ffilrreirg nf 
 
 Wihttltr 
 

GREEK LESSONS 
 
 PART I. THE GREEK IN ENGLISH 
 PART II. THE GREEK OF XENOPHON 
 
 BY 
 
 THOMAS DWIGHT GOODELL, PH.D. 
 
 ASSISTANT PROFESSOR IN YALE UNIVERSITY 
 
 NEW YORK 
 
 HENRY HOLT AND COMPANY 
 1892 
 
COPYRIGHT, 1886, 1889, 1892, 
 
 BY 
 
 HENRY HOLT & CO. 
 
 GIFT 
 
 TYPOGRAPHY BY J. S. CUSHING & Co., BOSTON, 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 THE two parts of this book, though divided in date of 
 publication by an interval of nearly six years, were planned 
 each for the other, and form together a consistent whole. 
 The Greek in English may still be obtained in separate form, 
 and in the preface of that edition will be found a fuller 
 account of what it aims to accomplish for those who do not 
 intend to carry Greek farther. For one who does intend to 
 continue the study there are obvious advantages in beginning 
 with that part of the language which appears in English. 
 It is easier to get a start in the grammar, if the memory is 
 not forced at the same time to struggle with a vocabulary 
 wholly strange; any study is more interesting, if we see 
 from the beginning its practical use; and even those who 
 may give up the subject at the end of the first term will 
 have no reason to regret as wasted a single hour given to 
 Greek. It is a great gain if the first weeks of a study can 
 thus be made immediately fruitful. 
 
 In Part I. the main stress is laid on the relations between 
 Greek and English words, and the grammatical outline 
 includes only the commonest and most regular declensions, 
 and only the present indicative and infinitive of verbs. Con- 
 traction is left untouched, to be taken up with contract verbs, 
 where it is learned most easily. This temporary ignoring 
 of contraction, and the almost complete restriction of the 
 vocabulary to words that appear in English, give a non- Attic 
 
 iii 
 
IV PBEFACE. 
 
 and unliterary look to the exercises. But in any case uncon- 
 tr acted forms must precede the contracted ; and how much 
 of literary style is there in the disconnected extracts that are 
 usually put before the beginner ? All that can be asked of 
 such exercises at first is that they shall furnish drill in the 
 elements of grammar, be correct, and be no more dreary 
 than is inevitable. 
 
 In Part II. the leading idea is, in the words of Professor 
 Gildersleeve, "early contact with the language in mass." 
 But not too early, lest the student be bewildered by the 
 multitude of new and apparently unrelated facts confronting 
 him in every sentence. The aim is to prepare the way 
 adequately, but to shorten the road so far as it can be with 
 safety, by concentrating attention upon groups of essentials, 
 leaving what is less urgent until it presents itself in Xeno- 
 phon. Hence the regular verb in its most common varieties 
 is first presented in the indicative, infinitive, and participles, 
 without which connected discourse is impossible. The order 
 of presentation is so chosen as to enable the pupil to conquer 
 the difficulties in small detachments. Hence also the most 
 common differences of idiom between the two languages are 
 introduced early. The aorist tense, the middle voice, the 
 particles, a word-order differing from that of both English 
 and Latin, these and like features convey so much of the 
 spirit of the language that they cannot too early become 
 familiar in their simpler uses. The exercises gradually 
 approach the character of connected passages from Xeno- 
 phon, until the Anabasis is begun. From this point refer- 
 ences are made to the two leading Grammars, and the 
 remaining inflections and principles of syntax are introduced 
 in great part through such references. Thus the book 
 
PREFACE. V 
 
 changes by degrees from an elementary Grammar with exer- 
 cises to an annotated edition of an author, while at the 
 same time introducing to the larger Grammar. In this way 
 the long step from disconnected exercises to Xenophon is 
 taken almost imperceptibly; and meantime what was first 
 learned as partially isolated groups of facts is slowly put 
 together into a grammatical system, that it may the better 
 be retained for use in reading. 
 
 As regards vocabulary, both parts together contain, besides 
 proper names, about 865 Greek words. Of these about 275 
 furnish one or more English words apiece, as explained in 
 Part I. ; while 610 appear in the first three chapters of the 
 Anabasis. Of the 93 proper names also, all but four are 
 found in the same three chapters, and therefore could not 
 be omitted. Altogether it is believed that, without omit- 
 ting anything that is needed, this book makes less demand 
 upon the beginner than any other course leading to the 
 same point of progress. The large amount of space given 
 to explanation does not increase the amount to be learned. 
 Average classes can easily finish both parts in one year. 
 
 The maker of a book like this is bound to show that he 
 has learned from his predecessors. Those acquainted with 
 this branch of school literature will recognize that there is 
 little here that is new. In trying to solve certain definite 
 pedagogical problems the best light within reach has been 
 sought during many years of preparatory and college teach- 
 ing. Among those who have helped me directly, especial 
 thanks are due to Mr. F. S. Morrison, of the Hartford High 
 School, who did me the great favor of reading the manu- 
 script critically in an early state ; to my colleagues, Professor 
 Seymour and Professor Clapp, who have given many valu- 
 
VI PREFACE. 
 
 able suggestions ; and to Professor Goodwin, whose kindness 
 enabled me to make the references to the 1892 edition of his 
 Grammar, printing at the same time with this. The assist- 
 ance of Mrs. Goodell also, by counsel and criticism as well 
 as otherwise, has been such as to call for public acknowledg- 
 ment. 
 
 YALE UNIVERSITY^ July, 1892. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 I. THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 INTRODUCTION. Why every one should know some- 
 thing of Greek . . . . 1 
 
 Writing, Pronunciation, Transliteration . . ,7 
 The Article . ....... 14 
 
 Nouns : First or A-Declension . . . . . 16 
 
 O- Verbs : Present Indicative and Infinitive Active . 22 
 A-Declension : Second Class of Feminines ... 26 
 
 A-Declension: Masculines 29 
 
 O- Declension : Masculines and Feminines . . .33 
 
 O- Declension : Neuters 39 
 
 Additional A- and O-Stems . . . . . .43 
 
 Adjectives of the Vowel Declension . . . . 48 
 
 O- Verbs : Present Indicative and Infinitive Middle and 
 
 Passive . 56 
 
 Consonant Declension : Stems in -*- and -y- . . 63 
 Consonant Declension : Stems in -T-, --,-#- . .68 
 
 Consonant Declension : Stems in -v- and -p- 74 
 
 Consonant Declension : Neuter Stems in -ar- and -cos 
 
 HoXvs ,. . .79 
 
 Consonant Declension : Stems in -t- and -cv. AWO/JOI 86 
 
 Mt-Verbs : Ti%u and AiSoyu 93 
 
 Mi-Verbs : lon^u and Kcpawv/u . . . . 100 
 The Verb 4>iy/u : the Adjective Has . . . 106 
 
 vii 
 
Viil CONTENTS. 
 
 II. THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Present, Imperfect, and Aorist Tenses . . .116 
 
 The Middle Voice . . 129 
 
 The Future System 137 
 
 First Passive System . . . . . . .138 
 
 First Perfect System . 144 
 
 Perfect Middle System 148 
 
 The Mt- Aorist . . . . . . . .149 
 
 The Infinitive Mode . * > . . . .156 
 
 The Participle . . .... . . .159 
 
 Contract Verbs . . . . , ... . . . 176 
 
 Liquid Verbs . . . ... . .192 
 
 Second Passive System 194 
 
 Second Aorist . .200 
 
 Second Perfect 203 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives 204 
 
 Classification of Consonants 212 
 
 Mute Themes 215 
 
 Anabasis I., 1, 1-2 226 
 
 The Subjunctive Mode 229 
 
 Anabasis L, 1, 3-4 240 
 
 The Optative Mode 244 
 
 Anabasis L, 1, 5-7 253 
 
 The Imperative Mode 257 
 
 Anabasis L, 1, 8-11 267 
 
 Anabasis I., 2 . .275 
 
 Formation of Words 292 
 
 Anabasis L, 3 299 
 
 Greek-English Vocabulary 319 
 
 English-Greek Vocabulary 355 
 
 Index of Derivatives 365 
 
PART I. 
 THE GKEEK IN ENGLISH. 
 
THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 WHY EVERY ONE SHOULD KNOW SOMETHING 
 OF GREEK. 
 
 EVERY person who begins this book is supposed 
 to have already studied Latin a little. Now before 
 going very far in the study of Latin, every student 
 must have begun to notice that a great many Latin 
 words looked like English words. Not exactly like 
 English words, perhaps ; and of course it was found 
 that many more Latin words were quite unlike 
 English, and were rather hard to remember because 
 their forms were new and strange. And yet it was 
 plain that rex, reg-is, was somewhat like reg-al ; 
 and miles, milit-is, like milit-ary ; virgo, virgin-is, 
 like virgin; animal like animal; stella like con- 
 stella-tion ; agricola like agricul-ture ; and a great 
 many other resemblances of the same kind ap- 
 peared as the study continued. In cases like 
 these, too, the English words not only look and 
 sound like the Latin words, but there is plainly 
 some connection in meaning also. For instance, 
 
2 T3L G^EEtf IN ENGLISH. 
 
 agriculture is th ; 3 v/ork of agricolae, farmers ; a 
 constellation is made up of a number of stellae, 
 stars ; templum means temple ; virtuous means 
 having virtus, virtue ; " my paternal house " means 
 the house of my father, pater : and so on. Of 
 course such a great number of resemblances in 
 both form and meaning of words could not possi- 
 bly be accidental. There must be some reasonable 
 explanation ; and the most natural one is that one 
 language inherited or borrowed words from the other. 
 As Latin is some centuries older than English, 
 plainly English must be the borrower in this case. 
 And now, on tracing back the history of our tongue 
 a few centuries, we see beyond question that our 
 explanation is the true one : that there was a time 
 when the people who spoke English and espe- 
 cially those who wrote English felt a need of 
 more words, and that they took the words they 
 wanted, in great part, directly from Latin. 
 
 One might ask, Why did these people go to the 
 Latin rather than to any other language to borrow 
 words ? Or, indeed, why did they not make their 
 new words out of the stock which English already 
 had, by putting together the old words in new com- 
 binations? For that was the way in which the 
 Germans, for instance, and the Greeks, and the 
 Romans to some extent, made the new words 
 which they wanted. To answer such questions 
 fully would take too much time, and might not be 
 easy; but a part of the reasons can be quickly 
 given. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 3 
 
 England had been conquered by the Normans, 
 who spoke a form of French. Although the con- 
 querors could not compel the mass of the people 
 to learn French, yet they were strong enough in 
 numbers and influence to bring into English a 
 great many French words. The English lan- 
 guage, then, at the time we speak of, had become 
 mixed, as the people had; and the new part of the 
 language, like the new part of the people, was 
 French. Now French is mainly derived from 
 Latin is a sort of corrupted or changed form 
 of Latin : and everybody was used to that kind of 
 Latin words in every-day speech. This circum r 
 stance would of itself naturally open the door a 
 little way for other Latin words. " 
 
 Then again the old Latin was at that time a 
 sort of common tongue for all educated people. 
 Everybody who studied at all studied Latin ; 
 everybody who could read at all read Latin ; books 
 were generally written in Latin all over Europe as 
 well as in England. As Latin, then, was so gen- 
 erally understood, a speaker or writer, if he wanted 
 a new or more dignified word, might very natu- 
 rally help himself to a Latin one. This went on 
 until our language, especially the part of it used 
 in serious and thoughtful speech and writing, is 
 quite largely borrowed from the language of the 
 Romans ; and besides, the custom of thus borrow- 
 ing and forming new words has become firmly 
 fixed, and the process is still going on. And this 
 is one great reason why the study of Latin in 
 
4 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. 
 
 school is so necessary. No one can know English 
 well without knowing something about Latin. 
 Every one who begins the study of this book can 
 already partly see, from his or her own experience, 
 the truth of this statement. 
 
 And with Greek the case is pretty much the 
 same. Some Greek words have come into English 
 through Latin. For the Romans learned much 
 of their civilization from the Greeks. The very 
 alphabet was taught them by the Greeks, whose 
 literature the Romans translated and imitated ; 
 and along with every art or science partly or 
 wholly learned from Greece such as painting, 
 sculpture, geometry, medicine, architecture - 
 there came into the language a larger or smaller 
 number of Greek words connected with that 
 branch of knowledge. These words, then, were 
 a part of the Latin language, and were taken 
 thence into English as readily as other Latin 
 words. 
 
 Besides this, for several hundred years now 
 Greek and Latin have been studied together a 
 great deal. This was natural, because the civili- 
 zation which our ancestors learned from the Ro- 
 mans was so largely, as was just said, Greek in 
 its origin. People saw that it was worth while to 
 go back to the source, and become acquainted at 
 first hand with the works of that remarkable people 
 with whom the progress of the modern world began. 
 Hence, after the custom of borrowing Greek words 
 through Latin was once fixed, it seemed quite nat- 
 
INTRODUCTION. 5 
 
 ural to take a step farther and borrow from the 
 Greek directly. This step was made all the easier 
 because new compounds and derivatives were not 
 freely made in Latin, but in Greek they were 
 made with the greatest freedom. Thus it came 
 about that if Latin could not give just the word 
 desired, nor Greek either, two Greek words would 
 be put together into a new word that no Greek 
 ever heard of. Many of our scientific terms, like 
 thermometer and telephone, are of this last sort. 
 
 In all these ways, then, Greek words have come 
 over into English ; and however much we might 
 wish to get them out, we cannot do it. In fact 
 new ones are all the while being brought iri, and 
 our need for new words will probably continue for 
 a long time to be supplied largely from Greek. 
 The only thing for us to do is to learn these words 
 as soon as we can, if we wish to understand what 
 thinking people are talking about. With some of 
 them we make a partial acquaintance pretty early. 
 Arithmetic, geography, poetry, music, telephone, 
 type, dialogue these all came from Greek ; and 
 all readers of this page have some idea of what 
 these words mean. But one has a better idea of 
 their meaning if he knows also what the Greek 
 words mean. Besides, it is very interesting to 
 follow words back to their origin to know, for 
 instance, just what is the original meaning of helio- 
 trope, acrostic, George, tropic, crystal, and a host of 
 other words, even though one may have already a 
 pretty good notion of their present significance, 
 
6- THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. 
 
 And then, as one comes to read more, and tries to 
 find out what wise people are thinking, and all 
 sorts of people are talking about, scores of less 
 familiar words taken from Greek present them- 
 selves some among them not very short which 
 one must understand clearly in order to know at 
 all what the writer's thought is. 
 
 Thus it becomes necessary to learn something of 
 Greek, if we wish to thoroughly know one impor- 
 tant part of our own language. In order to grasp 
 the thoughts which are expressed by some of these 
 words of Greek origin, and in order to tell them 
 to others, we must learn enough of Greek to be- 
 come familiar with those words. 
 
1] 
 
 ALPHABET. 
 
 I. WRITING, PRONUNCIATION, TRANSLITERA- 
 TIONS 
 
 ALPHABET. 
 
 1. Greek is written with the following twenty- 
 four letters : 
 
 Form 
 
 
 
 Name. 
 
 Sound. 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 d\<f>a 
 
 alpha 
 
 a in father 
 
 B 
 
 /3 
 
 ftrJTa 
 
 beta 
 
 b 
 
 r 
 
 1- 
 
 ryCLLLLU 
 
 % gamma 
 
 ffmgo 
 
 A 
 
 8 
 
 Se'Xra 
 
 delta 
 
 d 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 ^T\ 
 
 bv epsilon 
 
 e in met 
 
 Z 
 
 t> 
 
 gfjra 
 
 zeta 
 
 dz or z 
 
 H 
 
 n - 
 
 TITO, 
 
 eta 
 
 e in prey 
 
 e 
 
 e # 
 
 Brjra 
 
 theta 
 
 th in thin 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 Icora 
 
 iota 
 
 i in machine 
 
 K 
 
 K 
 
 KaTTTT 
 
 a kappa 
 
 k 
 
 A 
 
 \ 
 
 Xa/A/8 
 
 Sa lambda 
 
 I 
 
 M 
 
 /* 
 
 ^ 
 
 mu 
 
 m 
 
 1 Sufficient explanation and that often means a great 
 deal of explanation should always be given in class before 
 the pupils are required to learn a lesson. The alphabet must 
 of course be memorized at the beginning. For the rest of 
 this chapter it will be enough to read it over in class with 
 explanatory comments (a process which may require two or 
 three recitation hours), and then go on to Chapter II. Abun- 
 dant opportunity for practice in writing, pronunciation, and 
 transliteration will be furnished by the declensions and 
 exercises. 
 
THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. 
 
 [2- 
 
 Form. 
 
 N 
 
 a 
 o 
 n 
 p 
 
 2 
 T 
 
 v 
 
 e 
 
 o 
 
 7T 
 
 P 
 O- 9 
 
 T 
 
 V 
 
 Name. 
 
 vv nu 
 
 %l xi 
 
 o filfcpdv omicron 
 
 irl pi 
 
 pa) rho 
 
 (riy/jLa sigma 
 
 rav tau 
 
 ^LT 
 
 fl O) 
 
 upsilon 
 
 phi 
 chi 
 psi 
 omega 
 
 Sound. 
 
 n 
 x 
 o in obey 
 
 P 
 r 
 
 s in see 
 
 t 
 
 French u 
 
 German u 
 
 ph 
 
 German ch 
 
 ps 
 
 o in no 
 
 a. At the end of a word 5 is written ; elsewhere, a-. 
 
 2. In ancient times only the capitals were used ; 
 but as writers tried to make the letters in the 
 easiest way, they gradually changed the capitals 
 to the smaller forms, and now both are used. It 
 was said in the Introduction that the Romans 
 learned the alphabet (a\c/>a /S^ra, or A B C) from 
 the Greeks. This occurred at a time when some 
 of the capitals had slightly different forms from 
 those here given ; and our alphabet was borrowed 
 from the Latin, with some changes. Hence many 
 of our letters are like the Greek, but not all. 
 
 a. By marking in the list and writing out a few times 
 those Greek letters which are unlike the English equivalents, 
 the pupil can memorize them without much difficulty. Copy- 
 ing out the Greek names of the letters in Greek characters 
 will also be useful. Observe that the Greek name of each 
 
5] PRONUNCIATION. 9 
 
 letter begins with the sound of that letter. Observe also the 
 force of our word delta from the shape of the capital letter, 
 and how it happens that the phrase " alpha and omega" 
 means the beginning and the end, and that iota means a r< /</ 
 small quantity. (Jot is a corrupted form of iota.) 
 
 3. Every letter (except i subscript ; see 5, 6) is 
 sounded : there are no silent letters. 
 
 4. Of the vowels, e and o are always short in 
 quantity that is, were pronounced by the Greeks 
 in less time than the long vowels; 77 and co are 
 always long that is, had more time given them 
 in pronunciation. The others, a, i, v, are some- 
 times long and sometimes short. In this book the 
 long a, I, v will be printed with a straight mark 
 over the letter ; short a, i, v will be left unmarked. 
 
 5. The diphthongs (Si-00oy7<M double sounds; 
 see 96, 1) are 
 
 (ll, 1, Ot, dl', 6V, Of, 
 
 a, j7, p, VL. 
 
 a. Originally the sounds of the diphthongs were 
 made by simply pronouncing the separate vowels 
 closely together, in one syllable. But some of the 
 diphthongs are not usually sounded so now. We 
 may pronounce 
 
 ai like i in fine, av like ow in now, 
 
 ei like ei in rein, 1 v like eu in feud, 
 
 01 like oi in oil, ov like ou in you, 
 
 vi like we. 
 
 a, rj y q> are pronounced like a, w, a>, as if t were 
 not there. 
 
 1 Many, however, pronounce ct like ei in height, 
 
10 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [6 
 
 b. This silent i, written below the other letter, 
 is called i subscript (Latin sub-scriptus, written 
 below). When the first vowel of a diphthong 
 containing i subscript is written as a capital, L is 
 written on the line : HIAHI = *lt,8$ = cJSf;. 
 
 6. The consonants are pronounced like the corre- 
 sponding English consonants, with two or three 
 exceptions, as follows : 
 
 a. Gamma (7) before K, 7, ^, or is sounded 
 like n in anger, ink, and is represented by n in 
 English words from the Greek : ay/cvpa (Latin an- 
 cora), anchor. When sounded in this way, 7 is 
 called 7 nasal (Latin nasus, nose), because all the 
 breath used in making the sound comes out through 
 the nose. For the same reason p and v are called 
 nasals. 
 
 b. Chi (^) is now pronounced like German eh, 
 and English has no corresponding sound. It is 
 between the sound of Jc and that of h. One should 
 begin by pronouncing it as h, and gradually learn 
 to roughen the sound sufficiently. 
 
 c. Zeta () is pronounced like dz. 
 
 BREATHINGS. 
 
 7. With every initial vowel is written one or 
 the other of two marks called breathings. The 
 rough breathing ( f ) is pronounced like our h ; the 
 smooth breathing (') is not pronounced at all, but 
 merely shows that the vowel to which it belongs 
 has no h sound before it. These breathings are 
 written over a small vowel, but at the left of a 
 
9] BREATHINGS. SYLLABLES. ACCENT. 11 
 
 capital: &pd (Latin hora) season, "OfjLTjpo? Homer. 
 Initial p also has the rough breathing: prjr&p 
 (rhetor*) a public speaker. Double p is sometimes 
 written pp, and is represented by rrh in English : 
 Kardppov? catarrh. 
 
 a. A diphthong takes the breathing over the 
 second vowel: avros self. But t, subscript does 
 not take the breathing : "Ai&rjs Hades, wSi; song. 
 
 SYLLABLES. 
 
 8. Every vowel or diphthong, with or without 
 one or more consonants, makes a separate syllable : 
 v-yt-i-a health. The last syllable of a word is 
 called the ultima ; the next to the last, the penult ; 
 the syllable before the penult, the antepenult. 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 9. The accented syllable in Greek is always marked, and 
 for this purpose three sighs, called accents, are used. These 
 are : the acute accent, 
 
 the circumflex accent, * TO> 
 the grave accent, 
 
 These different accents mark differences in the ancient 
 Greek pronunciation, but all are now commonly pronounced 
 alike. 
 
 a. These accents are written over the vowel of the accented 
 syllable ; they are written over the second vowel of a diph- 
 thong, unless the second vowel is t subscript. If the vowel 
 has a breathing also, the acute and the grave are placed at 
 the right of the breathing ; the circumflex is placed above the 
 breathing : o /u*pov, of, o>. If the accented vowel is a cap- 
 ital, the accent, as well as the breathing, stands just before 
 it : " 
 
12 THE GHEES: IN ENGLISH. [10 
 
 10. a. The acute accent can stand only on one of the last 
 three syllables ; the circumflex can stand only on one of the 
 last two syllables, and only on a long vowel or diphthong. 
 
 NOTE. When a vowel has the circumflex accent, there- 
 fore, it must be long, and the mark of length will be omitted 
 in this book. 
 
 b. If the ultima has a long vowel or diphthong, the acute 
 cannot stand on the antepenult nor the circumflex on the 
 penult. 
 
 11. The general rules of accent, accordingly, are : 
 
 (1) A word with short vowel in the ultima, if accented 
 
 a. on the antepenult, has the acute: Statra. 
 
 b. on a short vowel in the penult, has the acute : LOTTOS. 
 
 c. on a long vowel or diphthong in the penult, has the cir- 
 cumflex : yXcucr(ra. 
 
 d. on the ultima, has the acute : 0eog. 
 
 (2) A word with a long vowel or diphthong in the ultima, 
 if accented 
 
 a. on the penult, has the acute : o-o<id, yAwcrcn/s. 
 
 b. on the ultima, sometimes has the acute and sometimes 
 the circumflex : <a>vry, <^>(ov^5. 
 
 12. Final -at and -ot, although long, have the effect of short 
 vowels on the accent of the penult and antepenult : 
 
 13. An acute on the ultima changes to the grave when fol- 
 lowed by another word in connected discourse : ryv, but rrjv 
 This is almost the only use of the grave accent. 
 
 TRANSLITERATION. 
 
 14. Transferring words from a foreign alphabet 
 into our own respelling them in our own letters 
 is called transliterating them (Latin trans, 
 across, and liter a, letter). The natural way of 
 doing this would seem to be simple. And for the 
 most part the transliteration of Greek words into 
 
141 TRANSLITERATION. 13 
 
 ' 
 
 English is in fact simple ; but a few points need 
 especial notice. 
 
 In the Introduction it was said that some Greek 
 words have come into English through Latin, hav- 
 ing been first borrowed by the Latins. Nearly all 
 these words had been Latinized, that is, sufficiently 
 changed in form to seem at home among other Latin 
 words, before they were Anglicized or taken into 
 English. Thus a fashion was set, as we might say, 
 to be observed by any later comers from Greek 
 into English. Again, not only were Greek and 
 Latin studied together, but for a long time Greek 
 was studied only through Latin. The Greek gram- 
 mars were written in Latin, and in Greek vocabu- 
 laries and dictionaries the definitions were given 
 in Latin. Thus the fashion of treating borrowed 
 Greek words as the Romans did that is, of Latin- 
 izing them was firmly established. At present 
 this custom is not so closely followed with new 
 words ; but generally, in tracing out connections 
 between Greek and English, we are obliged to 
 notice what changes are due to this Latinizing 
 process. All these changes will be fully illus- 
 trated, later, in connection with the derivatives in 
 which they are found ; but for convenience the 
 following are summed up here : 
 
 a. Zeta (f), though pronounced dz, is repre- 
 sented by z. 
 
 b. Kappa (K) is usually represented by <?, which 
 in Latin had the sound of our &, although in later 
 borrowings the more natural k is often used. 
 
14 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [15 
 
 -* 
 
 c. Upsilon (u), if not part of a diphthong, is 
 represented by y. When the Romans did most of 
 their borrowing, v had a sound between that of i in 
 machine and u in rule (nearly the sound of French 
 u or German #), and that sound had no represen- 
 tative in the Latin alphabet. Therefore the Latins 
 transferred the Greek letter itself, and T is the 
 origin of our letter Y. Of course the sound of our 
 y is very different ; and after spelling the word in 
 the Latin way, we pronounce it in the English way. 
 
 d. Chi (^) is represented by ch, which, however, 
 we generally pronounce in English like Jc. 
 
 e. The diphthong ai is represented by ae, which 
 in Latin had nearly the same sound with ai. 
 
 f. The diphthong ei, usually becomes i, sometimes 
 e ; for in the Roman period the pronunciation of 
 4 changed from that of Latin e to that of Latin i. 
 
 ff. The diphthong OL becomes oe, which in Latin 
 had nearly the same sound as 01. To represent 
 better our own pronunciation, this oe is often 
 changed to e. 
 
 h. The diphthong ov becomes u in words that 
 have come through Latin, and ou in words taken 
 from Greek directly. 
 
 i. Iota subscript is omitted in transliteration. 
 
 Jc. It was mentioned above (7) that p becomes 
 rh, and pp becomes rrh. 
 
 II. THE ARTICLE. 
 
 15. In Greek, as in Latin, nouns, pronouns, ad- 
 jectives, and verbs are inflected; that is, their 
 
18] 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 15 
 
 forms are varied according to their relations to 
 other words in the sentence. For example, leav- 
 ing other parts of speech till later, nouns or sub- 
 stantives are declined to denote case and number; 
 and adjectives, including the article 6, 17, TO ?//', 
 are declined to denote gender also. 
 
 16. Greek has 
 
 a. Three genders: masculine, feminine, and 
 neuter. 
 
 b. Three numbers : the singular for one object, 
 the plural for more than one, the dual for two. 
 
 c. Five cases : the nominative, genitive, dative, 
 accusative, and vocative. 
 
 17. The definite article 6, 17, TO the is declined in 
 three genders and numbers, and in all the cases 
 but the vocative. As the article may be used with 
 any noun, it will be best to take this up before the 
 nouns. It is declined as follows : 
 
 18. 
 
 
 M. 
 
 F. 
 
 N. 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 
 i 
 o 
 
 TOO 
 
 
 
 TO 
 TOO 
 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 Tft) 
 TOV 
 
 # 
 T1JV 
 
 TCO 
 TO 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 TO) 
 
 Tft) 
 
 TO) 
 
 G. D. 
 
 rOLV 
 
 rolv 
 
 rolv 
 
 Plu. Nom. 
 
 ol 
 
 at 
 
 rd 
 
 Gen. 
 
 T&V 
 
 T&V 
 
 ra>v 
 
 Dat. 
 
 T019 , 
 
 rat? 
 
 TOtS 
 
 Ace. 
 
 TOU9 
 
 
 
 rd 
 
16 THE &REEK IN ENGLISH. [19 
 
 19. The forms 6, ^, 01, at (with a few other words of one 
 syllable) have no accent of their own, but lean forward upon 
 the following word, and hence are called proclitics (jrpo for- 
 ward and /cAii/co lean). The article the in English, unless 
 emphasized, is a proclitic, as are many other words. Thus 
 when we say, " The boy has a jack-knife; he whittles," the, 
 a, and he have no separate accent, but lean forward on the 
 following words, very much as Greek proclitics do. 
 
 It will assist in remembering the forms to note that all 
 genitives and datives have the circumflex, and that all other 
 forms (except the proclitics) have the acute. In the dual 
 number, which was not much used, the nominative and 
 accusative of all genders are alike, and also the genitive and 
 dative of all genders. 
 
 NOTE. From this point on, unremitting practice is neces- 
 sary both in writing and in reciting paradigms. In preparing 
 these the pupil should first copy out a small group of forms 
 (say the singular only, or even less), taking especial pains 
 about the written accent and pronouncing each form aloud; 
 then should close the book and write the same group from 
 memory. Next let him compare his work with the printed 
 forms, correct all mistakes, and try again; and so on, until 
 the work can be written correctly from memory. Then let 
 him take another group of forms, not so large but that one 
 or two trials will enable him to master it; finally let the 
 whole paradigm be taken together. The first attempts may 
 perhaps be discouraging, because the alphabet, though really 
 differing so little from our own, is unfamiliar. But a few 
 days of careful practice will make a vast difference, and soon 
 an entire paradigm can be mastered at one trial. 
 
 III. NOUNS: FIRST OK A-DECLENSION. 
 
 20, The stem of a noun is that part to which the 
 case-endings are added in declension. Noun-stems 
 (and also adjective-stems) are classified according 
 
23] NOUNS: FIRST OR A-DECLENSION. 17 
 
 as they end in (1) a, (2) o, (3) a consonant or i 
 or v. These three classes of stems are declined in 
 three slightly different ways, named from the last 
 letter of the stem: 
 
 The A- Declension, or First Declension. 
 
 The O- Declension, or Second Declension. 
 
 The Consonant-Declension, or Third Declension. 
 
 21. All stems ending in -a- belong to the a-declen- 
 sion. The feminines have no case-ending in the 
 nominative singular. The following are examples: 
 
 22. i) (o>pa-) 1) (#ea-) 
 
 season sight head 
 
 Sing. Nom. $ &pd 
 Gen. T?}? a>pds 
 
 Dat. rrj &pd Oed K(j>a\fj 
 
 Ace. rrjv &pd-v Qid-v 
 
 Voc. & &pd Oed 
 
 Dual N. A.V. TO) &pd Bed tce<f>a\a 
 
 G. D. roiv oypaiv 0eaiv K<f>a\aw 
 
 Plu. Nom. al &pai 0eai 
 
 Gen. TWV wpwv 
 
 Dat. rat? &pai<; 
 
 Ace. r9 &pd$ 0eds 
 
 Voc. w oipat ^eat 
 
 a. For the accent of TTJV, TO>, ras, see 13. For <5p<u, see 12 
 and 11, (1) c. (In wpotv and wpcus, cu is not final.) 
 
 b. With the vocative the interjection & is 
 often, though not always, used. It should not 
 usually be translated. 
 
 23. All words of the a-declension are declined 
 
18 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [24 
 
 alike in the dual and plural. In the singular all 
 feminines originally had -a in the nominative, and 
 were declined like &pd. But in many words this 
 -a has been shortened in the nominative, accusa- 
 tive, and vocative, singular. Hence there are two 
 classes of feminines. In this section we take up 
 only the 
 
 24. First Class of Feminines. These have a 
 long vowel, a or 77, in the last syllable throughout 
 the singular. 
 
 a. Long a is retained after e, L, or p ; otherwise 
 it is changed to 77 throughout the singular. 
 
 Accent of Nouns. 
 
 25. The accent of a noun remains, in all the forms, on the 
 same syllable as in the nominative singular, or as near that 
 syllable as the general rules of accent (10, 11, 12) allow. 
 
 26. An accented ultima in general takes the acute ; but 
 
 27. In the genitive and dative of all numbers a long ultima, 
 if accented, takes the circumflex. 
 
 28. Further, in the a-declension only, the genitive plural 
 always has the circumflex on the last syllable. 
 
 a. This is because the stem-vowel -d and the ending -cov 
 were contracted to one syllable, so that -dcov became -on/. 
 
 29. Vocabulary. 1 
 
 r) afc/jitf, -779 summit, prime (acme). 
 
 'Y] fiordvn, -779 grass, herb (botan-y). 
 
 1 It will assist in learning the vocabularies to read over 
 carefully, in connection with each one, the corresponding 
 section of Notes on Derivatives, at the end of each chapter; 
 those notes, however, should not be required to be learned 
 until after the preceding Exercises have been translated. 
 
SO] NOUNS: FIRST OR A-DECLENSION. 19 
 
 77 777, 7%, 777, 7771; earth, land (geography). 
 
 ypdffxo I write (geo-graph-y). 
 
 eV, 1 prep. w. dat. only, in. 
 
 eya* I have. 
 
 77 77/877, -775 youth (Hebe, goddess of youth). 
 
 77 6ed t -9 sight, show (thea-tre). 
 
 77 tce<t>a\ij, -779 head (cephal-ic). 
 
 iraKiVj adv., again, back (palinode). 
 
 7re/H, prep. w. gen., about, concerning. 
 
 ri, pron., what? 
 
 77 (u^rfy -779 song, ode. 
 
 77 &pd, -9 season, appointed time (hour). 
 
 30. Exercises. 
 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 1. T7}9 &5S779. 2 2. eV XT} 777. 3. rals ftordvais 
 T779 7779. 4. TT)I/ /Bordvrjv %co. 5. fce<f)a\r)v e^o). 
 6. T6 3 ypd(f>(t) ; 4 7. rt ypdcfxi) irepl r&v f3orav)v ; 
 8. Trept rr}9 7^79 ypd<f)(i) (ge-o-graph-y). 9. Trepl TWI/ 
 wpwv ypd<f)a) (hor-o-graph-y). 10. eV TT} 77/877 T779 
 
 7779. 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. In the prime of youth. 2. I write songs in 
 the season of youth. 3. I write about the season 
 of the herbs. 4. I write the song again (palin-ode). 
 5. What have I in my (Greek idiom in the) head 
 
 1 Proclitic : see 19. 
 
 2 Unless other directions are given, the cases may be trans- 
 lated as in Latin. 
 
 8 Tt never changes its acute accent to the grave. 
 
 4 The mark of interrogation in Greek is like our semicolon. 
 
20 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [31 
 
 (en-cephal-on) ? 6. I write an ode about the 
 show. 
 
 31. Notes on Derivatives. 1 
 
 1. Hints have been given as to a few English 
 derivatives from words in the above vocabulary. 
 For instance, acme comes to us with only the 
 change of K to c (see 14, 5), and its meaning is 
 about the same as that of ateptf. 
 
 2. Botan-ist and botan-ic remind one at once of 
 botan-y, and usually we need not stop to mention 
 more than one member of a family in which the 
 family resemblance is so plain. We shall see later 
 that the endings -ic and -1st are themselves of Greek 
 origin, -ic making adjectives and -1st making nouns 
 
 1 The entire class should have ready access to at least one 
 unabridged English dictionary, as the Imperial, Webster's or 
 Worcester's. Before leaving a chapter all English deriva- 
 tives the words partly or wholly in full-face type should 
 be looked up, and the connection between their present mean- 
 ings and the Greek originals clearly understood. In many 
 cases this connection is explained in this book ; but often it 
 is only hinted at and left to be brought out in class. This 
 course has been followed because a little independent work 
 on the part of the scholar, constantly directed and aided by 
 suggestions and questions from the teacher, is the best possible 
 method of arousing interest and fixing indelibly in the pupil's 
 mind just those facts which it is the object of this book to 
 teach. To repeat, then, constant use of the dictionary, with 
 constant help and questioning on the part of the teacher, 
 must on no account be neglected. 
 
 With some classes it may be thought best to omit, until 
 review, a few derivatives whose connection with their primi- 
 tives is not easily made clear, 
 
31] NOUNS: FIRST OB A-DECLENSION. 21 
 
 that denote persons (see 78, 11, and 86, 11). We 
 shall also find that often, as in botan-y, the final 
 vowel of a Greek stem is dropped off, for ease of 
 pronunciation, in derivatives or compounds. 
 
 3. Ge-, meaning earth or land, appears in several 
 words, such as ge-o-logy (see 50, II., 5), ge-o-metry 
 (see 57, 4), apo-gee (see 57, 1). The -0- in ge-o- 
 graphy, geology, horography, seems to have no busi- 
 ness there ; yet we shall find that the same sylla- 
 ble has been put between the two parts of a large 
 number of compounds, in which it has no more 
 meaning than a hyphen. (See 51, 1.) 
 
 4. Oraph-ite is a substance used in pencils for 
 writing, the syllable -ite being our remnant of an 
 ending which denotes merely a vague connection. 
 (Compare dynam-ite, 94.) Oraph-ic, in some of its 
 uses, goes back to another meaning of ypd<f>co, 
 namely, draw or paint. We shall meet the syl- 
 lable -graph- frequently. For -gram, see 91, 4. 
 
 5. En-cephal-on, a more learned and scientific 
 name for brain, shows the change of K to c, and 
 shows also the form cephal- which tce<f>a\ij takes in 
 several scientific words, such as cephal-ic, pertain- 
 ing to the head, a-cephal-ous f see 60, 3, i), headless, 
 cephal-algia (see 110, 2), headache. 
 
 6. HaXip appears in palin-drome (see 51, 3), palin- 
 genesis (see 96, 3), and palim-psest. In palim-psest 
 (jra\i^^(Trov) the m takes the place of n for 
 ease of pronunciation before a jt?-sound ; the second 
 part is from a verb, i/rao>, meaning to rub. Parch- 
 ment was costly, and hence was often used a second 
 
22 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [32 
 
 time, the old writing being rubbed off again ; but 
 this process still left faint traces of the older writ- 
 ing, and some very valuable ancient books have 
 been recovered from palimpsests. 
 
 7. Several rather common words contain cJSr; as 
 one element; such are mel-ody (see 100, 8), par-ody 
 (see 46, 5), pros-ody, and rhaps-ody ; and also, with 
 a change which obscures the form of oJS^, trag-edy 
 (rpaywSld, Latin tragoedia), and com-edy (fccojiJLcp&id, 
 Latin comoedia). The significance of the first part 
 of rhaps-ody, trag-edy, and com-edy is uncertain. 
 
 8. From &pa was taken the Latin hora; and 
 from hora, through a French form, is derived the 
 English hour. Then directly from Greek we have 
 (with the inserted hyphen-like -0-) hor-o-loge (see 51, 
 5, a), hor-o-scope (see 74, 9), hor-o-meter (see 57, 4). 
 
 IV. fl- VERBS: PRESENT INDICATIVE AND 
 
 INFINITIVE ACTIVE. 
 32. Present Indicative Active. 
 
 Sing. 1 ypd(f)co I write 
 
 2 rypdfais you write 
 
 3 ypdfat, he (she, if) writes 
 
 Dual 2 ypd^erov you (two) write 
 
 3 rypd<f)Tov they (two) write 
 
 Plu. 1 ypdfofjLev we write 
 
 2 .ypd<j>T6 you write 
 
 3 ypd<j>ov(Ti, they write 
 
 Present Infinitive Active, 
 to write 
 
35] H- VERBS. 23 
 
 33. Most Greek verbs are conjugated in the 
 present tense like ypd<f>ci), and are called, from the 
 ending of the first form, co-verbs. Besides the 
 singular and plural they have a second and third 
 person dual, but no first person dual. 
 
 a. The accent of the verb, with but few exceptions, stands 
 as far from the end of the word as possible ; that is, on the penult, 
 if the ultima has a long vowel or diphthong, otherwise on the 
 antepenult, if there is an antepenult. 
 
 34. Vocabulary. 
 
 d/cova) hear (acon-stic). 
 
 e5, adv., well (en-phony). 
 
 17 UTTO/PUZ, -a? history, story. 
 
 fjMvOdvco (root /-uifl) learn (math-ematics). 
 
 TI fjLrj%ainj, -% machine (mechanic). 
 
 ou, ov/c, ov%, 1 adv., not. 
 
 17 (TXO\IJI -779 (1) leisure, (2) school. 
 
 o-^oXafo) (fr. <TXO\IJ) have leisure. 
 
 TT/X*, adv., at a distance, far (tele-phono). 
 
 77 </>o)i^7, -779 sound, voice (tele-phone). 
 
 (f)coveci) (fr. $0)1/17) sound (phon-ograph). 
 hand (chir-ography). 
 
 35. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 1. T?7 iurix av y 2 TTJ\ rrjv (fxDvrjv (tele-phone) 
 
 1 Proclitic (see 19). The form ov is used before a consonant, 
 OVK before a smooth breathing, ov\ before a rough breathing. 
 
 2 Translate, By means of, etc. The dative is used in Greek, 
 like the Latin ablative, to denote means or cause. 
 
24 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [36 
 
 dfcovo/Jiev. 2. TI fMj%avr) ra? <eom9 ypdfai (phono- 
 graph). 3. ev rfj cr%o\fi rj %elp ypdfaiv (chir-0- 
 graphy) pavOdvei. 4. ov cr^oXafe^? ev rrj 
 5. TI o)Sr) ev (frcoveei (eu-phony). 6. ov 
 d/coveiv TTJV i(7TOpidv* 7. TL /JLavOdvere irepl 
 8. al cJSai ou^: ev (j>coveov<ri,. 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The machine writes at-a-distance (tele-graph). 
 2. They have-leisure in youth. 3. What are you 
 writing? 4. What do you hear? 5. They are 
 writing the history (histori-o-graph-er) of the ma- 
 chines. 6. They have herbs. 7. We are writing 
 the sounds (phon-o-graphy). 8. We hear songs in 
 the season of the herbs. 9. Are you learning the 
 song again ? 
 
 36. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. Acoustic, pertaining to hearing, is a clipped 
 form of d/covo-rifcd?, an adjective with an ending 
 which we shall meet frequently. The addition of 
 an -s gives the noun acoustics, the science of sounds, 
 as heard. 
 
 2. The adverb ev appears in the form eu-, with 
 the force of well, easy, good, in a considerable 
 number of words besides eu-phony. (See 51, 5, a ; 
 60, 1.) 
 
 3. Story is merely a corrupted form of history, 
 but has come to have a slightly different meaning. 
 We speak of such forms as corrupted (literally 
 spoiled), because at first the change was simply a 
 
36] fl- VERBS. 25 
 
 mistake, or blunder, due to carelessness or igno- 
 rance; but after a while the new form became 
 common, accepted by every one, and general good 
 usage makes a word entirely respectable and cor- 
 rect. These slight changes of form, followed 
 often by a variation of meaning, are no small part 
 of the growth and development of a language, 
 and the process is all the time going on. 
 
 4. Mrjxavij also is represented by two different 
 forms. First it became in Latin machina; this 
 became machine in French, from which the word 
 was taken into English. Then more directly from 
 Greek we have mechan-ic (/t^aw/to?), mechan-ism, 
 with various derivatives and compounds. 
 
 5. A special meaning of tr^oX?; was leisure de- 
 voted to study; this gave the Latin schola, from 
 which we get schol-ar (Latin scholar is) and the 
 corrupted form school Scholastic (o-^oXao-r^o?), 
 is from cr;oXafa>. Again, from o-^oX?/ is derived 
 (with a changed but clearly related meaning) 
 cr-)(o\iov an explanation, comment, scholium. Scholium 
 has the Latinized ending, ~um for -oi/. Finally, 
 from o-^oX/oi/ is derived scholiast (o-^oXmo-r^?), a 
 commentator, especially one of those otherwise 
 unknown commentators whose explanations are 
 found on the margins of old Greek and Latin 
 manuscripts. 
 
 6. Phonetics (from <f>cov>fy is the science of spoken 
 sounds, or the sounds of the human voice, and is 
 thus to be distinguished from acoustics (see 36, 1). 
 Phonetic (<&> 1/77x1*09), is the corresponding adjective. 
 
26 
 
 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. 
 
 [37- 
 
 V. A-DECLENSION : SECOND CLASS OP FEMININES. 
 
 37. 
 
 77 
 
 ) V 
 
 ball 
 
 77 
 
 tongue 
 
 rr 
 
 r<f)aipa 
 
 Sing. Nom. 77 
 
 Gen. T 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 Voc. & 
 
 Dual N. A.V. TOO afyaipd 
 
 G. D. TOI> a<palpaiv 
 
 Plu. Nom. at 
 
 Gen. TWI> 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 Voc. &> crcfralpcu 
 
 mode of life 
 Siaira 
 
 Bialry 
 
 Staira-v 
 
 Slaira 
 
 Siaird 
 Siairaiv 
 
 <yXwo"(7a6 laiTai 
 SICUTWV 
 
 Siairai 
 
 38. The Second Class of Feminines of the a- 
 declension shorten long a of the stem to short a 
 in the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular 
 only. In all other respects these nouns are like 
 those of the First Class (see 22, 23, 24, a, 25-28). 
 
 a. In all the nouns of this class the accent is recessive, that 
 is, stands as far from the end as the general rules of accent 
 allow. 
 
 39. Vocabulary. 
 
 j 7\(S<7era (or 
 y\a)TTC(,), -779 
 77 latTa y -779 
 77 /jiovcra, -779 
 77 jAovo-i/ctj, -779 
 
 (1) ^ (2) j (glossa-ry). 
 
 mode of life (diet). 
 Muse. 
 
 music, 
 
41] A-DECLENSION : SECOND CLASS. 27 
 
 make (poet). 
 77 a(f)aipa, -d? ball, sphere. 
 
 77 vyteia, -d? health, good health (Hygeia). 
 
 -d9 she-goat (chimaera). 
 
 40. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 1. "E^owrt <r<f)alpav. 2. 77 ^i/jLaipa rrjv fjiov<rt,/cr)v 
 d/covei. 3. al /Jiova-ai fjiovcri/crjv 7roiov<ri. 4. ri 
 <m(y) 1 (is) 77 Siaira TT}? xifjialpd? ; 5. 17 777 ec 
 <r<f>aipa. 6. at' /Z-OVOYU ou fJLavOdvov(Ti ra? 
 a>So9 > oiSe (wor) at ;//Aat/>at TO? 
 a58a9. 7. vyieiav e'xop.ev ev ij/3y. 
 
 n. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The she-goat by her (Greek idiom 6y fo; 
 compare 35, I., 1) mode-of-life has good-health. 
 2. We are learning about the mode-of-life of the 
 muses. 3. We hear the language of the muse. 
 4. They are writing music. 5. The language 
 sounds well. 6. He is making a ball. 7. Do you 
 hear the music of the spheres ? 
 
 41. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. rXwrra appears, in the sense of language, in 
 poly-glot (poly- means many; see 91, 12). In later 
 Greek yX&oraa came to mean an obsolete or foreign 
 
 1 After <m and also after any word ending in -o-t, v is often 
 added, whether the next word begins with a vowel or with a 
 consonant. This is called v movable. 
 
28 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [41 
 
 word, requiring explanation, and then an explana- 
 tion given for such a word. In this sense we have 
 the form gloss, and the derivative glossary. The 
 name <y\u>TTL$, from y\a)rra, was given (probably 
 from the resemblance in shape) to the mouthpiece 
 of a musical instrument like our clarinet; and 
 Greek physicians applied the same term to the 
 narrow upper end of the windpipe or larynx (see 
 76) ; the latter is the meaning of glottis. 
 
 2. The muses were goddesses of literature and 
 the arts, and everything over which they presided 
 was included under ^OVO-IKI'I. Later, /jLovo-ifcrj was 
 restricted to the art of music, as we understand 
 that term. 
 
 3. Henri-sphere has for its first part rj^i-, a Greek 
 prefix meaning half, related to the Latin prefix 
 semi-, and never used as a separate word. Hemi- 
 forms part of many English scientific terms. In 
 sphere and its derivatives, ae, the Latin equivalent 
 of ai>, has been replaced with e. The change was 
 made because the letter e represents more simply 
 the sound which was given to ae in the English 
 pronunciation of Latin. So in diet from Slaira, 
 and in chimera. 
 
 4. 'Tyleia was personified as a goddess of health, 
 Hygeia, the English word representing the later 
 shortened Greek form. From the same word we 
 have hygiene and hygienic. 
 
 5. The chimaera was a fabulous fire-spouting 
 monster, with a goat's body, a lion's head, and a 
 serpent's tail. Hence the word is often used for 
 
43] 
 
 k-LECLENSlON : MASCULINES. 
 
 29 
 
 any imaginary object of fear. It is usually spelled 
 chimera, e taking the place of ae, as in sphere and 
 diet. The adjective chimerical often does not 
 imply fear, but only that the thing is fanciful and 
 improbable or impossible. 
 
 42. 
 
 VI. A-DECLENSION : MASCULINES. 
 
 o (tcpiTd-) 6 (ySopea-) o (TroXrra-) 
 
 
 
 judge 
 
 north-wind 
 
 citizen 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 
 r 
 
 
 tcpt,Ttj-<: 
 
 fioped-s 
 
 7ToX*T17-9 
 
 Gen. 
 
 TOV 
 
 KplTOV 
 
 ftop4ov 
 
 TroXfrou 
 
 Dat. 
 
 T$3 
 
 /CplTTj 
 
 fioped 
 
 TToXtTT) 
 
 Ace. 
 
 TO V 
 
 Kpt,Tl')-V 
 
 Poped- v 
 
 7TOX/T77-J/ 
 
 Voc. 
 
 & 
 
 /CplTO, 
 
 ftoped 
 
 TToXtra 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 
 TO) 
 
 Kptra 
 
 
 TroX^ra 
 
 G.D. 
 
 TOIV 
 
 /cptTaiv 
 
 
 TToXfTOlV 
 
 Plu. Nom. 
 
 01 
 
 tepiTat 
 
 
 TroXZrat 
 
 Gen. 
 
 T&V 
 
 KplT&V 
 
 
 TroXZrwj/ 
 
 Dat. 
 
 rofc 
 
 KpiTals 
 
 
 TroXfrais 
 
 Ace. 
 
 \ 
 
 KpiTas 
 
 
 7ToXtT(Z9 
 
 Voc. 
 
 
 
 KpiTai 
 
 
 TTOXtTttt 
 
 43. Masculines of the a-declension are like the 
 f eminines, except in the following particulars : 
 
 a. They take the case-ending -9 in the nomina- 
 tive singular. 
 
 b. The genitive singular ends in -ov. 
 
 c. Nouns in -TT/<? have in the vocative singu- 
 lar -rd. 
 
30 THE GKEEK lit ENGLISH. 
 
 44. Vocabulary. 
 
 Pd\\a> throw. 
 
 6 /3opea9, -ot> north-wind (Boreas). 
 
 6 &e<T7roT?79, -ou 1 master, owner of slaves (despot). 
 Kpivw judge. 
 
 o Kpirris, -ov judge (critic). 
 
 jrapd, prep. w. dat., at the side of, beside (3X&-ffrapK). 
 Trapa- ySaXXca compare (literally, throw beside). 
 
 ( poet (literally, maker, from 
 
 O 7T0497T779, -OV , N J 
 
 ( 7TOL60)). 
 
 rj Trapa- /3oX?;, -979 comparison, illustration, parable. 
 6 7ro\tT?79, -ou citizen (polit-ics). 
 
 ep, prep. w. ace., beyond (bypeY-criticafy. 
 
 outdo, excel (literally, throw be- 
 ' v J ' 
 
 f r >o A / i excess, extravagance (literally, 
 rj v7Tp-fio\r), -779 ] , .. ^ i. i. i 
 
 ( over-shooting), hyperbole. 
 
 45. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 1. C H ^el/o roi) TToXtrov /3a\\ei rrjv 
 
 2. Tra/m r^ cJS?} ypd<f)o/jiv (para-graph) 
 
 3. o Sec77TOT7;9 oi or^oXaei ftd\\iv rrjv 
 
 4. T^I> 7?}^ a-fyaipa 7rapa/3d\\o/Jiev. 5. <w 
 
 oi^: dfcoveis rrjv rov Kpurov (frcovijv ; 6. ot iroKlrai 
 OVK atcovovcri rrjv 7rapa/3o\rjv. 7. ra> Kpira rypdfarov 
 
 7Tpl T^9 TCOZ/ 7TO\2TO)V V7Tep^O\^. 8. Tt UTTep TOZ^ 
 
 ftopedv (hyper-borean) eVrt (is, Latin es^) ; 
 
 1 ACOTTOTT;? draws the accent back in the vocative singular : 
 
46] A-DECLENSION : MASCULINES. 31 
 
 n. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The citizens are throwing ball again. 2. The 
 master compares the head of the poet to a ball. 
 3. Have we a master ? 4. Citizens, you hear the 
 voice of the judges. 5. We do not judge the 
 citizens. 6. They throw the ball beyond the 
 master. 7. We are comparing the judges. 8. 
 Citizen, you are learning the language of the 
 poets. 
 
 46. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. From the root of tcpivco and Kpnris is derived 
 the adjective tcpinicos capable of judging, which 
 gives us critic, critical, criticise, criticism ; also tcpi- 
 Trjptov criterion, and Kpia^ judgment, trial, which 
 gives us crisis. 
 
 2. From TroXtrrj? we have not only politics, po- 
 litical, politic ; but also (through TroXrre/o, -a? ad- 
 ministration, form of government) polity, policy, and 
 the still farther shortened police. 
 
 3. The derivatives of ySaXXw show the original 
 form of the root with one X, and often with a 
 changed to o, as in 7rapaj3o\ij and i/TrepySoX?;. 
 In parable the o, even, has been dropped, but 
 the adjective parabolical is nearer to the Greek 
 form. Another compound of /3aXXa> is &a-/3aXXa> 
 slander, in which the force of the separate parts 
 is not very clear. From Sia-fidXXco come SiafioXij 
 slander and Smy8oXo<? slanderer. This latter was 
 used especially as a title of Satan, and has been 
 corrupted into devil; but, as with parabolical, the 
 
32 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [46 
 
 adjective diabolical was taken more directly from 
 the Greek form. 
 
 4. Poet, poetry, and poesy come to us through 
 the Latin forms poeta and poesis, which have lost 
 the i of the original Greek form. In Greek itself, 
 however, Troiea) and its derivatives were often 
 written and pronounced 7roeo>, etc., without i. 
 
 5. In a par-ody (jraptoSla, from Trapd and cJS^ ; 
 see 29 and 31, 7) the words of some writing are 
 altered just enough to give them a laughable turn, 
 while they still remind one of the original. Thus 
 in reading the parody one seems to hear the origi- 
 nal, usually a poem, sounding beside it. Para- 
 graph was used at first to denote a mark or note 
 written beside the page, in the margin. Now it 
 denotes especially the sign ^[, used to denote a 
 break in the composition, and the beginning of a 
 new line farther than usual from the margin ; and, 
 finally, the word stands for a section or division 
 thus begun. Para- is an element in many scien- 
 tific words. 
 
 6. The preposition virep has the meaning beyond 
 in a few English derivatives; thus hyper-borean, 
 literally beyond the north-wind, and so in the ex- 
 treme north. Secondly, in a number of derivatives 
 the element hyper- denotes an extreme degree, or 
 too much, of something, as in hyper-critical. (Com- 
 pare with this the related Latin word super-, as in 
 super-natural, super-sensitive.) 
 
49] O -DECLENSION : MASCULINES. 33 
 
 VII. O-DECLENSION: MASCULINES AND 
 FEMININES. 
 
 47. 6 (ai/0/Ht>7TO-) O (/Z1700-) f) (680-) 
 
 man tale road 
 
 Sing. Nom. avOpayrro-s i*v0o-<; oSo'-? 
 
 Gen. dvOpcoTTOv p,v9ov 6Sov 
 
 ACC. aV0pQ)7TO-V JJLV00-1' 6S6-V 
 
 VOC. aV0p(O7T fAV0 6Se 
 
 Dual N. A. V. dv0pd)7ra) /JLV0Q) 68(0 
 
 G. D. dv0p(iyjrotv pv0oiv oSolv 
 
 Plu. N. V. dv0pc&7rot, fiv0OL oSoi 
 
 Gen. CtV0p(t)7TG)V U,vO(i)V OuWV 
 
 Dat. dv0pa)7rois 
 
 Ace. dv0p(t)7rov$ 
 
 48. All stems of the second declension end in o. 
 Masculines and feminines x are declined alike. 
 
 a. The rules for the accent of nouns, given in 25-27, apply 
 to all declensions. 
 
 49. Vocabulary. 
 
 6 avOpoyrros, -ov man (anthropo-logy). 
 6 $/o5, -ov life (bio-graphy). 
 
 yt,yvd)<TKQ) perceive, learn to know (Gno-stic). 
 
 read (originally know again, 
 
 ava-ywvotxr/ca) . . 
 
 ( re-cognize). 
 
 6 &po//,o9, -of a running, race (palm-drome). 
 
 1 The number of feminine -o- stems is not large, and only 
 one, 68os, is used in The Greek in English. 
 
34 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [50 
 
 icai and. 
 
 ( (1) order. (2) ornament, (3) the 
 
 Of 1 77X N 
 
 ( universe, world (cosmos). 
 /coo- flea) adorn (cosmetic). 
 
 \eyco speak, tell. 
 
 < ^ i s? ( (1) word, (2) aZ&, discourse, 
 
 o \0709, -ou (fr. ) v ' \ y ': 
 
 ~/\ \ (o) account, description (an- 
 
 \67G>) I ^ i \ 
 
 V thropo-logy). 
 
 o /jivOos, -ov tale, legend, myth. 
 
 f r^/ ^ ( roac?, t^av (odo-meter ; see meter, 
 
 7? OS09, -OV ' ^ 
 
 o/?acD s^e (cosm-orama). 
 
 o <f)i\os, -ov friend (phil-anthropy). 
 
 6 xpovos, -ov time (chrono-logy). 
 
 50. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 1. Ol Trotrjral &)Sa9 TroieovGi. 2. TOV ftiov rov 
 pd(j)o/jLv (bio-graphy) . 3. <j)l\os <ypdcf)i, 
 <j)cova)v \d<yov (phon-o-log^y) KOI rwv /juvOcov \6yov 
 (mytho-logy). 4. ^1X09 av0pd)7rcov (phil-anthrop-ist) 
 io-TOpidv <ypd(f>i. 5. 77 y\a)(rcra TOV Kpirov ev \6yei. 
 
 6. dva<yLyva)O'Ko/jLv r?}9 ^1)^9 \6<yov (psych-o-logy) . 
 
 7. o 7roXtT7;9 ov ry(,<yva)crKL rbv %p6vov. 8. opdeTe 
 TOV $pd/jiov ev TTJ oSco ; 9. TO^ /JLV()OV<; TWV 
 dvayiyvd)CTKT V Trj a"^o\f). 10. e^ei o 
 
 (3d meaning) yjrv^v ; l 11. v \eyei Trepl TOV (say 
 his) <f)i\ov. 
 
 1 Certain ancient thinkers believed that it has. 
 
51] O-DECLJ-:\>1<>\ : MA >r r LINES. 35 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. A citizen of the world (cosmo-polite) is read- 
 ing an account of the times (chrono-logy). 2. The 
 poets speak and we hear. 3. They are reading 
 the tale of the chimera. 4. We hear the words 
 of friends. 5. They read an account of life (bio- 
 logy) and an account of the earth (ge-o-logy ; see 
 31, 3). 6. The poet is making an ode about the 
 soul. 7. The poets adorn the legends and write 
 poems (^Troujfiara). 8. The life adorns the man. 
 9. Do you see a man beside the road? 10. He is 
 speaking about the race of a man and a she-goat. 
 
 51. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. In bio-graphy, bio-logy, cosmo-polite, and chrono- 
 logy, it is plain that the letter o- at the end of the 
 first part of the compound belongs to the stem of 
 that part, ftio-, KOOTAO-, ^povo-. The number of 
 compounds in which the first member was an o- 
 stem was very large, so large that the a- came to 
 be carelessly regarded as a mere device for con- 
 necting the two parts of any compound. Hence 
 the -0- was often inserted in other cases, where it 
 is only a sort of spoken hyphen, connecting the 
 two members, although the first member may 
 have ended originally in a- or a consonant. (See 
 31, 3.) 
 
 2. The root of yiyvd^a-KO) is 71/0- or 71x0-, related 
 to our word know, in which the k was formerly 
 pronounced. From this root was 
 
36 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [51 
 
 "knowing" whence our word Gnostic. An ancient 
 religious sect were called Gnostics, because they- 
 claimed to be particularly " knowing " on certain 
 subjects. (For agnostic see 60, 3, 5.) Gnome is 
 also a derivative of yiryvcticrKG) ; certain imaginary 
 beings were so called because they were supposed 
 to know where mineral treasures were hidden in 
 the earth. 
 
 3. Apo'yu<o9 appears in palin-dBome (see 31, 6), 
 and dromedary, which comes to us through a late 
 Latin form dromedarius, -edarius being a combina- 
 tion of derivative endings. 
 
 4. KocryLto? appears in English in two meanings, 
 which at first sight seem not very closely con- 
 nected. First, from the meaning ornament, we 
 get, through /coo-peco and KOO-JJ^TIKO^ the word cos- 
 metic. Secondly, the visible universe was called 
 Koa-fio^ as being an orderly, well-arranged system ; 
 and in this sense we have cosmos, from which cos- 
 mic and cosmical naturally follow. In cosmo-polite, 
 cosmo-politan the first part, instead of including the 
 entire universe, is restricted to the various coun- 
 tries of the earth. So in cosm-orama, of which the 
 second part is from opda). 
 
 5. a. The syllable -log-, representing Xo'yo? in 
 the sense of discourse, account, description, appears 
 in many names of sciences, like those in the Exer- 
 cises. In fact this element, preceded by an -o-, is 
 so familiar that there has even been formed from 
 it the separate word ology, used most often in the 
 plural as a rather humorous name for the sciences. 
 
51] O-DECLENSION : MASCULINES. 37 
 
 Eu-logy (see 36, 2) is good talk, a speaking well, 
 about one ; that is, praise. Eu-logium is a longer 
 form of the same word ; eu-logize is the correspond- 
 ing verb. A pro-logue (TT/DO before, Latin pro) is 
 something spoken before, as an introduction to a 
 poem or play. (Compare epilogue, 68, 6.) A hor- 
 o-loge (&pd, see 31, 8) is an instrument which tells 
 the time. Further, Xoyo? signifies that power of 
 the mind which is exhibited in speech, namely, 
 reason. From \6yos in this sense we have logic 
 (\oyiKrf), the science of reasoning. 
 
 b. The preposition avd, up or along, has taken on 
 a variety of meanings, the connection of which is 
 not so plain as might be wished. Like Latin re- 
 (seen in re-pel, re-novate, re-new) it signifies back 
 and again. Thus from dva-ypd<f)co write back or 
 again, we have ana-gram, a word or phrase formed 
 by re-writing in a different order, or transposing, 
 the letters of another word or phrase. So ana- 
 chron-ism is a transposition or confusion of the time 
 (^ovo?) of events. In dva-yiy wvo- /ceo the preposi- 
 tion has the force of again, and likewise in ana- 
 baptist, one who holds that those baptized in infancy 
 should be re-baptized when older (/3a7rrtco bap- 
 tize). Then in two or three phrases avd was used 
 in the sense of according to ; one of these was ova 
 \dyov, in which \6<yo<; also has a highly specialized 
 sense, that of reckoning or ratio. From this phrase 
 was formed the adjective dvdXoyos analogous, ap- 
 plied to things which are to each other according 
 to a certain ratio, or which are alike in their rela- 
 
38 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [51 
 
 tions or circumstances. The neuter form dvaXoyov 
 gives us analogon or analogue, an analogous word 
 or thing ; analogy (avdXo^La) is the relation between 
 analogous things. 
 
 The prefix ana- is found in many scientific terms, 
 and should not be confused with negative an-, for 
 which see 60, 3, b. 
 
 c. The preposition /card down is also much used 
 in composition with meaning more or less changed. 
 Thus /card-\o<yos a telling down, as it were, that is 
 list, cata-logue; cata-comb (/CV/JL/STJ, -779, something 
 hollow^), underground passages where the dead 
 were deposited. 
 
 6. Philo-, phil-, and -phile are the representatives 
 of </>/Xo9, as in phil-anthropy, love of mankind, phil- 
 harmonic (dpfjiovid harmony), philter ($l\rpov love- 
 charm, or means of producing love), pnilo-Turkish, 
 Turco-phile, Slavo-phile, phil-hellenic ( r/ E\\rjv a 
 GrreeK), and others. Philo-logy is etymologically 
 fondness for words or for language ; hence the 
 study of words or of language, or in a. larger sense, 
 the study of literature and all that is expressed in 
 language. 
 
 7. XpoVo9 gives us chronic, applied to diseases 
 that have lasted a long time, and chronicle, a narra- 
 tive of events in the order of time. 
 
 8. Psychic (^^#09) is our adjective from 
 tyv'Xr). Psych-o-logy is the science which treats of 
 the nature and powers of the soul. 
 
54] 
 
 O- DECLENSION : NEUTERS. 
 
 39 
 
 VIII. O-DECLENSION: NEUTERS. 
 
 52. 
 
 TO (/I6TpO-) 
 
 measure 
 
 /JLTpO-V 
 
 perpov 
 
 TO (07C777TTpO-) 
 
 staff 
 
 TO 
 
 TOV 
 
 (T/cijTrrpov 
 
 TO 
 
 & 
 
 TO) 
 TOW 
 
 \ 
 TO, 
 
 TO)V 
 
 /JiTpO-V 
 fJLTpO-V 
 
 jJ,TpQ) 
 /JLCTpOLV 
 
 fJLTpa 
 
 (T/crjTTTpa 
 
 TO, /jLerpa 
 
 9 
 O) 
 
 Sing. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 G.D. 
 
 Plu. Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 Voc. 
 
 53. Neuters of this declension differs from mas- 
 culines only in the nominative, accusative, and voca- 
 tive, singular and plural. In the singular these 
 cases take the case-ending -v : in the plural they 
 change the stem-vowel -o to -a. (Compare Latin 
 metrum, metrd.*) 
 
 54. Vocabulary. 
 
 a-Tro, prep. w. gen. only, from, away from (apo-logy). 
 TO SevSpov, -of tree (rhodo-dendron). 
 
 Sid, prep. w. gen., through (dia-meter). 
 
 eXe^/prep.w.gen.only, out of, from (Latin ex). 
 
 1 Proclitic (see 19) ; CK is used before a consonant, e before 
 a vowel, 
 
40 THE GBEEK IN ENGLISH. [55 
 
 TO epyov, -ov work (en-erg-y) 
 
 1 he (she, it) is. 
 
 1 they are. 
 
 6 ^X*o9, -ov sun (helio-trope). 
 
 TO Oedrpov, -ov theatre (p lace of seeing, 6 ea). 
 
 TO Oeppbv, -ov heat (therm-al). 
 
 TO fjuerpov, -ov measure (meter, metr-ic). 
 TO opyavov-ov (related j imtrument ( } 
 
 to epyov) ) 
 
 7repi, prep. w. gen., about, concerning. 
 
 w. ace., around (peri-meter). 
 
 TO pobov, -ov rose (rhodo-dendron). 
 
 TO o-KrjTrrpoVy -ov staff, sceptre. 
 
 TpeTTQ) turn. 
 6 T/OO'TTO?, -ov (f r. T/oe7r&)), a turn (trope). 
 
 55. The verb-forms eon and eio-t, with a few other words, 
 are enclitics (from cv and K\tva) lean) ; that is, they usually 
 have no accent of their own, but lean on the preceding word. 
 As to accents in this connection we have the following rules : 
 
 a. The word before an enclitic, (1) If it has the acute on 
 the ultima, does not change the acute to the grave : Trot^TT/s 
 eon. (2) If it has the circumflex on the penult, or the acute 
 on the antepenult, it takes also an acute on the ultima : <r<t>cupd 
 <m, opyavov ccrrt. 
 
 6. An enclitic of two syllables takes an acute on the ultima, 
 if the preceding word has an acute on the penult : poSov ecrrt. 
 
 56. ^Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 1. ? O avdp&TTo? %i poSa airo SevSpov (rhodo- 
 
 1 See 40, 1., 4, with note. 
 
56] O- DECLENSION : NEUTERS. 41 
 
 dendron) . 2. 6 ev rcS Oearpw^- avOpwrros 
 
 rpov. 3. ri ean TO perpov rfjs 6Sov Sia (dia-meter) 
 
 TOV rj\lOV KOI TO /JiCTpOV T?}? oSoV 7Tpl (peri-Od) TO V 
 
 rj\iov (peri-helion) ; 4. e/c TOV opydvov yiyvd^aicofiev 
 TO TOV Oepfjiov fierpov (thermo-meter). 5. o Kpt,Tr)<s 
 Tp&irei TTJV (say his) fce<f)a\r]v CLTTO TOV rj\iov. 6. K 
 TOV ftlov T^]V -^rv^v av0p(t)7TOV ryiyvcocr/cofjiev. 7. rot'9 
 
 T/3O7TOU9 TT)? 6SoV OV% 6paT. 8. OL TTOirjTai iO~L 
 
 <f)i\oi. 9. ol <f)l\oi elorl TroirjTai. 10. ov Trj\ CLTTO 
 TOV Oearpov SevSpov etrrt. 11. ol <f)i\oi Kocr^eovcn 
 pdSoi? Trjv TOV TTOtrjTov K<f>a\rjv. 12. rt TTOLCCI TO 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. You do not perceive the measure of the time 
 (chrono-meter). 2. We see roses in the theatres. 
 3. The man makes a road around the earth (peri- 
 gee). 4. The earth is far from the sun (aph- 
 elion 2 ). 5. In work (energy), not in talk, is the 
 way of the soul's health. 6. [There] is a tree 
 beside the road. 7. On the tree is a rose. 8. The 
 sun makes the rose. 9. I see the helio-trope (TO 
 ff^io-TpoTnov) and the roses. 10. What is the 
 measure of the staff? 11. The sun adorns the 
 earth with roses. 12. The heat of the sun turns 
 back the citizen from the road. 
 
 1 Such a phrase standing between the article and its noun 
 modifies the noun. 
 
 2 Before the rough breathing OLTTO may lose its final vowel, 
 and then takes the form dd>'. 
 
42 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [57 
 
 57. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. Apology (a7ro-Ao7/a, from O/TTO and ^0705) is 
 literally a talking off, with which are connected 
 apologize and apologetic. Apo-logue, though of the 
 same derivation exactly, has a curiously different 
 meaning. Usage often proves stronger than ety- 
 mology in fixing the significance of words. Apo- 
 gee has 777 for its second part. 
 
 2. Di-orama is from Si-opdco (from Sid and o/oa&>) 
 to see through. (Compare cosmorama, 51, 4, and 
 panorama, 110, 11.) 
 
 3. Exodus (-0809) is from e and 0809, with 
 Latinized ending -us. Meth-od (/-ie#-oSo9) also con- 
 tains a fragment of 0809 ; the first part is the prep- 
 osition fierd, which with the accusative means after. 
 As a? before the rough breathing becomes </>', so 
 //-era becomes pe6\ Method, then, is primarily a 
 way after, or a going after, something ; hence an 
 inquiry, then the systematic way of making an in- 
 quiry or investigation. 
 
 4. The name George is our corruption of Tewp- 
 7^09, which goes back finally to an older form of 
 777 and the root of epyov, and so means earth-worker, 
 titter of the soil. In forming the compound, a pe- 
 culiar change of vowels has taken place. A similar 
 change has taken place in geo-metry (^yecofjuerpla), 
 land-measuring; for the Greek science of geometry 
 was used originally for measuring land. For hor- 
 o-meter (also containing perpov) compare 31, 8. 
 
 5. From ^\609 come various scientific terms, 
 
58] ADDITIONAL A- AND O- STEMS. 43 
 
 such as heliacal, connected with the sun, and helio- 
 meter, originally an instrument for measuring the 
 diameter of the sun. 
 
 6. Along with the theatre must be placed amphi- 
 theatre. The preposition apfyi around, about, is 
 related to Latin ambo, both. In composition it 
 often means (1) on both sides, (2) double. The 
 latter is the force of amphi- in amphi-theatre, and 
 also in amphi-bious (yS/o?), having a double life, that 
 is, in the water and in air. 
 
 7. The tropic is the apparent turning-pl&cQ of 
 the sun. Trophy is a corrupted form of rpoTraiov, 
 related to rpoVo?. At the place where the enemy 
 turned in flight during a battle, the Greeks piled 
 up, or fastened on a tree, part of the armor taken 
 from the enemy. This remained as a memorial of 
 victory. (For variation of e of rpeTro) to o of rpo- 
 7T09 compare /3aXAo>, 46, 3.) 
 
 IX. ADDITIONAL A- AND O- STEMS. 
 58. Vocabulary. 
 
 -ou messenger (angel). 
 
 report, announce. 
 
 6 aSe\<o9, -ou brother (Adelphi). 
 
 o au\o9, -oO pipe (hydr-aul-ic). 
 
 eVt, prep. w. ace., to (after verbs of motion). 
 
 6 0eo9, -ou 1 a god, God (theo-logy). 
 
 6 J/7T7T09, -ou horse (hippo-drome). 
 
 1 The vocative singular of 0cos is like the nominative. 
 Compare Latin deus, vocative deus. 
 
44 
 
 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. 
 
 [59 
 
 o /cpv<TTa\\os, -ov 
 
 , "OV 
 
 TO fjiovcrelov, -ov 
 
 fr. /jLovaa) 
 6 TrapdSeiaos, -ov 
 6 TroXe/409, -ov 
 o TroTa/Jids, -ov 
 
 ice (crystal). 
 
 circle (cycle, cyclone). 
 
 form (morph-ology). 
 
 house of the muses, museum. 
 
 park (paradise). 
 
 war (polemics). 
 
 river (hippo-potamus). 
 
 send. 
 
 send away. 
 
 envoy, ambassador (apostle). 
 
 letter (epistle). 
 
 art, skill (techn-ology). 
 
 place (topo-graphy). 
 
 water (hydr-aulics). 
 
 fear (hydrophob-ia). 
 
 59. ^Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 1. To v&cop pel (flows) Sia rov av\ov (hydr-aulic, 
 hydr-aulics). 2. opday rov ITTTTOV eV rcS Trora/tft) 
 (hippo-potamus). 3. ol aSeX</>ol <f>i\oi, 1 (Phil-adelphia) 
 ela-f. 4. </Xo9 VTTTTCOV (Phil-ip, <3>/A,fc7r7ro9) Trepl rwv 
 TOTTCOV ypdfat, (topo-graphy) rw^ 2 ev rq> TrapaSeto-q). 
 5. o TTorayLto? pel eV KVK\G) (en-cycl-ical) Trepl TO 
 liovcrelov. 6. o /3oped$ iroieei /cpvcrTa\\ov eV rot? 
 
 1 The article is omitted with a predicate noun ; thus we can 
 often distinguish the subject from the predicate noun when 
 they stand side by side, as here. 
 
 2 The repetition of rwv shows that ev ro> TrapaSctW belongs 
 
 tO TO7TODV. 
 
 6 a7TO-(7ToXo9, -OV 
 
 rj Tri-crTO\r}y -7)9 
 97 rexyr], -779 
 
 O T07T09, -OV 
 
 TO vSoOp 
 
 6 >0^09, "OV 
 
60] ADDITIONAL A- AND Q-STEMS. 45 
 
 Trora/iofc. 7. o ayyeXo? opdei TTJV rov 6eov /j,op<f)7Jv. 
 
 8. ol 6eol &TiX\,ovo~i(y) dyj\ov<; eirl 
 
 9. ol aSe\cf)ol (AdelpM) p,av6dvovo-i(v) 
 
 CTK6LV Ta? 7Tl<TTO\aS TO)V dTTOO'TOXwV. 10. Ol a-TTO- 
 
 <7TO\oi 7ricrTO\r)V jpa^ovai roS Kptrfj. 11. o 0oy8o9 
 rov /cpvo-Ta\\ov rpeTrei p, (me) diro rov TOTTOU. 12. ol 
 deol e^ovcrt rrjv (frcovrjv ical rrjv fJLOp<f>r)V dv0pa)7rct)v 
 (anthropo-morphic). 13. ol aTrocrroXo^ ay<y\\ovo-i 
 
 TOU? 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The horses in the park are learning the art 
 of war. 2. The messengers announce war. 3. He 
 turns the horse in a circle around the park beyond 
 the museum. 4. The water in the pipes is from 
 the river. 5. The horses perceive the fear of the 
 master. 6. We are reading an account of the arts 
 (techn-o-logy). 7. Fear in war does not adorn the 
 citizens. 8. You do not see the forms of the gods. 
 9. Have you letters from the brothers of the am- 
 bassador? 10. The arts adorn the life of men. 
 11. The letter reports the ambassador's words 
 about war. 12. The heat of the sun sends-away 
 ice from the rivers. 13. Do you see instruments 
 of war in the museums? 14. The brothers per- 
 ceive the skill of the citizens in war. 15. The am- 
 bassador's friend is in the messenger's place. 
 
 60, Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. As was said before (36, 2), the adverb ev 
 often has in composition the meaning good. From 
 
46 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [60 
 
 ev and a7<yeXo9 was formed the noun ev-a<y<ye\i,ov 
 good tidings, which is also the meaning of our 
 Saxon word gospel. In Latin this became evan- 
 gelium, the sound of the combination of Greek 
 letters eva- being best represented to the Roman 
 ear by eva-, pronounced in the Roman way. Evan- 
 gelium gave us evangel, evangelical, evangelize, etc., 
 pronounced in our English way, which causes the 
 first syllable to sound very different from the Greek 
 eS. 
 
 2. Philadelphia is usually translated brotherly 
 love ; the verb c^Xeeo, from </Xo9, is the common 
 word signifying to love. 
 
 3. a. Theology is the science which treats of the 
 nature of God, and his relation to his works. The- 
 ist and theism are formed from 0eo?, as deist and 
 deism from Latin deus. 
 
 b. A-theist has for its first element the syllable a- 
 (which takes the form av- before a vowel), called 
 alpha privative (Latin privo, to take away). This 
 syllable has the force of not which in- and un- have 
 in such words as in-active and un-known; in fact 
 av- is the original form, related to our negative in- 
 (from Latin) and un-, and might more fitly be 
 called negative av-. Accordingly a-theist means not- 
 theist. So from pop^rf we have a-morphous, literally 
 shape-less; from vS&p, an-hydrous av-vSpo$ water-less; 
 and from gnostic (see 51, 2), a-gnostic. Care is 
 sometimes necessary in order to distinguish this 
 an- followed by -a- from the preposition ana- (see 
 51, 5, i). 
 
60] ADDITIONAL A- AND O- STEMS. 47 
 
 c. Apo-theosis is formed directly from 
 deify, which goes back to CLTTO and #609. Theo-dore 
 (0eo-Sw/309 gift of Grod) has for its second part 
 Swpov, -ov, gift. Poly-theism (see 91, 12) is a belief 
 in many gods. 
 
 4. Hippo-drome, from LTTTTOS and 8po//,o?, literally 
 horse-race, is mostly used of a place for a horse- 
 race. 
 
 5. In bi-cycle, the syllable bi- is a Latin prefix 
 meaning double. (For tricycle see 82, 8.) 
 
 6. Morpheus (from popfyrf) was the god of dreams 
 (literally the shaper or fashioner) and hence the 
 god of sleep. From Morpheus in this latter sense 
 we have morphine. In meta-morphosis (from //,era- 
 fjiop(f)6co trans-form) the preposition //-era,. as is often 
 the case, denotes a change. So also in met-em- 
 psychosis (/xer-e/i-i/ru^oct) from /xera, eV, and ^t^*?), 
 the doctrine that the soul, after the death of the 
 body which it inhabits, is reborn into another. 
 Anthropo-morph-ism (avOpvTros) is the representa- 
 tion of God in the form or with the character of 
 man. 
 
 7. Apo-stle is another instance of a word which 
 has lost the o- of the Greek original, while its ad- 
 jective apo-stolic has retained the vowel. (Com- 
 pare parable and parabolic, devil and diabolic, 46, 3.) 
 Epistle and epi-stol-ary are another similar pair. 
 (With the variation of e to o in the derivatives of 
 <TT\Xa) compare the variation of a to o in the de- 
 rivatives of ySaXXw, 46, 3. See also 57, 7.) 
 
 8. Te%i>77 gives us technical, pertaining to an art 
 
48 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [61 
 
 or trade ; technique (through, the French), the 
 technical or material part of an art, as distinguished 
 from the intellectual and imaginative part, as in 
 music or painting ; techn-o-logy, a description of the 
 arts ; also poly-technic (see 91, 12). 
 
 9. "YScop generally appears in English as hydr-. 
 Examples are hydra (a portentous water-serpent on 
 which grew two new heads for every one cut off), 
 hydr-ant, hydr-o-meter (//,er/x>j/), hydr-o-graphy, hydr- 
 o-phobia (<o/3o9). 
 
 X. ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 
 
 61. These adjectives follow the second declen- 
 sion in the masculine and neuter, and the first de- 
 clension in the feminine. Thus the nominative 
 singular ends in -09, -a (or -?;), -ov (Latin -us, -a, 
 -urn). 
 
 O " "\T A f A f J f 
 
 Gr. (TOfyoV (TO^ij^ (7O(f>OV 
 
 \-s (7O(pCt) (TOfpfJ (7O(D(t) 
 
 -cV. (TOCDOI/ (TO&TIV (TOCpOlS 
 
 Vi / i / / 
 
 . O"O(p GTOCbll (TO(pOl/ 
 
 Dual N. A. V. crochet) cro(f)a <70<f)(b 
 
 G-pi I ^ I f 
 
 -L'. (TOCpOiV (TOtpCLlV (TOCDOLV 
 
 Plu. N. V. (70(>Oi (TO(f)al (TO<pd 
 
 -U. (TO(pOl$ (TOchai^ O"O(pOfc9 
 
 At / i ^ JL ' 
 
 ^0(1)01/9 ^O(DCi9 ^O(Z)Ct 
 
04] ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 49 
 
 other. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 ere/909 
 
 erepd 
 
 erepov 
 
 G. 
 
 erepov 
 
 erepd? 
 
 erepov 
 
 D. 
 
 erepa) 
 
 erepd 
 
 erepa) 
 
 A. 
 
 ere/ooi/ 
 
 erepdv 
 
 erepov 
 
 V. 
 
 erepe 
 
 erepd 
 
 erepov 
 
 Dual N.A.V. 
 
 ere/oft) 
 
 erepd 
 
 erepco 
 
 G.D. 
 
 erepoLv 
 
 erepaw 
 
 erepoiv 
 
 Phi. N.V. 
 
 erepoi 
 
 erepai 
 
 erepa 
 
 G. 
 
 erep&V 
 
 erepcov 
 
 erepwv 
 
 D. 
 
 erepois 
 
 erepais 
 
 ere/Dot? 
 
 A. 
 
 erepovs 
 
 erepdv 
 
 erepa 
 
 62. The feminine singular always has a long 
 vowel throughout ; long -d is retained after e, i, or 
 p; otherwise it is changed to -77, as in the first 
 class of feminine nouns. (See 24, a.) 
 
 a. In the nominative and genitive plural the feminine fol- 
 lows the accent of the masculine. 
 
 63. Rule. As in Latin, the adjective must agree 
 with its noun in gender, number, and case. 
 
 64. The relative pronoun, 09, %, o who, is declined 
 
 as follows. 
 
 Sing. Flu. 
 
 Nff rf ff f/ f/ tf 
 
 09 rj o 01 ai a 
 
 G. ov 
 
 ov 
 
 D. cS 
 
 ov 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 G.D. 
 
 OU9 
 
 & 
 
 olv 
 
 a 
 
50 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [65 
 
 65, Rule. The relative pronoun agrees with 
 its antecedent in gender, number, and person, but 
 takes the case required by the construction of its 
 own clause. 
 
 66. Vocabulary. 
 
 dyaOds, -77, -dv good (Agatha). 
 
 dvTi, prep. w. gen., instead of. 
 TO aaTpov, -ov star (astr-al). 
 
 !-self; myself, himself, itself, 
 etc. (auto-biography); pre- 
 ceded by the article, same. 
 TO Pi/3\iov, -ov book (Bible). 
 
 Sofceco think. 
 
 77 Sdga, -779 (fr. So/ee&>), opinion (ortho-dox). 
 7rt, prep. w. dat., upon (compare 58 eV&). 
 erepo9, -a, ~ov other (hetero-dox). 
 
 /ea/eo9, -77, -ov bad (caco-phony). 
 
 6 Xi#o9, -ov stone (litho-graph). 
 
 alone, only, only one (mono- 
 
 -77, -ov N 
 
 gram). 
 
 deal out, distribute (Nemesis). 
 6 v6/j,os?-ov(fi:.vfjiG)), law (metro-nome). 
 
 !(1) straight, (2) upright, 
 (3) right (as opposed to 
 wrong') (ortho-dox). 
 
 1 The neuter nominative and accusative singular of avros is 
 avro ; otherwise the word is declined like o-o<os, "but has no 
 vocative form. 
 
 2 Nojuo? means, first, what is dealt out to one, and so what is 
 held in use and possession ; hence the meanings custom, usage, 
 and finally law. For change of e to o compare 60, 7. 
 
67] ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 51 
 
 09, r\ y o who, that, which. 
 
 7rco\ea) sell. 
 
 6 fiij3Xio-7rd)\r}<;, -ov book-seller, biblio-pole. 
 
 c-0009, -i], -dv wise (theo-soph). 
 
 77 vofyid, -09 wisdom (Sophia). 
 
 67. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 1. 'O KpiTr)$ ypdfai dyaffov j3i/3\lov Trepl TWV 
 v6/jiQ)v. 2. o TToirjrr)? avTos ypdfai, (auto-graph) 
 TOV (his) /3lov (auto-bio-graphy). 3. ol iroKlrai 
 01 rou9 vop,ovs avrol Troieovaw, avrovo/Jiol (auto- 
 nomous) eiai. 4. ov a"%o\do/Jbv eVl \l0<p TOV vopov 
 ypdfaiv (litho-graph). 5. 6 a7roo-roXo9 e%e^ eVt- 
 r;^ fj dyj\\i rrjv Sogav rwv TroXlT&v. 6. eV 
 avOdvovGiv dyada y8t/3X/a dva<yiyva)(TKi,v 
 avrl /ca/cwv /3^/3\t&)i/. 7. 6 \i0os pr)<yvv<TL (breaks) 
 
 TOV KpV<7TO\,\OV CTTi Tft) TTOTa/Aft). 8. TO9 TCt)V (TO<f>O)V * 
 So^a9 7T6/51 TO)V d(7TpCi)V /JL(lV0dvO/JLV K /3l/3\l(0V. 
 
 9. 6paT TOV Tpov aSe\(f)ov TOV d<y<ye\ov. 10. ol 
 (To<f>ol KOI al (T0(f>al TO avTo (the same thing) \e<y overt, 
 (tauto-logy). 11. ri So/ceT avTol Trepl TOV /3i/3\lov ; 
 
 12. eo9 dyaOa vepet, TOI$ dyaOol? /cal 
 
 13. ol opOol pdvot, ev dvayiryvcocr/covo'i, TOU9 cv 
 
 1/6//-OI/9. 14. ov/c e%ofjt,v TOL>9 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. Not booksellers alone sell (mono-poly) books. 
 2. The wise and good man's opinion is right 
 
 1 The adjective may be used alone as a noun, as in Latin. 
 
52 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [68 
 
 (ortho-dox). 3. Bad citizens do not make wise 
 laws. 4. I see a friend of wisdom (philo-soph-er) 
 who has a bad horse to sell. 5. [They] are l bad 
 citizens who make war in the land. 6. The sun 
 distributes heat. 7. The bookseller's only brother 
 is throwing stones. 8. The poets tell (\eyova-i) a 
 legend about the two (Svo) ways of life. 9. We 
 are ourselves reading a book about the laws of 
 the stars (astronomy). 10. We perceive the wis- 
 dom of God in the stars. 11. The citizens make 
 laws, which they write on stone. 12. They are 
 reading the books which they have. 13. The law 
 alone is master of the upright citizen. 14. Others 
 have the same law. 
 
 68. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. As a preposition avri means instead of; but 
 its original force was rather facing, opposite to, 
 opposed to, and this last is its common meaning in 
 composition, both in Greek and in English. Thus 
 an anti-periodic (Tre/n-oSo?) medicine is one against 
 a periodical disease (as quinine for fever and 
 ague). The word avri-^wva (</>o>z^), an adjective 
 in the neuter plural, denoted a form of church 
 music in which one choir or part of a choir 
 responds to another. This became in late Latin 
 antifona (retaining the Greek accent), which 
 being taken into English became (through the 
 forms ant&fne, ant^vne, antSmne, dntemn, dntem) 
 
 1 An enclitic (55) should not begin a sentence, 
 
68] ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 53 
 
 anthem, taking on a slightly extended meaning. 
 Finally anti-phone was reintroduced in the original 
 sense. The Anti-nomians (1/0^09) denied, it was 
 said, that they were bound by the moral law. 
 Anti-nomy is an opposition or contradiction of laws. 
 In fact anti- has been so fully naturalized that it 
 is now used freely as a prefix, whether the rest 
 of the word is Greek or not. 
 
 2. So far as derivation goes, we should expect 
 astro-logy to have the meaning which is really 
 given to astro-nomy (1/0/409). But here, as often 
 happens, use and association one might say, the 
 company which the word has kept have given a 
 certain twist to the original force of astro-logy, so 
 that it is now the name for a false, astro-nomy 
 for a true, science of the stars. Another form 
 of acrrpov is acrnjp; this gives us aster, and 
 asterisk (do-repla/cos*) is a diminutive of the same 
 word. 
 
 3. a. A people that has the right of using or 
 making its own laws is called auto-nomous, and 
 auto-nomy is the right itself. Auto-maton and auto- 
 matic also contain avros. The second element is 
 from a Greek root pa- to desire, or will; hence 
 auto-maton is etymologically acting by one's own 
 will, and so self-acting. The word is especially 
 used of machines. 
 
 b. With the article before it auro? signifies the 
 same ; TO avrd, often run together into ravro, 
 signifies, therefore, the same thing. Hence ravro- 
 \oyid tauto-logy. 
 
54 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [68 
 
 4. A biblio-graphy is a description or list of the 
 books on a particular subject. Other compounds 
 of ftcffXiov are biblio-mania ^avia madness), and 
 biblio-phile (</>/Xo?). 
 
 5. Hetero-dox is usually contrasted with ortho- 
 dox. In para-dbx the first element is irapd; but 
 the preposition here means, not beside, but against, 
 contrary to. Ao<z also signifies the good opinion 
 which others have of one, and so fame, glory. 
 This is the force of dox- in dox-o-logy. 
 
 6. Epi-graphy is the branch of philology (see 51, 
 6) which deals with inscriptions cut on stone, of 
 which there are thousands in Greek and Latin 
 alone. Epi-gram (eiri^pa^fjba) meant originally 
 such an inscription ; but as these were usually 
 short and often in verse, the word came to be 
 used for a short, pithy poem, or saying. The epi- 
 glottis (see 41, 1) is just over the glottis. In all 
 these epi- has the meaning given in the vocabu- 
 lary (66) ; in ep-ode (&) and epi-logue (con- 
 trasted with prologue ; see 51, 5, a) it indicates 
 something added on at the end. Further, rj^epa is 
 the Greek word for day ; before the rough breath- 
 ing 7rl loses the final vowel and becomes e$'; 
 thus is formed etjyrjfiepk diary or day-book, whence 
 eph-emeris. 'Ec/y^te/oo? eph-emeral is the adjective, 
 signifying lasting for a day. 
 
 7. Ka/eo? appears in caco-phony, the opposite of 
 en-phony (see 35, I., 5) ; in caco-doxy, the opposite 
 of orthodoxy (see 68, 5); and in caco-graphy, the 
 opposite of ortho-graphy (see 68, 11). 
 
68] ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 55 
 
 8. Lithol-ogy is another of the "ologies" the 
 science which treats of stones or rocks. 
 
 9. Moiw is represented by mono-, with the force 
 of one, or single, in a great many English words. 
 Common examples are mono-gram; mono-graph, a 
 treatise on a single subject, usually of a limited 
 nature ; mon-ody, a mournful poem (oJS?;) express- 
 ing one person's grief; mono-theism (#eo?), belief 
 in one God ; mono-logne, a speech uttered by one 
 person, contrasted with dialogue (see 105, 2), and 
 not quite the same as soli-loquy (from Latin solus 
 and loquor) ; mono-lith (X^os), a large column 
 or statue of a single block of stone ; mono-mania 
 {pavia 68, 4) madness on one subject only ; mono- 
 tone (o roVo9 tone, from TCWCD strain) ; mono-metallist 
 (TO fj,6Ta\\ov originally a mine, then metal) one 
 who holds that one metal only, gold, should be used 
 as the standard of value, whereas a fo-metallist 
 (compare W-cycle 60, 5) believes that both gold and 
 silver should be used as a double standard ; mono- 
 syllable (see 110, 8) ; mono-phthong, a single vowel 
 sound (o 0^07709 sound) contrasted with di-phthong 
 (for di- see 96, 1). Monad is also from /u,oVo9, a 
 derivative of the same sort with decad (see Se/ta9, 
 80). Further, from fjudvos were derived /jiovd%co to 
 live alone and /jLova%6$ single, solitary. The latter 
 has been corrupted to monk; from /jiovdco we 
 have mon-astery {fjLovadrripiov, -of) and monastic 
 (/Aovaa-Ti/cos). The early monks lived alone, hence 
 the name. Monachism has retained the -a- of 
 
56 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [69 
 
 10. Metro-nome might be rendered law-giver of 
 the measure ^erpov and ^0/409) ; it is the name 
 of an instrument for keeping the time in music. 
 From the same verb ve/juco are derived VO/JLOS law 
 (ee 66 and foot-note to 1/0/^09) and 1/0/^09 pasture 
 (one meaning of ve^a is graze or pasture} ; vopa- 
 Se9 was a term applied to tribes who moved from 
 pasture to pasture feeding their herds. Hence 
 our word nomad. Ne/-fcecr9 (originally distribution) 
 denoted indignation at undue or too great good 
 fortune ; this indignation on the part of the gods 
 was personified as a goddess, who repaired such 
 inequality by humbling those who were too proud 
 in prosperity, especially when such haughtiness 
 led to impiety or crime ; hence our word nemesis, 
 retribution, divine vengeance. 
 
 11. Ortho-graphy is right writing ; ortho-epy is 
 right pronunciation (TO CTTOS a word). 
 
 12. A theo-sophist (#609 and 0-0^09) is one who 
 believes that superhuman knowledge may be at- 
 tained by direct intercourse with God and superior 
 spirits ; theo-soph is sometimes used in the same 
 sense, and theo-sophy is the belief or doctrine of 
 theosophists. (For sophist, etc., see 74, 10.) 
 
 XL H-VERBS: PRESENT INDICATIVE AND 
 INFINITIVE MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 
 
 69. The passive voice represents the subject as 
 acted upon, while the active voice represents the 
 subject as acting. There is also in Greek a middle 
 
71] fl- VERBS: MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 57 
 
 voice which represents the subject as acting either 
 upon, or with reference to, itself. But in the pres- 
 ent tense the passive and middle have the same 
 endings, and often are to be distinguished only by 
 the connection in which the words are found. In 
 this book, only the one word <f>aiv(o show will be 
 used in the middle voice ; all other forms with 
 these endings may be understood as passive, or 
 else as deponent (see 71). 
 
 70. Pres. Ind. Middle. Passive. 
 
 S. 1 (^aivo-^at I show myself, appear am shown 
 
 2 fyaivei you show yourself are shown 
 
 3 <f>a[ve-Tat, he shows himself is shown 
 
 Du. 2 fyaive-a-Oov you two show yourselves are shown 
 3 fyawe-a-Bov they two show themselves are shown 
 
 PI. 1 <j>aivo-iJie6a we show ourselves are shown 
 
 2 (fxiive-aOe you show yourselves are shown 
 
 3 (fraivo-vrat, they show themselves are shown 
 
 Pres. Inf. 
 <f>alve-cT0cu to show one's self to be shown 
 
 71. Deponent verbs, as in Latin, are such as 
 have the passive (middle) form, but are active in 
 meaning, as a-fceTrrofjiai, view. The inflection is 
 exactly like that of fyalvopai, but the translation 
 is of course active. 
 
58 
 
 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. 
 
 [72 
 
 72, Vocabulary. 
 
 ay co lead. 
 
 6 ay coy 6<t, -ov (fr. ayco), leader, guide (dem-agogue). 
 
 the people, the free citizens, 
 the commons (dem-agogue). 
 
 true, real, genuine (etymo- 
 
 -OV 
 
 -?;, -ov 
 
 -rj, -ov 1 
 , -a, -ov 
 -a, -ov 
 
 (H/C09, -OV 
 OL/C6CO 
 
 -a, -ov 
 
 (7K7TTOfJLCU, dep., 
 
 o CT/COTTO?, -ov (fr. 
 
 equal (iso-thermal). 
 long, large (macron). 
 small, little (micro-scope). 
 house (oeco-nomy). 
 inhabit, dwell in. 
 older, elder (presbyter). 
 examine, view (skeptic). 
 
 watcher, lookout (micro-scope). 
 overseer, guardian (episcop-al). 
 be clever, or wise (sophist). 
 
 under. 
 
 show (dia-phan-ous). 
 show one's self, appear 
 (phenomenon). 
 
 73. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 1. f O rov SIJ/JLOV dycoyo? (dem-agogue) ov opdofjuev 
 
 1 Followed by the dative. 
 
 2 The ending -rcpos, -d, -ov is equivalent to the English -er, 
 denoting the comparative degree, 
 
 e7T6-0-/C07r09, -OV 
 
 (rocftl^ofjLcu (fr. 
 0-0^)09), dep., 
 i?ro, prep. w. dat., 
 
73] 1- VERBS: MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 59 
 
 OVK dyaOos 7roXiT?79 earl. 2. ol TroXirai dyovrai 
 
 7rl 7r6\/jLOV. 3. fMKpOS X/009 /3d\\TCU 67Tt fACLfCpOV 
 
 (to a long distance). 4. fj ryfj virep rov ftopeav 
 (see 46, 6) OVK olfceerai. 5. Oeo? ecrnv eVar/toTTo? 
 rov fiaxpov Koa/juov (macro-cosm) 1 /cal rov [uicpov 
 Koa-fjiov (micro-cosm) . 6. ol 7rio-/co7roi 
 ra? oSou?. 7. o 7rpcr/3vTpos aSeX</>O9 cr 
 /cal ^L fti[3>\ia ev rcS oil/cay. 8. o TV/J,OS 
 
 ervpovs \dyov<$. 9. ot ayyeXoi <f>aivovcri TW 
 r^z; roi) KpiTov 7no-To\r)v. 10. 97 oliceo^evr] 
 (inhabited) <yf) pa/cpa eart. 11. rt VTTO TO> \i0q) 
 earl ; 12. TO Oeppov r&v acrTpwv OVK 'iaov ea"rl rc3 
 depute (iso-thermal) rov rj\lov. 13. Trpeo-ftvrepov 
 d&\<f>ov e^o), 09 dyaObv TOTTOV e^ei ev rcS ffearpa). 
 14. e^e^ o &7/-&09 opOovs dycoyovs ; 15. frrot e^Vtz/ o/ 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The star itself is not small. 2. To learn-to- 
 know the true opinions of the people is the work 
 of a wise man. 3. The seasons are equal. 4. The 
 skill of the overseer himself is not equal to the 
 skill of the little bookseller. 5. He is examining 
 the little stones which are in the road. 6. True 
 overseers show themselves wise. 2 7. There is 
 water under the house. 8. The laws of the people 
 are (being) written in books. 9. I am writing a 
 
 1 In contrast with the mind of man, the micro -cosm or little 
 world, the larger universe was called macro -cosm. 
 
 2 A predicate adjective belonging to the subject must agree 
 with it in gender, number, and case. 
 
60 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [74 
 
 long letter. 10. An upright leader of the people 
 speaks true words. 11. In the long time of ice 
 we do not see roses. 12. They examine the little 
 circles which you are making on the ice. 13. The 
 leader of the people is-clever, but (aXXa) does not 
 show himself wise. 
 
 74. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. An epi-demic disease is one prevailing among 
 the people (eVl rcS S^w). Demotic, belonging to the 
 people, is often contrasted with hieratic (see 96, 6). 
 
 2. To erv/jiov was the Greek term for the literal 
 sense of a word ; hence we have etymon, the primi- 
 tive from which a word is derived, and etymo-logy. 
 
 3. From ?cro9 %p6vo<$ equal time we have iso- 
 chronous, lasting an equal time; from laov Oep/jiov 
 equal heat, iso-therm, an iso-thermal line, or line 
 passing through places of which the average tem- 
 perature is equal; and from Icrov fjierpov equal meas- 
 ure, iso-metric. Iso-sceles has for its second element 
 TO cr/eeXo9, -609 a leg. 
 
 4. The mark of length over a vowel is a macron. 
 The macro-meter measures objects a long way off. 
 Macro- occurs in other scientific terms, like macro- 
 cephalous (/eec^aX?;). 
 
 5. MZ/epo9 is seen in micro-scope (CT/COTTO?), micro- 
 meter, micro-cephalous, micro-nesia ($ 1^0-09 an 
 island^). 
 
 6. Eco-nomy (formerly spelled oeconomy ; see 14, #) 
 is from ol/co-vo/jiia, which goes back to oZ/eo? and 
 
 although the changes of meaning seem 
 
74] fl-TEEBS. MIDDLE AND PASSIVE. 61 
 
 strange at first sight. oZ/eo? is not only house, but 
 also the estate orfarm which belonged to the house; 
 and one meaning of i/e/i<, the primitive of vo/j,o$ 
 (see 66 and note 2), is to manage. An oi/co-v6fjio$ 
 was a manager of a house or an estate ; hence ol/co- 
 vopia came to signify, not only management, but 
 also good management, of property. This, then, is 
 the proper meaning of economy. 
 
 7. In ol/ceo/jievr}, the present passive (middle) 
 participle of olfceco, the vowels eo were contracted 
 to ou; 77 olfcovfjiewrj, with <yf) understood, was a 
 term for the entire inhabited world. Accordingly 
 an oecumenical council is one assembled from all 
 lands. 
 
 8. Priest is corrupted from presbyter. (An in- 
 termediate form is prester.) 
 
 9. Skeptic or sceptic (cr/eeTTT^os), from cr/eeTrro/xaj, 
 meant originally one who is inclined to examine 
 into statements, not accepting them without such 
 examination. The root also takes the form O-/COTT- 
 in ovtoTTo?, which means not only watcher, but also 
 the thing watched, namely, the mark aimed at. 
 Hence the original meaning of scope is aim, or pur- 
 pose. From this are derived the other uses of the 
 word. Among compounds of O-KOTTO? in the sense 
 of watcher, along with micro-scope (see 74, 5) we 
 have tele-scope (r^Xe) and hor-o-scope, a view or de- 
 scription of the position of the planets at the hour 
 (wpa; see 31, 8) of one's birth; for astrologers 
 held that one's whole life could be foretold from 
 such a horoscope. The syllable is even put with 
 
62 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. f^ 
 
 some words not from Greek, as in spectro-wope, 
 from Latin spectrum. 'ETTI-O-KOTTOS gave the Lajin 
 episcopus and our epi-scopal, epi-scopacy ; bishop is a 
 corrupted form of eW-ovcoTro? (in old English bis- 
 cop, Us ceo p). 
 
 10. From ao^i^ofjiai is derived crofaa-Tijs sophist. 
 The sophists were teachers of eloquence, philoso- 
 phy, and politics; and as many of them were 
 skilled in a wordy and showy, but false, mode of 
 argument, the entire class got a bad name. Hence 
 the implication of dishonesty, or of an endeavor to 
 deceive, in our words sophistry, sophism, sophistical. 
 To sophisticate is primarily to give one the quali- 
 ties of a sophist ; from this follow sophisticated and 
 unsophisticated. 
 
 11. The root of <$>aivw is <j>av-, or <a-. Phase 
 
 , phantasm (^az/rao-^a), phantasy or fantasy 
 , fantastic (originally phantastic), phan- 
 tom, epiphany (eTri-fydveio) all these have mean- 
 ings closely connected with that of appearance. 
 Fancy is a shortened form of fantasy. Em-phasis 
 (e/40a<79, ez> and <a6V&>),~ starting from nearly the 
 same sense of an appearing, took on the meanings 
 declaration, significance, and finally special signifi- 
 cance or force in an expression. Emphatic is the 
 adjective. Diaphanous (&a-(a*?9) signifies letting 
 things show through. Finally, fyaivopevos, -77, -ov 
 appearing is the present middle participle, declined 
 like ayaOfa. The neuter ^aivo^evov phaenomenon, 
 or phenomenon, signifies, therefore, that which ap- 
 pears. 
 
CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 63 
 
 XII. CONSONANT DECLENSION: STEMS IN -*- 
 AND -7-. 
 
 75. To the Third or Consonant Declension be- 
 long nouns whose stems end in (1) a consonant 
 or (2) in i or v. Masculines and feminines are 
 declined alike. 
 
 77 
 
 ladder 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 K\i/JLa% 
 
 G. 
 
 Khf/JLa/C-OS 
 
 D. 
 
 /cXtfjiafc-L 
 
 A. 
 
 /c\/jiaK-a 
 
 V. 
 
 K\i/jiaj; 
 
 Dual N.A.V. 
 
 K\/jia/c- 
 
 G.D. 
 
 K\lp,dic-oiv 
 
 Plu. N.V. 
 
 /c\f/jiatc-s 
 
 G. 
 
 K\lfJidK-Q)V 
 
 D. 
 
 KtdfJba^i 
 
 A. 
 
 K\/JLaK-as 
 
 flesh 
 
 throat 
 
 o-dpl; ^ 
 
 \dpvyt; 
 
 crap/c-o? 
 
 \dpvyy-os 
 
 aapK-i 
 
 \dpvyy-i 
 
 adpK-a 
 
 \dpvyy-a 
 
 crap!; 
 
 \dpvyg 
 
 crdpK-e 
 
 \dpvyy-e 
 
 (rap/c-oiv 
 
 \apvyy-on 
 
 \dpvryy-es 
 
 crap/c-wv 
 
 crapgi 
 
 crdpK-a? 
 
 a. The ending of the nominative singular is -9, 
 which unites with a preceding K or 7 (or ^) to 
 form -. The ending of the dative plural is -<, 
 and the same combination takes place. 
 
 I. Monosyllabic stems of the consonant declension accent 
 the case-ending in the genitive and dative of all numbers: 
 the long syllables -otv and -o>v take the circumflex. 
 
64 
 
 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. 
 
 [76 
 
 y dep., 
 -ov 
 
 -r, -ov 
 
 , -ov 
 
 O 
 
 6 \dpvyf;, -7709 
 
 -OV 
 
 , dep., 
 ^ dep., 
 
 7T/}(MT09, -^, -OV 
 
 crTe/3609, -, -ov 
 avv, prep. w. dat., 
 
 TV7TTO) 
 
 6 TU7T09, -OV 
 
 t -, 
 
 V7ro-/cptvouai, dep., 
 
 <paye2v, infinitive, 
 o ^^0-69, -ov 
 
 76. Vocabulary. 
 
 perceive (aesth-etic). 
 
 number. 
 
 count (arithmetic). 
 
 naked, bare. 
 
 exercise. 
 
 gymnasium (place for exercise). 
 
 ladder (climax). 
 
 throat, larynx. 
 
 imitator (mime). 
 
 imitate. 
 
 shall see (syn-op-sis). 
 
 first (proto-type). 
 
 flesh (sarc-ophagus). 
 
 firm, solid (stereo-type). 
 
 with (syn-opsis). 
 
 strike. 
 
 ( type (originally, what is caused 
 \ by a blow). 
 
 (1) answer, (2) play a part on 
 ^ ' 7 v J r * * 
 
 trie stage. 
 
 actor (hypo-crite, hypo-crisy). 
 to eat (sarco-phag-us). 
 gold (chrys-alis). 
 
 77. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 1 Future of 6pao>, but from a different root, OTT-, and the 
 future suffix -o-o- or -o-e- ; inflected like the present middle 
 (passive), ctyo/x,ai, OI/KI, o^erat, etc. 
 
77] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 65 
 
 2. dvOpWTToi el<riv o? jjbavOdvovcn rrjv crdpKa av- 
 OpwTTcov (frayelv (anthropo-phagons, anthropo-phagi). 
 
 3. Ol \lOot, V7TO TO) O/LKG) (TTpOl elcTl. 4. OV/C Ol- 
 
 cr6dvecr6e rrjv <nepeav (rdp/ca ra)V av6 ptoTrwv o? ev 
 rofc ryvfjivacriois yv/jLvd^ovrai, ; 5. rc3 opydvq) rov 
 rov vTTOKpirov \dpvyya <T/c7rTTai, (laryng-0-scope) . 
 6. 6 OVCOTTO? alcrOdvercn, TO Trpwrov do-rpov. 7. a7a- 
 vTTO/cpiras ev rcS Oearpa) o^Jro/Jieda^ OL rou? rou 
 dycoyovs ev pJifJieovTai. 8. o ^pvcrbs OVK dya- 
 66$ can (frayeiv. 9. ou/c 6'^re^ ra darpa <rvv ro3 
 10. TVTrreiv erepov? KCLKOV ecrn. 11. o api6- 
 TTO\IT&V 60-09 eVrl ra> dpiOfjiq) r&v 
 
 12. ot eTrlcrfcoTTOi, dpiOpeova't, rov eV r^ oSc3 
 
 13. oyjrofjieda rov /M/cpbv OLKOV bv o VTTOfcpirrjs ol/ceet, ; 
 
 14. oliceei, ev ray Trpcora) OIKM vTrep rbv rpoirov rrjs 
 
 6Bov. 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. With the actor is an elder .brother. 2. The 
 ladder strikes the bookseller on the head. 3. They 
 will see a man who writes letters with (dat. of 
 means) types (typo-graphy). 4. Wise actors show 
 art. 5. The throats of the horses are long. 6. The 
 overseers will see the solid types (stereo-type). 
 7. We perceive solid gold in the stone. 8. We 
 see men who do not have flesh to eat. 9. Actors 
 exercise their tongues (in Greek the tongues) and 
 throats. 10. To exercise the muscles (plural of 
 0-dpQ well is the way of health. 11. We shall 
 see the messenger on a bare horse. 12. With the 
 messengers are guides. 13. The first actor is a 
 good imitator of others' voices. 14. To count the 
 
66 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [78 
 
 little stones in the river requires (in Greek is of) 
 a long time. 
 
 78. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. From av- privative (see 60, 3, 6) and the root 
 of aiaOdvopai we have an-aesthetic, making in-sen- 
 sible, and an-aesthesia, the condition of insensibility 
 produced by an anaesthetic. The word aesthetic (al- 
 adrjTiKos*), which originally meant merely capable of 
 perceiving, has been narrowed down to the meaning 
 capable of perceiving beauty, or pertaining to beauty; 
 hence aesthetics, the science of beauty or taste. 
 
 2. The connection between the meanings of 
 71^1/09 and <yv/jLvdco is due to the fact that the 
 Greek boys and men trained, in the gymnastic 
 schools, quite naked. Of course gymnic, gymnast, 
 gymnastic are all from the same primitive. 
 
 3. K\ljjLaKTijp is the round of a ladder ; hence 
 climateric, one of the successive stages of develop- 
 ment, and hence a critical time of life. 
 
 4. Mimic and mimetic (/u/^r^o?), as well as 
 mime, are from /iu//,o9, /M/jLeopaL. Panto-mime has 
 for its first element vra? (see 110, 11). 
 
 5. The root of 0^0 fiat is OTT-, which appears in 
 optic, optics, Aut-opsy (auro?) is self-seeing, seeing 
 for one's self. 
 
 6. The sarc-o-phagus was so named because it 
 was originally made of a kind of limestone which 
 quickly consumed the flesh of a corpse ; then the 
 name was given to any stone coffin. From adp% 
 was also derived the verb crap/cdfa to tear the flesh, 
 as dogs do. From this we have sarcasm 
 
78] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 67 
 
 7. The stereo-type plate is a solid piece of metal, 
 as distinguished from the separate types. The 
 stere-opticon (crrepeo?, OTT-) throws on the screen an 
 image which appears solid ; the stereo-scope, by the 
 arrangement of its lenses, causes the picture to 
 look like a solid object. 
 
 8. 2vv in English derivatives takes the forms 
 syn-, sym-, syl-, or sy-, according to the nature of 
 the following letter, and has the general meaning 
 of together. Thus, we have syn-opsis (OTT-), a col- 
 lective view (adjective syn-optic) ; syn-od (dSo?) a 
 meeting ; syn-agogue (crvv-aycoyrj ; dyco), place of 
 religious assembly among the Jews ; syn-chronous, 
 agreeing in time (%/ooz>o9) ; syn-chronism ; sym-metry, 
 correspondence in measure ^erpoii) ; symphony 
 (c/>ft>z>?7), a form of orchestral music; syl-logism 
 (Xo7o? in the sense of reason; see 51, 5, a, end), a 
 form of reasoning. Systole (cru-o-ToX?; ; avv and 
 cTTe'XX&>) is a sending together, that is, contraction. 
 It is contrasted with dia-stole (S^a-cn-oX?;), in which 
 Sid has the force of apart, Latin dis-; thus dia-stole 
 is the relaxation of the muscles of the heart, which 
 alternates with the sy-stole. The same force of 
 Sid is seen in dia-critical, distinguishing (see 46, 1), 
 and dia-gnosis (<yi<yv(i)crfca)*), the determination of a 
 disease by noting its distinguishing marks. 
 
 9. The various significations of type can all be 
 traced back to that of something produced by a blow. 
 For instance, the image or other device on a coin 
 was made by a blow upon the die under which the 
 disk of metal had been placed. Thus TUTTO? and 
 
68 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [79 
 
 type get the meaning of stamp, image, and next 
 that of character or kind. Among compounds and 
 derivatives are typical, proto-type (jirp&ros), phono- 
 type (a printed character representing a sound, 
 (frcovify, auto-type (avro^, helio-type (rpuo9), the two 
 latter being arbitrarily used to denote varieties of 
 permanent photographs. 
 
 10. From xpvcros we obtain chrysalis (from its 
 color), chryso-lite (\lOo$), chrys-anthemum (avdefjiov, 
 -ov flower ; compare avOos, 98), chrys-elephantine 
 (e\e<l)dvTivos from e'Xe<a9, -avros elephant, and then 
 ivory). In some of the finest Greek statues the 
 flesh parts were of ivory and the rest of gold ; this 
 kind of work is called chrys-elephantine. 
 
 11. We have already had occasion to notice 
 many words from Greek which end in -ic, repre- 
 senting the Greek adjective ending -IKO? ; as, in 
 this section, aesthetic, optic, typic, etc. This sylla- 
 ble -ic is so common and familiar that it is added 
 to many words not derived from Greek. 
 
 XIII. CONSONANT DECLENSION: STEMS IN 
 
 5\ /5 
 
 79. 
 
 TO (</>&)T-) O (TToS-) 6, f] (opvlO-) 
 
 light foot bird 
 
 Sing. N. <(W9 7TOU9 opvl<$ 
 
 (jr. <l)Ct)T"09 7TOO-09 OpVi(/"0^ 
 
 \J U u)(t)T"i 7rOO~l> OpViU"L 
 
 A. <(W9 7r6S-a opvlv 
 
 V. <(W9 7TOU9 8pvl$ 
 
80] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 69 
 
 Dual N. A.V. 0(wr-e -rro'S-e opvlO-e 
 
 G. D. <f)(i)T-Ol,V TToS-OlV OpVtO-OlV 
 
 Plu. N.V. <f)a)T-a TroS-e? opvW-es 
 
 G. <f)COT-Q)V TToS-COV 6pvf0-O)V 
 
 D. <j)a)(7L Trocrl opvlai 
 
 A. <f)0)T-a TroS-a? opvlO-as 
 
 a. As in the o-declension, the accusative and 
 vocative of neuters in the consonant declension are 
 like the nominative. Before -5 or -o-^, the stem- 
 consonant r, S, or 6 is dropped. The nominative 
 Trow? is irregular. The ending of the accusative 
 singular of masculines and feminines is -a; but 
 opvls usually has opvlv. 
 
 b. For the accent of monosyllabic stems see 75, b. But the 
 genitive dual and plural of <ois do not follow this rule. 
 
 80. Vocabulary. 
 
 (be first, hence) (1) begin, (2) rule. 
 -779 (1) beginning, (2) government. 
 
 -a, -ov ancient (archaeo-logy). 
 rywvid, -a9 corner, angle (deca-gon). 
 
 Se/ca (indeclinable) ten (deca-gon). 
 77 Se/ea?, -aSo9 company of ten, decad (decade). 
 a (indecl.) seven (hept-archy). 
 
 7j, -ov seventh. 
 TI ey88o/^a9, -aSo9 week, seven days (hebdomadal). 
 e'a>, adv. w. gen., outside (exo-tic). 
 
 ), adv. w. gen., inside, within (eso-teric). 
 
 -ai, -a in plural, few (olig-archy). 
 6, f) 8pvl$, -^09 bird (ornith-ology). 
 
70 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [81 
 
 6, r) Trolly TrcuSds 1 child. 
 
 Trai&evco educate (treat as a child). 
 
 ( child-leader, teacher, paed-agogue 
 ov< , N 
 
 ( (or ped-agogue). 
 
 7ro8o9 foot (anti-podes). 
 three (tri-cycle). 
 (f>epa) bear, carry (Latin fero). 
 
 TO 09, 0o>T09 light (photo -graph). 
 
 81. Hlxercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 1. f/ Q-7rov (where) o\i<yoi, dvffpcoTroi ap%ovo-i, rov 
 BtffjLov? evravOd (there) ecmv o\i<yap%ia (oligarchy). 
 2. $e/ca opvlOes <yvfjbvd%ov<n, row \dpwyyas ev <ya>vla 
 rov 7rapa&el<rov. 3. eTrra /Al/cpol TratSe? e^w rov 
 TrapaSelcrov aKovov<ri r&v opirfdcov? 4. cro(f)ol 
 aycoyol TOW TralBa? TraiSevovai,. 5. eVo) TOU 
 vaviov elal rpeis Se/caSe? avOpcoTrcov. 6. e^ofjbev ev 
 To3 oiK(p e?TTa /3fy8X/a r&v ap^aicov TTOL^T^V. 7. TO 
 <^)ft)9 TOT) rj\iov rrj\ (paiverai. 8. ez/ TT} 
 7ri(7TO\rj<; dvayiyvaxTKO/jiev rbv 
 9. @eo? /Aoi/o9 fipx ei (nion-arch) TWZ^ avOpco- 
 KOI TWV a<TTpa)v. 10. 97 777 <j>epi SevBpa /cal 
 TO SevSpov (frepei poSa. 11. ou/c ap%aioi,s 
 12. rj K\la Se/ca 
 
 1 Vocative Trat. In accent Trat? is like c^co? (see 79, and 6). 
 
 2 Verbs of beginning and ruling, like apx ^ govern the geni- 
 tive instead of the accusative. 
 
 3 Verbs of hearing and perceiving, like dfcovo) and at<r0avo/A<u, 
 take the genitive more commonly than the accusative. 
 
 4 Ace. of extent, as in Latin. 
 
82] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 71 
 
 fjia/cpa Ian. 13. rpefc e/3So/4a8e9 eia\ pa/epos %p6vo<> 
 rofc TraiaL 14. 6 TraiSaycoyo? e^ei fu/cpov 
 irepl T&v ap%ato)v 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 1. The stone has ten corners (deca-gon). 2. The 
 government of the few is bad. 3. With the first 
 bird we see seven other birds. 4. The seventh 
 bird, the [one] on the ladder, is an overseer, who 
 is educating the first bird. 5. [He] who begins 
 war is not wise. 6. The sun shows its light to 
 the earth. 7. The feet of the children are in the 
 river. 8. What is the opinion of the ancients 
 about the government of the few ? 9. The actors 
 are leading horses which carry solid gold. 10. In 
 a few weeks we shall see messengers who bear 
 letters. 11. Within the house are three men who 
 rule the people. 12. In the seventh house beyond 
 the corner of the park dwells a man who reads 
 few books. 13. An elder brother bears the child 
 through the river. 
 
 82, Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. a. Both meanings of ap^a) (which are evi- 
 dently nearly related) are well represented in 
 English. Thus, archaeo-logy (ap^ato9) is an account 
 of ancient things; archaic (apxalicos, -77, 6v) and 
 archaism also refer to ancient things, but with a 
 slightly different shade of meaning ; arche-type 
 (ap^e-TUTTo?) was originally that which is first 
 struck off or first moulded as a model or example. 
 
72 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [82 
 
 b. Again, an-archy (avap^id; av- privative, see 
 60, 3, 0) is no-rule; mon-archy {pov-apyia) is the 
 rule of one; hept-archy, the rule of seven; dec-archy, 
 the rule of ten. A patri-arch is a clan-ruler (rj 
 irarpia clan, from Trarrip, Latin pater, father) ; 
 archives (TO ap^elov, government house), the place 
 where government records are kept, or the records 
 themselves. Finally, the prefix arch- or archi- in 
 arch-angel, arch-bishop, archi-episcopal, archi-tect (o 
 re/crow builder), etc., is also from ap%co, and has 
 come to be used in the sense of chief or leader, 
 with many words not from Greek, such as arch- 
 duke, arch-thief, etc. When used with words not 
 from Greek, or with words, like bishop, so thor- 
 oughly Anglicized that the Greek origin is ob- 
 scured, the ch of arch- is pronounced as in child; 
 in words directly from Greek ch is pronounced 
 like k. 
 
 2. Tcovld appears in goni-o-meter (//,er/ooz>), and 
 gives the syllable -gon, angle, in dia-gon-al (Sm), 
 poly-gon (see 91, 12), tri-gon-o-metry (TO rpl-ycovov 
 tri-angle the first syllable being the stem of rpeis 
 and fjierpov), hex-a-gon (eg-d-ycovov ; e% six, with 
 an -a- which seems to have been inserted from 
 analogy). 
 
 3. Ae/ca appears in deca-logue, and in many 
 names of metric weights and measures, such as 
 deca-gram (see 91, 4), deca-meter. 
 
 4. From the stem of e/38o^a9 we have hebdom- 
 adal, a clumsy word for weekly. 
 
 5. An exotic plant is one from outside (e^&)), 
 
82] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 73 
 
 foreign. Esoteric (eW) doctrines are, so to speak, 
 the " inside," or secret, doctrines, contrasted with 
 the exoteric, or outside, public, doctrines, which 
 may be imparted to everybody. 
 
 6. Hat? takes the forms -paed- and -ped-; the 
 latter syllable must not be confounded with ped 
 in derivatives of Latin pes, pedis, foot. A ped-o- 
 baptist is one who believes in child-baptism (/3a?r- 
 TL^CO baptize'). Ortho-ped-y is child straightening 
 (op66<i), curing children's deformities. From 
 TrcuSeta education (7r<uSeu&>) we obtain en-cyclo- 
 paedia and cyclo-paedia (eV and KVK\O<$). 
 
 7. The nominative TTOU? appears in poly-pus, 
 many-footed (see 91, 12), which is also shortened 
 to poly-p. The stem-form -pod- is seen in chir-o- 
 pod-ist (%e/p), a healer of hands and feet, and tri- 
 pod (rpels), and in numerous scientific words like 
 cephal-o-pod (/ce^aX?;). Finally, anti-pode has been 
 formed as the singular of anti-pod-es (avri), and 
 thus has final e. 
 
 8. Tpefc is also seen in tri-logy, a series of three 
 connected plays, and in tri-cycle (/cu/cXo9). 
 
 9. Peri-phery (jrepL and </>ep&>) is the exact 
 equivalent, etymologically, of circum-ference, from 
 Latin circum and fero ; but the latter is used only 
 of circles and spheres, while the former is used of 
 other figures. The root of fyepa) takes also the 
 form <f>op-. A meta-phor (/zera-^o/oo) is, in a cer- 
 tain sense, a trans-fer (Latin trans and fero) of 
 meaning; as when a soldier is called a lion to 
 denote that he is brave, the word lion contains a 
 meta-phor. 
 
74 
 
 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. 
 
 [83- 
 
 V 
 
 divinity 
 
 etccov 
 
 orator 
 prjrcop 
 
 10. Phos-phorus (</>&>9-<o/909) signifies light-bearer. 
 The stem <f>cor- is found in phot-o-graph (ypd<f>a) 
 means to draw or paint as well as to write ; com- 
 pare graphic, 31, 4), phot-o-sphere (a-fyalpa) the 
 burning gas which envelopes the sun ; photo- 
 meter, an instrument for measuring the quantity 
 of light ; phot-o-litho-graph (X/009), a print from a 
 stone on which the picture has been printed by 
 photography. 
 
 XIV. CONSONANT DECLENSION: STEMS IN 
 
 -V- AND -p-. 
 
 83. 
 
 c 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 Dual N.A.V. 
 
 G.D. 
 Plu. N.V. 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. 
 
 a. Stems in -v- and -p- omit the nominative end- 
 ing -9, and lengthen a preceding e or o to rj or a*. 
 Observe that the long vowel is retained in the 
 vocative singular if accented, otherwise not. In 
 the dative plural v before -<n is dropped. 
 
 &u>oz/-69 
 
 el/cdv-i 
 ei/cdv-a 
 el/ccov 
 
 el/COV-6 
 
 eiicov-oiv 
 eltcov-es 
 eiicov-wv 
 eiKocn 
 
 prjrop-a 
 
 pfjrop 
 
 prjTop-e 
 
 prjrop-es 
 prjrop-cov 
 
 ptfrop-cri, 
 
 ? / 
 
84] 
 
 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 75 
 
 84. 
 
 o aycov, <ya)vo$ 
 i,, dep., 
 
 avr 
 
 and a<y.), dep., 
 o dvT-aycomcmjs, -ov 
 6 dtfp, depot; 
 6 a#\O9, -of 
 TO a6\QV y -ov 
 6 affhrjTtjs, -ov 
 6 Sal/jLwv, -01/09 
 fj elictov, -o'z/09 
 6/377/1,09, -?;, -ov 
 o /cavd)V, -01/09 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 contest (agony). 
 struggle, engage in a contest 
 (agonize). 
 
 struggle against (ant-agonize). 
 
 ant-agonist, 
 air. 
 
 athletic game, 
 prize. 
 athlete. 
 
 divinity, spirit (demon). 
 image, statue (icon-oclasm). 
 solitary, lonely (erem-ite). 
 measuring-rod, rule (canon). 
 break (icono-clasm). 
 ship (nausea). 
 sailor (nant-ical). 
 fire (pyr-otechnics). 
 orator (rhetor). 
 pointed stake, 
 scratch. 
 
 mark (engraved or stamped on 
 something. Character) . 
 
 85. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 1. 'H <y\a)(7o-a rov ptfropo? ap^et, rov 
 
 1 From ayo) : (1) a gathering, (2) a gathering for athletic 
 contests, (3) contest. 
 
 r) vavs 
 
 o vavrr)?, -ov 
 
 TO 
 
 o prjrcop, -0^009 
 
 -#09 
 
76 THE GREEK: IN ENGLISH. [85 
 
 2. o\l<yoi, d6\rjral dff\a (frepovcriv e/c TMV dycovcov. 
 
 3. ev Tofc dya)(7iv dyo)vi^ovTat ol dd\rjTal <yv/jivoi. 1 
 
 4. o Trafc Troieei Trvp ev ycovia TOV oi/cov. 5. ^apdcr- 
 <rei Trjv el/cova TOV rwv vavr&v Oeov, /cal K\dei rov 
 rov SpvlGo? TroBa. 6. ov /ca/co$ irals ecm ; 7. r) 
 
 TOV %pvcrov TCOV dd\rjTc*)V <f>epei. 8. opvlv 
 ev TW aepi. 9. dyaffov Salfjiova %i 009 (as) 
 
 7Tl(7K07rOV. 10. O TOV VTTOKpiTOV dvTa<ytoVi(TTri<$ 
 
 K\dei ro9 ap^aid^ eiicovas (icon-o-clast) rwv Oe&v. 
 11. opdo) KpirrjV 6p0bv, 09 o\tyovs 0/Xou9 e^et, /cal 
 <$>aiv6TCU, eprjfjios. 12. 6 eiricricoTros /jLa/cpbv Kavova 
 /cal opdet rot'9 /Jil/cpovs Tral&as 01 7rl TOO /cpv- 
 ela-L 13. o/ 7raSe9 TVTTTOVO-I, TOV ad\rjTtjv. 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The child bears [away] the first prize. 2. 
 Through the air are borne the voices of birds. 
 3. In the air are good spirits who are guardians 
 of men. 4. Small marks appear on the gold. 
 
 5. The statues in the park appear lonely. 6. The 
 athlete has a measuring-rod seven feet 2 long. 
 7. The orator is an antagonist of a sailor in the 
 first contest of the season. 8. The measuring-rod 
 makes a long mark on the head of the ancient 
 mariner. 9. Little children break the ice with 
 stones. 10. The fire is seen afar. 11. We are 
 reading the tale of the ancient mariner. 12. A 
 wise orator by a few words leads the people. 
 13. Shall we see a contest of athletes under the 
 
 1 This was the Greek custom. 2 Accusative of extent. 
 
$6] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 77 
 
 tree? 14. The fear of God is the beginning of 
 wisdom. 
 
 86. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. Agony (ay&vid, another form for aywv) is prop- 
 erly struggle, then the pain of struggle in a contest, 
 but has come to include any severe pain or anguish. 
 From dywvioij,ai, is formed aycDVicrr^ contestant; 
 this with Trpwro? gives prot-agonist, first contestant, 
 used especially of the leading actor in a Greek 
 play. 
 
 2. Aer-o-naut is an air-sailor; aer-o-lite, a stone 
 which falls from the air. As aer was taken from 
 Greek into Latin, some of our derivatives have 
 Latin endings or are compounded with Latin 
 words. Such are aer-zW, aer-ate, aer-iform. Air 
 has been ^further changed by coming through 
 French. 
 
 3. Daemon, or demon, now denotes bad spirits 
 only, quite differently from Greek usage ; and 
 daimon is sometimes used in the more general 
 sense of Sallow. This sense is retained in dai- 
 monic, and sometimes, though not usually, in dae- 
 monic; demoniac and demon-ology are connected 
 rather with demon. 
 
 4. Icon-o-clasm is the act of an icon-o-clast ; icon- 
 o-graphy is the description of images, statues, or 
 pictures. 
 
 5. Eremite (ep^pir^, from eprjfjuo^ is less com- 
 mon than hermit, the corrupted form of the same 
 word. 
 
78 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [86 
 
 6. The various meanings of canon are all more 
 or less closely connected with the figurative sense 
 of rule. For example, it denotes a rule of the 
 church; the list of sacred books accepted by the 
 church as belonging to the Bible ; the authoritative 
 list of saints, as in the Roman Catholic church. 
 Hence we have canonical and canonize. 
 
 7. N<zur/Xo9, which is merely another form of 
 vavrrjs, is Latinized into nautilus, a little shell-fish 
 that sails over the water in its shell. The con- 
 nection between vav$ and nausea is plain to any 
 one who has been sea-sick. 
 
 8. On a pyre (from irvp) the dead were burned, 
 among the Greeks and Romans. Pyr-o-technics is 
 the art (re^^) of making fire-works. The em-pyr- 
 ean (from ep-Trvpos in fire or on fire, ev and Trvp) is 
 the highest heaven, which the ancients imagined to 
 be pure fire. 
 
 9. Rhetoric is primarily f) prjropLfcrj re^yrj the art 
 of an orator ; but the term is now used to denote 
 the art of composition, while oratory has more ref- 
 erence to the art of speaking in public. 
 
 10. The primary force of character is still seen 
 in its sense of a distinctive mark, as a letter, 
 figure, or sign. Then the word came to signify 
 the sum of those invisible marks of one's nature, 
 the qualities of soul which make up what is called 
 character. Hence characterize (^xapa/crrjpl^co^ and 
 characteristic. 
 
 11. In this and former chapters we have met 
 several Greek verbs derived from nouns and end- 
 
87] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 79 
 
 ing in -lco or -l%o/j,ai. This ending -/o> (-/b//,eu) 
 was used very freely in Greek to change nouns 
 into verbs ; and so many Greek verbs have been 
 taken into English with the termination -ize (or 
 -ise) that this ending itself has been pretty fully 
 naturalized, and is added to many nouns and 
 adjectives which have themselves nothing to do 
 with Greek. Also, from the same class of verbs 
 were formed nouns in -07x09 and -KTrfa which 
 have given us the endings -ism and -1st. 
 
 XV. CONSONANT DECLENSION: NEUTER STEMS 
 
 IN -ar- AND -e<7-. Ho\vs. 
 87. 
 
 TO (TTVeV/JLdT-^) TO (jyV 
 
 breath race 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 
 D. Trvevfjiar-i yevei, 
 
 A. TTvev/Jia yei>o9 
 
 V. 7TVV/Jia 7J>09 
 
 Dual N. A. V. irvev/juar-e yeve-e 
 
 G. D. TTvevfidr-oiv yeve-oiv 
 
 Plu. N. V. Trvev^ar-a yeve-a 
 
 G. 
 
 D. 
 
 A. Trvevfjuar-a <yeve-a 
 
 a. All neuter nominatives singular in -a have 
 stems in -ar-; final r of the stem is dropped in 
 
80 THJS GREEK IN ENGLISH. [8d 
 
 the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular, 
 which take no case-ending. This r often appears 
 in English derivatives. 
 
 b. Stems in -e<7- change the last syllable to -09 in 
 the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular. 
 This is the same vowel-change which we have 
 already met in Xe<y&>, Xo^yo?; rpeTrco^ T^OTTO? (see 
 57, 7) ; o-reXXo), crroXo? (see 60, 7) ; V/JLQ>, VO/JLOS ; 
 cr/ceTTTo/jLai, CT/COTTO? ; (frepco, (f>6pos (see 82, 9). Be- 
 tween two vowels, and before -c, cr is dropped. 
 
 88. The adjective 77-0X^9, TroXX?;, TTO\V much 
 (plural, many) has the stem TTO\V- in some for,ms, 
 and in others the stem ?roXXo- (feminine, ?roXXa). 
 
 Sing. N. 7roXu9 7roXX?7 TroXu 
 
 G. TTOXXOU 7TOXX?79 TTOXXoi) 
 
 D. TToXXft) 7TOXX?7 TTOXXft) 
 
 A. 7TO\VV TTOXX^J/ 7TO\V 
 
 V. TroXu TroXX?; TToXiJ 
 
 (Dual wanting.) 
 
 Plu. N. V. TroXXo/ TroXXat TroXXa 
 
 G. TTOXXWJ/ TTOXXCOJ/ TTOXXft)^ 
 
 D. TroXXoK TroXXafc 7roXXot9 
 
 A. 7roXXov9 7roXXa9 TroXXa 
 
 89. Vocabulary. 
 
 aXXo9, -77, -o 1 o^r (allo-pathy). 
 
 77, -ov S#s (aristo-crat). 
 
 1 Declined like avrds (see 66 and note !). 
 
90] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 o yd/j,os, -ov 
 
 81 
 
 marriage (poly-gam-y). 
 
 become, be born, (of events) 
 
 ,77 
 take place. 
 
 TO 
 
 (fr. 
 
 TO rypafjifJLa, -TO9 
 
 TO tSo9, -O9 
 
 /caXo9, -?;, -ov 
 
 TO /CaXXo9, -09 
 TO KpaTOS, -O9 
 
 /cpaTeco (fr. /cpaTos) 
 9, -a, -ov 
 
 o/xou, adv., 
 TO ovvfia, -T09 
 TO 7ra^o9, -eo9 
 TO TTvev/jia, -T09 
 6 Trvevfitov, -01/09 
 7roXu9, TToXX^, TroXu 
 7T/x>, prep. w. gen., 
 TO xp&fjia, -T09 
 TO i|re{)8o9, -09 
 
 writing, letter (tele-gram). 
 
 shape, figure (kal-eido-scope). 
 
 beautiful (kal-eidoscope). 
 
 beauty. 
 
 strength. 
 
 rule (aristo-crat). 
 
 like (homoeo-pathy). 
 
 together. 
 
 name (Vyn-onym). 
 
 x J m S 
 
 feeling, passion (pathos). 
 breath, wind (pneumat-ic). 
 lung (pneumon-ia). 
 much, plural many (poly-gamy). 
 before (pro-gram). 
 color (chrome). 
 falsehood (pseudonym). 
 
 90. ^Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 1. 'Ei/ Ty dplo-Ty apxfj ol apicrTOL /cpaTeov&L 
 (aristo-crat, aristo-cracy). 2. 77 ap^rj Kafctf ICTTLV el 
 
 1 Root ycv- ; compare Latin gigno, genui, genus. 
 
82 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [90 
 
 (if) KCLKOS Srj/jios fcpareei (demo-cracy) r&v aptcrrcov 
 TroXZrooz'. 1 3. ol deol vepovcn rco r&v dv0pa)7T(0v 
 yevei /caXXo? KOI Kpdros Kal ra aXXa dyaOd. 4. ra 
 TrdOea T&V Oewv o/jioia TOLS rwv dv6pu>7TG)v TrdOecriv^ 
 el(TL. 5. 7ro\\al <yeveal olfceovcnv OJJLOV rrjv yfjv. 
 
 6. ol /ca\ol teal dyaOol TralSes ov \eyovcn tyev&ea. 
 
 7. TO %pO)/JLa T&V 7Tl TCO yS^ySX/ft) ypa/JL/JLaTCOV OfJiOlOV 
 
 pv<ra>* 8. pf TrvevfJboves rov dO\rjrov <yv/j,vd- 
 irpb rov dywvos, Kal rj crap% yiyverai 6/jboid 
 9. TL (TTLV ev ovv/Jbari, ; 10. /ca\a ei&ea 
 o-K7rrd/ji0a (kal-eido-scope). 11. ol opvlOes elcri 
 7ro\\a>v xpco/jLaTcov^ (poly-chrome). 12. 
 ypd(f>ovcn Trepl rov jd/jiov /caXXeo? Kal 
 13. TroXXol TrorafJiol paKpa ovvfjuara e^ovcn. 14. ov 
 TTO\V 0o)5 e^ofjiev CK rwv acrrpcov. 15. <w ?rat, alaOd- 
 vei rb Kpdros rcov 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. In many contests the best men bear [away] 
 the prizes. 2. The athlete's family has many 
 marks of beauty. 3. The sailor's horses are from 
 a beautiful race. 4. The child has a good name 
 and a figure which is like the statues of the gods. 
 5. You are painting (ypdcfrco*) the letters with 
 beautiful colors. 6. Men do not rule the winds. 
 7. The ship is borne by the strength of the winds. 
 
 1 As a verb of ruling Kparew takes the genitive (see 81, 
 
 i., i). 
 
 2 "O/xotos takes the dative, like tcros (see 72 and note x ), 
 
 3 Predicate genitive, used as in Latin. 
 
91] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 83 
 
 8. The orators are exercising their lungs ; they are 
 reading together a song about marriage. 9. The 
 marriage takes-place before the season of roses. 
 10. We have like feelings (homoeo-pathy) with 
 other men. 11. In the books of ancient orators 
 are not a few falsehoods. 12. In the best schools 
 children are educated together. 13. The soli- 
 tary athlete shows much strength, but not much 
 beauty. 
 
 91. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. Allo-pathy (aXXo?, vra^o?), the use of such 
 medicines as will produce effects different from 
 those produced by the disease, is contrasted, as a 
 mode of treating disease, with homeo-pathy (see 14, #). 
 
 2. From yd/jios we obtain mono-gamy (^01^09), 
 poly-gamy (vroXu?), and fo'-gamy; the last is another 
 instance of the combination of a Latin with a 
 Greek element. (Compare fo'-cycle, 60, 5.) 
 
 3. Hetero-geneous (erepo-yevrfs ; erepos and 76^09) 
 means of different kinds, and is contrasted with 
 homo-genedus (0/^0-76^779 ; for o/no- see 91, 8) of the 
 same kind, or all of one kind. Eu-gene (evyevrjs, 
 from ev and 761/09) and its feminine Eu-genia, or 
 Eli-genie (the French form), signify well-born, or 
 of good race. The root of ^l^vo^ai takes the form 
 <yov- (see 87, b, second sentence) in theo-gony (0eo- 
 yovtd, tfeoV), birth of the gods, or genealogy of the 
 gods ; also in cosmo-gony, birth of the universe. 
 
 4. The syllable -gram, from ^pa^pa, has been 
 already given, in some words, as from rypd<f>a) (epi- 
 
84 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [91- 
 
 gram, 68, 6 ; mono-gram, 68, 9 ; deca-gram, 82, 3). 
 Further, pro-gram (V/oo) is literally a before-writing ; 
 grammar was first applied to written language ; the 
 adjective grammatical shows the r of the stem. 
 
 5. We have seen that in many compounds the 
 vowel -o- is inserted to connect the two parts, 
 sometimes taking the place of a different vowel at 
 the end of the first stem. (Compare 51, 1.) In 
 spher-oid (from a^aipd), aster-oid (from darijp, 
 dcrrpov), delt-oid (from SeXra), anthrop-oid (in which, 
 if it stood by itself, one might say that the o be- 
 longed to the stem of dvOpcoiro?), this o has been 
 contracted with -id, the remnant of eZSo?, into the 
 syllable -old. Then, as this ending occurred so 
 frequently (especially in technical or scientific 
 words), the syllable -old has come to be regarded 
 as a simple suffix, meaning like, which may be 
 added to words from Latin as well as to words 
 from Greek. Thus ov-oid. (Latin ovum, egg), albu- 
 minoid., etc. The syllable -ide, frequent in chem- 
 ical terms, is also from eZ&o?. 
 
 6. Instead of /caXo? or /eaXXos, the related form 
 /ca\\L- was used in composition. This gives calli- 
 in calli-graphy, calli-sthenics (o-0eVo9, -609, strength, 
 nearly equivalent to Kpdros). 
 
 7. From /cpdros, tcpareco, we have the forms 
 -crat-ic and -cracy in aristo-crat, aristo-cracy ; demo- 
 crat, demo-cracy ; auto-crat (auro?) ; theo-cracy 
 (#eo<?) ; pluto-crat, pluto-cracy (TrXoOro?, -ov wealth). 
 These words have made the meaning of the part 
 from Kpdro<$ so familiar, that -crat and -cracy are 
 
91] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 85 
 
 added to a few words not from Greek. Thus 
 bureau-CT&t, bureau-ci&cy ; and mob-o-CT&cy is some- 
 times heard instead of the more regular ochlo-cracy 
 (0^X09, -ov moH). 
 
 8. The adverb O/AOV is a genitive form of the ad- 
 jective 0/409, -77, -6v same, which early passed out 
 of common use. But a number of compounds of 
 6/109 remained in common use, and we have in 
 English homo-geneons (6/40-76^77' 9 ; see 91, 3) ; hom- 
 onym, hom-onymous (ovvpa), of the same name, that 
 is, pronounced alike. 
 
 9. Besides hom-onym, ovv^a gives us an-onymous 
 (av- privative ; see 60, 3, 6) ; syn-onym (GVV), a 
 word of like meaning with another (to be distin- 
 guished from hom-onym) ; pseud-onym (-^61)809) ; 
 also ep-onymous (eVt), giving a name to, and ep- 
 onym, a name of a person given to a people or place. 
 A patr-onymic is a name derived from that of a 
 father (irarrip, Trarp- 6s father, Latin pater) or other 
 ancestor. Met-onymy (yu,era indicating change ; see 
 60, 6) is a rhetorical figure consisting in a certain 
 kind of change of name. 
 
 10. From Trdffos are derived pathetic (TraOrjTi/cos), 
 a-pathetic and a-pathy (alpha privative; see 60, 3, 0), 
 anti-pathy (aim), sym-pathy (cruz/), hydr-o-pathy (the 
 treatment of disease by water, vScop'), and path-o- 
 logy, the theory or doctrine of disease. 
 
 11. The r of TTvevfjuar- appears in pneumatic. 
 
 12. The representative of ?roXu9 in English is 
 poly- with the force of the plural, many, which has 
 already been mentioned with a number of com- 
 
86 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [92 
 
 pounds. (See 41, 1; 60, 3, <?; 60, 8; 82, 2; 
 82, 7.) 
 
 13. Hp6 appears in pro-gnosis (yiyvwo-fcci)*), judg- 
 ment beforehand, especially as to the probable 
 course and result of a disease, whence pro-gnostic 
 and pro-gnosticate. 
 
 14. From ^pco/jia we have mono-chrome (/-toy 09), 
 poly-chrome, chrom-o-litho-graph (see 67, I., 4), and 
 the abbreviated chromo. Chromatic, pertaining to 
 colors, retains the stem. It is most often used of 
 a musical scale of which the intervals are all half- 
 tones, the intermediate tones having been at one 
 time commonly written in colors. 
 
 XVI. CONSONANT DECLENSION: STEMS IN -i- 
 
 AND -6V-. 
 92. 
 
 fj (?roXt-) 
 
 city king 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 A. iro\,L-v /3acri\-a 
 
 V. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 7roXe-e 
 
 G. D. 
 
 Plu. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 
94] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 87 
 
 a. Stems in -i- take -&>?, instead of -09, in the 
 genitive singular, and take -v in the accusative 
 singular. The vowel i appears only in the nomi- 
 native, accusative, and vocative singular; else- 
 where e (in the accusative plural e^) has taken its 
 place. 
 
 b. The genitive singular and plural of stems in -t- still keep 
 the accent on the antepenult. 
 
 c. Stems in -ev- lose v before a vowel in the end- 
 ing ; they take -o>9 in the genitive singular, -d in 
 the accusative singular, and -a? in the accusative 
 plural. 
 
 93. The verb Svva/j,cu can, am able, is a deponent, 
 and, like Latin possum, takes the infinitive in 
 dependence upon it. It is conjugated as follows : 
 
 Sing. 1 Svva-fjiai, 
 
 2 Svva-a-ai 
 
 3 Svva-rcu 
 
 Dual 2 Svva-<70ov 
 3 
 
 Plu. 1 
 2 
 
 3 Svva- vrat, 
 
 94. Vocabulary. 
 
 TO a/cpov, -ov top, upper part (acro-stic). 
 
 77 a/e/oo-7ro7U9, -e9 citadel, acro-polis. 
 
 6 /3<z<7fcXeu9, -e&) 9 king. 
 
 -&>9 birth, origin, genesis, 
 
THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. 
 
 [95 
 
 oY9, adv., 
 
 s, -eft>9 
 o SvvdcTT'rjs, -ov 
 lepds, -a, -6v 
 o iepevs, -eft>9 
 \vco 
 TI \V<TIS, -eft)? 
 
 , -6ft>9 
 TO /U0-09, -609 
 
 -a, -ov 
 
 -ft>9 
 
 77 Tat9, -ft)9 
 
 <f)VQ) 
 
 f) <f)VO-l,<}, -60)9 
 
 TO <f>VTOV y -OV 
 
 carve (hiero-glyph-ic). 
 i(?e, related to Svo 
 
 force, power (dynamite). 
 
 ruler, dynast (dynasty). 
 
 sacred (hiero-glyphic). 
 
 priest (hier-archy). 
 
 loose, undo, let loose. 
 
 a loosing, setting free. 
 
 unloose, take apart, ana-lyze. 
 
 an undoing, taking apart, 
 ana-lysis. 
 
 hatred (mis-anthrope). 
 
 dead (necro-polis). 
 
 new, young (neo-phyte). 
 
 city (necro-polis). 
 
 line (as of writing). 
 
 arrange (tactics). 
 
 arrangement (syn-tax). 
 
 make grow. 
 
 ( (originally growth, then) 
 ( nature (physical). 
 
 plant (neo-phyte). 
 
 95. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 1. O/ lepees ev ry aKpoiro\i yX 
 
 2. e 
 
 Trep T^9 ToO /coafjiov yeve(Tec0$ (cosmo-gony). 
 3. ol Svvdo-rai, TroXhrjv Svvafuv e%ov<ri /cal /cpareov- 
 
95] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 89 
 
 (Ti TTO\\WV dvOpwTTCOV. 4. 8^9 dvajLjvci)a-/CL 6 Paari- 
 Xei;9 TO veov f3i/3\lov Trepl rrjs rcov dcrrpcov Taeo>9. 
 5. ev rrj vea vroXet (Nea-polis, Naples) ylyverai veov 
 <yeVo9. 6. TroXXal teal ica\ai eicriv al TCDV ve/cp&v 
 7roXee9 (necro-polis). 7. 77 Svva/Ms rov rfKiov <j)vet> ra 
 <f)vrd. 8. TO /i6o~o9 dv0pa>7rcov (mis-anthropy) /ca/cbv 
 7ra#o9 ecrri. 9. ol 6eol \vovcn ra TrvevuaTa, fcal rj 
 vavs KO\ TO, vea <f>vra /cXdovrat,. 10. al veai Svvav- 
 rai dva\vew TO (frvTOV, TO ovv/jia ov Svvavrai \eyeiv. 
 11. Svvacrai rrjv rwv dcrrpcov <f>vo-t,v \eyeiv ; 12. ol 
 iepees oifceovaiv ev rfj aKpO7r6\ei y aXXa ov TTO\V Kpd- 
 T09 e^ovcn. 13. TroXXol crri^oi <ypd<f>ovrai Trepl rfjs 
 cro<l>la$ rov veov Swdcrrov. 14. 77 Tral? 
 q>Sr)V Seta 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The sacred writings are carved on stones. 
 2. The priests rule (hier-archy) the city, and ar- 
 range the sacred [things]. 3. The birth of a 
 young king is reported in the sacred city. 4. The 
 overseer takes-apart and examines the new ma- 
 chine. 5. The force of the wind breaks many 
 trees. 6. The rulers come-to-know the hatred of 
 the citizens. 7. The priests announce the loosing 
 of the sacred birds. 8. Sailors cannot rule the 
 winds. 9. Man is by nature a little world (micro- 
 cosm). 10. The plant lives in the air and has a 
 long name. 11. Many races of men arrange their 
 houses in cities, and have kings and priests who 
 make laws. 12. In the sacred books are many 
 tales about the birth of the gods. 13. The wise 
 
90 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [96 
 
 man writes a letter to the ruler about the nature 
 of the laws. 14. The top of the tree is dead. 
 
 96. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. An acro-stic (a/cpov and 0-7-^09, -ov verse or 
 line) is a series of lines of which the first or last 
 letters, or both, form a word or words. A di-stich 
 (&- representing &($ or Suo) is a couplet, or two 
 lines making complete sense. This prefix di-, 
 meaning double, or two, appears in a number of 
 derivatives, as di-graph, two letters standing for one 
 sound (pA, for example) ; di-morphic or di-morphous, 
 appearing under two forms ; di-phthong (see 68, 9) ; 
 di-lemma (see 110, 8) ; di-(s) syllable (see 110, 8). 
 This prefix must not be confused with the di- from 
 Latin, meaning apart, as in di-gress. 
 
 2. Basil, as a proper name and as the name of a 
 plant, is from fia<ri\evs. Basilisk, a kind of serpent, 
 is from ftao-iKio-Kos little king, the diminutive of 
 y8a<7Xeu9, so called because something on its head 
 slightly resembles a crown. (Compare asterisk, 
 68, 2.) A basilica ^/3aa-i\iKrf) was originally the 
 building in which a judicial officer at Athens, 
 called /3a<Xei;9, held court. This style of building, 
 imitated and somewhat changed at Rome, became 
 the prototype of the early Christian churches, and 
 churches of this form are still called basilicas. 
 
 3. Genetic is the adjective corresponding to gen- 
 esis. Palin-genesis (jrd\iv and yeveo-is ; see 31, 6) 
 is again-birth, re-generation. 
 
96] CONSONANT DECLENSION. 91 
 
 4. The tri-glyph (r/oefc and y\v<f>(D*) is a kind of 
 architectural ornament. 
 
 5. Dynamic (Suz/a/u/eo?) is the adjective from 
 Suz/a/u?. Dynamo is a common contraction for 
 dynamo-electric (rj\eicTpov amber, in which electricity 
 was first observed) machine, so called because in 
 it electricity is generated by force from a steam- 
 engine. 
 
 6. Hieratic (Ve/wrrtAxfc) is the adjective from 
 lepevs. Hiero-glyphics were the sacred writing, or 
 picture-characters, which were used by the Egyp- 
 tian priests, and which have come down to us 
 carved on stone. A hiero-phant (</>atW) is one 
 who shows (make plain, interprets*) the sacred 
 things. Hier-onymus (6W/xa) means having a sacred 
 name ; Jerome is a corruption of the same. 
 
 7. Para-lysis (jrapd-\vcn<^) is a loosing aside, or 
 disabling, the name of a disease which disables 
 the nerves. Paralytic (7rapa\vTifcd^ is the corre- 
 sponding adjective, as analytic is the adjective cor- 
 responding to ana-lysis. Palsy is a corruption of 
 paralysis, intermediate forms being parlesy, palesy. 
 
 8. A necro-logy is an account of the dead. 
 
 9. Neo-logy or neo-logism (i/eo?) is the use of new 
 words. A neo-phyte is one newly planted (yeo- 
 <f>vrov) ; that is, a new convert, or a new member 
 of a religious society. Also from z/eo? we obtain the 
 prefix neo- meaning new, used with a considerable 
 number of words, as neo-platonism (TlXdrwv Plato). 
 
 10. Miso-gamist is from /ucro? and 7^/109; miso- 
 gynist from /jLiaos and yvvr], yvvai/c-os woman. 
 
92 TEE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [96 
 
 11. IToXt? has been put at the end of several 
 modern names of cities, such as Indiana-polls, Anna- 
 polis, in imitation of ancient Nea-polis (literally new 
 town), and others. In Constantino-pie (Kcova-Tavrl- 
 vov-7ro\is Constantine^ s town) and in some others, 
 the last element has been shortened. A Greek 
 metr-o-polis was the mother city (/jitfTrjp mother, Latin 
 mater) which sent out colonies, and to which these 
 colonies looked back as to a common centre. The 
 adjective is metro-politan (TroXir???). 
 
 12. Tactics and tactic (ratcTiicos from rdo-aco') 
 have reference to the arrangement of military or 
 naval forces. Syntax (crvv and ra^) is the arrang- 
 ing together of words in sentences ; syn-tactic is the 
 adjective. 
 
 13. From <j)vo-i<? are derived a number of words 
 which show quite a variety of meaning. Thus 
 physi-cal signifies pertaining to nature; physi-o-logy 
 is the science of nature, but in use the word is re- 
 stricted to one phase of the nature of the human 
 body ; physi-o-gnomy (<yiyvd)crfcc0~) is the art of dis- 
 cerning the nature of a person from his face, and 
 then the word comes to mean the face itself. 
 Again, physics is the science of nature, having about 
 the force which we should expect physiology to 
 have from its etymology. Physic has received the 
 special meaning of the art of healing diseases 
 (whence physician) ; then the word was employed 
 in the sense of medicine, and finally for that par- 
 ticular kind of medicine with which, in old times, 
 people were most familiar. In meta-physics 
 
97] Mi- VERBS: Ti&y/u AND Ai'Soyu. 93 
 
 signifies after (a common use of* /xera with the 
 accusative), since meta-physics was considered as 
 coming after physics in the order of studies. It 
 includes the study of the phenomena of mind, psy- 
 chology (see 51, 8). 
 
 14. An epi-phyte (eW, <f>vrov) is a plant growing 
 on another, without receiving from it any nourish- 
 ment. 
 
 XVII. M^-VERBS: Ti'0i//u AND 
 
 97. A few verbs, some of them common ones, 
 are conjugated in a slightly different manner from 
 the verbs thus far given (with the exception of 
 Svvafjiai). This form of conjugation is called the 
 /u-form, from the last syllable of the present in- 
 dicative active first singular. TlOrjfu put and Sl- 
 give are examples. 
 
 Active. Passive (Middle). 
 
 Sing. 1 ri-6^-fii 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 Dual 2 ri-6e-Tov Ti-6e-<r6ov 
 
 3 ri-Oe-rov Ti-6e-cr6ov 
 
 Plu. 1 Ti-0e-fJLV 
 
 2 TL-0-T 
 
 3 Ti-6e-acri ri-Oe-vrai 
 Inf. ri-Oe-vai 
 
94 THE GREEK tfr ENGLISH. [98 
 
 Active. Passive (Middle). 
 
 Sing. 1 
 
 2 6Y-&0-9 Sl-So-crcu 
 
 3 oY-8G)-o" Si-Bo-rat, 
 
 Dual 2 Si-So-rov 
 
 3 S/-So-TOz/ 
 
 Plu. 1 St-So-fjiev 
 
 2 St-So-re Si-So-(r0e 
 
 3 Si-So-dai Sl-So-vrai 
 
 Inf. St-So-z/a^ 8l-&o-<r0ai, 
 
 a. The root of rldrjfju, is #e-, that of StSw/it is So-; 
 the syllables - in ri-Orj-^i and S^- in Sl-So)-/M, called 
 the reduplication, do not appear in derivatives. 
 (Compare yi-yvco-cr/ca).) The root-syllables 0e- and 
 So- are lengthened to #??- and &a>- in the singular 
 active. 
 
 98. Vocabulary. 
 
 TO avOos, -eo9 flower (anther). 
 
 TO Sepfjia, -TO? s&iw, Azc?^ (derm). 
 
 SiS&fii, give (dose). 
 
 Spdco do, accomplish. 
 
 TO SpafLa, -TO? (1) ^^c?, (2) drama. 
 
 TO 97^09, -609 character (eth-ics). 
 
 Kev6<$y -ij, -6v empty (ceno-taph). 
 
 TO fcepas, Keparos horn (rhino-ceros). 
 
 o fjidvTis, -e&)9 soothsayer, prophet (necro-mancy). 
 
 TO /^e\09, -eo9 song, strain of music (mel-ody). 
 
 -179 memory (mnem-onic). 
 
99] Ui-VERBS: Ti&y/u AND Ai'&/u. &5 
 
 77 pf$, plvo? 1 nose (rhin-o-ceros). 
 
 d Ta<o9, -ov grave, tomb (cenotaph). 
 
 riffrj/jLL put, place. 
 
 77 Oecris, -eo>9 position, putting (thesis). 
 
 ow-ri0ijfJLt put together. 
 
 a putting together, composition 
 
 77 <TVV-Ue(Tl<$, -60)9 , . . x 
 
 ( (syn-thesis). 
 TO <f)dpfjia/cov, -ov drug (pharmacy). 
 
 99. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 1. To Oepfjiov rov r/Kiov <f>vt, ra avffea. 2. 
 rc5 rdcfxt) (epi-taph) rov fiavreco^ <y\v<f)o/jiV ra 
 /jLara rov ovv^Laro^. 3. 77 fu/cpa irals rdcrcrec avOea 
 7rl ro3 Kevq> rd(f)Q) (ceno-taph). 4. o /3ao-i\evs Sv- 
 varai Spdeiv 7ro\\a /cal dya0a Spa/jLara. 5. 7rl rc3 
 TT?? pivo? /cepa? (rhin-o-ceros) eVrt. 6. [77] 
 v@pGt)7roL<? 7ro\\d <f)dp/JLa/ca,, a 6 
 (pharmacist, druggist^ 
 7. rot? 6/070^9 /cal Spa/jLa<ri, rov TraiSbs 
 TO 77^09. 8. 77 a-vvOeGLs ov% 6/jLoid earl rfj ava\v<Ti. 
 9. 6 vavTijs ri6r](TLV vBcop ev TO) icevto SepfjiaTL 
 pd$. 10. ol VTTO/cpiral fyaivovrai e^eiv ev rrj 
 7ro\\d fjbe\ea. 11. ol tepees TiQeacn %pv<rbv VTTO 
 \i0<p ev jcovia rov oil/cov. 12. djaOd fiova \yo/JLev 
 Trepl ro)V vefcpwv. 13. crvvriOe/Jiev pdSa /cal a\\a 
 avOea. 14. & ySao~tXei), ov Svvaaac ftiov rol<$ ve/cpol? 
 StSovai. 
 
 1 Accusative ptva. 
 
96 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [100 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The soothsayer sells drugs [which are] like 
 dead flowers. 2. The sun gives to the skin of 
 the sailor's nose the color of a rose. 3. A good 
 character is shown by good deeds. 4. The best 
 actors have a good memory. 5. The king who 
 makes (riO^^i) the laws of the people cannot 
 make (nroieai) the songs. 6. Nature gives horns 
 to the she-goat and a thick (jra^ii) hide (pachy- 
 derm) to the hippopotamus. 7. The first flowers 
 of the season are put upon the graves of the dead. 
 8. Can you tell the position of the cities which 
 are sending their citizens to war ? 9. The peda- 
 gogue is writing a book about the composition of 
 words. 10. The priest is examining the origin of 
 the sacred songs. 11. Young orators are able to 
 put together many words which have little force. 
 
 12. The gods appear to the soothsayer alone. 
 
 13. A beautiful deed is like a light which can be 
 seen afar. 
 
 100. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. Anth-o-logy is properly a collection of flowers ; 
 for the primary meaning of \eyco, from which 
 the last part is derived, is gather. (^^K-\KTL/CO<; 
 eclectic, from e and Xeyw, shows the same force 
 of the verb.) But anth-ology is generally used in 
 a figurative sense, to denote a collection of choice 
 passages from authors, especially from poets. Heli- 
 anthus (rpuo?) is the scientific name for sun-flower. 
 
100] Mi-VERBS: TMrjfjii, AND A/Soyu. 97 
 
 2. Epi-dermis (eW and 8e/>/ia), the scientific 
 word for the outer skin, has come into common 
 use. Hypo-dermis, the under skin (UTTO), is mostly 
 confined to scientific writing and speech, although 
 the adjective hypo-dermic has become common from 
 the practice of giving certain remedies by injec- 
 tion under the skin. The element hypo- is used in 
 many scientific terms in the opposite sense to that 
 of hyper- (see 46, 6, and note that the related Latin 
 prefix sub- is in like manner contrasted with 
 super-). The adjective pachy-dermatous (?ra^u 
 thick) preserves the -ar- of Sepfiar-. Taxi-dermy is 
 the art of preparing skins so as to preserve their 
 natural appearance. 
 
 3. Dose is our remnant of So'o-i?, -eo>9 a giving, 
 from BiBcofiL. Anti-dote (avri-Sorov) is a medicine 
 given against that is, to counteract some effect. 
 An-ec-dote is from dv-ex-Sorov. The plural dv-etc- 
 Sora (literally things not given out or published) 
 was the name 'given by Procopius [a Byzantine 
 writer of the sixth century A.D.] to the unpub- 
 lished memoirs of the emperor Justinian, which 
 consisted chiefly of tales of the private life of the 
 court; whence the application of the name to 
 short stories or particulars. 9 
 
 4. A drastic (Spao-ri/cds from Spdco) remedy is 
 an active, vigorous one. The r of the stem Spdpar- 
 appears in dramatic, dramatist, and in dramat-urgy 
 (SpdjAarovpytd for Spdfj.aT-o-p<yid, the second part 
 being from epyov) drama-making, or the art of 
 writing and representing plays. 
 
98 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [100 
 
 5. An earlier meaning of 97^09 is custom, habit; 
 hence, that body of habits and usages which make 
 up character or morals. (In the same way Latin 
 mos, moris, custom, has given us moral.*) From 
 rjdos in the latter sense we have ethic, ethical, per- 
 taining to morals, and ethics, the science of morals. 
 
 6. Besides rhin-o-ceros (plv-o-Kepco? nose-horn) 
 /ee/oce>5 gives us also mono-ceros (/jLovo-Kepcos) unicorn 
 (Latin unus, one, and cornu, horn). 
 
 7. From p,dvri<s we have the adjective mantic 
 {fjiavTiKos), and also the element -mancy ^avreia), 
 divination, in chir-o-mancy, divination by examin- 
 ing the hand (%e//o), necro-mancy, divination by 
 consulting the dead (veicpo<i), pyr-o-mancy, by in- 
 terpreting the appearance of a fire (irvp), and 
 biblio-mancy, by selecting hap-hazard a passage of 
 the Bible (Pij3\iov). The corresponding adjec- 
 tives are necro-mantic, etc. 
 
 8. MeXos (which refers to the music, while cJS^ 
 refers more to the words of a song) appears in 
 melody (see 31, 7) and in mel-o-drama, song-play, or 
 play interspersed with music. 
 
 9. From fJLvtffjw) is derived the adjective /jLvrf^cov 
 mindful, which gives our word mnemonic, pertain- 
 ing to memory, and mnemonics, a system of artificial 
 aids to memory. A-mnesty (a-^v^cfTeia, alpha priva- 
 tive ; see 60, 3, 5) is a legal lack of memory, that 
 is, a general pardon for past offences in time of 
 war. 
 
 10. a. The root 0e- is the central element of a 
 number of important derivatives. Thesis has the 
 
100] Mi- VERBS: Tt%u AND A/S<w/u. 99 
 
 figurative meaning of a position taken and main- 
 tained in argument. (Note the derivation of posi- 
 tion from Latin positio, from pono, to place.) Anti- 
 thesis (aim) is op-position, contrast; par-en-thesis 
 (jrapd, ev) is literally a putting in beside, then 
 something put in beside, as a side or subordinate 
 matter; hypo-thesis (UTTO) is under-putting, a sup- 
 position (Latin sub, under) ; syn-thesis, putting 
 together, is often contrasted with ana-lysis, taking 
 apart. The corresponding adjectives are anti-thetic 
 (azm-0e/eo9), par-en-thetic, etc., to each of which 
 -al is often added. Further, epi-thet (eW-0eroz/) is 
 a descriptive word put on (figuratively) to a person 
 or thing. 
 
 b. Again, dtjKrj is a case or chest in which to put 
 things ; an apo-thecary (airo) was originally so 
 called because he has his drugs put away in cases; 
 biblio-theke (j3ij3\lov), book-case, is an old word for 
 library. Hypo-thecate is a legal term which goes 
 back to the elements VTTO and Orj/cq. Hence re- 
 hypothecate. 
 
 c. A theme (Oepa, -TO?) is primarily a subject 
 laid down, or proposed for discussion ; from this 
 are derived the other uses of the word. The adjec- 
 tive thematic retains the -ar- of the stem. Finally, 
 avddeiJia, -TO? (ava here meaning up) was originally 
 anything put up in a temple, that is, offered or 
 devoted to a god. Later, however, the form avd- 
 OTJ/JLO, was used in this sense, and avd-de/jLa meant 
 only what was devoted to an evil power. Hence 
 ana-themat-ize (ttya-0e//,aT/a>) signifies to devote to 
 
100 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [101 
 
 evil, to curse solemnly ; and ana-thema is not only 
 the person thus cursed, but also the curse itself, 
 which was formerly a solemn ceremony of the 
 church. 
 
 11. Pharmaco-poeia (<f>ap/jLa/co-7roud) signifies a 
 book describing drug-making, or the preparation of 
 medicines. 
 
 XVIII. Mt- VERBS : r/ Icm7/u AND 
 
 101. The root of iorrrj/ja set up, cause to stand, is 
 
 o-ra-, the same root which appears in Latin sta-re 
 
 and English stand. The present indicative and 
 infinitive are as follows : 
 
 Active. Passive (Middle). 
 
 Sing. 1 I-O-TVJ-JM i-crra-fjiai, 
 
 2 2-<7T?7-9 i-o-ra-aai, 
 3 
 
 Dual 2 i-(TTa-TOV 
 
 3 i-ara-TOV i-crra-crOov 
 
 Plu. 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 (i-a-rd-da-i) i-ara-vrac 
 
 l-crrdo'L 
 
 Inf. i-crrd-vat, 
 
 a. The syllable /- (originally <-) is a reduplica- 
 tion, like TI- in rLO^^i. (Latin sisto corresponds, 
 in formation and meaning, to r<7T?7/u.) The mean- 
 ing stand is given to certain other tenses of the 
 
103] Mi-VERBS : f/ lo-rrjfjLi JND lie paw* fit. 101 
 
 verb, which we shall not use here, and most of the 
 derivatives show this meaning. 
 
 102. The root of Kepavvvpi mix is Kepa-, which is 
 shortened to Kpd-, in derivatives. The syllable 
 -vvv-, -vvv-, is a suffix used to form the stem of the 
 present tense. 
 
 Active. Passive ( Middle) . 
 
 Sing. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 Kepd-vvv-s 
 Kepd-vvv-cri 
 
 Kepd-vvv-aaL 
 Kepd-vvv-rat, 
 
 Dual 2 
 3 
 
 Kepd-vvv-TOV 
 Kepd-vvv-TOV 
 
 Kepd-vvv-crOov 
 Kepd-vvv-aOov 
 
 Plu. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 Kepd-vvv-fJiev 
 Kepd-vvv-Te 
 fcepa-vvv-do'L 
 
 Kepd-vvv-a-6e 
 Kepd-vvv-vTai 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Kepa-vvv-vai 
 
 Kepd-vvv-aOai 
 
 103. Vocabulary. 
 
 aipeo) seize, grasp. 
 
 alpeofjiai (middle) choose. 
 
 -tj, -ov able to choose (heretic). 
 (di . eresis> 
 
 aipco) 
 Sca-\eyofjLat y dep., converse (dia-lect). 
 
 !in compounds only, with the 
 force of hard or bad; op- 
 posed to v (dys-pepsia). 
 TO %<pov, -ov animal (zoo-logy), 
 
IN ENGLISH. [104 
 
 -a, -ov one's own, private (idiom). 
 
 set up, cause to stand (stat-ic). 
 fcepdvvv/jii mix. 
 
 o fcpdrijp, -77/009 mixing-bowl (crater). 
 
 6>aXo ; 9, -77, -ov even, level (an-omalous). 
 
 digest (dys-pep-sia). 
 form, mould (plas-tic). 
 'cut (tome). 
 (f>pdo) make known, tell (phrase). 
 
 104, Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 1. f O plvoKepax; (see 100, 6) Svvarai alpeetv ra 
 a\\a %a)a KOI riOevau ev rc3 Trora/zft). 2. 6 ie 
 icrrrjo-t, Kevov Kparrjpa VTTO rc3 Sez^S/ow. 3. 
 TO, Qdp/jLa/ca. 4. eVt rfj o/jia\fj <yfj lara/JLev ol/covs. 
 5. o Trafc Kepdvvvo-i yrjv /cat vBcop /cal vrXacrcre^ /ca\as 
 T&V (pa)v. 6. 6 pl/cpos Tecopytos (see 57, 4) 
 rb SevSpov, d\\d (but) ov Svvarai T^evSo? 
 . 7. Svvacrai fypd^eiv rd ovvfjuara rwv av6e<ov 
 a dva\vei<$ ; 8. dvOpcoTroi ev TreTrrovcn (en-peptic) 
 rrjv crdp/ca (pcov /cal (f>vrd. 9. o /cpvcrTaX\,os ev rw 
 ISlep 7rapa$el<7G) rov f3aai\ea><$ o/i-aXo? ean. 10. ol 
 6eol bvvavrai 7T\dcrcriv vroXXa yevea q>cov. 11. ol 
 a7rd(7TO\oi St,a\eyovrai, avv TO?? TroXtrat? Trepl rov 
 7ro\/jiov. 12. alpeofieOa dyadov 77^09 dvrl r^9 ftao-i- 
 Xe&)9 &vvd/JL(t)<;. 13. rt Kepdvvvrai ev rc3 Kparrjpi ; 
 14. ot 0eol &8oa<rt TroXXa ro6? Tra^crt TWI/ dv- 
 
105] Mi-VEBBS: "IcrTrj/Jii AND Kepdwv/M. 103 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. The solitary dynast converses with the priest, 
 and makes-known his private feelings (idio-pathic). 
 2. The young [man] cannot mould an image of a 
 hippopotamus. 3. The poets make-known the 
 character and deeds of the ancients. 4. They 
 mix drugs in a little mixing-bowl. 5. The animal 
 is able to eat and digest many kinds of plants. 
 6. They are setting up a new machine, which cuts 
 grass. 7. It is best to choose the level road. 
 8. In time we learn to choose the good instead of 
 the bad. 9. The sailor's brother seizes and throws 
 the measuring-rod. 10. The leaders of the people 
 cannot divide the city. 11. To converse with 
 others is not given to many animals. 12. A level 
 road leads to the river. 13. He chooses the best 
 place in the theatre, from which he can see the 
 drama well. 
 
 105. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. Di-eresis or di-aeresis (Si-aipeaw, -eews), liter- 
 ally a taking apart, shows the active signification 
 of alpeco. From alpeco in its middle sense we have 
 heresy (aspect,?, -ew?), a choosing, and heretic. The 
 term heretic was originally given to people who did 
 not accept the doctrines of the church, but chose 
 their own beliefs; and heresy was a belief thus 
 chosen. 
 
 2. From Sm-Xeyo/^at (Sm and \eyco, in which the 
 force of Bid is not clear) we obtain dia-lect ( 
 
104 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [105 
 
 Xe/cro9, -on conversation, way of talking}, and dia- 
 logue (Sm-Xo709). Dia-lectics was first used of a 
 conversational form of argument and investigation. 
 
 3. A zoo-phyte (eooz>, fyvrov) is an animal-plant ; 
 that is, an animal very much like a plant. An epi- 
 zootic disease is one which prevails among animals 
 (eVl rofc &)(H5) as an epi-demic (see 74, 1) among 
 human beings. The zodiac (faSia/cds, an adjective 
 formed from %q>iov, the diminutive of eSoi/), that 
 imaginary belt of the sky through which the sun 
 seems to move, contains the twelve constellations, 
 which are fancied to resemble various animals. 
 
 4. Idiom (lia>p.a y -ro9) denotes, first one's own 
 peculiar use of language ; then a mode of expres- 
 sion which is peculiar to a particular language. 
 Idiomatic retains -ar- of the stem. Idiot (iSicoTrjs, 
 -ov) was formerly used in the Greek sense of a 
 private person, as distinguished from one in public 
 station. Then it came to mean a common, unedu- 
 cated, or simple person, 'and finally one who has 
 not the ordinary degree of intelligence. 
 
 5. From the root of to-T7?/u we have static (<rra- 
 TIKOS) and statics. A compound of statics is hydr-o- 
 statics (#&*)/)), the science which has to do with the 
 laws of pressure and equilibrium of water and sim- 
 ilar liquids. An apo-state (aTro-o-raT?;?) is one who 
 stands off from, or deserts, his former faith or party. 
 Apo-stasy (aTro-o-ra^^) is the act of so deserting. 
 Ec-stasy (e/e-o-racw), a standing out, is an extreme 
 state of emotion, in which, as we say, one is " be- 
 side himself " ; ec-static is the adjective. Sy-stem 
 
105] Mi-VERBS : "lo-TV/M AND Kepavvvpi. 105 
 
 -TO?, from <rvv and fa'Trjfii) denotes the 
 standing together of things, in an orderly manner; 
 systematic is the adjective, and systematize the verb. 
 (Many English words containing the root sta are 
 from Latin.) 
 
 6. The Greek /cpdrtfp was a large bowl in which 
 the wine was mixed with water before being drunk ; 
 the crater of a volcano is so named from its resem- 
 blance in shape. From i&o?, avv, and Kpa<ri<; mix- 
 ture was formed ISio-a-vy-icpdcrid idio-syn-crasy, one's 
 own peculiar mixture of qualities ; idio-crasy is 
 rarely used in the same sense. 
 
 7. From opa\b$ and dv- privative (see 60, 3, 5), 
 we have an-omalous (dv-cl)fjLa\o$ with an irregular 
 lengthening of o to o>), irregular, and ano-maly 
 (av-cofjLa\La), irregularity. 
 
 8. Eii-peptic and eu-pepsia are contrasted with 
 dys-peptic, (Sucr- and TreTrro)) digesting ill, and dys- 
 pepsia, bad digestion. 
 
 9. From 7rXao-<7<*> we obtain plaster (e/^-TrXao-- 
 rpov), and also plastic (TrXacrr^oV), moulding, or 
 capable of being moulded, or pertaining to moulding 
 or fashioning. 
 
 10. The root of refivco is re/-t-, which appears in 
 English derivatives in the form TO^-, with the 
 common change of e to o. A tome (TO/W, -oi/) is 
 a part of a work cut from the rest, hence a volume. 
 An a-tom (a-ro/io?, alpha privative') is a particle so 
 small that it cannot be cut in two, an indivisible par- 
 ticle. Ana-tomy is primarily the cutting up (ava- 
 
 ?), dissection of a body ; then it came to mean 
 
106 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [107 
 
 the structure of a body, as learned by dissection. 
 Zoo-tomy is the anatomy of animals. An epi-tome 
 (eV^-ro/x?;) is a brief summary of a book, the result 
 of cutting out all but the principal statements. 
 The Greek word for in-sect (Latin in and seco, 
 cuf) is ev-To/jiov, because so many insects, like the 
 wasp and spider, are cut into so as to be almost 
 divided. Hence the first element of entomo-logy. 
 
 11. Phrase is our form of (frpdais speaking, from 
 (ppd^co. Compounds are phrase-o-logy, para-phrase 
 (jrapd), and peri-phrasis (jrepi), with the adjective 
 peri-phrastic. (Compare circum-locution from Latin 
 circum and loquor.^) 
 
 XIX. THE VEKB <E>?7/u; THE ADJECTIVE Ha?. 
 
 106. The conjugation of fyripi say, affirm, is nearly 
 like that of lo-rrj/Ai in the present active ; but the 
 present indicative of fy^^i is enclitic (see 55), ex- 
 cept in the second person singular, fyfo ; hence it 
 follows the rules in 55, a and b, in regard to ac- 
 cent, and should not be placed at the beginning of 
 a sentence. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plu. 
 
 2 (779 <j)a-rdv <f>a~T 
 
 3 tyrf-ai fya-rov <j)d<7l 
 
 Inf. 
 
 107. The adjective ?ra9 all (sometimes, in the 
 singular, every} is of the third declension in the 
 
108] THE VEEB <f>r)fjil ; THE ADJECTIVE TTCLS. 107 
 
 masculine and neuter, and of the first declension 
 in the feminine. It has some irregularities of ac- 
 cent, and is therefore given in full. 
 
 Sing. JN. 
 
 7TC19 
 
 Tracra ircuv 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 Traz/Tos 
 
 TTCLVTl 
 
 Trdvra 
 
 Tracnjs Travros 
 Tracrrj TTCLVTI 
 ircLo'dV Trciv 
 
 V. 
 
 TTCLV 
 
 Trdara irdv 
 
 DualN.A.V. 
 
 irdvre 
 
 TTddCL 7TCLVTC 
 
 G.D. 
 
 irdvroi 
 
 v Tracraw irdmoiv 
 
 Plu. N.V. 
 
 Trai/res 
 
 r Trdcrai, Trdvra 
 
 G. 
 
 TrdvTcov Trdcrwv TrdvTcov 
 
 D. 
 
 Trda-L 
 
 j. ~ 
 
 TTCLddl^ TTddi 
 
 A. 
 
 TTaVTCH 
 
 ? 7rao~a9 Trdvra 
 
 
 108. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 i] dyopa, -9 
 So/eel (3rd sing 
 
 .of , 
 
 assembly (phantasm-agor-ia}. 
 pain (neur-alg-ia). 
 weight (baro-meter). 
 teach (didac-tic). 
 
 it seems, seems true. 
 
 TO Soy/la, -TO 9 
 fcaa> (root 
 
 opinion (what seems true' 
 dogma). 
 
 burn. 
 
 burning, caustic. 
 
 conceal (crypt). 
 \a/jL/3dvco (root Xa/3-) take (syl-lab-le). 
 p,av6dva> (root pad-) learn (philo-math). 
 
 /cavern /cos, -77, -ov 
 
108 THE GEEEK IN ENGLISH. [109 
 
 TO /jidOrj/jia, -TO? lesson (mathematics). 
 
 fjivco shut the eyes. 
 
 TO fjLvarrjpiov, -ov secret doctrine, mystery. 
 
 fjLvo-Ti/cds, -T], -bv secret, mystic. 
 
 0X05, -rj, -ov whole (holo-caust). 
 
 Tra?, iraa-a, Trdv all, every (pan-orama). 
 
 r) irelpa, -a? attempt, trial (em-pir-ic). 
 
 o Treipartfs, -ov pirate. 
 
 Trpaa-ao) accomplish (prac-tical). 
 
 TO 7rpa<y/jLa, -TO? deed, affair (pragmat-ic). 
 
 s ptit (schism). 
 
 say, affirm (eu-phe-mism). 
 
 109. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 1. TV <f>r)s TO ToO fwou /3apo? elvai ^ (to be) ; 
 2. ev rfj ayopa T&V iroXirwv ol ptfropes pavQavovai 
 To3 Stffjiq). 3. Svvarai 6 Trpecr/Bvrepos SiSd- 
 Trdvra ra /jLVcrrrfpia rwv 6e&v ; 4. TO?? eV 
 cr%o\f) fjiaOrf/JLao-t, TrXdcrcrovrat, ol TraZSe?. 5. rj 
 r) cro<j>id r&v ap^alcov OVK ere (longer) xpv- 
 6. ol irdXlrai <f>pdov(ri, ra S6<y/j,ara TV)? 
 T. rj Treipa SiSd(r/ci rl SwdpeOa irpacro-ew. 
 8. ol ireiparal a7ro-T p^vovcn (CLTTO- = off) ra$ K<f)a- 
 Xa? TrdvTwv TWV %<pcov a \a/ji/3dvov(ri. 9. ov Sv- 
 vao~6e cr^i^eiv TO SevSpov. 10. vrai/Te? ol vra^Se? 
 fiavOdvovcn TO 0X01^ /jidOrj/jia. 11. TO Kavantcov 
 Oeppov rov r)\lov SiSoxTiv aX^ea. 12. o ptfrcop fyrjcrl 
 
 1 The verb <f>r)p,L, like verbs of saying in Latin, takes the in- 
 finitive, with or without a subject-accusative, as its object. 
 
110] THE VEEE fapl ; THE ADJECTIVE Tra?. 109 
 
 rov Sfj/jiov elvai, crocfrbv KCLI ayaddv. 13. Treipdowrcu 
 Kaew rd SevSpa. 14. o fj\ios icaei, TO Bepfia rov veov 
 dffXrjrov. 15. ra i^va-Tripta, a ol Trpeafivrepoi, tcpv- 
 TreipdovTdi, Trdvra 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 1. They conceal the nature of the drugs which 
 they give. 2. The fire splits all the stones and 
 burns all the plants. 3. The whole affair is secret. 
 4. Pain teaches many lessons. 5. Can you tell in 
 the assembly of the people the secret-doctrines 
 which the priests teach ? 6. The pirate takes all 
 the gold in the city. 7. Caustic words give pain. 
 8. The king conceals the attempt of the sooth- 
 sayers. 9. The air in the lungs has not much 
 weight. 10. We learn from ancient books the 
 opinions of the ancients about nature. 11. The 
 wise affirm that the good citizen rules (inf.) his 
 own feelings, and gives much to others. 12. It is 
 best to learn, not many [things], but much about 
 a few things. 13. What are you trying to accom- 
 plish? 14. The image which the citizens are 
 trying to set up is a work of much skill. 
 
 110. Notes on Derivatives. 
 
 1. Phantasm-agoria (^ai/racr/^a, 74, 11, and ayopa) 
 denotes an assemblage of phantasms or images. In 
 pan-egyric we have a derivative of a dialectic form 
 of dyopa. A 7rav-tfryvpi$ was an assemblage of all 
 the people, as at the great Olympic games ; and a 
 
110 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [110 
 
 Trav-rjyvpi/cbs \6<yo$ was an oration delivered at 
 such an assembly. As such orations were often 
 in praise of some city or person, the term came to 
 mean a eulogy. 
 
 2. From a\<yo$ is derived the last part of cephal- 
 algia (see 31, 5) and neur-algia (TO vevpov nerve). 
 
 3. In bary-tone the y stands for v of /3a/ou? heavy, 
 which is plainly related to /3apo9- The word is 
 also spelled baritone, (For tone see mono-tone, 68, 
 9.) The baro-meter is an instrument for measuring 
 the weight of the atmosphere. 
 
 4. Didactic (StSa/cr^/co?, from &Sa<7/c&>, the root 
 of which is StSa/c-) means instructive. 
 
 5. Ao7//,a sometimes has the same meaning as 
 Soa; but the English dogma has taken on the 
 sense of an accepted opinion, or one which is put 
 forth as unquestionably true. Hence dogmatic 
 and dogmatize. 
 
 6. The verb /caw has lost the v which is shown 
 by other forms to belong to the root. Cautery 
 (/cavrrjpiov a branding-iron) is the act of burning 
 or searing in surgery. Cauterize is the verb. 
 
 7. Apo-crypha (ajrb'icpvfya, from aTro-Kpvirrfi)) 
 signifies properly hidden away ; then by a curious 
 transfer the word was applied to those books of 
 the Bible which were not recognized as inspired. 
 
 8. Syl-lable is from o-v\-\a/3rj (<rvv and \ap- 
 /3dva)), what is taken together, that is, pronounced 
 with one impulse of the voice. In di-(s)syllable 
 (for di- see 96, 1) the extra s was originally due 
 to a blunder, like many other peculiarities of our 
 
lid] THE VERB <f>rifjii; TttE ADJECTIVE TTUS. Ill 
 
 spelling. Tri-syllable has for its first element the 
 stem of rpefc. Syl-labus, of the same etymology 
 with syl-lable, denotes an abstract or compendium. 
 In epi-lepsy (literally, an attack, seizure), the root 
 Xa/3- appears in the slightly different form \TJTT-. 
 The root is still farther changed in di-lemma (St- 
 \rjfji /jia). This word was originally the technical 
 name of a peculiar form of argument, but now is 
 often used for a difficult situation, in which any 
 course of action which may be chosen seems likely 
 to lead to further difficulty. The force of the 
 word may be roughly given as double-catch; for 
 di- see 96, 1. 
 
 9. In mathematics the meaning of fjLadtjfjLara has 
 been restricted to a particular branch of learning. 
 A philo-math (</Xo9) is one who is fond of learning. 
 
 10. Holo-caust (0X09 and fcavo-rds from KOW) is 
 used of sacrifices which were wholly burned. The 
 phrase KaO' o\ov (for Kara oXou) is used in an 
 adverbial sense, wholly ; from this was formed the 
 adjective Ka6o\uc6<s universal, general ; hence our 
 word catholic. 
 
 11. IIa9 appears in English in the forms pant- 
 and pan-. Thus, pant-o-mime (see 78, 4), pant-o- 
 phagous (fayeiv), equivalent to omni-vorous, from 
 Latin. Fan-demonium (Sa//4&>z/) is the place of all 
 demons ; pan-theon (irav-Oelov, #609), a temple of all 
 gods; pan-theism, the doctrine that the universe, 
 taken as a whole, is Grod ; pan-orama (6pa), a com- 
 plete view ; pan-acea (nav-d/ceia, from aiceo^ai to 
 cure), a cure-all; pan-oply (jrav-oTrKia, from OTT\OV 
 
112 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. [110. 
 
 armor), complete armor. From frequent use in 
 these and similar words, the syllable pan- has come 
 to be used freely with a like meaning in forming 
 new compounds, often when the second part is 
 not Greek, as in pan-evangelical, ^n-Slavism. Dia- 
 pason is an abbreviation of Sia Tracr&v %op$a>v (jj 
 Xop&rj the string of a lyre, whence our chord) ; it 
 means, therefore, the octave, or the entire scale. 
 
 12. An em-piric is one whose knowledge or skill 
 is gained only in trial or experiment (eV ireLpa), 
 and is not founded on scientific principles. A 
 pirate makes hostile attempts or attacks on others ; 
 piracy is shortened from Treipareia. 
 
 13. From Trpaao-co we have practical (nrpaicTiKo^, 
 practice, and praxis (jirpa^i^), a technical term 
 having one of the meanings of practice ; pragmatic 
 shows the stem of 7rpay/j,a. 
 
 14. A schism (a^iv^a, -TO?, from a-^i^ai) is a 
 " split," or division, in a party or organization ; 
 hence schismatic, 
 
 15. From eft-fa /JLOS well-speaking (et> and </>??/<<</) 
 we have eu-phemism, eu-phemistic. A Trpo-far^ 
 is one who speaks for another (TT/OO, like Latin pro, 
 often having the meaning for) ; pro-phet, one who 
 speaks for, or in place of, God ; that is, one who is 
 inspired by God and declares his will. Hence 
 pro-phetic, pro-phecy, and pro-phesy. Hetero-phemy 
 (ere/jo?) is a euphemistic word, of recent forma- 
 tion, for false-speaking. 
 
PAET II. 
 THE GKEEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 111. Nearly all the verbs hitherto given are in the pres- 
 ent indicative or infinitive. In learning the rest of the verb 
 it will be a great help to observe the following facts. 
 
 a. Although the forms of the verb are many, the elements 
 of which they are made up are few, each having a definite 
 meaning ; and these elements can usually be clearly distin- 
 guished. For example, He will be sent for is a sentence 
 made up of five short words ; it is all expressed' in Greek by 
 one verb, /xeTa-Tre/x^-^-o-e-rai, but that verb is made up of 
 five elements, each of which is just as distinct in form and 
 meaning as the separate English words. Yet we are so 
 accustomed, in English, to distributing the meaning over 
 several short words, that we are apt to overlook the separate 
 elements when grouped in a single word, even when the 
 total number of syllables is the same. It is absolutely neces- 
 sary, therefore, to gain, as early as possible, the habit of catching 
 the full meaning of every syllable as it is read or spoken. In- 
 deed, this remark, though it applies especially to the Greek 
 verb, applies also to every part- of any foreign language. 
 Every element of every word conveys an idea, or helps to 
 convey an idea. To learn a language one must become so 
 familiar with its elements that the sign shall always call up 
 the idea which it stands for, 
 
 115 
 
116 THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON. [112 
 
 b. It is not convenient to distinguish different conjuga- 
 tions, as in Latin, but only different ways of forming the 
 several tenses. In the present tense we have seen some verbs 
 conjugated like y/oa<o>, called co-verbs, others conjugated 
 like riOrjfJii, called /xt-verbs ; but these names apply properly 
 only to a part of the verb, and there are different ways of 
 forming both /it-presents and w-presents. So in other tenses 
 we shall find formations distinguished as " first " and " sec- 
 ond," and a few verbs have a formation called the "/u- 
 aorist," because of a certain likeness to the /xt-present. All 
 the tense-formations of any verb are shown by the " princi- 
 pal parts" (see 150). 
 
 c. The verb will first be taken up by modes, beginning 
 with the indicative, the uses of which are in general the 
 same as in Latin and English. 
 
 PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AORIST TENSES. 
 
 112. In the indicative mode there are seven 
 tenses : the present, imperfect, aorist, perfect, plu- 
 perfect, future, and future perfect. The tenses 
 most used are the present, imperfect, and aorist; 
 these will therefore be described first. 
 
 113. a. The present tense is used like the same 
 tense in English. 
 
 Most English verbs really have two forms of the present, 
 the simple present, as, He writes, and the compound present, 
 as, He is writing. The former denotes an act simply as pres- 
 ent, the latter denotes an act as going on in the present. 
 The latter active form must not be confused with the com- 
 pound present passive, as, It is written. All these forms are 
 expressed in Greek by the present, active or passive as the 
 
114] PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AORIST. 117 
 
 case may be, ypa<ci and ypa<ercu. In this case we make a 
 distinction in English which Greek does not express. 
 
 b. The imperfect, as in Latin, represents the 
 action as going on in past time. 
 
 It often corresponds to the English compound imper- 
 fect, as, He was writing. It was being written; it sometimes 
 implies repetition of the action, as in Latin. Thus He was 
 writing and He used to write are both expressed by the im- 
 perfect active 2ypa<e ; It was being written and It used to be 
 written by the imperfect passive cypa^ero. 
 
 c. The aorist, 1 in the indicative mode, represents 
 an act simply as occurring in past time. 
 
 This corresponds to the English simple past tense, as, 
 He wrote cypai/K, It was written cypa<?;. These uses must 
 not be confused with those of the imperfect. Note carefully 
 the English phrases by which we habitually make the same 
 distinction that is made in Greek by means of these tenses. 
 The only difference is that we use various groups of short 
 words where the Greeks used longer single words slightly 
 varied in form. 
 
 114. The fu-formation is in some respects sim- 
 pler than the other. For comparison io-rrj^ set 
 up, station, and \va) loose are given in the present, 
 imperfect, and first aorist active. 
 
 In all paradigms the elements will be separated, as far as 
 possible, by hyphens. If not so separated, this means that 
 
 1 From the Greek adpwrros indefinite (a privative and 
 6pio> define). We shall see later that the term is more suit- 
 able to other modes than to the indicative, 
 
118 
 
 THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [115 
 
 by some change the elements have been so closely united 
 that a mark of separation might lead to misunderstanding. 
 
 115. 
 
 Present System. 
 
 First Aor. Syst. 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 
 
 / set or am set- I was setting, 
 ting, etc. etc. 
 
 I set or stationed, 
 etc., / did set, did 
 I set, etc. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 f/ 
 
 tr 
 
 l-CTTt}-(ri 
 
 i'-cmj-v 
 
 f-CTT?;-? 
 
 f-a-rrj 
 
 e-crrrj-cra 
 
 V 
 
 e-CTTrj-cre 
 
 D. 2 
 
 V 
 
 f-crra-TOV 
 
 e-o-rfo-a-roi/ 
 
 3 
 
 i-CTTa-TOV 
 
 T-ard-rrjv 
 
 e-cmj-crd'Trjv 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 
 1-ffTOr/JLeV 
 
 i-crra-re 
 
 T-crra-fjiev 
 f-crra-re 
 
 ~(7T11~(J'CL~/JiV 
 
 > / 
 ~G'T11~G'CL'~T 
 
 3 
 
 (t-o-ra-acrt 
 
 ) f-crra-crav 
 
 e-arrj-aa-v 
 
 
 l-crrdcn 
 
 
 
 
 I loose, etc. 
 
 I was loosing, etc. 
 
 I loosed, etc. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 \v-co 
 
 e-\v-o-v 
 
 -\,v-(ra 
 
 2 
 
 \v-ex 
 
 e-Xu-e-9 
 
 ~\ l V~(7Ct~^ 
 
 3 
 
 \v-ei 
 
 e-Xu-e 
 
 6~Xu~(7"6 
 
 D. 2 
 
 \v-e-rov 
 
 \-V--TOV 
 
 6~Xu~O"tt"TOl^ 
 
 3 
 
 \v-e-rov 
 
 e'-Xu-e-TT/z/ 
 
 ~Xl'"O"l"T77 1/ 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 . 
 
 \V-0-fJLV 
 
 \v--re 
 
 -\V~0-/JiV 
 
 -Xu-e-re 
 
 e-Xu-cra-re 
 
 3 
 
 \V-OVCTL 
 
 <!-\V-0- V 
 
 e-\v-cra-v 
 
116] PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AORIST. 119 
 
 NOTE. In reciting paradigms, a practice much followed in 
 German schools will be found useful for distinguishing accents. 
 A slight motion of the forefinger, as if one were writing the 
 accent in the air, will show whether one has in mind the acute 
 or the circumflex while pronouncing the forms; at the same 
 time, the stress of voice indicates on which syllable the accent 
 stands. It saves trouble in the end to take pains to pronounce 
 as accurately as possible, making long vowels long, short vowels 
 short, and doubling the consonants if they are doubled (as in 
 English coolly, home-made, fineness, fire-red, mis-step, hop-pole, 
 cat- tail, sack-cloth). 
 
 116. a. Comparison of the paradigms shows that in each 
 verb one element appears in all forms, namely, erra- or o-rrj- 
 in lo-Trjfu and Xv- in Avco. This element is called the verb- 
 stem, or more simply, theme; it contains the fundamental 
 idea of the word. Thus ora-, o-rrj- expresses the simple idea 
 of setting up or stationing, and \v- the simple idea of loosing ; 
 the other elements, added to this, indicate various modifica- 
 tions, as of tense, voice, person, etc. We have seen, for 
 instance, that the suffix -<n- added to each of these themes 
 in the short form makes a noun-stem denoting the action: 
 Av'-o-i-s (94) and (d7ro)-<rra-ai-s (105, 5). In the parts here 
 given \v- remains unchanged, having the vowel long through- 
 out, though in Au'-cro it is short ; but crra- is lengthened to 
 cm/- in the present and imperfect singular active, and in the 
 aorist throughout. The lengthening in the present singular 
 has also been illustrated in ri-Orj-fu and 8i-8o>-/u (97). A 
 theme ending in a vowel is called, for brevity, a vowel 
 theme. 
 
 b. In the present ora-, orr/- is preceded by the present 
 reduplication I- (originally (n-), a formation which is also 
 illustrated by ri-Orj-^i and 8i-S<o-/u (97), and by yi-yvw-<r/co> 
 (51, 2) and yyv-o-/>uxi (89). Only a few of the oldest o>- 
 and ^u-verbs take this present reduplication; whatever 
 
120 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [116 
 
 special meaning it had originally has disappeared. Note 
 that the vowel of the present reduplication is always t. 
 
 c. In both imperfect and aorist of Avo> the syllable e- is 
 prefixed to the theme; in TorT/fii the aorist has the same 
 prefix, but the imperfect lengthens the initial I- of the pres- 
 ent to I-. This lengthening of the initial vowel of the pres- 
 ent is called the temporal augment, the prefixed c- is called 
 the syllabic augment, since one increases the time of a syllable 
 and the other increases the number of syllables of the verb. 
 The two forms of the augment have the same force, indi- 
 cating past time ; they belong, therefore, to verb forms that 
 denote past time ; that is, to the indicative imperfect, aor- 
 ist, and pluperfect. 
 
 d. In the aorist of both verbs the theme is followed by 
 the syllable -era- (in the third singular -ore-) ; this is the tense 
 suffix denoting the first aorist ; it will be found that before 
 this tense suffix a vowel theme usually has its vowel long, 
 e-orrj-o-a- and c-Av-ora- are therefore the tense-stems of the 
 first aorist indicative, being made up of augment, theme, 
 and tense suffix ; the first element denotes past time, and 
 does not appear in the other modes, the second denotes the 
 fundamental idea of the verb, the last marks the aorist tense. 
 
 e. In lo-TrjfJLi the present reduplication appears also in the 
 imperfect (the only difference being that the imperfect is 
 augmented), and no other element stands between the theme 
 and personal endings. Here, then, the tense-stem is i-ora- 
 or t-orrj-, with no tense suffix, but augmented in the imper- 
 fect. In Avo), on the other hand, another element stands 
 between the theme and personal endings in the present and 
 imperfect. Throughout the imperfect and in part of the 
 present this element is seen to be -o- or -e-; in the other 
 forms of the present the element is really the same, but is 
 so united with the endings that its original form is obscured. 
 Here, then, the tense-stem is \v-o- or Av-e-, augmented in the 
 
117] PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AORIST. 121 
 
 imperfect. The vowel -o- or -e- is the present tense suffix 
 of this verb; it is called the variable vowel and may be 
 written -%- ; it is -o- before p or v, elsewhere -c-. Since in 
 all verbs the stem of the imperfect is merely the present 
 stem augmented, while in the other modes there is no im- 
 perfect, these tenses are grouped together as the present sys- 
 tem, as distinguished from the first aorist system and others. 
 That is, a verb system includes all the forms that contain essen- 
 tially the same tense-stem. 
 
 f. As to the personal endings, observe (1) that those of 
 the past tenses differ in part from those of the present; 
 
 (2) that those of the imperfect and aorist of A.vo> are alike, 
 except that c-Av-aa, in the first singular, omits the ending ; 
 
 (3) that in the present system T-aTrj-fu. takes different endings 
 from Xvo> in the third plural. The endings of the present 
 are called the primary endings, and belong, as we shall see, 
 to the indicative present, future, perfect, and future perfect, 
 which are called the primary or principal tenses. The other 
 set of endings are called the secondary or historical endings, 
 and belong to the indicative imperfect, aorist, and pluper- 
 fect, which are called the secondary or historical tenses. The 
 same tenses which take the augment take also the secondary 
 endings. 
 
 The significant elements in these paradigms, then, are the 
 theme, augment, tense suffix, and personal endings. 
 
 117. The verb-stem or theme expresses the fun- 
 damental idea of the verb. A theme which can- 
 not be further divided into significant elements is 
 called a root. 
 
 ora- and \v- are roots ; TraiSev-, the theme of TrcuSevw, is 
 not a root, because it is seen to contain the noun-stem TraiS- 
 and a derivative suffix -cv-. 
 
122 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [118 
 
 118. The augment indicates past time, and be- 
 longs to the imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect in 
 the indicative only. It has two forms : 
 
 1. The syllabic augment, made by prefixing e- ; 
 it is used in verbs beginning with a consonant. 
 
 2. The temporal augment, made by lengthening 
 an initial vowel; it is used in verbs beginning 
 with a vowel. 
 
 a- and a- become ?;-; diphthongs (except ou-) 
 lengthen their first vowel. The breathing remains 
 unchanged. 
 
 119. The tense suffix, added to the theme, indi- 
 cates the tense. We have met, 
 
 1. In the present system -%- or none. The im- 
 perfect is distinguished from the present by the 
 augment and the endings. 
 
 2. In the first aorist -era-, in the third singular -ere-. 
 
 120. The personal endings indicate person and 
 number, and generally voice. The active endings are 
 
 Primary. Secondary. 
 
 (Principal Tenses.) (Historical Tenses.) 
 Sing. 1 -pi -v 
 
 2 -9 -9 
 
 3 -cu [-T] 
 Dual 2 -TOV -TOP 
 
 3 -TOV -rr)v 
 
 Plu. 1 -fjiev -pep 
 
 2 -re -re 
 
 3 -avi or -(V) ^ w ^av or -v 
 
123] PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AORIST. 123 
 
 The old secondary ending -T in the third singular ceased 
 very early to be pronounced. 
 
 121. The /-^-inflection is followed 
 
 1. When there is no tense suffix ; 
 
 2. When the tense suffix does not end in -%- 
 or -a-. 
 
 It has -acri and -crav in the third plural. 
 
 The endings generally appear without change. 
 
 122. a. The w-inflection is followed when the 
 tense suffix ends in -%- or -a-. It has -(y)at, and -v 
 in the third plural. 
 
 b. The first person has -CD instead of -fu ; the process which 
 has made -eis out of -c-s in the second person and -a out of 
 -c-cri in the third person is not certainly explained. 
 
 In the third plural -(v)ort very early lost the v; this caused 
 the preceding vowel to be lengthened ; thus -o-vo-t became -overt. 
 
 123. Like \vco inflect in the present, imperfect, 
 and aorist active : 
 
 d/covo) (a/eou- 1 ) hear. 
 
 /3ao-(,\va) (/3ae\eu-) be king, reign (fr. ySao-^Xei;?). 
 
 POV\VCO (^ouXeu-) plan (fr. ySouX^, a plan). 
 
 KCO\VCO (/cfc>A,{}-) prevent, hinder. 
 
 Travco (-Trau-) cause to stop, stop (transitive). 
 
 Like terry/Jit, inflect : 
 
 set down, establish (/card down 
 and 
 
 1 In vocabularies in this book the theme of each verb will 
 be given in parenthesis. 
 
124 THE GHEES: OF XENOPHON. [124 
 
 a. To inflect these verbs put the new theme in place of 
 that in the paradigms, the other elements remaining the 
 same. For the augment of d/covo) see 118, 2. The imper- 
 fect can be formed easily from most presents, but the forma- 
 tion of the aorist cannot always be inferred from the present. 
 
 b. Compounds of a preposition and a verb take the aug- 
 ment after the preposition. Thus from Katf-t'orrj/Ai we have 
 KaO-io"Tr)v imperfect, and Kar-eorrjo-a aorist. 
 
 c. In composition Kara loses final a before an initial 
 vowel. If the initial vowel has the rough breathing, as in 
 foTiyfu, the breathing and T are written together as 0, which 
 had anciently the sound of T followed by a distinct ^-sound. 
 Thus Kara appears as Kar- or Ka0-, according as the form of 
 the simple verb begins with the smooth or the rough breath- 
 ing. 
 
 124. Vocabulary. 
 
 6 'Apraep?79, -ov Artaxerxes. 
 
 n QacriKeia, -a? (fr. Bacn- ) 7 . 7 7 
 
 1 ^ , ^ [ Kingdom, royal power. 
 
 Dareios or Darius, 1 king 
 of Persia 424-405 B.C. 
 
 1 To find the English form of a Greek name, transliterate 
 it according to 14, and then place the accent according td 
 the Latin rule ; i.e., accent the penult if it is long or if the 
 word has but two syllables, otherwise accent the antepenult. 
 In transliterating there is a difference of usage among schol- 
 ars, some preferring to Latinize the forms more fully than 
 others. No one is entirely consistent, or can be. We are 
 equally inconsistent in our treatment of names from other 
 languages. A name like Cyrus is so thoroughly adopted 
 into English that it seems pedantic to try to change it. In 
 general the author thinks it best to transliterate simply, 
 
124] PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AORIST. 125 
 
 Be, conj., and, but. 
 
 Svo two. 
 
 els, proclitic, prep. w. ace., into. 
 
 6 r/ EXX77i;, -05 Greek. 
 
 eri, adv., still, further, longer. 
 
 t A , ( death (Thanat-opsis, eu- 
 
 o uavaros, -ov ,, . , 
 
 ( tnanasia). 
 
 o KO/305, -ov Cyrus. 1 
 
 r A -*,- ( Lydia, 1 division of Asia 
 
 rj AvSia, -a? * 
 
 ( Minor. 
 
 prep. w. ace., after. 
 
 w. gen., with. 
 
 -a, -ov younger. 
 
 o Hepo-rjs, -ov Persian. 
 
 6 7r6\/jLo$, -ov war (polemic). 
 
 o crarpaTrrj^, -ov satrap, Persian governor. 
 
 ri why? what? 
 
 ( Phrygia, division of Asia 
 , j 
 
 without Latinizing, unless the name, like Cyrus, is actually 
 used as an English name, or has received an English termi- 
 nation, like Athens. The reasons which have made this 
 practice universal in Germany have also caused it to be 
 adopted by many well-known English-speaking scholars, 
 although it is true that the majority in England and Amer- 
 ica would Latinize nearly all names (not Melos, however, 
 nor Delos, Latmos, Tenedos, Patmos, Pergamos). Pupils 
 need to know the look of both forms, and generally in this 
 book both will be given in vocabularies. 
 1 See note on p. 124. 
 
126 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [125 
 
 125. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 1 
 
 O/ f/ EXX?7Z>e9 ryv/JLvdcria KaOicrracrav ev rat? Tro'Xe- 
 criv, ev 0*9 ol vecorepoi eyv/jiva^ov -eavrov? (them- 
 selves^). Aa/)eo9 /3a(rl\V T&V Hepo-tov. KCU, 
 ryiyvovrai, Adpeiov ?raSe9 Suo, Trpecrfivrepos 
 
 1. icaOtcrTcurav : the funda- 
 mental meaning of a word or 
 tense may be variously modi- 
 fied by the circumstances in 
 which it is used ; in other 
 words, the context is just as im- 
 portant as the vocabulary in de- 
 termining the meaning. Here 
 the imperfect should be ren- 
 dered used to establish. What 
 is it in the context that shows 
 this to be the meaning rather 
 than were establishing? 
 
 3. TWV rUpo-wv: verbs of 
 ruling and of superiority, like 
 verbs of beginning, take the 
 gen. Compare 81, I., 1 and 
 note 2 . 
 
 4. A ape Co v : the gen. here 
 gives the source, with a verb 
 denoting birth. The various 
 senses of from are all expressed 
 in Greek by the gen., often with 
 a preposition, but sometimes 
 without a preposition. |Uv : a 
 particle, .meaning that some- 
 thing not yet mentioned is 
 thought of as contrasted with 
 the word before ptv. In Eng- 
 lish we more often indicate 
 this idea merely by the tone of 
 voice, or by a slight change of 
 pitch in speaking; the phrase 
 on the one hand is too long and 
 clumsy to use except rarely ; 
 indeed sometimes expresses the 
 
 1 It is intended that all translation from Greek in the 
 class should be done from the teacher's reading. This trains 
 the ear, and affords constant practice in taking the meaning 
 of the Greek in the right order, and will be found to add 
 much to the rapidity of progress. The Greek exercise should 
 also be read aloud by the pupil until it can be given readily, 
 and on review should be translated back into Greek from the 
 English. This gives the best kind of practice in writing 
 Greek, especially after the Anabasis is begun. 
 
125] PRESENT, IMPERFECT, AND AOEIST. 127 
 
 ved)Tpo<; Se KOpo?. TOV fiev vecorepov 5 
 \dpeios (rarpd'Trrjv A.vSid$ /cal <&pvyid$ 
 en TralSa ovra (being^), o Se TT peer /3v7 epos p*era TOV 
 
 o~ev CLVTL rov aSe\<pov /SacriXeveiv, aXXa 
 
 idea, but has so many other 
 uses that it is best avoided. 
 
 5. v6T6pos : the ending -repos 
 has the same force as in irpeo-fiv- 
 repos, that of English ~er in 
 young-er, denoting the compar- 
 ative degree. Final -o- of the 
 stem of the positive vto-s has 
 been lengthened to -o>- before 
 -repos. 84 : conjunction, trans- 
 lated but or and. It means 
 that the member in which it 
 stands is thought of as con- 
 trasted with something pre- 
 ceding; here, that vedrepos is 
 contrasted with -rrpecr/StVe/oos, as 
 (j.tv indicated the first member 
 of the contrasted pair. Thus 
 fji^v and 5^ correspond to each 
 other; that is, are correlative. 
 The contrast is often, as here, 
 so slight that we do not indi- 
 cate it at all, or only by the 
 tone of voice ; but would here 
 exaggerate the contrast, and so 
 would be unnatural. Note that 
 ptv and 5<* always stand after 
 at least one word of their re- 
 spective members. Hence they 
 are called postpositive words 
 (Latin post and pono) . 
 
 6. KaT&rrqo-c : appointed. 
 Here the character of the sub- 
 ject and objects a king, a 
 young man, governor shows 
 clearly what kind of establish- 
 ing is meant. o-aTpdirrjv : sec- 
 ond obj. w. KaT&rr?7<re, as with 
 like verbs in Lathi. 
 
 7. iraiSa: pred. ace. after 
 6vTa, agreeing with rbv vc&rcpov. 
 We say while still a boy. 
 
 3. cpaorCXcvo-e : in this con- 
 text reigned is about the same 
 thing as became king, began to 
 reign. Compare the Old Tes- 
 tament phrase, as in 1 Kings 
 15, 8 : " Abijam slept with his 
 fathers, and Asa his son reigned 
 in his stead." This is a fre- 
 quent use of the aorist, which, 
 when so used, is called the in- 
 ceptive aorist (Latin incipio'), 
 because it denotes the begin- 
 ning of an action. It is only 
 the context which tells whether 
 the aorist is inceptive or not. 
 
 9. dXXd : of stronger adver- 
 sative force than 6t. licwXii- 
 o-v : the object is often omitted 
 when it can easily be supplied 
 from the context. 
 
128 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [125 
 
 io 'Apra^ep^s. rl Aapeo? ov /carecrT^cre Kvpov 
 e/5 TTJV Pacn\eiav ; eiravcrav fiev rov TroXeyico^, 
 Se /ca/ca j3ov\evovcnv. 
 
 to take es with the ace. in- 
 stead of tv with the dat. This 
 difference of idiom between 
 Greek and English will appear 
 often with this and other 
 words. 
 
 12. Kaicd: here used as a 
 noun. 
 
 10. rC: what determines 
 here whether rl means what ? 
 or why ? 
 
 11. els TT]V pacriXeicLv: the 
 motion implied in the primary 
 meaning of KaOLo-T-rj/ju was prom- 
 inent enough in the mind of 
 the Greek to cause the word 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 What stopped the music? Did you ever (vrore, 
 enclitic) hear the legend of the seven wise men? 
 I was planning to hear music in the theatre, but 
 the young boys in the street prevented it. Why 
 did the king appoint Cyrus satrap ? War caused 
 the work to stop. We were establishing a new 
 gymnasium. The king of the Persians got the 
 city into a war. Cyrus was (fiv) a son of Dareios 
 
 7. got : the word get has a 
 great variety of uses in Eng- 
 lish ; watch the context to de- 
 termine the meaning. Here 
 use Ka0t<rTr)/ju. 
 
 8 f. son, brother: mark 
 the contrast in Greek, though 
 we hardly think of it in Eng- 
 lish. 
 
 In the last sentence what 
 words are contrasted? 
 
 3. -was planning : there is 
 a contrast here between was 
 planning and prevented, which 
 the Greek would mark by ptv 
 and 5^ ; this contrast makes the 
 two verbs the most prominent 
 words in their clauses ; hence 
 the verbs are to be placed first. 
 
 4. It : cf . I., 9 and note. 
 
 5 f . caused ... to stop : 
 evidently equivalent to stopped ; 
 
126] THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 and brother of Artaxerxes. The elder citizens 
 were planning good things, but the younger pre- 10 
 vented them. 
 
 THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 126. Forms with middle endings have thus far been treated 
 almost entirely as passive or deponent, since they often are 
 so, especially in the present, where the passive has no sepa- 
 rate form (see 69). But other uses of the middle are very 
 common. It is necessary to watch the voice carefully in 
 reading, in order to learn its shades of meaning; for many 
 of the ideas which this voice expresses in Greek, English 
 must express in some other way. Sometimes, too, English 
 does not express at all the slight difference between the 
 active and middle, but leaves it to be understood. Some 
 verbs, from their meaning, give no occasion for the use of a 
 middle ; as /2ao-iAevo>. 
 
 a. The middle endings commonly represent the 
 subject as acting upon itself, or with reference to 
 itself. Thus in ^aivo^ai show one's self and iravo- 
 fjiat, stop one's self, cease (or stop used intransi- 
 tively), the subject is at the same time the direct 
 object. These are examples of the direct middle. 
 This is the simplest use of the voice, and is very 
 like the passive ; but not many verbs are used in 
 this way. 
 
 b. For example, \vo^ai does not mean loose one's 
 self (that is expressed by \va) with the pronoun 
 meaning myself, etc.), but loose for one's self, or 
 get loosed for one's self by some one else. Thus 
 
130 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [127 
 
 \verai rbv a8e\$oV would be said of one whose 
 brother had been taken in war, and who buys the 
 captive off ; Tie gets his brother released, or ransoms 
 his brother. This is one example of the indirect 
 middle. In the case of \vo^ai there is a causative 
 force, which is prominent in the middle voice of 
 many verbs. 
 
 c. The middle of lo-rrjfju, is used both as a direct 
 middle, set or station one's self, and as an indirect 
 middle, set or station for one's self. As this verb 
 is very common, both in composition and alone, 
 every use of it must be carefully noted. 
 
 127. 
 
 Present System, Mid. 
 
 First Aorist 
 System, Mid. 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 
 
 / set myself, 
 etc. 
 
 / was setting 
 myself, etc. 
 
 I set myself, etc. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 2 
 
 f/ 
 
 i-crra-crat, 
 
 t-trrd-fJ/qv 
 
 f-crra-ao 
 
 ? f 
 
 ~GTfl~(TCL'~LL r fl V 
 ~&TtJ~&CO 
 
 3 
 
 i-crra-Tai, 
 
 T-ara-ro 
 
 t-vrfaa-TO 
 
 D. 2 
 
 3 
 
 i-crra-crOov 
 l-crra-aOov 
 
 f-crra-affov 
 
 -aTtf-cra-cr0ov 
 e-crTr)'crd-C70rj v 
 
 P. 1 
 
 l-ard-fjie0a 
 
 t-(TTd-fJL0a 
 
 -aT<r)-<rd-/ji0a 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 L-o-ra-o-06 
 
 r/ 
 
 f-crra-(T0 
 T-ara-vro 
 
 -o-Tij-cra-(r06 
 e-crrrf-aa-VTO 
 
THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 131 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 / ransom, etc. 
 
 \V-O-/JLCU 
 \v-rj or \v-6i, 
 \v-e-rai 
 
 / was ransom- 
 ing, etc. t 
 
 -\v-6-/Ji'r]V 
 e-\v-ov 
 e-\v--ro 
 
 I ransomed, etc. 
 -\v-a-d-^7]v 
 
 -\V-(TC0 
 
 e-\v-aa-TO 
 
 D. 2 
 
 \v-e-cr6ov 
 
 -\v~-cr0ov 
 
 e-\v-(ra-(r0ov 
 
 3 
 
 \v-e-cr9ov 
 
 e^ju-e-aOriv 
 
 -\v-(rd-cr0'r)v 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 
 \v-d-/jL0a 
 \v-6-a06 
 
 e-\v-6-fJL0a 
 
 -\V'-a0 
 
 e-\v-crd-iJL0a 
 e-\v-cra-a-0 
 
 3 
 
 \V-O-VTCLL 
 
 -\V-0-VTO 
 
 e-\v-<ra-VTO 
 
 128. Comparing these forms with the active we find 
 that (a) the themes are the same, except that the present 
 and imperfect middle of IOTT///.* have only the short form 
 ora-; (6) the augments are the same, temporal in krra/Ar/v, 
 etc., syllabic elsewhere ; (c) the tense suffixes are the same, 
 in the present system of the /u-verb none, in the present 
 system of the co-verb -%-, in the aorists throughout -era-. But 
 
 129. The personal endings of the middle differ 
 from those of the active. They are seen unchanged 
 in the present system of the /^-verb, and are 
 
 Primary. 
 (Principal Tenses.) 
 Sing. 1 -pat, 
 
 Secondary. 
 (Historical Tenses.) 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 -crat, 
 -rat, 
 
 -(TO 
 -TO 
 
132 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [130- 
 
 -0-00V 
 
 ~(70r)V 
 
 Primary. Secondary. 
 
 (Principal Tenses.) (Historical Tenses.) 
 Dual 2 -0-00V 
 
 3 '(700V 
 
 Plu. 1 -fji0a 
 
 2 -(70 -(70 
 
 3 -vrai -vro 
 
 130. In some forms the tense suffix and ending have run 
 together, \v-rj and Xv-ct are for Av-e-aat ; cr of the ending is 
 dropped, as it often is between two vowels, and -e-ai contracts 
 to -17 or -ct. i\vov is for eAv-c-cro ; cr is dropped and -e-o con- 
 tracted to -ov. In like manner eor^cra) is for 
 and cAvtro) for eAi;-o r a-(o')o. 
 
 131. Vocabulary. 1 
 Athenian. 
 
 -a, -ov 
 (a?ro + crra-, 
 
 imp. d(f)-tcrTr)v 
 aor. a 
 
 \, especially 
 
 Mid. (dir.) set 
 one's self off, revolt. 
 
 Asia. 
 
 'plan. Mid. (indir.) plan 
 for one's self or with 
 one's self, hence delib- 
 erate. 
 
 1 Inflect all words contained in the vocabulary. 
 
131] 
 
 THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 133 
 
 imp. crvv-eftovXevov 
 aor. 
 
 -a? 
 
 o ' fttcToyp, -0/009 
 Kara-\vco (/cara 4 
 imp. 
 aor. 
 
 7TL-BoV\VQ) (llTi + BoV- \ , 
 
 , plan against, plots? scheme 
 
 > against. Middle forms 
 
 imp. 7T-pOV\VOV , , 
 
 , , used only as passive. 
 
 aor. 7T-/30V\VO'(l f 
 
 (rvfji,-/3ov\vco (GTVV+ \ plan with another, advise. 
 I Mid. (indir.) plan with 
 ( another for one's self, 
 ) ask advice, consult with. 
 democracy. 
 Hektor or Hector. 
 \ break down, destroy. Mid. 
 > (indir.) destroy for one's 
 ) self, get destroyed, 
 establish, sometimes get 
 or bring into a certain 
 place or condition. Dir. 
 mid., establish one's self, 
 get one's self into a place 
 or condition. Indir. 
 mid., establish for one's 
 self, sometimes appoint. 
 Lacedaemonian, Spartan, 
 be about to do something, 
 intend, be going to do 
 something. No mid. ; 
 aor. scarcely used in 
 this sense. 
 month (Lat. mensis). 
 
 (/cara 
 
 crra-, CTTT;-) 
 imp. KaO-teryv 
 aor. Kar-ea-rrjaa 
 
 -a, 
 
 imp. fjL\\OV 
 
 -09 
 
134 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [132 
 
 6/crd), indecl., 
 97 
 
 TTCLVCO (jrav-) 
 
 , -ou 
 indecl., 
 o Tvpavvos, -ov 
 
 Tvpavvevo) (rvpavvev-) 
 
 eight (Lat. octo). 
 
 oligarchy. 
 
 stop (transitive). Mid. 
 (dir.) stop one's self, 
 stop (intrans.), cease. 
 
 Priam, king of Troy. 
 
 thirty. 
 
 absolute ruler, tyrant, 
 
 be or act as absolute ruler 
 or tyrant, tyrannize. 
 
 132. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 fjv (was) TTO\VV %povov rofc ' 
 777)09 roi>9 Aa/ceSaifjioviovs pera Se TOV 7rd\/jiov 
 JJLCV * KOyvaiow rrjv Brj/JLOKparidv ol Aa/ce- 
 Se /carearrja'av rrjv T&V rpia- 
 
 often in Lat. Literally, for the 
 Ath. ; but we should say of the 
 Athenians. 
 
 4. oXi-yapxCdv 84: the two 
 clauses Kart\v<rav . . . Aajce- 
 dai/jidvLoi and <5Aryap%/av . . . 
 TpidicovTa are contrasted, rather 
 than single words ; but in those 
 clauses the most important 
 words are KCLT&VO-CLV and 6X1- 
 yapxtdv, which are therefore 
 put first in their respective 
 members, and followed, one by 
 n{i>, the other by 5^. -H)v : the 
 
 Latin, denotes extent of time ; 
 TroXOp XP VOV is the common 
 phrase for a long while. 
 *A0T]vaCois: dat. of possessor, 
 as in Latin. 
 
 2. irp6s : with the ace. means 
 to or towards. Where we say 
 between the Athenians and the 
 Spartans, the Greek says to the 
 Athenians towards the Spar- 
 tans. Note the Greek colon (). 
 
 3. 'A6Tjvaois : here dat. of 
 interest or disadvantage, as 
 
132] 
 
 THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 135 
 
 Kovra. KOI ol rpia/covra ep,e\\ov pev Srj VO/JLOV? 5 
 TiOevai, Kaff ou? apX LV efi\\ov avrl Se rov VO/JLOV? 
 riOevcu 7T/3ov\V(rav TCH? iroKtrais ical ervpdvvevov 
 fjirjvas o/crd). 6 Se Srjfjbos a7T(mj(TaTO fiev O.TTO r&v 
 rpiaKovra, Karea-njo-aro Se iraXiv rrjv Srj/jLOKparidv. 
 
 6 /3a<Ti\ev<; eKvcraro rov iralSa f/ E#Topa. 10 
 6a TO) aTrocrroXft) Trepl rov VO/JLOV. 
 
 We use here the verbal noun 
 in -ing, which happens to have 
 the same form as the present 
 active pple. in -ing, but is in 
 fact of different origin. Such 
 verbal nouns, like the Greek 
 and Latin infinitive and the 
 Latin gerund, retain enough 
 verbal force to take a direct 
 object or an adverbial modifier, 
 but can be used only in short 
 and simple phrases ; we shall 
 see that in Greek such infinitive 
 clauses may be of almost any 
 length and very complicated. 
 
 7. iroXtrais : dat. after ^TTI- 
 in TTf3ov\V(rav. 
 
 & f. dir0"Hj<raTO, icaT<rrfj- 
 o-aro: what in the context 
 makes it clear whether these 
 verbs have the force of the dir. 
 mid. or the indir. ? Notice that 
 while Kareo-r^o-aro is in the 
 mid., Kar^rTT/o-aj/ above is ac- 
 tive. The mid. is naturally 
 used of a people setting up a 
 government of their own. 
 * 11. <rvv|3ovX.v<rd|j,0a : for 
 
 form shows what this and the 
 following words belong with ; 
 the effect of thus postponing 
 the modifier is given perfectly 
 in this instance in English by 
 translating r-f)v that and reserv- 
 ing the whole phrase till the 
 end of the sentence. 
 
 The war referred to is the 
 Peloponnesian war, 431-404 
 B.C., in which the Spartans were 
 victorious. The " Thirty Ty- 
 rants" were deposed in the 
 summer of 403 B.C. 
 
 5. 8-fj : a particle whose 
 various uses must be carefully 
 watched. Here its force may 
 be given by as they said, im- 
 plying that they did not really 
 intend to do so. 
 
 6. ri0vai : the verb regularly 
 used of making laws. icaO* : 
 for KO.T& ; the same change as 
 in KaB-Lo-rjjfjLt. KO.T& with the 
 ace. often means, as here, ac- 
 cording to. TOV: marks the 
 phrase PO'/XOUS T t0^cu as a noun 
 in the gen., governed by dvrl. 
 
136 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [132 
 
 ov (TVvejiovXeva-aTe rois TroMraLs Traveo-Oai rov 
 7ro\/Jiov ; ol r/ EX\77^9 ol ev rfj 'Acrta d 
 rov /3acr^Xeco5. aTrecrr^cre rov$ 
 
 15 r&v Hepcr&v. 
 
 voice, see vocabulary above. 
 dative after <rvt>- in 
 
 13. iroX^ov: here a from 
 gen., denoting separation, after 
 
 CLTTO 
 
 In 600 B.C. the Greek colo- 
 nies in Asia Minor, which had 
 been subdued by the Persians, 
 revolted ; this is known as the 
 Ionian revolt. 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 The Spartans were planning the war a long 
 time. The Greeks in Asia schemed against the 
 Persians, and got themselves into a war. The 
 tyrant broke down the strength of the city. 
 
 5 The people plotted against the oligarchy, but es- 
 tablished over themselves a tyrant. Were you 
 consulting with friends ? We advised the tyrant 
 to rule according to the laws. After the war I 
 procured the release of many citizens. Why did 
 
 10 you get the Greeks to revolt from the Persians? 
 Many cities took counsel with the Lacedaemonians 
 and revolted from the Athenians. There was war 
 
 3. got . . . into: mid. of 
 /jiL and els. 
 
 5 f. Mark the contrast be- 
 tween the members by ptv and 
 5^. over themselves : suf- 
 ficiently expressed by the mid. 
 voice of the verb. 
 
 9. procured the release 
 
 of : expressed by one word. 
 
 10. did you get to re- 
 volt : expressed by one word. 
 
 12 f . Of. 132, I., 1 f., and 
 
 put the word for Greeks in the 
 dat. 
 
134] 
 
 THE FUTURE SYSTEM. 
 
 137 
 
 for many months between the Greeks and the Per- 
 sians. 
 
 THE FUTURE SYSTEM. 
 
 133. The future tense is used like the English 
 future. There is no difference in the future be- 
 tween /u-verbs and co-verbs. The active and 
 middle differ only in the personal endings, and 
 together make up the future system. 
 
 134. Future System. 
 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 
 / shall loose, etc. 
 
 / shall ransom, etc. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 
 \V-(TG) 
 
 \v-crei? 
 
 \v-cro-fjucu 
 
 3 
 
 \v-a-et 
 
 \v-a-6-rai, 
 
 D. 2 
 
 \v-cre-Tov 
 
 \v-ae-a-6ov 
 
 3 
 
 \v-cre-rov 
 
 \V-(T-(T00V 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 
 \V-O"0-fJLV 
 \V-(T-T 
 
 \v-a6-fjLeOa 
 
 3 
 
 \v-crovcri 
 
 \v-ao-vrai, 
 
 In the same way are inflected most futures, as crnyo-a> 
 1 shall set, and OTT/-CTO-/X(U / shall set myself, etc., from ixmy/u 
 (OTOT, crrrf) ; 
 
 f3ov\ev-<T(a 1 shall plan, and flovXev-cro-pjai 1 shall deliberate, 
 etc., from 
 
138 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [135- 
 
 ) 1 shall stop, and 7rav'-<ro-/>uu / shall cease, etc., from 
 v'o) (TTCIU-). 
 
 135. a. The future tense suffix is -<r%-, with -o- 
 before /x or y, elsewhere -e-. 
 
 b. The theme usually takes the longer form 
 in the future, if there are two forms ; as in 
 a-rtf-aco. Thus the future tense-stem of io-r^/ja is 
 O-TIJ-O-%-. 
 
 c. The primary endings are used, and the same 
 changes occur as in the co-present. Thus \v- 
 (rovcn is for \v-a o-(y) GI\ \tharj and Xu-cret for 
 
 FIRST PASSIVE SYSTEM. 
 
 136. The passive voice has a separate form 
 from the middle in the aorist and future only. 
 The aorist passive and future passive are formed 
 with the same passive suffix, and are so related 
 that if one is given the other can always be 
 known. Hence they are grouped together in 
 one system, called the passive system, the mark 
 of which is the passive suffix. In this system 
 there is no difference between /u-verbs and co- 
 verbs. 
 
 NOTE. It will assist in keeping in mind the true relation of 
 forms, if the pupil is always required, when writing verbs on 
 the board, to put at the head the tense-stem of the system to 
 which the forms belong. The analysis of forms should be 
 called for often, 
 
138] FIRST PASSIVE SYSTEM. 
 
 137. First Passive System. 
 
 139 
 
 
 AORIST. 
 
 FUTURE. 
 
 
 / was loosed or ran- 
 somed, etc. 
 
 / shall be loosed or ran- 
 somed, etc. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 -\v-0r}-$ 
 -\v-0r] 
 
 \v-0ij-arj or -&i 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 -\V-0rj-TOV 
 
 \v-0ij-a-e-o-0ov 
 
 \V-0rj-<T-(T00V 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 6-\V-07)-/JLV 
 
 \v-0rj-o' 6- jj,0 a 
 \v-0rj-o- e-(T0 
 \v-6r\-GQ-VTai 
 
 In the same way are inflected most vowel themes, as -ora- 
 OYJ-V I was set, and <rra-077-cro-/Luu 1 shall be set, etc., from 
 to-r^/At (crra-, (rrrj-) ', 
 
 -7rav-Orf-v I was stopped, and Trav-O-q-o-o-fuu 1 shall be stopped, 
 etc., from TraJo) (7rav-) ; 
 
 e-KtoXv-Orj-v 1 was hindered, and Kw\-v-Orj-<TO-iM.i I shall be 
 hindered, etc., from KwXvco (KoAv-, 
 
 138. a. The passive suffix of the first passive 
 sj^stem is, in the indicative, -Or]-. (On taking up 
 the other modes we shall find that this suffix takes 
 the form -0rj- only before a single consonant ; else- 
 where that is, before two consonants or a vowel 
 it is -0e-.) 
 
 b. The theme sometimes takes the long form, 
 
140 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [139 
 
 but often the short form, if there are two. Thus 
 the passive stem of larrj^L is a-ra-drj- ; of \G>, Xu- 
 0rj- ; of /JouXevo), /3ou Xei>-#?;-. 
 
 c. In the aorist passive there is no tense suffix ; 
 the secondary active endings are added Directly 
 to the passive stem, which of course is augmented 
 in the indicative. This tense, therefore, is in all 
 verbs a /it-formation (see 121), and in the third 
 plural takes -vav. 
 
 d. In the future passive the future suffix -<r%- 
 is added to the passive stem, and the middle pri- 
 mary endings used. In the second person -0-77 and 
 -crei are for -<7e-(o-)a, as in the present and future 
 middle. 
 
 139. Vocabulary. 
 
 /30UX7;- 1 ) .. 
 
 P , n ^ , >dep/ wish. 
 
 tut. povKrjaoJiai 
 
 aor. eft 
 
 1 In /3ov\ojjjaL and some other common verbs the theme 
 takes on the syllable -77- in some forms, apparently to prevent 
 two consonants from coming together which the Greeks could 
 not easily pronounce. 
 
 2 Compare 71. In the future and aorist some deponents 
 take the middle forms, others the passive. Those which 
 take the passive forms in the aorist are often called passive 
 deponents ; those which take the middle forms in the aorist 
 are called middle deponents. There is no difference in 
 meaning. 
 
140] 
 
 FIRST PASSIVE SYSTEM. 
 
 141 
 
 conj., 
 
 -ft>T09 
 
 conj., 
 
 l/cavo$, -77, -ov 
 vvv, adv., 
 
 OVTCO before a cons. 
 o#rft>9 before a vowel 
 7roXe/uo9, -a, -oz^ 
 Trore, interrog. adv., 
 TTore, indef. adv., enclitic, 
 rore, demonstrative adv., 
 ore, rel. conj., 
 o o-Tpari(f)Tr)<;, -ov 
 
 for. 
 
 laughter, 
 when, after, 
 sufficient, enough. 
 
 now. 
 
 adv., thus, so. 
 
 ware, conj., 
 
 hostile; as noun, enemy, 
 at what time ? when ? 
 at some time, ever, once, 
 at tTiat time, then, 
 when, 
 soldier. 
 
 so that, that, in a result 
 clause. 
 
 140. Exercises. 
 
 "Ore 
 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 Ki)|009 TI TTCW fjv KOI eVatSeuero 
 ra>v a\\(ov TraiScov, apicrTos irdvrayv rjv ev rols e/9 
 7rd\fJ,ov epyot,?. eVel 8e o-arpdirrj^ Karearddrj, OVTCO 
 
 1. ptv: when ptv and 5^ 
 stand immediately after a con- 
 junction, as here after 6re and 
 in line 3 after tird, it is usually 
 the entire clauses, instead of 
 single words, that are con- 
 trasted. liraiSevero : in tenses 
 that have no separate passive 
 form the context and the mean- 
 
 ing of the verb must determine 
 whether a form is mid. or pass, 
 in meaning. 
 
 2. els: of ten has the derived 
 meaning with reference to, bear- 
 ing upon, useful for. 
 
 3. c'p-yois : activities, exer- 
 cises. iireC : when tire is used 
 in the sense of when, the time 
 
142 
 
 THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [140 
 
 AcaXo9 KOI aya0b$ fjv wcrre <f)i\oi pev eylyvovro aura> 
 
 5 7TOXX(H, 7TO\/MOl, & O\lyO(,. KOl V T(p TToXe/tft) O9 
 
 V. /iera Se TOI> 7roXe/io*>, ore 
 
 O, roVe S^ ITepcrafc 
 10 (were) ara> l/cavol rbv apiOpov, efiovXtjOrj Be KCU 
 
 of the principal clause is gen- 
 erally the same as that of the 
 ic/iett clause ; in other words, 
 while can be substituted for 
 when without much change of 
 meaning. When tird is used 
 in the sense of when, the time 
 of the principal clause is gener- 
 ally later than that of the when 
 clause ; in other words, after 
 can usually be substituted for 
 when. But the distinction was 
 not always observed, and fad 
 tended to crowd out 5re. cra- 
 TpaTTTjs : pred. nom. 
 
 4. KaXos : is used of charac- 
 ter, as well as of the appearance; 
 KdX6s Kdl aya&6s is a common 
 phrase describing a thoroughly 
 admirable person ; honorable 
 and good is a literal rendering, 
 but is far less common in Eng- 
 lish than the corresponding 
 phrase in Greek. 
 
 6 f. <t>t\os rots AO.K. : he 
 aided them during the last three 
 years of the war with ships and 
 large sums of money. 
 
 8. jjL\\v: v movable may 
 be added to any verb of the 
 third person sing, in -e, as well 
 as to verbs of the third plu. 
 in -0-1, to datives plu. in -0-1, 
 and to tvrl. Cf. 40, I., 4 and 
 note. 
 
 9. 8-fj : here slightly empha- 
 sizes the preceding word. 
 
 10. avrw : lit. to Mm, dat. 
 of possessor. When used thus 
 alone, without the article and 
 not in apposition, the forms of 
 atfr6s supply the place of the 
 unemphatic personal pron. of 
 the third person, of him, her, 
 etc. The nom. is never so 
 used, but is always in agree- 
 ment with some word, either 
 expressed or understood. 
 apiBpo'v : in number, ace. of 
 specification. icaC: like Lat. 
 et, Kat is not only a conjunc- 
 tion, but also an adverb, call- 
 ing attention to the following 
 word or phrase. The context 
 shows whether also or even is 
 called for in English. 
 
140] 
 
 FIRST PASSIVE SYSTEM. 
 
 143 
 
 s, dptcrroi jap efyaivovro 
 Twv Tore. fjv TTOTC 7roXe/-6O9 rois 'AOrjvalois 7rp09 
 rou9 Tlepcrds. 7rel ol TratSes ij/covcrav TOV fJLv6ov, 
 7roA,U9 ye\co$ TJV. Tore fjuev eTravOiycrav TOV rvpav- 
 vevew ol TpicucovTa VTTO TOV SIJ/JLOV, vvv Se Tvpavvevet, 15 
 6 &%to9. TTore TravOrjcreTcu 6 Tvpavvos T^S 
 
 tion. Compare TroX^tou, 132, 1., 
 13. 
 
 15. vnrd TOV 8-rjfxov : with 
 pass, verbs the agent is regularly 
 expressed by vw6 with the gen. 
 
 16. iroV : compare carefully 
 the correlatives 7r6re, TTOT^, r6re 
 and tire. All refer to time, all 
 end in -ore. We shall find the 
 same ending in other adverbs of 
 time. Note particularly how the 
 interrogative, indefinite, and de- 
 monstrative are distinguished ; 
 all are common, and students 
 are apt to confuse them. 
 
 11. (TTpaTwoTas : in predi- 
 cate apposition with "EXXrjvas : 
 we should say as soldiers. 
 yap : always post-positive, like 
 ptv and 5 
 
 12. TWV TOTC : by being put 
 thus after the article, r6re be- 
 comes equivalent to an adjec- 
 tive modifier. The phrase is in 
 the gen. of the whole, depend- 
 ing on &PHTTOI. Say of those of 
 that time, or of contemporary 
 soldiers. 
 
 14. TOV rvpavvViv : the inf. 
 is here in the gen. of separa- 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 When the satrap was honorable and good he 
 had enough soldiers; but after he began to act 
 like a tyrant, the soldiers kept revolting. While 
 
 1 f. he had: use dat. of 
 possessor, were to him (atf- 
 r<?). Cf. note on I., 10, and 
 see vocabulary under 
 
 began . . . tyrant : express by 
 one word in the aor. 
 
 3. kept revolting : what 
 tense? 
 
144 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [141 
 
 the older citizens were deliberating, the younger 
 5 men got the city into a war which destroyed the 
 city's power. When were the thirty deposed 
 from the government? There was once a king 
 who wished to rule the whole earth. When the 
 Greeks were revolting, the Persians wished to 
 10 prevent them. The people will some time delib- 
 erate about the matter, and then the war will be 
 stopped. When will the soldiers be released? 
 The enemy will some time be ransomed. Then 
 the children's laughter used to be stopped by their 
 15 elders, but the children of to-day sometimes (eW- 
 ore) rule the house. A word to the wise is enough. 
 
 4. older, younger : ntv 
 
 and 5(* cannot be used here, 
 because 5^ is a conjunction, 
 and there is no but or and here. 
 The contrast of ideas is left 
 unmarked, as it is in English. 
 
 6. deposed: 
 
 7. once : since irort is en- 
 clitic it should not be put first. 
 
 10. them: use avrovs if 
 anything. 
 
 11. matter : IT pay pa. 
 
 14. used to be stopped : 
 one verb-form. their : use 
 the article. 
 
 15. the children of to- 
 day: in Greek the now chil- 
 dren. 
 
 FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM. 
 141. The perfect tense, indicative, represents 
 
 1. Usually an act completed in present time, as 
 /ce/ccoXvfca I have prevented ; 
 
 2. Sometimes a continued state, the effect of an 
 act now completed, as earvfca I have stationed (my- 
 self), and so I am standing ; the latter is the com- 
 mon meaning of this form of IO- 
 
143] 
 
 FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM. 
 
 145 
 
 The first use is the same as that of the English perfect 
 and the Latin perfect definite. The second use is frequent 
 in a few verbs, and is seen also in Latin memini, I remember. 
 
 142. The pluperfect tense, indicative, represents 
 
 1. Usually an act completed in past time, as 
 e/cKa)\v/crj I had prevented. 
 
 2. Sometimes a state continued in the past, as e/- 
 a-TtJKrj I had stationed (myself), and so I was stand- 
 ing ; the latter is the common meaning of this form 
 of 
 
 The pluperfect is to the perfect as the imperfect is to the 
 present. As the pluperfect is always formed in the same 
 way from the perfect, both are grouped in the same tense 
 system. But the perfect active system differs from the per- 
 fect middle system. 
 
 143. First Perfect System. 
 
 
 PERFECT ACTIVE. 
 
 PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 
 
 
 / have loosed, etc. 
 
 / had loosed, etc. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 \e-\v-Ka 
 \-\v-/ca-s 
 
 \-\V-K 
 
 -\-\V-K7J, Or -KL-V 
 
 -\-\v-/crj-$, or -#e*-s 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 \e-\v-fca-Tov 
 
 \-\V-KCL-TOV 
 
 -\-X V-KGL-TOV 
 
 -\e-\v-Kei-rrjv 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 \-\V-fCd-/JiV 
 
 \e-\v-fca-T 
 \e-\v-Kacn 
 
 -\-\V-Kl,-fJLV 
 -\-\V-/Cl-T 
 
 -\-\v-K-crav 
 
146 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [144 
 
 s. i 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 PERFECT ACTIVE. 
 I stand, etc.. 
 
 etc. 
 
 PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 
 I was standing, etc. 
 7, or -K,ei-v 
 9, or -/cet-9 
 
 etc. 
 
 In the same way are inflected most vowel themes, as 
 
 Tre-TratSeu-Ka 1 have educated, c-Tre-TratSev-K^ I had educated, 
 from TraiSeJa) (?rai8eu-) ; 
 
 avfJi-/3-flovX.v-Ka I have advised, <rvv-e-/3c-/3ov\eu-Kr] I had 
 advised, from cru/x/foiAei/a) (ow + /SovAcu-) ; 
 
 d<#>--crT7^Ka / am m re?;o^ (^ave se^ myself off), 
 7 ^as in revolt (had revolted), from a 
 
 144. a. The theme in the first perfect system 
 takes the shorter form in some verbs, the longer 
 form in others. 
 
 b. To the theme is prefixed the reduplication, 
 which is the special sign of completed action. 
 The simplest form of the reduplication is seen in 
 \-\v-tca ; it consists of the initial consonant of the 
 theme with e. Other forms of the reduplication 
 will be noticed later. e-o-Tvj-tca is for the older 
 form o-e-o-rrj'/ca ; initial a has been weakened to 
 the rough breathing, just as in ib-nj/u for cricrTTjfjit,. 
 Note that the vowel of the perfect reduplication is 
 always e, of the present reduplication is t. 
 
145] FIRST PERFECT SYSTEM. 147 
 
 c. The tense suffix of the first perfect is -/ca- (in 
 the third singular -#e-). 
 
 d. The primary endings are used. But in the 
 first and third persons singular the ending is 
 omitted. In the third person plural -a-vcri has 
 become -aai by dropping v and lengthening a. 
 
 e. The examples show that in compounds the 
 preposition stands first of all. 
 
 145. In the pluperfect 
 
 a. The theme and reduplication are the same as 
 in the perfect. 
 
 b. The augment is prefixed to the reduplicated 
 theme. In elarrj/cij (for older e-cre-crT?;-*:?;) ei- has 
 resulted from dropping a and contracting e-e. 
 
 c. The tense suffix is -/crj- or -tcei- in the first and 
 second persons singular, -/ce- in the third person 
 plural, elsewhere -KCL-. (The difference of pro- 
 nunciation in the three forms was of course very 
 slight.) 
 
 d. The secondary endings are used, with -aav in 
 the third person plural. In the first person singu- 
 lar after -/crj the ending is omitted. 
 
 It is clear, then, that the pluperfect active is in 
 all verbs a /u-formation (121). 
 
148 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [146 
 
 146. PERFECT MIDDLE SYSTEM. 
 
 
 PERFECT MID. (PASS.). 
 
 PLUPERFECT MID. (PASS.). 
 
 
 / have ransomed (or been 
 loosed), etc. 
 
 / had ransomed (or been 
 loosed), etc. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 \-\V-/JL(U 
 
 e-Xe-Xu-///?7*> 
 
 2 
 
 \e-\v-crai, 
 
 l-Xe-Xu-cro 
 
 3 
 
 \e-\v-rai, 
 
 6-Xe-Xu-ro 
 
 D. 2 
 
 \e-\v-a0ov 
 
 -\-\V-(T00V 
 
 3 
 
 \e-\v-cr6ov 
 
 t-\e-\v-o-0r)v 
 
 P. 1 
 
 \-\V-fJL0a 
 
 -\-\V-fJL0a 
 
 2 
 
 \-\V-(T0 
 
 -\-\V-(70 
 
 3 
 
 \e-\v-vrat, 
 
 .e-Xe'-Xz^To 
 
 In the same way are inflected most vowel themes, as 
 
 7r-7rau-/jwu / have stopped (been stopped), c-Trc-Trav-//.^ / had 
 stopped (been stopped), from 7rava> (TTOLV-) ; 
 
 (7VfJi-ft-/3ov\v-fjLai I have consulted, (rvv--/3e-/3ov\v-fjLr}v I 
 had consulted, from o-v/x^ovXevcu ( crvv + flovXtv-) ; 
 
 jSe-^ovXr^-jiuxt / have wished, -(3e-j3ov\rj-fJir]v 1 had wished, 
 from POV \ofjuca ((3ov\-, fiovXrj-). 
 
 NOTE. The perfect and pluperfect middle of ftrr^/u are not 
 used, except in a few compounds, and in these not often ; their 
 place is supplied in this verb by the peculiar turn of meaning 
 given to the perfect and pluperfect active, and by other verbs. 
 
 147. In the perfect and pluperfect middle 
 
 a. The theme takes the shorter form in some 
 verbs, the longer form in others. 
 
 b. The reduplication is the same as in the per- 
 fect active ; the pluperfect takes the augment. 
 
149] THE Mi-AOEIST. 149 
 
 c. There is no tense suffix; the endings are 
 added directly to the reduplicated theme, in the 
 perfect the primary endings, in the pluperfect the 
 secondary endings. The system is therefore a /u- 
 formation (121). 
 
 THE 
 
 148. A few common verbs have an aorist formed 
 without a tense suffix, the endings being added 
 directly to the theme. This is called the ^6-aorist, 
 after the analogy of the /u-present. lo-rrjiJLi has 
 this aorist in addition to the regular first aorist, 
 but with a different meaning ; while the first aorist 
 60-rrja-a is transitive, the /u-aorist ea-rrjv is intransi- 
 tive, and is generally used instead of the direct 
 middle eo-rrja-d/jLrjv in the sense / set myself, took 
 my place, stood (not I was standing ; that is et- 
 O-TT;*;?;). The same meaning appears also in the 
 numerous compounds of this verb. yiyvwo-Kco has 
 no first aorist, but a /u-aorist instead, with the 
 ordinary aorist meaning. 
 
 149. Mi-aorist of tW^/u and 
 
 
 / set myself, etc. 
 
 1 perceived, knew, etc. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 2 
 
 -(7T?7-9 
 
 >r 
 
 3 
 
 e-arrj 
 
 V 
 
150 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [150 
 
 
 / set myself, etc. 
 
 I perceived, knew, etc. 
 
 D. 2 
 
 e-crrrj-TOV 
 
 e-yva>-TOV 
 
 3 
 
 L-crrtj-rrjv 
 
 e-yvco-rrjv 
 
 P. 1 
 
 e-<JT?7-/iej> 
 
 -<yV(0-fJiV 
 
 2 
 
 -(TTrj-T 
 
 -yva)-T 
 
 3 
 
 e-Grrj-aav 
 
 -yva)-(7av 
 
 a. The formation is very simple. The aug- 
 mented theme, in the longer form, takes the sec- 
 ondary endings, with -aav in the third person 
 plural. Neither eo-rrjv nor eyvcov has any mid- 
 dle. 
 
 150. By the principal parts of a verb we mean 
 the first form of every tense system used in that verb. 
 They are so called because, if these are known, all 
 the forms of the verb can be inferred from them. 
 The following table gives the principal parts of 
 most of the verbs hitherto introduced, so far as 
 they are in common use. Not all compounds are 
 given, since these can be formed from the simple 
 verbs. It is necessary to learn the principal parts 
 of all common verbs, because that is the easiest 
 way of mastering their forms ; and until one knows 
 thoroughly all the common verb forms, so that 
 each one is recognized instantly in its full mean- 
 ing, it is impossible to read with any satisfactory 
 results. 
 
151] 
 
 THE Mi-AOBIST. 
 
 151 
 
 f XL 
 ( - 
 
 " 
 
 <S T 
 
 41 
 
 2.2- 
 
 II 
 
152 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [151 
 
 W 
 > 
 
 2 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 
 l 
 
 i * 
 
 w 
 
 d 'O 
 
 t Q3 
 
 tf 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 - 
 
 55 
 
 w 
 
 M 
 
 ^0 03 
 
 b 
 3 
 
 I 
 
 
 i 
 
152] THE Mi-AORIST. 153 
 
 152. Vocabulary. 
 ava-yiyvGtHTKco (dva + yvo-, ~\ 
 
 yvw-), dvayvdxio^ai, > read, 
 dveyvcov, dveyvco/ca ) 
 
 o ftdpftapos, -ov foreigner, barbarian. 
 
 77 Paa-i\eid, -9 kingdom, royal power. 
 
 o SouA,o9, "ov slave. 
 
 e\ev6epos, -d, -ov free. 
 
 77877, adv., already. 
 
 Ionic. 
 
 ( Marathon, town on the 
 ( eastern side of Attica. 
 77 mKrj, -779 victory. 
 
 vlKao) (yiica-, vl/crj- f r . vf/crj\ \ 
 
 . , , . I conquer, be victorious, 
 
 vifcricrG), em/crjcra, vew/crj- > 
 
 , /71 surpass, 
 
 /ca, veviicrinai, evlfcrjvrjv ) 
 
 {Xerxes, king of Persia, 
 B.C. 485-464. 
 on, conj., that, 
 
 a-rparevco (crrparev- fr. N 
 
 crrpaTo? army, cf . a-rpa- 
 rtcoTT/9), o-Tparevo-co, 
 ear par ever a, ecnpd- 
 
 pedition. Often used 
 as deponent. 
 ecrTparevdrjv 
 G>9, rel. adv.(conj.), proclitic, as. 
 
 take the field, serve as 
 soldier, make an ex- 
 
 1 
 
 When the reduplication syllable is followed by two con- 
 sonants (or a double consonant ; see 212), the reduplication 
 
154 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [153 
 
 153. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 oKi^/ap^iai Kara\\WTCU VTTO BTJ/JLCOV, 
 TroXXat Be BTj/jLO/cpariat, VTTO rvpdvvcov. i 
 VIKCLS, & crTpcLTiwrai, o~vv ro2<; 6eol<$ 
 eVel o ptfrcop dveyvco rrjv rov ftaa"t\ 
 5 rore Brj eyvtocrav ol vroXmu on eVeySeySouXeui/TO. ol 
 f/ EXX?7ve9 eveviKecrav 77877 TOU? TLepaas eV 
 ore Hep^779 IcrTpdrevcrev eV aurou?. at 
 
 1 f . iroXXal p.v . . . iroXXal 
 8^: when, as here, a word of 
 some importance is used in 
 both the contrasted clauses, 
 that word is usually put first 
 in each clause and followed by 
 ntv and 5e respectively. The 
 contrast here is rather between 
 
 often means the 
 democratic faction among the 
 people; in the plural, demo- 
 cratic factions. 
 
 3. vtKcis : cognate ace. with 
 veviK-fiKare. Cf . English die the 
 death. We cannot say conquer 
 victories, but must say win vic- 
 tories, or the like. <rvv: ren- 
 der with the help of. 
 
 5. irppovXWTO : the mean- 
 ing of the verb and the context 
 
 show that the form must here 
 be taken as pass. 
 
 6. MapaOwvi : the battle of 
 Marathon was fought 490 B.C. 
 
 7 f . ITT* : a final short vowel 
 of prepositions, and a few other 
 words, is often elided (cut off) 
 before an initial vowel, even 
 when not in composition. Com- 
 pare dvr for avrl and dXX' for 
 dXXd (12). Probably in speak- 
 ing and reading the Greeks 
 made such elisions very freely, 
 but in writing they were some- 
 times indicated, sometimes not. 
 'IcoviKcd irdXcis : a name often 
 given to the cities on the cen- 
 tral-western coast of Asia 
 Minor, colonized by Ionic 
 Greeks, who were one of the 
 three large branches of the 
 
 usually consists of 
 Cf . 
 
 only, omitting the initial consonant. 
 
153] 
 
 THE Mi-AORIST. 
 
 155 
 
 Tracrai a<p(7rrJKacn rov 
 
 <yva) ore al 'Icovi/cal TroXe^? a<f){,(TTiJK(7av. 
 o crarpaTrr]^ 7T(,/3j3ov\VK ro3 /3acn\i KOI ireirav- 10 
 rat Trjs cipXn^t Kal aXXo? Karacrrad^a-erai aarpaTr^ 
 CLVT avrov. TreTraiSev/Jieda ov% a>9 SovXot, aXX' 009 
 e\evdepoL 7ro\lrai. Trore vevlicrjicacriv fSdpftapoi 
 f XX?7^a9 ; Trdre /carearrj ' Apra^ep^rjs et9 
 ySacrfXe/az/ ; - o^ crvfjL/3/3ov\Vcr0 rois api<TTQis 15 
 
 8. TOV f3a<ri\&i>s : gen. of 
 separation ; the preposition is 
 often not repeated after 
 
 race. The other two were 
 the Dorian and the Aeolian 
 branches. The Athenians were 
 lonians, the Spartans Dorians. 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 We have not yet (OUTTCD) surpassed the Greeks 
 in wisdom. The land has been ruled by kings a 
 long time. The power of the people is already 
 established. The slaves revolted from their mas- 
 ters. The slave has never ceased to plot against 
 his master. The orator is already standing beside 
 his antagonist. The king had not reigned many 
 months when he was deposed. The Athenians 
 
 5. never : that is, not ever, 
 ov TTore, or as one word ovirore. 
 A proclitic before an enclitic 
 takes the acute accent. to 
 plot : use the inf . with the ar- 
 ticle, in the gen. 
 
 8. was deposed : Travw in 
 aor. pass. 
 
 1. surpassed: 
 
 2. in wisdom : dat. of re- 
 spect. has been ruled by 
 kings : expressed by one word. 
 
 3 f. is established: pert 
 act. of KaOia-rrjfjLL. revolted : 
 use the /xt-aorist. their : the 
 article is enough. 
 
156 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [154 
 
 were free and did not wish to be reigned over. 
 10 I perceive that you have not yet read the tale. 
 Why have the boys not yet read the orator's 
 speech ? 
 
 9. to be reigned over : ex- 
 pressed by one word. 
 
 12. speech: \6yos, which 
 has a wide range of meaning. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE MODE. 
 
 154. The infinitive is a verbal noun ; that is, like 
 a noun it is used as subject, object, etc., in all cases 
 but the vocative; but it is so far a verb that it 
 may take a subject in the accusative, and any of 
 the modifiers which any part of the verb can take. 
 There is an infinitive in each tense system. 
 
 a. Except in indirect discourse 
 
 The present infinitive denotes an action simply 
 as continued or repeated : as \vew to be loosing (at 
 any time) ; 
 
 The aorist denotes an action simply as brought 
 to pass : as \vaai to loose (at any time) ; 
 
 The perfect denotes an action simply as com- 
 pleted: as \e\vK<=vai, to have loosed (at any time). 
 
 In all these the time is determined only by the 
 context. 
 
 5. The future infinitive denotes an action as 
 future relatively to that of the principal verb ; it is 
 used (1) in indirect discourse to represent a future 
 indicative of the direct, (2) as the complement of 
 
156] 
 
 THE INFINITIVE MODE. 
 
 157 
 
 /ji\\Q) : thus <f)r}alv TOU? <f>i\ov$ /3ov\evcr6(r0ai, Jie 
 says the friends will deliberate, <f>r) rov? <f>l\ovs 
 j3ov\eva-a-dcu he said the friends would deliberate, 
 /j,e\\ov /3ov\vo-o-0ai they were about to delib- 
 erate. (/-teXXo) may take either the present or 
 the future infinitive with no especial difference of 
 meaning). 
 
 155. Infinitives of tirr^/u (<rra-, CTTTJ-). 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 t-crra-veu 
 
 i-crra-a-flai 
 
 [Like the mid.] 
 
 Fut. 
 
 (oriT-cre-cv) 
 
 <7Trf-<TW 
 
 o'Tiq-o'e-crOai 
 
 (TTa-Oij-(T~crOa.L 
 
 1st Aor. 
 
 (TT^-o-at 
 
 VTiq-a'a-o'Oai 
 
 (TTa-Orj-vai 
 
 Mi-aor. 
 
 0"rrj-vaL 
 
 
 
 1st Perf . 
 
 -0-T7/-K-VOt 
 
 
 
 156. Infinitives of \va (\v-, Xu-). 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 (Xv-e-cv) 
 \v-uv 
 
 Xv-c-o-^at 
 
 [Like the mid.] 
 
 Fut. 
 
 (Av-o-e-ev) 
 Xv-aciv 
 
 Xv-cre-cr&u 
 
 \v-0-q-cre-cr0ai 
 
 1st Aor. 
 
 Xv-crat 
 
 Xv-aa-o'Oai 
 
 \vOfj-vai 
 
 1st Perf. 
 
 Ac-Xv-K-vat 
 
 \t-\v-crOaLi 
 
 [Like the mid.] 
 
158 
 
 THE GHEES: OF XENOPHON. 
 
 157. Infinitives of TraiBevco 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 [Like the mid.] 
 
 Fut. 
 
 TratSev-o'C-cr&u 
 
 1st Aor. 
 
 1st Perf . 
 
 Tre-TratSev-Ke-vat 
 
 [Like the mid.] 
 
 NOTE. Similar tables should be formed to show the infini- 
 tives of other verbs, simple and compound. 
 
 158. The endings of the infinitive are 
 Active, -ev (contracted with preceding -e- to -6i>), 
 
 or -vai ; 
 
 Middle, -adai. 
 
 These are added to the tense-stem, as the per- 
 sonal endings are. 
 
 a. Of the active endings -vat, is used in //^-forma- 
 tions (//^-present, /-u-aorist, aorist passive), and in 
 the perfect active ; in the perfect active the tense 
 suffix before -VCLL becomes -/ce-. 
 
 b. In the first aorist active the wholly irregular 
 -aai stands for the tense suffix and infinitive end- 
 ing together. 
 
 159. a. All infinitives in -vai accent the penult. 
 b. The first aorist infinitive active accents the 
 
 penult. 
 
161] THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 c. The perfect middle infinitive accents the pe- 
 nult. 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 160. The participle is a verbal adjective; that 
 is, it has the declension and construction of an 
 adjective, agreeing with a noun or pronoun ; but 
 it is so far a verb that it may take an object or 
 other modifiers of the verb. Participles are formed 
 in every tense system. 
 
 a. Participles generally denote time relatively 
 to that of the leading verb. The aorist participle 
 denotes an act relatively past, and is often trans- 
 lated by our perfect participle, as \vcras having 
 loosed. The perfect participle denotes an act com- 
 pleted at the time of the leading verb, as XeXu/coi? 
 having loosed. It often happens that English does 
 not distinguish between the two. The present 
 participle has the same meaning as in English. 
 Sometimes the present, aorist, and perfect partici- 
 ples differ only as the same tenses of the infinitive 
 do (see 154, a). The future participle may in the 
 paradigms be rendered by about to, as \va-cov about 
 to loose. 
 
 161. Participles of la-rrjfu (crra-, crrrj-'). 
 
 Pres. ACT. (t-ora-vr-, t-(7Ta(rd-). 
 
 N. i-oras t-OTacra l-ard-v 
 
 G. i-ora-vT-os t-orao^s etc., see 166. 
 
160 TEE GHEES: OF XENOPEON. [iei 
 
 MID. (t-oTa-//,evo-, [-ora-//.evd-). 
 
 N. i-ora-/>ievo-s t-(rra-/xn/ l-(TTa-/xvo-v 
 
 G. [-(TTa-fjitvov t-(7ra-/w,j^s etc., see 163, a. 
 
 Fut. ACT. (o-Tiy-o-o-vT-, o-Trj-crovad-). 
 
 G. OTiy-cro-vT-os OT^O-OVCT^S etc., see 165. 
 
 MID. ((7T77-cro-/jievo-, 
 
 G. cTTrj-(To-fjLvov (TTrj-cro-fJievrjs etc., see 163, a. 
 
 PASS. (oTa-077-(TO-/Aevo-, 
 N. crra-Orj-cro-iJievo-s (r 
 G. arTa-Orj-oro-fJievov (TTa-Orj-cro-iJicvrjs etc., see 163, a. 
 
 1st Aor. ACT. (aT^cra-vr-, oT^-(nxcrd-) . 
 
 . o-T7;-o-ds cmy-cra-cra 
 
 G. o-T>;-(ra-vr-os o-Trj-crd-o-rjs etc., see 16G. 
 
 MID. 
 
 N". O"T?y-(ra-/xevo-s 
 G. oT77-cra-/AVov crTrj-cra-fjLtvrjs etc., see 163, a. 
 
 PASS. (ora-06-i/T-, o-ra-^etcrd-) . 
 N. o-ra-^et? (rra-^eto-a ora-tfe'-v 
 
 G. aTa-^-vT-o5 o-ra-^cto-^s etc., see 167. 
 
 Mi- ACT. ACT. (ora-vr-, oTacrd-). 
 
 N. crras (rrao-a ara-v 
 
 G. crra-vT-os (rra-cr^s etc., see 166. 
 
 1st Perf. ACT. (C-CTT^-KOT-, l- 
 
 N. -crr?7-K(os k-crr-q-Kma. 
 
 G. e-CTT^-KOT-OS -<7T7^/CVtds etc., S66 168. 
 
162] THE PARTICIPLE. 161 
 
 162. Participles of ircuSeva) (TratSeu-). 
 
 Pres. ACT. (7rai8cv-o-rr-, TratSev-ovcra-). 
 
 N. TratSev-wv TrtuScv-ovcra TratScv-o-v 
 
 G. TraiScv-o-vT-os TraiScv-ovo^s etc. 
 
 MID. 
 
 N. TrcuSev-o-fievo-s 
 G. 7rat8ev-o-^vov 
 
 TraiSev-o-fJLtvrjs 
 
 7rat8ev-a-/xcvo-v 
 etc. 
 
 Fut. ACT. (TratSev-ao-rr-, 
 
 N. 7rat8eJ-ora)v TratSev-aovcra 
 
 G. TratScv-ao-vr-os 
 
 MID. 
 
 etc. 
 
 N. 
 
 G. 7rat8ciM7O-/xeVov 7rat8ev-o - o-/iK7;s 
 
 PASS. (7rai8v-0T7-cro-/u,vo-, 
 
 N. 7r 
 G. 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 1st Aor. ACT. (TratSev-aa-vr-, 
 N. 7rat8eJ-<rds TratSev-crdera 
 
 G. TratScv-era-vr-os TratSev-aacr^? etc. 
 
 MID. 
 
 N. ?rat8c 
 
 G. 7rat8ei>o-a-/xvov 
 
 PASS. ( 
 N. 7rat8cv-^ets 
 G. TratScv-^c-vr-os 
 
 -, 7rcu8ev-(ra-/xcv-d-) 
 
 t8ev 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
162 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [163 
 
 Perf. ACT. (Tre-rraiSev-Kor-, 7re-7rai8ev-Kwd-). 
 
 N. 7rc-7rat8cu-K(os Tre-TratSev-Kwa 
 
 G. Tre-TraiSev-KOT-os Tre-TraiScu-Kw'ds etc. 
 
 MID. (7T-7rat8ev-/xevo-, 
 
 N. Tre-TratSev'/xeVo-s 7re-7raiSev 
 
 G. 7T-7rat8v-//,vov 7re-7raiSev-)U,v?7S etc. 
 
 163. The participial endings are 
 
 Active, -i/T- (but in the perfect active -or-) ; 
 
 Middle, -pevo-. 
 
 These are added to (or, in the perfect active, com- 
 bined with) the tense stem, and the entire parti- 
 cipial stem is then declined as an adjective. 
 
 a. The middle ending -pevo- presents no diffi- 
 culty ; participles with this ending are declined 
 like ordinary adjectives of the vowel declension. 
 
 164. The accent of the participles is exceptional 
 in the following respects ; the rules apply to the 
 nominative singular masculine. 
 
 a. All third-declension participles in -9, except 
 that of the first aorist active, are oxytone (that is, 
 have the acute on the ultima). This applies to 
 the /u-present, /u-aorist, perfect active, and aorist 
 passive : /CTTO?, <rra$, TreTratSeu/cw, iraiev6eis. 
 
 b. The perfect middle participle accents the 
 penult (as does the perfect middle infinitive) : 
 
166] THE PARTICIPLE. 163 
 
 165. Participles in -o)i>, -ov<ra, -ov are declined 
 like \vcov (\vovr-, \vovad-) : 
 
 Sing. N.V. \v<ov 
 
 G. XUOPTO? 
 
 \vovcra 
 
 XUOUO"?/? 
 
 X0oi> 
 
 X6oi/T09 
 
 D. \VOVTi 
 
 Xuouo"?; 
 
 Xuoi^Tt 
 
 A. \vovra 
 
 \vovdav 
 
 XOoi/ 
 
 DualN. A.V. \vovre 
 
 \vovcrd 
 
 X6oi/T 
 
 G. D. \VOVTOiV 
 
 \vov<raiv 
 
 \VOVTOIV 
 
 Plu. N.V. \vovres 
 
 \vovaaL 
 
 \vowra 
 
 G. \IOVTCOV 
 
 \vovcrcov 
 
 \VOVTO) V 
 
 D. \VOVai 
 
 \vovcrcus 
 
 \vovcri, 
 
 A. \vovras 
 
 \vovcrds 
 
 \VOVTCL 
 
 166. Participles in -a?, 
 * ( - \ . 
 
 -da a, -av are 
 
 declined like 
 
 Sing. N. V. <7Ta? 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ardv 
 ardvros 
 
 D. a-rdvTi 
 A. crrdvra 
 
 ardarj 
 ardaav 
 
 ardv 
 
 Dual N. A. V. a-rdvre 
 
 araad 
 
 aravre 
 
 G. D. (rrdvTOiv 
 
 araacuv 
 
 ardvroiv 
 
 Plu. N. V. o-raj/re? 
 
 ardacu 
 
 ardvra 
 
 G. (TTaVTCOV 
 
 arda&v 
 
 f 
 
 aTCLVTWV 
 
 D~2~. 
 (TTCLG L 
 
 / 
 
 ardai 
 
 A. o-rdvras 
 
 crra<7a9 
 
 ardvra 
 
 This is like Tra? except as to the accent of the first form 
 and the quantity and accent of TTO.V. The accent of the first 
 aorist active participle (Xveras, TraiSev'cras) is recessive. 
 
164 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [167 
 
 167, Aorist passive participles are declined like 
 (\v06vr-. 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 \v0evTo? 
 
 \v6evra 
 
 Dual N. A. V. \v6bre 
 G. D. \v0evroiv 
 
 Plu. N.V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 \v6evres 
 \v0evrcov 
 \v6el<ri 
 \vOevTas 
 
 \v0eicra 
 
 \v0ev 
 
 \v0ei<T<r)s 
 
 \v0evros 
 
 \v06iarj 
 \v6ela-av 
 
 \v6evrt, 
 \v0ev 
 
 \v0eicra 
 
 \v6evre 
 
 \v0eiaaiv 
 
 \v0evroiv 
 
 \vdelcrai \vdevra 
 
 \vdeia-i 
 \v6evra 
 
 168. Perfect active participles are declined like 
 
 XeXu/coi? 
 
 Sing. N. V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G.D. 
 
 Plu. N.V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 -, \e\vicviar) : 
 
 \e\vxv2a 
 
 \e\VKOTt, 
 
 \e\VKora 
 
 \e\vfcvla 
 \e\vicvlav 
 
 XeXu/co? 
 
 \e\VKvLa \e\VKore 
 
 \e\VKOTOW \e\VKViCLLV \\VKOTOLV 
 
 \e\VKora 
 
 XeXf/core? 
 \\v/cdcri 
 
 \e\vKviai 
 
 \\V/CVIO)V 
 
 \e\vfcvlais \\VKO<TI, 
 XeXv/cora 
 
170] 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 165 
 
 169. The /u-aorist participle of yt,yvob(r/cco is as 
 follows : 
 
 (ryvovT-, yvovaar). 
 
 Sing. N. V. yvovs yvovcra yvdv 
 
 G. yvdvTOS ryvovarjs yvovTO? 
 
 D. ryvdvri yvovcrr) 
 
 A. ryvdvTa yvovcrav 
 
 yvov 
 
 Dual N. A. V. yz/oWe 
 
 G. D. ryVOVTOLV 
 
 Plu. N.V. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 yvovTcov 
 yvovat, 
 
 yVOVTCLS 
 
 yvovaa 
 yvovcraw 
 
 yvova-cu 
 yvovcr&v 
 
 yvdvToiv 
 yvovra 
 
 ryvovads 
 
 yvovat, 
 yvdvTa 
 
 170. a. If the participial ending -VT- follows a 
 tense suffix ending in -o-, the nominative singular 
 masculine rejects the case-ending -9, drops -r, and 
 lengthens o to o>, as in \vwv for \V-O-VT-S. Other- 
 wise -VT- is dropped before the case-ending -9, and 
 the preceding vowel lengthened in compensation, 
 as in /crra? for IO-TCI-VT-S : e then becomes e^, as in 
 \v0eis for Xt^^e-z/r-?, o becomes ou, as in yvovs for 
 <yvo-vT-s. The dative plural also shows this latter 
 change. The nominative singular neuter simply 
 drops -T without lengthening, as in \vov for \V-O-VT. 
 
 b. In the perfect active participle -KOT- may be 
 called the combined tense and participial suffix; 
 
166 THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON. [170 
 
 the nominative singular masculine and neuter 
 have -/C609 and -#09. 
 
 c. The formation of the feminine participial 
 stem is somewhat irregular. Note that all par- 
 ticiples (and adjectives) of the consonant and 
 a-declensions have short a in the nominative, accu- 
 sative, and vocative singular feminine ; all partici- 
 ples and adjectives of the o- and a-declensions have 
 long a or rj in these forms. 
 
 d. Comparison of the passive forms shows that 
 the passive suffix appears as -07)- before a single 
 consonant, elsewhere as -6e-. So in the /u-aorist a 
 theme vowel is long before a single consonant, 
 elsewhere short. 
 
 The following synopses, giving the first forms of each 
 tense and mode, will show the relation of the infinitives and 
 participles to the indicative forms of the same system. The 
 principal parts are in full-face type. 
 
 NOTE. The participles of other verbs should be given in 
 tabular form, as in 161 and 162. 
 
171] 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 167 
 
 7* 7^ 7 
 
 p x ja p x ja ^ Ps ^^^ j a 
 
 t Ml? ' 8 " T: ? 
 
 PR 
 
 W 
 3 
 
 J 
 
 QD 
 H 
 
 B 
 
 H 
 fc> 
 
 
 
 Kj 
 
 S 
 
 3 1 f 
 
 pK<3>.a 
 
 * 
 
 I 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 i 
 
168 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [172 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ w 
 
 5 CO 
 
 I * 
 
 H 
 a OQ 
 
 
 CO 
 H 
 
 HI 
 
 3 3 
 
 V P P 
 
 CO 60 
 
 A A 
 
173] 
 
 alrea) 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 173. Vocabulary. 
 
 alrrj-), alrtjaa), 
 yrrjica? yrrjfjuai,, yrtf- 
 
 169 
 
 rj /3otf0ei,a, -a? 
 o /3&>yu,09, -oO 
 Sov\dco 
 
 , Sov X&><7<w, 
 
 , Sov\ct)0rjv (fr. SoOXo?) 
 (Jbvva-, Svvrj- 
 
 &vvrj0rjv, pass. dep. f 
 
 eavTov, 3 -779, -of), reflexive pron., 
 
 ( 
 
 elbevai, inf. of oZSa, irreg., perf . in 
 form, pres. in meaning, 
 
 spaTrevfca,* re0e- > 
 
 
 , 0pa7TV0rjV ) 
 
 , 0V(TG), e6v<ra, re- ) 
 , erv0rjv \ 
 
 ask (for some- 
 thing), de- 
 mand. 
 
 help. 
 
 altar. 
 
 > enslave. 
 
 can, be able. 
 
 one 's self, him- 
 self, herself. 
 
 to know. 
 
 serve, worship 
 (therapeutics). 
 
 sacrifice. 
 
 1 The diphthong at is regularly changed to rj by the aug- 
 ment. See 118, 2. 
 
 2 Verbs beginning with a vowel lengthen that vowel for 
 the reduplication ; in such verbs, then, the reduplication 
 takes the same form as the augment. 
 
 3 Declined like avros, but from the meaning there is no 
 occasion to use it in the nominative or vocative. Compare 
 Latin sui, sibi, etc. 
 
 4 A rough mute (<, 0, ;() becomes smooth (TT, T, K) in the 
 
170 THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 ol "Icoves, -cov 
 
 [173 
 
 fj,d\\ov, adv., comparative, 
 
 TI /jid^rj, -779 
 
 oifcot,, adv. (fr. ol/co^, 
 
 (ol-, 0677-)? oirj(ro/j,at,) 
 v, 2 adv., 
 
 7roXXa/a9, 2 adv., 
 f) <rlrytf, -7)9 
 
 , , k Y make an expedi- 
 
 o-vo-rparevco (a-vv + crrparev-), av- . . 7 . . 
 
 / ,1 tionwith,ioin 
 
 a-rparevcra), --- 
 
 etc., reg., 
 
 Tonians. 
 common, public. 
 more, rather. 
 battle, fight. 
 at home. 
 think, suppose. 
 everywhere. 
 often. 
 silence. 
 
 , . 
 in an expeai- 
 
 tion. 
 Sokrates or Soc- 
 
 rci/ces. 
 body. 
 
 dare. 
 
 <f>avpo$, -a, -6v (fr. root of </>eu- ) plain, evident, 
 vco) j visible. 
 
 -oi>9, -ei, -rjv 
 
 -TO9 
 
 (roXyLta-, roX/i?;-), 
 
 w9, adv. 
 
 plainly, openly. 
 
 reduplication. See 211. In like manner the theme 0v- 
 becomes TV- in the passive system, because the passive suffix 
 in the next syllable begins with 0. 
 
 1 Imperfect wo/x^v. See 118, 2, and compare atrew. 
 
 2 Note the derivation and endings. We shall meet other 
 adverbs of place in -ov, and all the numeral adverbs but the 
 rst three end in -a/as. 
 
174] 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 171 
 
 o <f>i\6(ro(f)o<;, "Ov 
 
 &v, ovaa, 6V, 1 pres. pple. of 
 
 lover of wisdom, 
 
 philosopher, 
 being. 
 
 174. ^Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 
 Ol 'AOijvalot,, TWV 'Icovcov TI^TJ a^ea-rrjKorcov CLTTO 
 /3a<7fc\e&>9 Kal alrTjo-civTow avrov? /BoijOeiav, vvve- 
 o-rparevcravro avrols, oWe? /cal avrol "lave? TO 761/09. 
 Se i*i?<ra? TO 1)9 eV rfj *Aaia 
 
 four meanings which we always 
 distinguish in English. The 
 first meaning, and, is familiar. 
 Below in /cal rb <rw/xa Kal r^v 
 tyvx^v we translate the first Kal 
 by both, the second by and. 
 Besides these uses as a conj., 
 the word is often an adv. em- 
 phasizing the following word 
 or phrase, with the force of 
 also, too, or of even. Deter- 
 mine by the context which 
 meaning is intended. TO -y- 
 vos : in race ; ace. of specifica- 
 tion. 
 
 4 f . Adpctos : Dareios I., son 
 of Hystaspes, king of Persia 
 521-486 B.C. viK^jcrds, 8ovX<&- 
 <rds : having conquered and hav- 
 ing enslaved; or better after 
 conquering and enslaving. The 
 
 1 f. TWV 'IwVWV d<()CrTT|K6- 
 
 T<OV, atrqo-dvTwv : a noun and 
 pple. may stand together in 
 the gen., not directly connected 
 with any other word; this is 
 called the genitive absolute. 
 Its uses are similar to those of 
 the Latin abl. absolute. It 
 should most often be translated 
 by a clause; thus here, when 
 the lonians, etc. 
 
 2. avrovs, po^|0iav : objects 
 of aiT-rjo-di'Twv. As in Latin, 
 verbs of asking, teaching, and 
 some others may take two ac- 
 cusatives, one of the person, 
 the other of the thing. 
 
 3. avTots : dat. of associa- 
 tion after <rvv- in <rvve<7Tpa.Teij- 
 <ravTo. KCU : also. Compare 
 140, I, 10 and note. Kal has 
 
 1 Gen. OVTOS, ovvrjs, ovros, etc., like AiW, 165. 
 
172 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [174- 
 
 5 TroXXaZ? 
 
 /cal &ov\ct)o"ds 7rd\i,v rot>9 a?ro- 
 /cal TOU9 ' A.0rjvaiov$ SovXcocrat 
 <f>' eavrov arparevaacrdaL. ov- 
 7ro\efJLioi (fravepcos eyiyvovro Tlep&at, /cal 
 
 /Jia\\ov r&v 7ro\\a)V. ol 
 
 Oepairevcov 
 yap 
 
 aor. pples. here denote actions 
 which preceded that of the verb 
 
 5 f . pdxais : dat. of means, 
 though in translating we should 
 use in. rot>s oL-iroo-Tavras : 
 practically a noun, object of 
 dov\6<ras : translate by a rel. 
 clause. 
 
 7. TOVS ToXji'/jtravras : the 
 repetition of TOVS shows that 
 the pple. belongs to 'AOyvalovs. 
 Translate by a rel. clause. 
 
 8. ovv: accordingly, or an 
 unemphatic therefore or then. 
 Another post-positive word. 
 iroXljuoi : this was really the 
 cause of the Persian expedition 
 against Athens and the other 
 Greeks of Greece proper. 
 
 10. 6pairva)v : pred. nom. 
 after <f>ai>epbs ?iv, agreeing with 
 the subject, Swjcpdrr/s. This is 
 the first instance of the supple- 
 mentary pple., a common idiom 
 in Greek, to which there is no 
 corresponding usage in English. 
 Lit. Sokrates was plain (or well- 
 
 known) worshipping; i.e., it 
 was well known that S. wor- 
 shipped. Oepawetwv is thus an 
 essential part of the predicate, 
 and not merely a loose modifier. 
 In distinction from the supple- 
 mentary pple., the usage in the 
 gen. abs., and in 6vres, vlirfi- 
 (ras, 5oi>Xc6(ras, is called the 
 circumstantial pple. ; that in 
 Tofls dTrocrrdvras, roi)s roX/x^- 
 a-avras, is called the attributive 
 pple. 
 
 11. iroXv: much; adver- 
 bial ace., so frequent as to be 
 practically an adverb. TWV 
 iroXXwv: gen. of comparison 
 after nSXKov. Comparatives 
 without TJ (than) are followed 
 by the gen. Cf. the Latin use 
 of the abl. after comparatives 
 without quam. The phrase 
 ol iro\\oL (lit. the many) is 
 often used in the sense of 
 the mass of men, most peo- 
 ple. |iv -yap : notice the posi- 
 tion, between the article and 
 
 TToXXo/. 
 
174] 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 173 
 
 TroXXot. olovrai rovs Oeovs rd pev el&evai rd &' OVK 
 elbevai, ^to/cpdrrjs Se Trdvra fjuev cSero 6eov<$ elSevai, 
 rd re \<yd/jiva /cal Trpdrro/Jieva /cal ra o'lyfj /3ov- 
 
 , 7ravra%ov Se irapelvai (are present), /cal 15 
 \v ?roXXa/a9 /j,ev oll/coi 7roXXa/a9 S* eirl 
 
 ToXeft>9 /3co/JLO)V. A:aXft)9 Be 7T7rCU- 
 
 Sevfjievo? r)V KOI TO <rw/Jia /cal rrjv ^v^tjv rot>9 jap 
 jjirj &vva/jivov$ eavr&v apfteiv OVK </>?) Swrfo'ea'dat, 
 aXXo)i/ deiv. 20 
 
 12. rd fUv, rd 84: some 
 things, other things. In this 
 and some like phrases the ar- 
 ticle retains its earlier force as 
 a pronoun. 
 
 14. T : both. Enclitic par- 
 ticle slightly weaker than /ca/, 
 like Latin que. re ... KaL is a 
 little less strong, both . . . and, 
 than KaL . . . KaL irpa/rrdficva : 
 without the article, therefore 
 still affected by the ra before 
 \ey6fjLeva. Therefore ra . . . 
 TrpaTT6fjiva as one phrase is 
 parallel with ra pov\ev6fjLi>a, 
 and re is correlative with the 
 KaL before the latter phrase. 
 -irparru is the common Attic 
 prose form for the older irpdo-o-u. 
 So y\u>rra for y\uxr<ra, and in 
 other words containing rr or 
 <r<r. (riyfj : dat. of manner. 
 
 15. iravraxov 84 : with 
 which per is this 5t correlative ? 
 
 16. iroXXdicis . . . 
 
 cf . 153, 1., 1 f . iro\\al fUv... iro\- 
 \al 5^ and note. 4ir: in the 
 literal sense of on something 
 brL usually takes the gen. in 
 prose. 
 
 17 f. KO.XWS: well; adv. of 
 manner from /caX6s. Compare 
 (pavep&s from <f>avep6s. Adverbs 
 of manner in -ws are formed 
 from most adjectives ; the ac- 
 cent is like that of the gen. 
 plur. of the adjective. ireircu- 
 Scvplvos : trained, disciplined. 
 TO o-cojia, TTJV +VX^ V : acc ^ 
 
 specification. 
 
 19. jrfj: TIO^. The differ- 
 ence between ^ and ov must 
 be learned by careful observa- 
 tion. Here TOI)S IJL^J dwa^vovs 
 is general, meaning any one 
 who cannot ; while roi)s otf 5v- 
 va/j.evovs would be particular, re- 
 ferring only to certain definite 
 persons whom the writer has in 
 mind. f>T] : imperfect of 
 
174 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [174 
 
 (0a-, ^77-), conjugated like Iffryv, 
 except in the 2d sing., thus : 
 
 e<f>a<rav. 
 but 
 
 modules 
 
 when <t>r)nl introduces a nega- 
 tive clause, the negative regu- 
 larly stands just before the 
 form of 0i?/u/, as if compounded 
 with it. Compare Latin nego. 
 
 n. Translate into Greek. 
 
 I did not think the Greeks knew everything. 
 He said he did not know the man who was caus- 
 ing the lonians to revolt. The barbarians wished 
 to enslave the Greeks, but the Greeks declared 
 5 they would be unable to do so. The lonians, 
 having revolted from the king, asked help of the 
 Athenians, who were themselves also lonians in 
 race. Sokrates evidently thought that the best 
 way to ruling others was through conquering 
 
 1. knew : use the inf. 
 
 2 f. the man who was 
 causing to revolt: express 
 by the article and the attribu- 
 tive pple. ; in the pres. tense, 
 because the time referred to is 
 the same as that of he said. 
 
 4. declared: 0i^. 
 
 5. they : if this referred to 
 the Greeks, the subject of de- 
 clared, it would not be ex- 
 pressed in Greek ; since it 
 refers to some one else than 
 the subject of the principal 
 verb, it must be expressed. 
 
 7. who were : pple. ; them- 
 selves and lonians, being predi- 
 
 cate words denoting the same 
 persons as Athenians, must 
 agree with Athenians. 
 
 8. evidently thought : use 
 the supplementary pple.: lit. 
 was evident thinking. 
 
 9. to ruling others: use 
 tirl with an inf. clause preceded 
 by rb to mark the clause as 
 ace. governed by tnl. Euling 
 is here a verbal noun of the 
 same nature as the Greek inf. 
 So conquering. was : use the 
 inf. el vat. through conquer- 
 ing : did with an inf. clause pre- 
 ceded by TOV to mark it as be- 
 ing in the gen. governed by 5id. 
 
174] 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 175 
 
 one's self ; for he that could not rule himself was 10 
 already himself enslaved; and he used to advise 
 all his friends to 'know themselves.' When the 
 Persians, after being defeated by the Athenians in 
 the battle at Marathon, were planning another ex- 
 pedition against them, the Athenians asked the 15 
 Spartans for help ; for the contest, they said, was 
 a common one. Though few, the Greeks dared 
 to take their place in battle against the barbarians, 
 who were many. 
 
 10. he that could not: 
 
 attributive pple., with ^ t be- 
 cause the statement is general. 
 The tense of could and icas in- 
 dicates that this statement is 
 given as that of Sokrates; in 
 other words, that the clause is 
 an indirect quotation. This re- 
 lation is marked in Greek by 
 putting the principal verb of 
 the clause (was enslaved) in 
 the inf. Note the position of 
 ydp. The first himself is re- 
 flexive; the second is merely 
 intended to emphasize the sub- 
 ject of was enslaved, and should 
 therefore be expressed by avrov. 
 12. know themselves : 
 use the aor. There was an 
 inscription in the vestibule of 
 the temple of Apollo at Delphi, 
 "Know thyself" (yv&Oi <rav- 
 r6v), which Sokrates often 
 quoted. -when : #re. 
 
 13. after being defeated : 
 
 express by a circumstantial 
 pple., aor. pass. 
 
 14 f. another expedi- 
 tion : lit. to-make-an-expedition 
 again. 
 
 16. they said : can be 
 sufficiently expressed by put- 
 ting the clause, for the con- 
 test was a common one, in the 
 inf. 
 
 17 ff. though few, etc. : in 
 Greek say the Greeks, being 
 few, dared . . . against the bar- 
 barians, being many. take 
 their place: /u-aor. of Ka.01- 
 a-Trjfjn, followed by ets with the 
 ace. because of the motion 
 implied. against the bar- 
 barians: dat. of association 
 with iJLdxyv. (We say fight 
 with, using with of hostile, as 
 well as of friendly, associa- 
 tion.) 
 
176 
 
 THE GKEEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [176- 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 175. Verbs in -aw, -eca, and -6co are contracted 
 throughout the present system. That is, final a, 
 e, or o of the theme unites with the following 
 vowel or diphthong, according to certain rules, to 
 form one long vowel or diphthong. The uncon- 
 tracted forms are like those of other ^-presents ; 
 but the contracted forms are alone used in Attic 
 prose. 
 
 176. Present System of vlKaco (ylica-) conquer. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D.2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 Active. 
 viAcd-co vZ/coi 
 
 n/ca-i viKa 
 
 vZ/cd-e-TOv vZ/carov 
 vZ/carov 
 
 vlKa-ovcrt 
 
 Middle (Passive) 
 i/ZK<i-o-^uxi vZ/ca) l 
 vZKa-T| or -i vZ/ca 
 
 vZKa-6-//,e^a 
 vZKa-o-vrat vZKwvrat 
 
 Impf. 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D.2 
 3 
 
 Active. 
 
 c-n/ca-o-v evf/ccav 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 c-vZ/cd-ov 
 
 e-vZ/cd-c-ro evZ/caro 
 
 c-viKA-6-rov cvl/carov 
 
177] 
 
 CONTEACT VERBS. 
 
 177 
 
 Impf. 
 
 P.I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 Active. 
 
 -I/lKO,-O-/AV 
 
 evZ/care 
 
 c-vt/ca-o-v 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 c-vZ/cd-o-vro cvZicaivTO 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 i'tKot-a>j/ 
 
 v/cav 
 vZ/caivros 
 
 vZ/cd-ovo-a 
 
 etc. 
 
 <0>V 
 
 etc. 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 vZKa-6-/icvos, -77, -ov 
 ievav, -lys, etc. 
 
 -17, -ov 
 -r/5, etc. 
 
 177. The contractions of verbs in -a&> are all 
 included in the following rule : 
 
 (1) a + an e-sound 1 (e, 77, e^, rf) gives a (a) ; 
 
 (2) a + an 0-sound (o, o>, o^, 2 ov) gives o> (w) ; 
 
 (3) Original i is retained as i subscript. 
 
 a. In vlKav (from vZKaeiv) t is not retained, because it was 
 not in the original form. That is, vZ/ca-civ is contracted from 
 vZ/ca-e-cv, ct being here merely a way of writing the long 
 
 1 In giving this rule pronounce the e- in e-sound as in prey. 
 
 2 In the forms thus far given the combination a + ot does 
 not occur, but it will occur later. 
 
178 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [178- 
 
 sound of c (practically the same as French e prolonged, or 
 German long e). In such cases the i was never pronounced. 
 
 178. The contract syllable takes an accent only 
 when one of the syllables contracted had one ; it 
 takes 
 
 The circumflex if the first syllable was accented, 
 The acute if the second was accented. 
 
 179. Present System of 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 love. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P.I 
 2 
 3 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 </)tX^-0-jLWU 
 
 Impf. 
 
 S.I 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P.I 
 2 
 3 
 
 Active. 
 
 <f>L\OVV 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 <t>L\L(T00V 
 
 <J>L\OVV 
 
 -<f>l\i-0-VTO <f>l\OVVTO 
 
181] 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 179 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 PAKTICIPLES. 
 
 Active. 
 
 <f>lXoVVTOS 
 
 etc. 
 
 <f>iXovv 
 etc. 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 ;, -ov 
 
 ^>tXc-o-/xei/ov, -lys, etc. 
 
 ^>tXov/xevo9, -17, -ov 
 ys, etc. 
 
 180. The contractions of verbs in -ew are all in 
 eluded in the following rule : 
 
 (1) e + e gives et; 
 
 (2) e + o gives ov ; 
 
 (3) e before a long vowel or diphthong is ab- 
 sorbed. 
 
 181. Present System of SovXaco (SouXo-) enslave. 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Active. 
 
 2 j 8oiA6-i5 
 3 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 SovXovjMU 
 8ovX6--g or -i SovXol 
 
 SovXorrat 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 SovXovrov 
 
180 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [181 
 
 Pres. 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 Active. 
 
 8ouA<5-o-/x,ev SovAov/xcv 
 8ouA6--re 8ouAo9rc 
 8ouA6-ovcn 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 8ovAov/x 
 SovAowfle 
 
 Impf. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 Active. 
 
 c-oWAo-o-v 
 -8ouAo--s 
 
 cSovAovv 
 
 e-SovAo-o-v 
 
 tW/e (Passive). 
 
 c-8ovA<5--ro 
 
 -8ovAo-6-/x,e0a c 
 
 C-8ovA<J--O"^ 
 
 -8ovA6-o-vro e 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 SovAovv 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Active. 
 
 etc. 
 
 SovAwv SovAovcra SovAovv 
 
 SovAovvros SovAovo-^? etc. 
 
 Middle (Passive). 
 ;, -ov 
 
 8ovAo-o-/xei/ov, -^5, etc. 
 
 8ovAov/xcvo5, -77, -ov 
 8ovAov/ivov, -779, etc. 
 
182] CONTRACT VERBS. 181 
 
 182. The contractions of verbs in -6co are all in- 
 cluded in the following rule : 
 
 (1) o + e or o or ov gives ov ; 
 
 (2) o + ?; l or & gives o> ; 
 
 (3) o + an ^-diphthong (et, ot, 1 77) gives ot,. 
 
 a. In SovXow (from 8ovXo-cti/) t is not retained, because it 
 was not in the original form, &>vA.o-c-ev, and was never pro- 
 nounced. Compare 177, a. 
 
 The following synopses show that the remaining parts of 
 these contract verbs are perfectly regular. 
 
 1 In the forms thus far given the combination o + rj and 
 o + 01 do not occur, but they will occur later. 
 
 For the convenience of teachers who wish at this point to 
 group the principles of contraction in a more general form, 
 the rules given in the Hadley- Allen Grammar are appended, 
 with slight changes. 
 
 a. An open vowel before a close forms a diphthong 
 with it. 
 
 6. Two like vowels unite in the common long. 
 
 c. An o-sound absorbs an a- or an e-sound and becomes CD. 
 
 d. If an a- and an e-sound come together, the first in order 
 absorbs the second, and becomes long. 
 
 e. But e-e gives a ; c-o, o-c, o-o give ov. 
 
 f. A simple vowel before a diphthong is often contracted 
 with the first vowel of the diphthong : the last vowel, if it is 
 i, becomes subscript. 
 
 g. But c and o are absorbed in 01 or ov without further 
 change. 
 
 h. And o-ci, o-j; give ot ; a-ov gives o>. 
 
 (The close vowels are c and v ; all others are open.) 
 
182 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [183 
 
 g X 
 
 
 
 x"*\ * 
 
 ^ CO 
 
 CO 
 
 So 
 
 CO 
 H 
 
 . 
 
 mi 
 
 1 1 s i 
 
 c 
 
 1 'II I 
 
 H 
 CL, 
 
 a 3 - 
 
 b b b 
 
 " v 
 
 c3 
 
 3 ai 
 
 i 
 
184] 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 183 
 
 ~ s </ 
 
 5>^vl V 3 
 
 S- 
 
 
184 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [185 
 
 s 
 
 H 
 
 OQ 
 
 tf 
 
 CQ 
 
 .- 
 
 O * 
 CO 02 
 
 ^ W 
 .* 
 
 H 
 
 CO CO CO CO 
 
 43 
 
 g CO CO CO CO 
 
 ^ co co co co 
 
 CO CO 
 
 ^ M 
 
 1 1J1 
 
 * 331 
 
 ">J O 
 
 **S <*% ^-H *^ /^ '^ 
 
 CO CO CO CO CO 
 
 ^0000 
 ^ co co co co 
 
 
 CO CO CO 
 
186] CONTRACT VERBS. 185 
 
 186. The interrogative pronoun is rt?, rl who? 
 which? what? Its accent never changes to the 
 grave, this being the only exception to the rule in 
 13. The same word when enclitic is the indefinite 
 pronoun some, any. 
 
 Interrogative. Indefinite. 
 
 M. F. N. M. F. N. 
 
 S. N. rk rl rfe rl 
 
 G* * f / 
 
 TIVO<$, TOV TIVQS, TOV 
 
 Df * / / 
 
 rivu TO) TIVI* TCO 
 
 I ' t 
 
 A. riva TI Tiva T\ 
 
 D. N. A. Tive Tive 
 
 G. D. rtvow Tivolv 
 
 P. N. TH/e? riva TIV& Tiva 
 
 G. TIVCOV TIV&V 
 
 D/ / 
 
 TI<JI Tiai 
 
 A I It f 
 
 Tiva<$ Tiva TIVOS Tiva 
 
 a. In the genitive and dative singular the forms TOV, ro> 
 are quite as common as the longer forms, and must be care- 
 fully distinguished from the article. 
 
 b. The accents printed in the forms of the indefinite pro- 
 noun are those which the forms take when, by the regular 
 rules for enclitics (55), they come to have an accent. (In 
 the case of rts, rl the grave accent is merely a conventional 
 way of distinguishing these, when spoken of separately, from 
 the interrogative forms.) 
 
186 
 
 -ov 
 
 THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON. [187 
 
 187. Vocabulary. 
 
 worthy. 
 
 worthy, think 
 
 eZra, adv., 
 
 r o9, -77, -6v (fr. $vva/JLai) , able, capable, 
 si, conj., proclitic, if. 
 
 afterwards, then, 
 
 secondly. 
 , adv., still. 
 
 adv. (comparative /xaX- ) very, much (more, 
 \ov, superl. /j,d\icrTa), ) most*). 
 
 01 MLYJOOI, -G>V M.ecles. 
 
 o Bevocfrcov, -wz>ro9 XenopTion. 
 
 0409, oia, olov, rel. pron. of ) of what sort, as 
 
 quality, ) (Lat. qualis). 
 
 6fio\ojea) (0/^0X076-, o/ioXo- 
 777-), 0^0X07770-0), coy 
 
 7770-a, 
 
 0)^0X0777^77^ (fr. 6/-&0- 
 
 TO 6WyLfca, -TO9 
 
 > agree. 
 
 name. 
 
 1 Further illustrations of the temporal augment, and of 
 the fact that the reduplication and augment have the same 
 form if the theme begins with a vowel. (Cf . atrco) 173 and 
 note.) 
 
 2 6/x.d-A.oyos, of the same word, agreeing (OJJLO- having the 
 same root as o/xotos and English same)) has given us homolo- 
 gous. 
 
188] CONTRACT VERBS. 187 
 
 Treipdco (ireipa-, Tre^pa-), Tret- A test, make trial of; 
 paa-to, eirelpcura, TreireipaKa, I (indir. mid.) try 
 7T7ripdfjiaii 7Ti,pa0r]v (fr. j for one's self, en- 
 7TLpd) J deavor, try. 
 
 TrjcrTo?, -?;, -6v faithful. 
 
 o 7roVo9, -ov toil, work. 
 
 (7Tft>Xe-, 7Tft)X^-), -^crw, A 
 
 e7ra>X?7/ca, TreTreo- > seK. 
 ^0rjv 
 
 6 a-vvep<y6s, -ov (GVV, epyov) helper. 
 
 rlfjidco (rlfjia-, rtyu,^- 1 ) -770-0), ert- A 
 
 , rerifirjKa, rert^/Lta^, > honor. 
 ifAijd'rjv (fr. rl^irf) ) 
 
 r/, inter, pron., ^Aol* which? what? 
 
 . . , ( som^, anv (-one or 
 
 t?, rl, mdef. pron., '. * v 
 
 ( -thing). 
 
 188. Exercises. 
 I. Translate into English. 
 e'cr^e (received) /JLCV TO 6Vo/ia a?ro TOV 
 K.vpov TOV e% dpxf)<> TOU? 
 
 1 f . 6'vofjLa : this is the form 
 used histead of 6wfM hi the 
 
 Attic dialect. TOV 
 distinguished by this epithet 
 
 1 Enough examples have been given to illustrate the fact 
 that verbs in -ao>, -ew, and -dw regularly have the final vowel 
 of the theme long outside of the present system ; and here- 
 after, for such verbs, only the short form of the theme will 
 be given, a lengthens to d after p ; elsewhere to rj. Of the 
 principal parts of vowel verbs hereafter only the present and 
 future will be given, if the rest are formed regularly. 
 
188 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [188 
 
 Svvacrdat Se fyaviv rj\iov TO ovof^a. r]V Se r&v pera 
 
 Kvpov TOP ap^alov Ilpo-a>v dfycoraros ap^eiv, o>9 
 
 5 6fJLo\,o<yeiTcu VTTO TTCUVT^V rwv IJVODKOTCDV olos yv. 
 
 KOI <f>i\ovv avrov, w (frrjo-i Sevoffr&v, TroXXol Sia 
 
 ancient from the younger Cy- 
 rus ; we call him the Elder, or 
 the Great. He conquered the 
 Medes about 559 B.C. 
 
 2. TOV . . . VIKWVTOS : trans- 
 late this attributive pple. by a 
 relative clause. ! dp x"ns : 
 originally, first. In many such 
 phrases the Greek says from 
 where we say in. 
 
 3 f. SvvcurOai : signifies; 
 so dtvafus is used for the force 
 or meaning of a word. The 
 English order of the clause 
 would be <pdffl 5 rb tivopa 5tiva- 
 o-Oai 7J\iov, but this would be 
 colorless, without expression, 
 in Greek, as if one should 
 in English make the statement 
 in a perfectly monotonous tone. 
 There is an antithesis (100, 
 10, a) between the source of 
 the name and its meaning; 
 therefore dvi>acr6ai is the most 
 prominent or emphasized word 
 of its clause, and is for that 
 reason put first. <pda-i is im- 
 portant grammatically, and so 
 may properly stand early, while 
 it was rather a habit to put a 
 form of <f>r]fjLt within the quota- 
 tion which it introduces, 
 
 is the least important word in 
 the clause, being a mere repeti- 
 tion of 6vojjia in the first line, 
 and therefore is put last, in the 
 place of least emphasis ; ^Xtov, 
 telling what the name signi- 
 fies, is far more important and 
 is placed before it. TWV . . . 
 Ilcpo-ttv : gen. of the whole, 
 with the superlative the same 
 usage as. in Latin. jjtcrd Kv- 
 pov : say since Cyrus. 
 
 4. dJiw-Taros : superl. of 
 #ios, formed by adding -raros, 
 -TJ, -QV to the stem of the posi- 
 tive. For the lengthening of o 
 of the stem to a compare ved- 
 re/oos, 125, I., 5. 
 
 5. TWV l-yvwKOTwv : those 
 who have discerned. uW with 
 the gen. is the regular way of 
 expressing the agent with pas- 
 sive verbs. 
 
 6. ws: a proclitic before an 
 enclitic takes the acute ac- 
 cent. gvo<|>a>v : in the An- 
 abasis and elsewhere Xenophon 
 represents Cyrus as a very at- 
 tractive man, of many virtues 
 and few faults. 8td : with the 
 ace. means because o/, on ac- 
 count of: 8ia TroXXd for many 
 
188] 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 189 
 
 TroXXa. Trpcorov fjuev yap Trepl TTCLVTOS eVotetro, el 
 VTTOCT^OLTO (promised) T6, ical TTOLCLV avro elra Se 
 fjt,d\a (fravepbs TJV Treiptopevos vlitav rov? fjuev <f>i\ov$ 
 
 V TTOltoV TOt>9 Se 7rO\/ALOV$ KafCO)? TTOltoV. TTlCTTol IO 
 
 ovv r)crav avrS ol (f)i\o^ /ecu eVet/owz/ro a>9 /-taXtcrra 
 e&vvavro crvvepryol avrq) ajaffol elvai. eVel yap 
 KOpd? nva TTICTTOV re /cal SvvaTov ovra, 
 
 reasons. There is a strong 
 tendency in Greek to place 
 near each other words of allied 
 or of contrasted meaning, or 
 two forms of the same word in 
 different constructions, as here 
 iro\\ol and iro\\d. This rhe- 
 torical device for enhancing the 
 force of both words was called 
 Trapovo/JLCLffld (Trapd, tfpo/xa) paro- 
 nomasia. 
 
 7. irpwrov : neut. form used 
 adverbially : in the first place. 
 ircpl iravros iroiiTO : idio- 
 matic phrase for considered it 
 of the highest importance; 
 <?7r<uetTo, indir. mid., made it 
 for himself beyond everything 
 (irepl retaining here an earlier 
 meaning). 
 
 8. \nr6<rxoiTO : the form will 
 be explained later. KCU : not 
 and. 
 
 9. VIKCLV: surpass. 
 
 10. t iroiwv : eft 7roieu> and 
 /ca/cws TTOLCIV are often thus con- 
 trasted in the sense of do good 
 to and do harm to ; both phrases 
 
 take the ace. of the person, not 
 the dat. as we might expect. 
 Here <f>i\ovs and iroXe^tovs stand 
 as the objects of both VIKO.V and 
 TroiCjv. To hate and harm ene- 
 mies was commonly considered 
 the duty of a good man, as 
 much as love for one's friends. 
 Yet Sokrates and Plato taught 
 the golden rule. 
 
 11 f. s . . . 8vvavro : lit. 
 as they most could, i.e. to the 
 best of their ability. 
 
 12. avTw : dat. after <rvv- ID 
 rwepyol, which is in the pred. 
 after elvai and agrees with the 
 subject of ^TreipcDvTO. 
 
 13 f . eyvw . . . rivet ovra : 74- 
 yv6<TKw and other verbs of 
 knowing, perceiving, remem- 
 bering, and their contraries take 
 a supplementary pple. agreeing 
 with the object, where we use 
 an infinitive or clause. An 
 expression like / saw him com- 
 ing is the nearest approach that 
 English has to this very com- 
 mon Greek construction. 
 
190 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [188 
 
 rjglov avrov en /juaXXov rl/AacrOai,, KOI 
 15 7roiL TWV a\\<ov ware ol /jLev ajadol 
 
 <f>aivovTo afyovpevoi eV rfj K.vpov apxy, ol Be tcafcol 
 
 v 
 0V. 
 
 T&v TTOIHOV 7ra>\ov<riv rjplv (to us) TTCLVTO, 
 ol Oeoi. 
 
 14. T|JCov avrdv : he deemed 
 him worthy. ert (idXXov : put 
 with rl/jid<rOcu. otpxcvra : pres. 
 act. pple. of &PX& used as a 
 noun. 
 
 15. d-ya0wv : neut. ; gen. af- 
 ter d^Lov/jievoi. d^iw takes the 
 gen. after the analogy of its 
 primitive, Aios. wo-re : acute 
 accent, not circumflex, because 
 made up of cJs proclitic and re 
 enclitic. Cf. w's <t>rj(ri 6. 
 
 16. dgiovfjievoi : supplemen- 
 tary pple. after tyalvovTo, agree- 
 ing with &ya.6oL tyalvovro 
 aiov/ju-voi is equivalent to <f>ave- 
 pol fjffav d%iovjjtvoi : cf . 174, 1., 10 
 and note. dpxfj : province. 
 
 17. ov: a proclitic at the 
 
 end of a clause takes the acute 
 accent, since there is nothing 
 for it to ' lean upon.' 
 
 18. irdvttv : price is denoted 
 by the gen. rd-ydO* : for rd 
 ayaOd. The running together 
 of a final and a following initial 
 vowel is called crasis (icpdcris 
 from Kepdwviu mix). The ac- 
 cent of dyaBd is thrown back 
 on the penult because the ac- 
 cented a is elided. Oxytone 
 prepositions and conjunctions 
 lose their accent in elision ; 
 other oxytone words throw it 
 back on the penult. The sen- 
 tence is a line (trochaic tetra- 
 meter) from Epicharmos (about 
 480 B.C.). 
 
 II. Translate into Greek. 
 
 When Xerxes was attempting to enslave the 
 Greeks, the Athenians, daring to enter into battle 
 
 2 f. daring : the Greek 
 would probably use an aor. 
 pple. instead of a present. 
 
 enter into battle with: cf. 
 174, II., 18, take their place in 
 battle, and note. 
 
188] 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 191 
 
 with him, were victorious with the help of the 
 gods. In war the possessions of the vanquished 
 all belong to the victors. Those who try to do 5 
 good to others are most loved by others. Those 
 who recognize what sort of a man Cyrus was all 
 agree that he was more worthy to be loved than 
 his brother ; but Artaxerxes became king, accord- 
 ing to the law of the Persians, because of his being 10 
 the elder. When we became aware that Cyrus 
 honored faithful helpers more than the king did, 
 we kept trying, as much as we could, to do such 
 things as we thought Cyrus wished. Who, pray, 
 
 3. with the help of : <rvv. 
 
 4. the possessions : rd w. 
 
 the gen. 
 
 5. belong to: lit. are of; 
 but a neut. pi. subject generally 
 takes the verb in the sing. 
 the victors: pres. act. pple. 
 Those -who try : attributive 
 pple. 
 
 6 f . by others : virt> w. the 
 gen. Those who recognize, 
 etc. : lit., those recognizing Cy- 
 rus, of what sort he was. 
 
 8. more worthy: di6-Te- 
 pos, like veti-repos. than : ex- 
 pressed by putting the word 
 for brother in the gen.; cf. 
 T&V TroXXwv 174, I., 11 and 
 note. 
 
 10. because of his be- 
 ing : did rb Trpefffivrepov afobv 
 
 elvat. elvai is the inf. of the 
 verb meaning to be, aMv is 
 its subject, the whole inf. 
 clause is in the ace. governed 
 by did. 
 
 11 f . became aware : one 
 word in Greek. that Cyrus 
 honored : supplementary pple.; 
 lit. became aware of Cyrus hon- 
 oring. 
 
 12. than the king: may 
 be expressed by the gen. Or 
 to avoid all ambiguity we may 
 use here TJ (than) followed 
 by the nom. Omit did in 
 Greek. 
 
 13 f . such things as : use 
 the neut. pi. of ofos, omitting 
 the antecedent. wished : inf. 
 
 14. pray : the effect of this 
 in making the interrogative 
 
192 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 when king, does not think it fitting that he should 
 be honored more than even the best of those 
 who are not kings ? Sokrates tried most of 
 all men to be a good citizen and to know him- 
 self. 
 
 prominent is given in Greek by 
 the enclitic TTOT (Compare 
 the vulgar English expression, 
 Who ever can it be ?) 
 
 15 f . -when king : circum- 
 stantial pple. denoting time ; 
 lit. being king, but in reverse 
 
 order, because king is the more 
 important word. that he 
 should be honored : inf. 
 
 16 f . even : KO.L those 
 who are not : attributive 
 pple. ; neg. ^ ; cf. rods ^ 6vva- 
 174, I., 19 and note. 
 
 LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 189. The letters X, /*, v, p are called liquids, because their 
 sound is smooth and easily prolonged. The combination of 
 a liquid with a following & was avoided by the Greeks. This 
 produced changes in the future and first aorist systems of 
 liquid verbs (that is, of verbs whose themes end in a liquid), 
 because the ordinary tense suffixes -<r%- and -<ra begin 
 with o-. 
 
 190. Liquid verbs in the future insert e before 
 the tense suffix -<r%- ; a then drops out (as it usu- 
 ally does between two vowels) ; this leaves -%- 
 as the future tense suffix of liquid verbs ; then the 
 same contractions are made as in the present sys- 
 tem of (f)i\Q) (compare 179 and 180). Thus the 
 future of crre\\o) (crreX-) send is (o-reXew) crreXco, 
 etc., as follows : 
 
192] LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 191. Future System of o-reXXeo (0-reX-) send 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 193 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 o-reXw 
 
 <TT\OV/JiCU 
 
 2 
 
 o-reXefc 
 
 trreX^, or -el 
 
 3 
 
 0-reXei 
 
 <TT\elrat, 
 
 D. 2 
 
 (7T\ITOV 
 
 0-T\l(T00V 
 
 3 
 
 areKelrov 
 
 tnekelcrOov 
 
 P. 1 
 
 <7T\OV/JiV 
 
 <TT\OV/Ji0a 
 
 2 
 
 (TT\lr 
 
 o-T\el(r0 
 
 3 
 
 (7T\OV<n, 
 
 <TT\OVVTat, 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Active. 
 
 crreXovv 
 
 Middle. 
 
 -ov 
 
 192. In the first aorist liquid verbs drop o- and 
 lengthen the theme vowel ; a becomes a after e, t,, 
 p, elsewhere 77; e becomes . Otherwise the in- 
 flection is like e\vara. 
 
194 
 
 THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [193- 
 
 193, First Aorist System of o-reXXw (o-reX-). 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 -O"Tl\-a 
 
 6-0-TL\-d-MV 
 
 2 
 
 e-o-retX-a-? 
 
 -(TTi\rO) 
 
 3 
 
 e-crre^X-e 
 
 e-o-reiX-a-ro 
 
 D. 2 
 
 -(TTi\-a-TOV 
 
 ~O"Ti\rCi"'O'uOV 
 
 3 
 
 -o-T6i\-d-rrjv 
 
 6~O"TAX~Cl~O"6'77 V 
 
 P. 1 
 
 -(TTL\-a-/JLV 
 
 -o-Ti\-d-pe0a 
 
 2 
 
 -(TTi\-a-T 
 
 "CT T 1 X~ft-0" (/ 
 
 3 
 
 t-*\-a-v 
 
 -0-Tl\-a-VTO 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Active. 
 
 crr6?X-a-z/ 
 
 Middle. 
 
 -77, -ov 
 
 SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM. 
 194, Some verbs form their passive system with 
 the passive suffix -77- (-e-) instead of -0rj- (-0e-) ; 
 this formation is called the second passive instead 
 
195] 
 
 SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM. 
 
 195 
 
 of the first passive. As in the first passive, -??- is 
 used before a single consonant, elsewhere -e-; in 
 every respect the inflection is like that of the first 
 passive, except for the omission of 0; and the 
 meaning is the same. 
 
 195. Second Passive System of <7Te'XXa> (o-reX-, 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 Future. 
 
 <7TaX-i7-cr?7, or -et, 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 Future. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Aorist. 
 
 o-raX-e/9) 
 
 Future. 
 
196 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [196 
 
 a. The change of the theme oreA- to orctA- is of the same 
 nature as those referred to in 87, b. The sounds a, , o are 
 nearly related, and often pass into one another in the inflec- 
 tion and derivation of words. 
 
 The coming together of consonants often produces 
 changes. Some of the commonest are seen in the 
 
 196, Perfect Middle System of o-reXXw (o-reX-, 
 
 0-raX-). 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 Perfect Mid. (Pass.). 
 
 Pluperfect Mid. (Pass.). 
 
 S. 1 
 
 e-<7TaX-/iat 
 
 e-ard\-Mv 
 
 2 
 
 6-crraX-crat 
 
 e-ardX-a-o 
 
 3 
 
 e-<7raX-T<u 
 
 e-o-raX-TO 
 
 D. 2 
 
 e-(TTO\-00V 
 
 -(TTa\-00V 
 
 3 
 
 e-(na\-6ov 
 
 -(TTd\-0<nV 
 
 P. 1 
 
 t-(TTd\-/JLe0a 
 
 -a-rd\-/iJL0a 
 
 2 
 
 e-crrak-Oe 
 
 -o-Ta\-0e 
 
 3 
 
 ~(7TCL\-fJLVOt> LO"L 
 
 e-(TTa\-fJiVOi, rjaav 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 e-ardX-Ocu 
 
 e-(7TaX-/4ei>09, -77, -ov 
 
 a. The reduplication omits the consonant and 
 consists of e- only, if the theme begins with two 
 
197] SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM. 197 
 
 consonants , a double consonant (, i/r, ), or p. In 
 such cases the pluperfect is not usually aug- 
 mented. (Compare 152, note 1 .) 
 
 b. When the theme ends in a consonant, the 
 addition of the endings -<70oz/, -adyv, -c70e, -&0ai, 
 -VTCLI, and -I/TO produced combinations difficult for 
 the Greek to pronounce. Hence 
 
 (1) a between two consonants is dropped. 
 
 (2) Consonant themes in the perfect and pluper- 
 fect middle indicative third plural use the perfect 
 middle participle with ela-l they are and fj<rav they 
 were. 
 
 197. The verb orcAAw illustrates also another way of 
 forming the present stem, and it is now time to group 
 together the present formations thus far introduced. It is 
 convenient to classify verbs in the present system according 
 to the way of forming the stem from the theme. 
 
 a. Variable Vowel Class. This includes all 
 verbs which form the present stem by adding the 
 suffix -%- to the simple theme : as \vco (Xu-), pres- 
 ent stem \v%-. So most of the verbs whose inflec- 
 tion has been described. 
 
 b. Iota Class. This includes all verbs which 
 form the present stem by adding the suffix -i%- to 
 the theme. This suffix always produces sound 
 changes. X with i produces XX: thus <7TeX-*%- 
 gives (TTe\\%- for the present stem, o-reXXo) for the 
 present indicative active first singular. (Compare 
 
 and Latin alius.) 
 
198 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [197 
 
 c. Inceptive Class. This includes all verbs 
 which form the present stem by adding -O-K%- to 
 the theme, with or without reduplication : as yi- 
 <yv(i)-a-K(o (jyvo-, 7^0)-), present stem <yi-yva)-o-K%-. 
 The class is so named because some verbs belong- 
 ing to it have the sense of beginning or becoming 
 (Latin incipio, begin). Thus ycyvGoo-Kco means be- 
 gin to know, come to a knowledge of something, dis- 
 cern, etc. 
 
 d. Root Class. This includes all verbs in which 
 the theme itself, with or without reduplication, 
 but without any tense suffix, serves as the present 
 stem: as i-o-rrj-fjn (crra-, CTTT;-), present stem lara-, 
 larij". Such presents must of course be of the 
 /u-form (121). 
 
 e. Other classes will be noticed later. Observe that this 
 classification has reference properly to the present system only. 
 The present suffixes -%-, -i%-, -O-K%-, are parallel with the 
 future suffixes -0-%- and -e%-, the first aorist suffix -era- or -a-, 
 the perfect suffix -/ca- and pluperfect suffix -KT/-, -KCI-, -KC-, and 
 the passive suffixes --ftp- (-0e-) and -rj- (-e-). So the names 
 variable vowel class, iota class, inceptive class, root class, etc., 
 for the present system, are parallel with the names liquid 
 future, first aorist, /xt-aorist, liquid aorist, first and second 
 passive, etc. They are merely ways of naming the manner 
 in which each system is formed from the theme. The theme, 
 not the present indicative, is to be thought of as the basis of 
 every verb form. 
 
 The following synopsis gives a view of the formation of 
 every system of 
 
198] 
 
 SECOND PASSIVE SYSTEM. 
 
 199 
 
 SB. g. -SB 
 
 0> ' CD * 
 
 u 
 
 II! i 
 
 
 ?- 
 
 $ 
 
 M 
 
 OQ 
 
 H 
 3 
 
 s? - 
 
 3 o 
 
 
 H H 
 
 r 
 
 o 2, 
 ? ^ 
 
 GC q 
 
 11 
 
 CO 
 
200 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 SECOND AORIST. 
 
 [199 
 
 199. Another liquid verb of the iota class, /3aXX&> 
 08aA-), illustrates the formation of the second aor- 
 ist active and middle. The meaning is the same 
 as that of the first aorist. 
 
 200. Second Aorist System of /3aXXo> (/3aX-) throw. 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 e-pa\-OT> 
 
 e-pa\-6-fJLr)V 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 e-/3aX-e-9 
 e-/3aX-e 
 
 e-/3aX-ou 
 . e-ySaX-e-ro 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 !-/3aX-e-roz> 
 
 -/3d\-6-(700V 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 -/3d\,-0-/JLV 
 
 e-/3aX-e-re 
 e-/3a\-o-v 
 
 -/3d\--(T0 
 -/3d\-0-VTO 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 /3a\-e-cr0ai, 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Active. 
 
 -v 
 
 Middle. 
 
 /3aX-o-/^ez>09, -77, -oi/ 
 
200] SECOND AORIST. 201 
 
 a. The theme always appears in its simplest 
 form. 
 
 b. The tense suffix is the variable vowel -%-. 
 
 c. The infinitive and participle accent the end of 
 the stem, i.e. the variable vowel; fta\elv is for 
 /3a\-e-v ; for f3a\6p,evo<; this gives the same accent 
 as the ordinary rule. 
 
 d. There is evidently a close resemblance between this 
 system and the imperfect, infinitive, and participle of the 
 present system of the co-form, since the augment and end- 
 ings are the same, and the tense stem of each system ends 
 in the variable vowel. But it will always be found that the 
 tense stems of the two systems differ in some way. Thus in 
 /&xXXa> the present tense suffix is -6%-, which gives XX in the 
 present stem ^oXX%-, while the theme, and therefore the 
 second aorist, has but one X. The accent of the infinitive 
 and of the active participle is also different. 
 
 The synopsis on the following page gives a view of 
 /SoXXw throughout. In the perfect and passive systems the 
 theme becomes ^8X77- by transposition and lengthening. 
 
 NOTE. Care should be taken to distinguish in pronuncia- 
 tion between the forms with one X and those with XX ; compare 
 p. 119, Note. 
 
202 
 
 THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 p 
 
 H 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 II 
 
 Hi 
 
 ^ 
 
 w <3 
 
 44 
 
 * ^< 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 PH 
 
 eg. eg. eg. 
 
 5 r- 
 
 ci v i 
 vu 
 
 i H 1 
 
 g 02. 02. 02. 02. 
 <5 vw 
 
 "S 'S 
 
 QQ 
 
 H 
 
 > 
 
 CQ. 
 
 
 " 
 
SECOND PERFECT. 
 
 203 
 
 SECOKD PERFECT. 
 
 202. The second perfect differs from the first 
 perfect only by the omission of /e, so that the tense 
 suffixes are -a- in the perfect indicative, -?;-, -e^-, -e- 
 in the pluperfect, -e- in the infinitive, -or- in the 
 participle. The theme often shows a change of 
 vowel. Thus yez/-, the theme of yiyvopai, becomes 
 yov-. 
 
 203. Second Perfect System of ylyvo/j,ai (761*-, 701;-) 
 become. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 S. 1 
 
 ye-yov-a 
 
 6-ye-ydiMj, or -ei-v 
 
 2 
 
 ye-yov-a-s 
 
 e-ye-yov-rj-s, or -et-9 
 
 3 
 
 76-70 1/-6 
 
 e-ye-ydv-et, 
 
 D. 2 
 
 ye-yov-a-rov 
 
 -ye-yov-6t,-Tov 
 
 3 
 
 ye-ydv-a-rov 
 
 e-ye-yov-eL-Trjv 
 
 P. 1 
 
 ye-yov-a-fjiev 
 
 t-rye-ytp-ec-fJieV 
 
 2 
 
 ye-yov-a-re 
 
 z-ye-yov-ec-re 
 
 3 
 
 ye-yov-da'i 
 
 e-ye-ydv-e-aav 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 ye-yov-e-vat, 
 
 76-701^605, ye-yov-vla, 
 
204 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [204 
 
 a. The present belongs to the variable vowel 
 class ; ylyvofjiai, is for ryi-yev-o-/jicu, e being cut out. 
 In the future the theme becomes yevrj-, giving 
 yevtf-ao-fjiai, (cf. ftovXija-ofjiat, from ^ovKofJuaC). There 
 is also a perfect middle ry-yevr)-/jiai with the same 
 form of the theme ; there is no difference in mean- 
 ing between the perfect active and the perfect 
 middle of this verb. The aorist is of the second 
 form, 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 204. The usual ending of the comparative de- 
 gree is -re/009, -repd, -repov (stem -repo-) ; of the 
 superlative, -raros, -rarrj^ -rarov (stem -raro-). 
 These endings are applied to the masculine stem 
 of the positive. Adjectives in -05 with short penult 
 lengthen -o- to -&>-. Thus : 
 
 POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 young vec-Tepos, -a, -ov veco-raro^ -77, -ov 
 
 worthy a^oo-re/w 
 
 o-o</>o'-5 wise o-o<o)-Tep09 
 
 6p06-? upright 6p66-Tpo<t opOo-raros 
 
 ) 1 old Trpeo-pv-repos 
 
 1 The positive is not used in Attic prose in this sense, 
 though the plural is common in the derived sense of ambas- 
 sadors. 
 
206] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 205 
 
 205. A less frequent ending of the comparative 
 is -Zeal/, -lov (stem -lov-') ; of the superlative, -(7x09, 
 -icrrr), -KTTOV (stem -40-To-). These endings appear 
 in a few very common words, some of which are 
 irregular. Thus : 
 
 POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 bad KdKlCDV WOTS6 KCLKIVTO* WOTSt 
 
 os good fteXrf&v better ft\Ti<7TO<; best 
 
 or a/jLivo)v.OidfjLmQ)v) apiaro? 
 or 
 
 kos beautiful /ca\\cov 
 
 206, Comparatives in -wv are declined like 
 
 better. 
 
 M. F. 
 S. N. /3eXTto>i/ 
 
 G. ySeXrf 01^09 
 
 D. 
 
 A. /SeXrfoj/a, ^e\rtco 
 
 V. 
 
 D.N.A.V. 
 
 Gr. D. /3e\Tlbv-oiv 
 
 P. N. V. 
 
 A. 
 
206 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [207 
 
 a. The forms in -ov have recessive accent. The shorter 
 forms in the accusative singular and nominative and accusa- 
 tive plural are contracted forms from a different stem in 
 -co--, which loses o~ between two vowels. 
 
 207. Vocabulary. 
 
 dyrye\\Q) 1 (a^eX-), 0776X0), 777- ^ 
 
 rjyj\fca, tfyyeXjuu, > announce, report. 
 ) 
 
 proclaim; mid. 2 
 7eX, etc., } offer, promise. 
 
 al 'Adrjvai, -&v Athens. 
 
 (ama-), alnaaQ^ai, ) blame, find fault 
 
 etc., reg., ) with. 
 
 f " ( Boiotian or Boeo- 
 
 DOICOTOS, -OV 
 
 I tian. 
 
 01 AeX^ot 7 , -&v Delphi. 
 e/e/3aXXft> (l/c + /8aX-), Kf3a\S>,\ 
 
 e%efia\ov, icpefi\r)Ka, e/cySe- > cast out, drive out. 
 
 ) 
 
 r)\6ov, e\tj\v 
 
 1 The XX of the pres. mark it as belonging to the iota 
 class, the pres. stem being dyyeXX%- for dyycX-t%. 
 
 2 Lit. announce to (another) from one's self. This use, a 
 little different both from the dir. and from the indir. mid., 
 is called the subjective mid. 
 
 8 The pres. belongs to the variable vowel class, but the 
 2d aor. and perf. are from a different theme. The 2d aor. 
 
207] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 207 
 
 epcordco (epcara- 1 ), ep&>rr;<7fc>, ^ 
 
 etc., reg. ; also 2d aor. 77/70- >ask (a question). 
 /*?7i> (e/?- 1 ), dep., 
 
 Kpivo) {icpiv-? fcpi>-)i fcpivG), \ (1) separate, pick 
 eicplva, fce/cpL/ca, KeKpt^ai, V out; 
 ercpldrjv ) (2) decide. 
 
 (a?ro + Kpiv-, Kpi>-), ^ 
 ii aTre/cplvafjujv, > answer, reply. 
 mid. dep., ) 
 
 < ., ( (1) guest or A0s; 
 
 o f ei/09, -ou < , ox , * . ,o 
 
 ( (2) guest-friend. 3 
 
 ovT . . . oiire 4 neither . . . nor. 
 
 rj Trarp/9, -tSo? (fr. Trarrjp) fatherland. 
 
 inf. and pple. are cAfletv, cX^wv. In the perf. we have an- 
 other form of reduplication, called the Attic reduplication. 
 This consists in prefixing the initial vowel and following 
 consonant; the vowel of the second syllable is then length- 
 ened : \-rj\vO- from eAv#-. The plup. in such verbs is not 
 augmented. The future of this verb is not used in Attic 
 prose. 
 
 1 Ipayra- is derived from the shorter form cp-. The 2d aor. 
 inf. and pple. are IptcrOcu and po/>tvos. 
 
 2 Pres. of the iota class ; Kptv-t%-, by transposition of v 
 and i with contraction of i-i to I, becomes Kplv%-. The 
 lengthening in the liquid 1st aor. is regular. The perf. and 
 pass, employ the shorter theme Kpi-. 
 
 3 Private hospitality filled a great place in ancient Greek 
 life. If one person was entertained in a foreign city by an- 
 other, this act of hospitality formed a tie of friendship 
 between host and guest and between their families. Per- 
 sons in this relation were called ei>oi to each other. 
 
 4 For the accent cf. wore, 188, I., 15, note. 
 
208 TBE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [208 
 
 Pisidians. 
 \ make war. 
 
 o 
 
 etc., reg., 
 av/Ji7ro\/Jia) (aw + TroXe^e-), *\ 
 
 avjjL7ro\fjujo'a>i (rvveTroXe/jMy- V make war with. 
 
 o-a, etc., reg., J 
 
 97 o-TpaTia, -a$ l army. 
 
 VO) (VTTO + O7TT6U-) V7TO- 
 
 VTTCx)- v 
 
 suspect. 
 
 V7TCD- 
 
 j, impersonal verb, 
 
 ( ought (Lat. opor- 
 \ te). 
 
 208. Exercises. 
 I. How Xenophon joined the expedition of Cyrus. 
 
 Tlapijv ev rfj Kvpov arparta tlevocfrtov 1 A.6r)valo<; , 
 ovre dp%(0v ovre crrparLcorr)^ &v, aXXa Tlpolfevds rt? 
 Bo^o>T09 yrrjcrev avrov eXdeiv, %evo<$ <bv ap^alo?. 
 7rrjyji\aro Se ITpo^e^o? <j>l\ov avrov TLvpw TTOITJ- 
 
 1. Ilapfjv : was present; 
 compound of irapd and ^v was. 
 
 2. apxwv: j)ple. used as a 
 noun, in the pred. after wv. 
 Cf. Apxovra 188, I., 14. TIS : 
 a certain. 
 
 3. avr6v: cf. a^roi/s 174, I., 
 2 and note. The second obj. 
 
 is here t\0eTv. Or one may re- 
 gard avrbv as the subj. of ^X- 
 Beiv. 
 
 4. <|>CXov : second object of 
 Troi^ff-eip, put first in its clause 
 for emphasis. The subject of 
 Tronri<Tiv is not expressed, be- 
 cause it is the same as the 
 
 1 Cf . OT/DCITOS, (TTpaTrjyos, OT/oanoJTTjs, 
 
208] 
 
 COMPAB1SON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 209 
 
 TT? 5 
 
 crew, ov avros ecj>rj Kpeirra) eavra) oizcrQai 
 7rar/)/So9. 6 Se Hez/o<&>z> avayvovs rrjv 
 
 <7VfJL/3oV\VTai, ^Q)KpaTL * KOI 6 ^CO/Cpdrr)? V7T07TTV- 
 
 rrjv TTO\IV alnacrecrdai n *3<Vo<f)(*)VTa el K.vpG) 
 <yvtfcrTai) Sta TO Kvpov roZ? Aa/ceSatfJLovtoi,? 
 7rl ra? 'Adtyittfe <7VjjL7ro\fjirjo-ai,) crvfi^ovXevei rcS 10 
 \66vTa et? AeX0ov9 epwrav rov Oebv 
 
 subject of the principal verb. 
 (This is contrary to the rule in 
 Latin. ) 
 
 5. avr6s : in apposition with 
 the subject of $77, but is to 
 be connected in translation 
 with ofecrflcu. Kpei-rrw : in the 
 sense of more useful. KpetrTuv 
 and KpdTio-Tos differ in meaning 
 somewhat from diielvwv, &pi<r- 
 ros and from jSeXrfwi/, jSArttrros. 
 The first pair are connected 
 with Kpdros strength, and often 
 mean stronger, strongest. 
 ccump: dat. of interest with 
 KpelTTO) ; for himself. 
 
 6. irarpCSos: gen. of com- 
 parison. 6 gvo<|>a>v : the ar- 
 ticle is often used with proper 
 names in Greek, sometimes to 
 mark the person as one already 
 mentioned ; it tends to give a 
 familiar conversational tone, 
 and is less likely ta be used in 
 a dignified or stately style. 
 
 8. TI : cognate ace. with 
 atTLao-eo-dai ; would blame X. 
 somewhat. 
 
 9. yv^<rT<u : as the whole 
 narrative refers to past time, 
 we must say should become, 
 although the Greek can use the 
 fut. ind., which would be used 
 in the direct form : the city will 
 blame you if you (shall) become. 
 
 9 f. Sid TO ... crvfnroXefAfj- 
 
 oreu: another inf. clause used 
 as a noun, marked by TO as 
 being in the ace. Within the 
 clause Kvpoif is the subject. We 
 should say on account of the 
 fact that (or more simply, be- 
 cause) Cyrus, etc. 
 
 11. \66vTa : agrees with 
 the understood subj. of tpwrav. 
 Delphi was the seat of the 
 most famous oracle of ancient 
 times. It was believed that 
 Apollo answered the questions 
 put to him, by inspiring the 
 priestess, who seated herself 
 upon a tripod and submitted 
 to the intoxicating influence of 
 a gas that came from a chasm 
 in the earth. The priests took 
 down the response which she 
 
210 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [208 
 
 I 
 
 7T6/H T?79 OOOV. \.tfO)V O O 3 
 
 'ATroXXo) rlvt 6e&v dvcov /cdXX.iO'Ta Kai dpiara 
 Trotijaerai, rrjv 6B6v /cal Xeyet aura) 'ATroXXw^ 6eol$ 
 15 0*9 %pr) Oveiv. eirel Be TraKiv fj\6ev, jjyyet\ev TO* 
 ^cofcpdrei, a 6 Oebs dTre/cptvaro. 6 8' ^TLCLTO avrov 
 OTI ov Trp&rov r)pd>ra el fieKrlov e<m arparev- 
 ecrffat, 77 ov. 'Evrel Se ovrws ijpov, OVTCOS, e(f>rj^ 
 
 uttered under this influence, 
 and gave the response to the 
 worshiper in hexameter verse. 
 
 12. 68ov : here journey. 
 
 13. ' AiroXXw : like compar- 
 atives in -iwv, 'A7T6XXWV has in 
 
 the ace. both 'A 
 'A7r6XXw. 6vwv : 
 
 and 
 the circum- 
 
 stantial pple., like the pple. in 
 Latin, may imply various re- 
 lations, such as time, manner, 
 means, a condition, etc. Here 
 we should say by sacrificing, em- 
 ploying our verbal noun in -ing 
 
 translate here in the most suc- 
 cessful and best way. 
 
 14. iroi-fjo-cTcu : indir. mid. 
 0ots : for 6eots, attracted to 
 the case of the rel. which stands 
 next to it. 
 
 16. 6 84 : beginning a clause 
 in this way and not followed 
 by a noun to which it belongs, 
 6 is a demonstrative pron., usu- 
 ally implying a change of sub- 
 ject from the previous clause 
 or sentence ; but he, meaning 
 Sokrates. Cf. r& tfv . . . 5^ 
 
 with a prep, to mark plainly 1 174, I., 12 and note, 
 the idea of means, which the I 17. &ri : because, a mean- 
 Greek pple. merely suggests. i ing about as common as that ; 
 KoLXXwrra, apio-ra : the neut. j the two are closely connected, 
 pi. ace. of superlative adjs. is j as may be seen in Latin quod, 
 
 regularly used as the superla- 
 tive adv. For the comparative 
 adv. is regularly used the neut. 
 sing. ace. of the comparative 
 adj. Thus the adv. from /caX6s 
 is compared /caXws, /cdXXto*/, /cdX- 
 Xicrra ; of &ya06v, eft (which is 
 independent of dya06s), &f*eivov, 
 &PHTTO., or pt\Ti6v, /S^Xrto-ra, or 
 KpdTHTTa. We might 
 
 and in such English sentences 
 as " Her eyes are mad that they 
 have wept till now" (Shak. 
 Yen. and Ad. 1062); or "I am 
 sorry that you are ill." cl: 
 whether. We often use if in 
 this sense, but if would hardly 
 be suitable here. 
 
 18. 6-ircC : since. The causal 
 meaning is a development from 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 211 
 
 irotelv 0)9 o 0609 \j6V. 6 Be Eevocftcov 
 pX rat/ 7ra pQ' IZ-vpov /cal eyevero <tXo9 avrq). /cal 20 
 Hpo!;vov T /cal JLvpov alrovvrtov earparevero &>9 
 7rl Hl(7iSdsi 01)9 e(f>rj Ku/009 j3ov\(r6ai e/c/3a\eiv e/c 
 
 T?79 77/9- 
 
 the temporal, as in Latin cum 
 and English since. 
 
 19. 0vcrdfj.vos : indir. mid., 
 have sacrifice offered for one's 
 self, used especially, as here, 
 of taking the omens in sacri- 
 fice. 
 
 20. irapd: takes the ace. 
 after verbs of motion ; to Cyrus. 
 
 21. npo^'vov . . . O.ITOVVTCOV : 
 
 something of cause is here im- 
 
 plied in the gen. abs. ws : 
 even in a literal translation of 
 the phrase it is clear that cJs 
 implies that it was Xenophori*s 
 belief that the expedition was 
 against the Pisidians. This is 
 a use of ws which has a wide 
 development, especially with 
 pples. 
 
 23. -yf]s: land, as the con- 
 text shows. 
 
 U. Translate into Greek. 
 
 Xenophon became a friend of Sokrates while 
 still a young man. Sokrates often advised his 
 friends to go to Delphi and inquire of Apollo, 
 when they were about to do something, whether it 
 was better to do it or not. A certain friend of 
 the philosopher, going once to Delphi, asked the 
 
 1 f . of Sokrates : use the 
 dat. SwKpdrei. while still, 
 etc. : lit. being still young, but 
 in reverse order, still young 
 being. 
 
 3. to go . . . and : best ex- 
 pressed by a circumstantial 
 pple. (aor.), which may agree 
 
 with the word for friends or 
 with the understood subject of 
 the inf. 
 
 4 f. whether it was: lit. 
 if it icas. Greek can retain 
 here the tense and mode of the 
 dir. form. So in 7, if any one 
 was. 
 
212 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [209 
 
 god if any one was wiser than Sokrates; and Apollo 
 answered that Sokrates was the wisest of mankind. 
 He, however, declared that he did not know what 
 
 10 Apollo meant. The Greeks thought that Apollo 
 replied to his worshipers when they asked him 
 what they ought to do. Neither Xenophon nor 
 Proxenos supposed that Cyrus was going against 
 his brother. The Athenians blamed Xenophon, 
 
 15 because he fought with the Spartans against Ath- 
 ens after he came back from Asia. 
 
 thought that: ofo/ucu usually 
 takes the inf. 
 
 11. replied: not aor. Why? 
 his worshipers : use the 
 attributive pple. 
 
 12. what they ought to 
 do : they need not be ex- 
 pressed. 
 
 15. fought with : use 
 
 7. than Sokrates : use the 
 
 gen. Sw/cpdrous. 
 
 8. answered: takes a 6Vt 
 clause, not the inf., as object. 
 of mankind : say of all men. 
 
 9. He, however: 6 W. 
 declared . . . not : put OVK be- 
 fore 60T7. Cf . 174, 1., 19 and note. 
 
 10. meant : Xy, an idio- 
 matic use of the word. 
 
 CLASSIFICATION OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 209. We have seen that when consonants come together 
 changes are often made for ease of pronunciation. To 
 understand some of these changes it is necessary to notice 
 the character of the sounds. The student should practice 
 giving aloud the sounds (not the names) of the different 
 letters as they are described in the following sections (re- 
 membering that the name of each letter begins with the 
 sound of that letter), and should observe always what organs 
 and muscles are active in making each sound. 
 
 It is not always easy for us to see why combinations were 
 difficult for the Greeks, and avoided by them, which we find 
 
211] CLASSIFICATION OF CONSONANTS. 213 
 
 easy, while on the other hand they found some combinations 
 easy which we find hard. Thus it is difficult for us to pro- 
 nounce r final or before a consonant (as in fire, horse) and 
 we usually make only a partial approach to the sound in 
 such places. So we have to make an effort at first in order 
 to pronounce initial kn, ks, kt, pn, tl, with which the Greek 
 had no trouble. Some of these combinations, too, a German 
 finds easy, though an English th, or final >, c?, or g, is to him 
 almost impossible. National habit in such matters can 
 hardly be explained, but must be recognized as a fact. 
 
 210. a. The sounds of TT, /3, </> are made with the 
 lips ; these letters are therefore called labials (or 
 lip-letters, Lat. labrum, lip). 
 
 b. The sounds of r, 8, 6 are made with the tip 
 of the tongue placed just back of the upper teeth ; 
 these letters are therefore called linguals (or tongue- 
 letters, Lat. lingua, tongue) or dentals (tooth-letters, 
 Lat. dens, tooth). 
 
 c. The sounds of K, 7, % are made with the back 
 of the tongue pressed against the palate or back 
 part of the roof of the mouth; these letters are 
 therefore called palatals. 
 
 d. All these sounds are so weak, or so little 
 resonant, when made alone, that these nine letters 
 are called mutes. 
 
 211. a. Again, the sounds of TT, r, K are merely 
 whispered; they are therefore called surd (Lat. 
 surdus, dulT) or smooth mutes. 
 
 b. The sounds of ft, S, 7 are made with the lips 
 or tongue in the same position as for TT, r, K, but 
 
214 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [212 
 
 they contain another element, that of voice. That 
 is, in uttering /3, 8, 7, as in uttering the vowels, 
 the vocal chords in the upper part of the windpipe 
 vibrate (the vibration can even be felt by putting 
 the finger on the outside of the throat) ; hence /3, 
 8, 7, like the vowels, are called sonant (Lat. sonans, 
 sounding') mutes. Greek grammarians called them 
 middle mutes, and some still use that term. 
 
 c. The sounds of </>, 0, % are also surd, but they 
 differ from TT, T, K in having the distinct A-sound 
 added in the ancient pronunciation ; hence they 
 are called aspirates (Lat. aspiratus, Ireathed on) 
 or rough mutes. 
 
 212. Of the other consonants, notice for the 
 present that a is also lingual and surd ; and that 
 >/r and are double and surd. ^ is but another 
 way of writing TTCT, and another way of writing 
 /ccr. is also a double consonant (it probably had 
 the sound of dz), and is sonant. 
 
 213. The following table will render this classi- 
 fication easier to remember. 
 
 MUTES. DOUBLE CON- 
 
 SONANTS. 
 
 Smooth. Middle. Rough. 
 
 (Surd) (Sonant) (Aspirate) 
 
 Labial TT /3 <f> ty 
 
 Lingual r 8 a- % 
 
 Palatal K 7 % 
 
 a. The mutes in the same horizontal line are cognate with 
 
214] 
 
 MUTE THEMES. 
 
 215 
 
 each other (Lat. co-gnatus, born together), because made with 
 the same organs. Those in the same perpendicular line are 
 coordinate with each other, or mutes of the same order. 
 
 214. The conjugation of themes ending in a 
 lingual mute is illustrated by 7re/#o> (?re^-) per- 
 suade; middle (direct) persuade one's self, believe. 
 
 a. The present system is like \vco. 
 
 b. In the future system 6 before the tense suffix 
 -cr%- is dropped, giving Trei-crco, etc. ; inflected like 
 
 \V(7Ct). 
 
 c. In the first aorist system 6 before the tense 
 suffix -era- is dropped, giving e-Tre^-o-a, etc., inflected 
 like e'Xto-a. 
 
 d. In the first perfect system 6 before the tense 
 suffix -/ea-, etc., is dropped, giving Tre-Trei-Ka, etc., 
 inflected like \e\v/ca. 
 
 e. The perfect middle system is as follows : 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 s. i 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Tre-jrei-aOov 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 e-7re-7re la-fArj v 
 > / 
 
 -7re-7Ti-(r()ov 
 
 -pevoi rj<rav 
 
216 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [215 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 -?;, -ov 
 
 Here also 6 before a- is dropped, and before p, 
 and T is changed to cr, which is, like #, a lingual, 
 and more easily pronounced with those conso- 
 nants. 
 
 /. In the first passive system before 6 of the 
 passive suffix is changed to cr, just as before r. 
 This gives e-Tre/o--^?;-^, etc., inflected like e\u- 
 
 The same changes are made in other lingual themes, and 
 are summed up in the following rule : 
 
 215. A lingual mute (r, 8, 0) 
 
 before a or K is dropped, 
 before another lingual or JJL is changed 
 to cr. 
 
 Thus aOpoifa (aOpoiS-) l assemble (transitive) ; middle 
 (direct) assemble one's self, assemble (intransitive) makes 
 ot-o-o), 7jf'0/ooi-o-a, TJOpoi-Ka, rjOpoLcr-fJuai, rjOpoi(T-Or]V. 
 
 216. The conjugation of themes ending in a 
 labial mute is illustrated by Tre/mco (?reyLi7r-) 
 send. 
 
 a. In the future system TT and the cr of the tense 
 
 1 For the formation of the pres, stem see 241, note 8 . 
 
216] 
 
 MUTE THEMES. 
 
 217 
 
 suffix -cr%- are written as i/r, giving Tre/i^o), etc. 
 (for 7re/,67r-<ja>). 
 
 b. So in the first aorist system e-Tre/jiTr-o-a is writ- 
 ten e-7re/i^a, etc. 
 
 c. In the perfect active system the second per- 
 fect and pluperfect suffixes -a- (-?;-, -a-, -e-) are 
 used, and before these (as is often the case in the 
 second perfect) the final consonant of the theme 
 is aspirated, becoming <; at the same time the 
 theme vowel e varies to o, giving 7re-7ro/x<-a, etc., 
 like yeyoz/a (203). 
 
 d. The perfect middle l system is as follows : 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 e-Tre-Treyu-TT-ro 
 
 1 It happens that the entire middle of this verb is used 
 only in compounds. 
 
218 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [217 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 7T-7r/jL<f)-0ai, 
 
 7re-7re/4-yLtez>09, -77, -ov 
 
 TT before -yL6at, -/4e0a, -pevos is changed to //,, and 
 in this verb (since three /*'s could hardly be pro- 
 nounced otherwise than two) one JJL was dropped. 
 TTCT is of course written ty. In -aOov, -o-Orjv, -aOe 
 cr is dropped between two consonants (see 196, 
 5, (1) ; then ?r before 6 is changed to the cog- 
 nate rough mute <, that is, is made coordinate 
 with 0. 
 
 e. In the first passive system TT is made coor- 
 dinate with the following 0, giving e-7reV</>-0??-J'> 
 etc. 
 
 Like changes are made in other labial themes and are 
 included in the following rule : 
 
 217. A labial mute (TT, & 0) 
 
 before p becomes & 
 with cr forms i/r, 
 
 before a lingual mute (r, 8, 0) is made 
 coordinate. 
 
 218, So \a/jL/3dva> l (Xa/3-, X^yS-) forms 
 (for X?;/3-cro-/<ta), 2d aor. e-Xa/3-oz/, 2d perf. ei- 
 (with quite irregular reduplication e^-), ei-\rjfji-fjLcu 
 (for et-X^/3-^at), k-\r]^-Qj]-v (for - 
 
 1 For the formation of the present see 221, 
 
219] MUTE THEMES. 219 
 
 a. The perfect middle of \a/i/3ai/ft> is as follows : 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 elaL 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 rjcrav 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 -ov 
 
 Here /3-/A become 
 
 /3-a- become i|r, 
 
 )S-r become TT-T, 
 
 /3-^ become </>-0, by the rule in 217. 
 
 219. The conjugation of themes ending in a 
 palatal mute is illustrated by Sel/cvvjAi (Se^-) point 
 out, show. 
 
 a. The present system assumes the suffix -w- 
 
220 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPRON. 
 
 (see 221, 5), and is thus of the /u-form, conjugated 
 like Keparvvv'^L (102), as follows: 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 
 OiK-VV-U>i 
 $l/C-VV-$ 
 
 Sei/c-vv-fjicu 
 Sel/c-vv-aai 
 
 3 
 
 Sei/c-vv-a-i 
 
 Seltc-vv-Tai 
 
 D. 2 
 
 SeiK-vv-rov 
 
 SeiK-vv-adov 
 
 3 
 
 Sel/c-vv-rov 
 
 SeiK-vv-crffov 
 
 P. 1 
 
 SetWv-/Ai> 
 
 Setvvv-peda 
 
 2 
 
 SelfC-VV-T 
 
 SeiK-vv-crOe 
 
 3 
 
 Sei/c-vv-dcn 
 
 SelK-vv-VTai 
 
 Impf. 
 S. 1 
 
 A ctive. 
 
 Middle. 
 
 2 
 
 -$lK-VV-S 
 
 e-Sel/c-vv-o-o 
 
 3 
 
 e'-SetVi^ 
 
 e-Sel/c-vv-ro 
 
 D. 2 
 
 e-Sel/c-vv-Tov 
 
 -0i/C-W~O'00V 
 
 3 
 
 e-Sei/c-vv-Trjv 
 
 -Bl/C~VV-O'0'nV 
 
 P. 1 
 
 Uelic-w-pev 
 
 e-$i,K-vv-/j,e0a 
 
 2 
 
 e-Sel/c-vv-re 
 
 -OLK-W-(T0 
 
 3 
 
 e-Sel/c-vv-crav 
 
 ~oLK"W-VTO 
 
 1 v is lengthened in the sing, of the pres. and imperf . ind. 
 act., as is a of 
 
219] 
 
 MUTE THEMES. 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 221 
 
 Sei/c-vv-vat, 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 -vv~v 
 
 etc., like l 
 
 -97, -ov 
 
 b. In the future and first aorist tc-<r are writ- 
 ten , giving felga) (for Se^-o-o)) and e-Se^a (for 
 
 c. In the second perfect K, is aspirated, giving 
 Se^-a. (Compare 7T7ro/i<a, et\r)<f)a.) 
 
 d. The perfect middle system is as follows : 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 *&&** 
 
 e-Se-Seitc-TO 
 
 Se-Seiy-fJievot, fja-av 
 
222 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [220- 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 -77, -ov 
 
 Here K-/A become 
 K-V become , 
 K-6 become ^-0, a- between two consonants 
 
 being dropped as always. 
 
 e. In the first passive system K before is made 
 coordinate, giving e-Set'%-0?7-z/, etc. 
 
 Like changes are made in other palatal themes, and are 
 included in the following rule : 
 
 220. A palatal mute (/e, 7, %) 
 
 before JJL becomes 7, 
 with <r forms , 
 
 before a lingual mute becomes coor- 
 dinate. 
 
 221. The verbs 7ret#ft>, Xayu-/3av&>, and Se//ci/yu 
 illustrate other modes of forming the present stem, 
 and for completeness the remaining classes are 
 here described. 
 
 a. Strong Vowel Class. The present suffix -%- 
 is added to the theme and the theme vowel is 
 lengthened, i becoming e^. Thus, we find in a 
 second aorist of Trelffa), used only in poetry, that 
 the theme is properly 7n0~. In the present this 
 becomes TreiO-, so that the present stem is f jreiO-%-. 
 Like most verbs of this class, Trelffco retains the 
 
223] MUTE THEMES. 223 
 
 strong (or lengthened) form everywhere, ex- 
 cept in the second aorist; and in this verb, as 
 was said, the second aorist is not used in Attic 
 prose. 
 
 b. Nasal Class. A suffix containing v is added 
 to the theme, and sometimes a nasal inserted in 
 the theme. Thus in SelK-vu-fiL the suffix -vv- is 
 added. In \a/jL/3dvco the suffix -av%- is added, and 
 /JL inserted. 
 
 c. Tan Class. The suffix -r%- is added to the 
 theme. Thus, KpvTr-ra) (/cpt><-) hide, present stem 
 /cpV7r-T%- (future Kpv-^roi). 
 
 222. The common varieties of verb formation have all 
 been given in the modes most used, and the student is now 
 ready, if what precedes has been well learned, to begin an 
 easy author. The subjunctive, optative, and imperative, 
 modes will be taken up gradually as they are needed. The 
 pupil should obtain a Grammar, to which reference will now 
 begin to be made, G. standing for Goodwin's, and H. for 
 that of Hadley and Allen. 
 
 The reading lessons that follow are the opening pages 
 of Xenophon's "Anabasis," or "Expedition of Cyrus." The 
 information which one should have before beginning that 
 work has been in great part given in the preceding lessons, 
 but for convenience it is brought together here. 
 
 223. Xenophon was an Athenian, born, prob- 
 ably, a little before the beginning of the Pelo- 
 ponnesian war (431 B.C.). In early manhood he 
 became acquainted with Sokrates, and for about 
 ten years, probably, remained in close relation 
 
224 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 with the philosopher, to whom he owed much of 
 his moral and intellectual development. It was 
 in 401 B.C. that his friend Proxenos invited him 
 to come to Asia Minor and make the acquaintance 
 of Cyrus, as narrated in the last Exercise. Cyrus 
 was then not over twenty-three years old, and had 
 for six years been governor of a large extent of 
 territory. He was energetic and ambitious, and 
 determined, if possible, to make himself king in 
 place of his brother, Artaxerxes. The only ground 
 which he had for a claim upon the throne was 
 that Artaxerxes, though the elder, had been born 
 before his father became king, while Cyrus was 
 the eldest son born after that event, and was 
 therefore the eldest son of the king. Xerxes I., 
 successor of Dareios I. and great-grandfather of 
 Cyrus, is said to have used the same argument 
 successfully. The account of the expedition, in 
 the latter part of which Xenophon was the real 
 leader, was written several years afterwards. 
 
 224. Vocabulary. 
 
 dfjL<f>OTpo$, -d, -ov both. 
 
 (airo + Se^/c-), A 
 d-Tre'Se^a, CLTTO- I ' 
 [ 
 
ANABASIS, /., 1, 1-2. 225 
 
 acrOevea) (acrffeve-), 0,06 evri- ) , 7 , . 7 
 
 7 [ 6e weak, be sick. 
 a-, 1 etc., reg., ) 
 
 /3az/-, /8a-), firjcro- 
 
 avaBaivcd (dva+Bav-, Ba-), ) . 7 , 
 
 , H go up, ffo inland. 
 
 avaprjcro/jiai, etc., ) 
 
 ( journey up, or towards 
 
 , ' 
 interior. 
 
 or (T'fflo'a), ea^ov, V have. 
 
 Kastolos or Castolus. 
 
 ; ^ in _ 
 ^ ^ ^ 
 
 , g 
 ^ 
 
 Xenias. 
 
 C heavy-armed soldier, 
 j 
 
 1 From its meaning this verb has no middle. 
 
 2 The pres. belongs to the iota class ; the theme (3av- takes 
 the pres. suffix -t%-, v and t are transposed, and i forms a 
 diphthong with the preceding a, giving for the pres. stem 
 PO.IV%-. Elsewhere the stem appears in the shorter form 
 (3a-. The future is deponent. (Compare ytyvwcr/co), Xa/x- 
 /?ava>, and others.) 
 
 8 A /u-aorist, conjugated like ccmyv (149). 
 
 4 For full explanation of the forms of this verb see 239. 
 
226 
 
 THE GBEEK OF XENOPBON. 
 
 [225 
 
 ( how much, as much 
 -??, -or, rel. pron. ot I , 7 
 
 , r . < as; pi., A0w many, 
 
 quantity and number, 
 
 V 
 
 , 
 Uappatrw, -a, -ov 
 
 77 Hapvo-arL^ -^809 
 TO TreoYoz/, -ov 
 
 as many as. 
 Parrhasian, of Par- 
 
 Pary satis. 
 plain. 
 ., make, do. 
 
 rj re\v T??, -779 
 o Ticro'acfrepv'rjs, -OU9, 1 -e^, 
 -ai, -a 
 
 TissapTiernes. 
 three hundred. 
 
 happen, chance. 
 
 rerv^rj/ca or rerev^a 
 
 225. Anabasis, I., 1, 1-2. 
 1. Aape/ou /<m Hapf crdriSos yiyvoVTCU 7ratSe9 
 
 7Tpecr/3vTpo$ 
 
 1. Adpeiou, ZlapwrdTiSos : 
 
 gen. of source. H. 750 ; G. 
 1130. -yC-yvovTai : historical 
 present, common in Greek, as 
 in Latin. 8vo : there were four 
 sons in all ; but the two younger 
 sons are left out of view because 
 
 & 
 
 they are not concerned in this 
 story. Note that a numeral or 
 other adjective is likely to fol- 
 low its noun, unless the adjec- 
 tive has some emphasis upon it 
 or the noun has the article. 
 
 2. 
 
 Artaxerxes 
 
 1 For declension see H. 191, 193 ; G. 228, 230. 
 
 2 Of the nasal class ; the theme rv^- aspumes the pres. 
 suffix -av%-, and inserts the palatal nasal before the palatal 
 mute x- Compare Xa/x^avcu, which inserts the labial nasal 
 before the labial mute /3. 
 
 8 Second aorist, like /?aAoi/ (200). 
 
225] 
 
 ANABASIS, L, I, 1-2. 
 
 227 
 
 7rel Se rja-Qevei kapelos KOI v7ra)7TTve reXevrrjv rov 
 
 /3/OU, /3oV\TO TOD TTCliSe d/Ji<f)OT6pCO 7TapLVai,. 2. O 
 
 fiev ovv 7rpcr/3vTpos Trapcov Tvy%av Kuyooz/ Se 
 fjLTa7re/ji7rTai, airo rf)? apx*js ^9 avrov 
 e, /cal arparrjyov Se avrov 
 
 II., called fjL^fjLOJv unf or getting, 
 for his remarkable memory. It 
 was said that he remembered 
 the names of all his soldiers. 
 The line of Persian kings was 
 Cyrus the Great, Kambyses, 
 Dareios I., Xerxes I., Arta- 
 xerxes I., Dareios II., Arta- 
 xerxes II. 
 
 3. T|<r0Vi Adpeios : the pred. 
 here stands before the subject 
 because the former is the more 
 important, containing the real 
 point of the new statement. 
 The general principle is that 
 the more important precedes the 
 less important, other things be- 
 ing equal. But other things 
 are often not equal, and hence 
 other principles come in play, 
 some of which will be noticed 
 later. When the relative im- 
 portance of words is merely 
 grammatical importance, as is 
 often the case in simple narra- 
 tive, then we have nearly the 
 ordinary English order; but 
 the more feeling is expressed, 
 the more the order in Greek is 
 likely to differ from that in 
 English. Note that the final 
 
 place in a clause is likely to 
 contain an important word in 
 English, but an unimportant 
 one in Greek. 
 
 4. irapcivcu : to be near him ; 
 made up of irapd near and eivai 
 to be. 
 
 5. jtv ovv: each particle 
 has its proper force; fdv, al- 
 though translated only by the 
 tone in which the whole phrase 
 is spoken, shows that the writer 
 has in mind something con- 
 trasted with 6 IT pea- pfo epos, while 
 ofiv connects the statement with 
 the former sentence as our ac- 
 cordingly does. irapwv: sup- 
 plementary pple. with 
 agreeing with the subj. 6 
 ptirepos. With rvyxdvw the 
 pple. really contains the main 
 statement. We say, chanced 
 to be present, or was at hand, 
 as it happened. H. 980, 984 ; 
 G. 1578, 1586. 
 
 6. fi,Tairjj,irTcu : indir. mid., 
 sends for to come to himself, 
 summons. apx^s : province, 
 a meaning easily derived from 
 that of government. 
 
 7. eiroifjo-c: the Greek is 
 
228 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [225 
 
 O<TOI eh Ka<TTQ)\ov 
 ovv o Ku/309 Xa/3ft)i> 
 
 often content to describe an act 
 by the aor. merely as occurring 
 in the past, where we are care- 
 ful to describe it by the plup. as 
 completed in the past. Hence 
 the plup. is far less common 
 in Greek, and we must often 
 use the plup. to translate an 
 aor. ind. ; so with dir{dei%e. 
 ical orrpaTTj-yov 8c : as 8{ is al- 
 ways a conj., Kal must here be 
 the adv. meaning also. The 
 writer drops the rel. clause and 
 practically begins a new sen- 
 tence. Greek often does this 
 rather than extend the rel. 
 clause to two or more members 
 as we do. 
 
 8. oo-oi : since we have no 
 single rel. pron. ref erring espe- 
 cially to quantity or number, 
 and as many as is clumsy, we 
 we may translate who. But 
 Greek generally uses fooi for 
 icho after an indefinite word 
 of number like irdvrwv. Ka- 
 o-TwXov ircSCov : practically one 
 proper name ; hence the omis- 
 sion of the article. In the ace. 
 because of the motion implied 
 in dBpolfrvrai (dir. mid.). In 
 Anab. I., 9, 7 Xenophon tells 
 US that Cyrus Kareir^^dTj vir6 
 TOV irarpbs (ivas sent down by 
 his father) aaTpdirys A.v5tds re 
 
 avafiaivei 
 real rwv 
 
 a>9 
 
 Kal &pvyids Kal K 
 
 &s Kal iravruv dire- 
 ols Kad-fjK^ (whose duty 
 it is) eis Kao-rwXoO TredLov ddpoi- 
 e<r6at. This was the central 
 mustering place of a wide re- 
 gion. &va|3aivi : note the 
 position and the reason for 
 it. This journey was made in 
 405 B.C. dvd in composition 
 with verbs of motion is used to 
 denote travel from the coast 
 inland, as we often use up. 
 Hence dv.dpao-is means a jour- 
 ney from the coast inland ; it 
 is the title given properly to 
 Xenophon' s account of the 
 march of Cyrus up to the neigh- 
 borhood of Babylon. This ac- 
 count is contained in the first 
 eight chapters of Book I., and 
 the remaining six Books de- 
 scribe the return of the Greeks ; 
 but the title is used as that of 
 the entire work. 
 
 9. Tioro-a4>pvr]v : really an 
 enemy of Cyrus, to whom had 
 been given a large part of the 
 power formerly held by Tis- 
 saphernes. Doubtless Cyrus 
 distrusted him, and for that 
 reason was unwilling to leave 
 him behind during an ab- 
 sence certain to last several 
 months, 
 
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 229 
 
 Se avrwv ^evicuv Tlappdcriov. 
 
 ap^ovra 10 
 
 10. \wv : having under his 
 command, as a body-guard. We 
 may translate with; but ob- 
 serve that in this sense ex (t)V 
 can be used only of a superior, 
 who can be said to have under 
 him soldiers or other inferiors. 
 Cyrus had seen clearly the ex- 
 cellence of Greek soldiers as 
 compared with Asiatics. 6-irXt- 
 TO.S: men fully armed with a 
 heavy shield, a bronze cuirass, 
 helmet, and greaves (which 
 clasped around the leg and pro- 
 tected it from the knee to the 
 ankle), together with a sword 
 and long spear for weapons of 
 offense. This armor all to- 
 gether was called forXa (ti-n-Xov 
 in the sing, means implement 
 in general), hence oTrXfr^s with 
 
 the same derivative ending as 
 in TroXiTTjs from TTO'XIS. dve'pTj : 
 the change from the historical 
 pres. to the aor. and from aor. 
 to historical pres. is very com- 
 mon. Tpia,Ko<rCovs : added af- 
 ter the clause is apparently 
 complete, as if it were an after- 
 thought, the number thus re- 
 ceives a certain prominence. 
 A word so added is in fact 
 made the beginning of a new 
 rhetorical group, as we might 
 say in English, " Some Greek 
 soldiers also accompanied him, 
 three hundred in number." In 
 this way a word standing at 
 the end of a clause may be an 
 emphatic one. 
 
 11. Ilappdo-iov : Parrhasia 
 was in southwestern Arcadia. 
 
 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 226. The subjunctive mode has, in principal 
 clauses, 1 only three uses, which are all found in 
 Latin. 
 
 a. The first person is used to express a request 
 
 1 The uses of the subjunctive in subordinate clauses will 
 be described as they occur. 
 
230 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [227 
 
 or proposal (hortative subjunctive) : avaft&nev let 
 us go up. 
 
 b. The second and third persons are used with 
 fjuj (not*) in prohibitions, but only in the aorist : prj 
 aOpoicrrjcrOe do not assemble. 
 
 c. The first person is used in questions as to 
 what may be done with propriety or advantage 
 (deliberative subjunctive) : ri TTOI&ILGV ; what had 
 we better do f 
 
 In each of these uses it is clear that there is some refer- 
 ence to future time ; and in almost all uses of this mode in 
 subordinate clauses as well, the connection and the nature 
 of the situation show more or less of reference to the future. 
 But 
 
 227. The tenses of the subjunctive do not mark 
 distinctions of time, but have the following force : 
 
 The present denotes an action simply as con- 
 tinued or repeated (at any time) ; 
 
 The aorist denotes an action simply as brought 
 to pass (at any time) ; 
 
 The perfect denotes an action simply as com- 
 pleted (at any time). 
 
 The context alone indicates what time is re- 
 ferred to. Compare 154, a on the infinitive. 
 
 228. There is no future subjunctive. Each 
 tense system except the future has a subjunc- 
 tive ; there is no subjunctive imperfect or plu- 
 perfect. ' 
 
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 231 
 
 229. Subjunctive of \vco (\i>-, \ih). 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE. 
 
 Pres. S. 1 
 
 \v-co 
 
 \V-0)-/JLCU 
 
 
 2 
 
 Xz)-?;? 
 
 \v-rj 
 
 
 3 
 
 XU-T; 
 
 \v-rj-rai 
 
 
 D.2 
 
 \V-T]-TOV 
 
 \v-rj-o-0ov 
 
 
 3 
 
 X-77-TOZ/ 
 
 \V-1)-(T00V 
 
 
 P.I 
 
 \V-0)-fJLV 
 
 \v-a>-tJL0a 
 
 
 2 
 
 \v~rj-re 
 
 \v-rj-a0 
 
 
 3 
 
 \V-GMTI, 
 
 \v-c0-VTat, 
 
 
 lAor.S. 1 
 
 \v-<r<o 
 
 \faa-liM 
 
 \V-00) 
 
 2 
 
 XV-0-779 
 
 \v-<rrj 
 
 \v-0fjs 
 
 3 
 
 \v-a-rj 
 
 \v-o-rj-rcu 
 
 \v-0fj 
 
 D.2 
 
 \v-a-rj-rov 
 
 \v-<rr)-(T0ov 
 
 \V-0fj-TOV 
 
 3 
 
 Xv-arj-TOV 
 
 \v-a-rj-o-0ov 
 
 \v-0rj-rov 
 
 P.I 
 
 \V-(7CO-fJLV 
 
 \v-crco-fjie0a 
 
 \V-0W- fjiV 
 
 2 
 
 \v-a-rj-re 
 
 \v-a-rj-a-0e 
 
 \v-0rj-re 
 
 3 
 
 \v-a-coa-L 
 
 XWco-i/ra^ 
 
 \v-eauTL 
 
 Perf. S. 1 
 
 \e-\v-fcco 
 
 Xe-Xv-^i/o? & 
 
 
 2 
 
 \-\v-/crp 
 
 " y<* 
 
 
 3 
 
 \e-\v-Krj 
 
 44 w 
 
 
 D.2 
 
 \e-\v-/crj-rov 
 
 \-\V-fJLVCO fJTOV 
 
 
 3 
 
 \e-\v- icy-rov 
 
 44 TITOV 
 
 
 P.I 
 
 \-\V-KQ)-/JLV 
 
 \e-\V-fJLVOl &fJLV 
 
 
 2 
 
 \-\V-Kr]-T 
 
 44 fjT 
 
 
 3 
 
 \'\V-/CCOCTL 
 
 far* 
 
 
232 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [230 
 
 230. The mode suffix of the subjunctive is the 
 lengthened variable vowel -%- ; co when the end- 
 ing begins with p or v, elsewhere 77. 
 
 a. If the indicative has a tense suffix ending in 
 -%- or a, the corresponding subjunctive puts -%- in 
 place of that vowel. Otherwise the subjunctive 
 adds -%- to the tense stem; a, e, or o contracts 
 with a following %-. 
 
 This amounts to the same thing as saying that the sub- 
 junctive adds -"Iff in /u-tenses, and elsewhere puts -<%,- in 
 place o/the final vowel of the tense stem. 
 
 b. But the perfect middle system has only com- 
 pound forms, made up of the perfect middle parti- 
 ciple and the present subjunctive of the verb elfii 
 am. 
 
 These forms of ct/xt are easily remembered, because they 
 are exactly like the combined mode suffix and endings of 
 all active subjunctives. The participle is of course declined 
 to agree with the subject. 
 
 c. In the aorist passive the passive suffix is -0e- 
 by the rule in 170, d. The accent is according to 
 the rule in 178. 
 
 231. The subjunctive takes the primary endings, 
 omitting -/u in the first singular; i subscript is 
 written where the indicative has i. 
 
 The subjunctive forms in ^u-tenses, in the second aorist, 
 
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 233 
 
 and in contracted presents, are shown in the following para- 
 digms. In the tenses not given, these verbs are like the 
 corresponding tenses of A.VOJ. 
 
 232. Subjunctive of 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 (crra-, 
 
 MIDDLE (PASSIVE). 
 
 Pres. S. 1 
 
 f / 
 
 -<rro> 
 
 L"O"TO)~LL(tt/ 
 
 2 
 
 /-err?}? 
 
 L~O'T'yj 
 
 3 
 
 l-arp 
 
 hrtfrnu 
 
 D. 2 
 
 l-a-rrj-rov 
 
 l"O"Tll~O'(/OV 
 
 3 
 
 l-CTTrj-TOV 
 
 i~(n"fl~(Tvo v 
 
 P. 1 
 
 i-o-rti-fJiev 
 
 l-(TTci)-/Ji0a 
 
 2 
 
 i-o-rfj-re 
 
 i-crrrj-a-Oe 
 
 3 
 
 i-arw 
 
 ivT&VTIU 
 
 
 
 a. In the /xt-aorist 
 
 Mt-Aor. S. 1 
 
 (7TO) 
 
 subjunctive the theme 
 
 2 
 
 M 
 
 has the short form ac- 
 
 3 
 
 N 
 
 cording to 170, d. In 
 
 tJ 
 
 O-TT; 
 
 both present and fu- 
 
 D. 2 
 
 O"T > 77~T"0 1' 
 
 aorist the contraction 
 
 3 
 
 (TTTj-TOl' 
 
 of a-rj is 77, contrary 
 
 
 
 to 177, (1); but these 
 
 P. 1 
 
 (TT&-fJLV 
 
 forms are easily re- 
 
 2 
 
 o-r^-re 
 
 membered, because 
 
 3 
 
 <7TW-(7fc 
 
 they show the mode 
 
 
 
 suffix the more plainly. 
 
234 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [233 
 
 233. Mi-aorist Subjunctive of yiyvwa/co) (71/0-, <yva)-). 
 
 S. 1 
 
 yva) 
 
 a. The theme has 
 
 2 
 
 7Z>ft)5 
 
 the short form accord- 
 
 3 
 
 7^cS 
 
 ing to the rule in 170, 
 
 
 
 d. The contraction of 
 
 D. 2 
 
 yvco-rov 
 
 o-r/ando-cois according 
 
 3 
 
 ryv&-Tov 
 
 to the rule in 182, (2); 
 
 P-j 
 
 
 but 0-77 gives a), con- 
 
 . 1 
 
 <yv&-fjLV 
 
 trary to 182, (3), so that 
 
 2 
 
 ryV&-T 
 
 CD appears throughout 
 
 3 
 
 ryVWCTi 
 
 the paradigm. 
 
 234. Aorist Subjunctive of areXXco ((jreX-, crraX-). 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 IstAor.S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D.2 
 
 3 
 
 P.I 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 <TTi\-CO 
 
 <7Ti\-7)-T 
 
 a-reiK-rj-dOov 
 
235] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 235 
 
 2d Aor. S. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 D.2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 crraX-Tj-re 
 
 a. The subjunctive 
 in the liquid first aorist 
 and in the second 
 aorist passive differs 
 from that of the <ra- 
 aorist and the first 
 aorist passive only in 
 the part that precedes 
 the mode suffix. 
 
 235. Second Aorist and Second Perfect Subjunctive 
 of \afjt,/3dvo) (Xa/3-, X?7y8-). 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 2d Aor. S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 Xa/3-w 
 \dfrg 
 
 \d/3-rj-(T0ov 
 
 \d/3-CO-VTCU 
 
236 THE GHEES: OF XENOPHON. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 [236 
 
 2dPerf.S. 1 
 
 l-\7)(p-(*) 
 
 a. The second aorist 
 
 2 
 
 lr\,Ti<p-'rjs 
 
 subjunctive active and 
 
 3 
 
 
 middle consists merely 
 
 
 i ~ W'V 
 
 of theme, mode suffix, 
 
 D.2 
 
 6 t,-\1J <p-7)~TO V 
 
 ending. The second 
 
 3 
 
 i'\TJ (D-7J-TO V 
 
 perfect subjunctive 
 
 
 
 differs from the first 
 
 P.I 
 
 L~\ / n d)~(t)-LLV 
 
 perfect only in the 
 
 2 
 
 6-X^</)-77-Te 
 
 part that precedes the 
 
 3 
 
 el-X^-axn 
 
 mode suffix. 
 
 236. Present Subjunctive of vlfcda) 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE (PASSIVE). 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D.2 
 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 vlK(a-rf)a-rov 
 w(a-()ft)-/i.6i' 
 
 a-co 
 
 a. In reading the paradigms, omit the syllable next after 
 the parenthesis to obtain the uncontracted form ; to obtain 
 the contracted form omit the letters in the parenthesis. 
 
 The contractions here follow the rule in 177. 
 
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 237 
 
 237. Present Subjunctive of ^Xeea 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE (PASSIVE). 
 
 s. i 
 
 2 
 . 3 
 
 D. 2 
 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 a. These contractions follow the rule in 180, (3). 
 
 238. Present Subjunctive of SouXo'w (SowXo-). 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE (PASSIVE). 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 So uX (0-779) 06? 
 
 SowX (O'-T;) <W-TO z/ 
 So uX ( 0-77) W-TO z^ 
 
 ( 6-ft)) ft)-yLUU 
 
 SouX (0-77)0^ 
 
 SoV\ (0-77) 
 
 So v X (o-a>) co-vrat, 
 
 a. These contractions follow the rule in 182, (2) 
 and (3). 
 
288 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [239 
 
 239. The verb fya) is so common and has so many pecu- 
 liarities that a full description of it is here given. 
 
 a. The theme was originally <r\- ; initial <r, as in ivrqfju, 
 VTTO, vTrep, CTTTCI (compare Latin sisto, sub, super, septem) was 
 weakened to the rough breathing in some forms, and in 
 others (wherever ^ remained unchanged) was still further 
 weakened to the smooth breathing. This gives the present 
 indicative l^w, etc. The imperfect takes the syllabic aug- 
 ment, remaining from the time when the <r was still pro- 
 nounced ; e-e^-o-v gives by contraction ct^ov. 
 
 b. The future !fo> is for l^-o-co, the initial rough breathing 
 being here retained because the aspiration of x disappears 
 in f . The other future, 0^770-0), shows another form of the 
 theme, cr^rj-. ^<o is much more common. 
 
 c. The second aorist lo-^ov is for l-cre^-o-v, the theme ap- 
 pearing as (r\-. The subjunctive is cr^to, ar^ys, "X?f> o"X*7 TOV > 
 cryrjTov, crx&fjitv, o^re, cr^wo-t ; the infinitive, o^etv ; the par- 
 ticiple, o-^wv, cr^ovo-a, o-\6v. 
 
 d. The perfects ecrxrjKa and toyflnai are regularly formed 
 from the theme o^-; the reduplication is e- only, by the 
 rule in 196, a. There is no aorist passive until a late period, 
 that system being supplied by other verbs. 
 
 240. The verb elfit am, of which some forms 
 have already been given, should now be learned in 
 full (except the optative and imperative modes) 
 from H. 4T8, 479, 480; G. 806, 1-3. 
 
 Observe that in Tra/oci/u (compounded of Trapa and ct/u) 
 the participle Trapwv retains the accent of the simple verb. 
 In the imperfect Trapfjv, Trapfja-Oa, etc., the accent remains on 
 the rj in accordance with H. 391 b ; G. 133, 1. 
 
241] ANABASIS, /., 7, 3-4. 239 
 
 241. Vocabulary. 
 
 ^ 
 
 >-, 2 KTOV-), 
 
 , aireicTeiva, aTreicTova } death. 
 (a?ro + 7re//,7r-, TTO/^^)-), \ 
 
 re/^^/rct), aTreTreuilra, aTTOTre- [ 7 
 
 ^ r ,' , \send away. 
 a, aTTOTTeTrefjifjiai, a7T7re/i<p- [ 
 
 ATV 
 
 arladfo (drt/^aS- 3 ), a,Tiu,av<),\ ,. , ,. 
 
 ; ^ b >_^ I dishonor, dis- 
 
 rjri.fjiaa'a* nriLLa/ca* 77Ttua<7uat, > 
 
 . - / /, I ^^- 
 
 rjTi/jiacrv'rjv ) 
 
 Sia/3d\\co (&a + aX-, /8X^-), S^a-^ slander, bring 
 /3aX<w, S^eySaXoz/, Sta/SeySX^/ca, > iwto discred- 
 SiafteftXrj/jiai,, &i/3\ij0r)v ) it. 
 
 eav? conj. followed by subjv. (jf. 
 
 e^aireo) (e^ + aZre-), e^airijcrco, etc., ) J^ o^*, /ree Jy 
 reg., ) entreaty. 
 
 77, conj., 
 
 1 For the accent see H. 391 J ; G. 133, 1. 
 
 2 Liquid theme ; the present of the iota class, formed like 
 uvco (see 224, note 2 ). 
 
 8 From art/xos unhonored, which is from a privative and 
 honor. The present is of the iota class, the present 
 stem being aTt/Aa%- for drt/xa8-t%-, 8-t forming . Cf. 
 a#poi'a>, which is in like manner derived from the adj. d0/ooos 
 together. 
 
 4 Compounded of et z/ and the particle av f which marks 
 the action as contingent. 
 
240 THE 'GREEK OF XENOPBON. [242 
 
 - 1 ), KivSvvevo-co, 
 
 Kiv$vvvco 
 etc., reg., 
 e, adv., 
 
 , -r/>o9 (H. 189; G. 274) 
 
 be in danger. 
 (Lat. 
 
 7r/>o9, prep. w. ace., 
 
 never. 
 
 mother 
 mater). 
 
 to, in the pres- 
 ence of. 
 
 how? 
 
 how. 
 
 7rcJ)9, 2 interrog. adv., 
 
 O7ree>9, adv., indir. interrog. or in- 
 
 def . rel., 
 
 (7v\Xa/ji/3dvQ) (a-vv + \af3-, X?7/3-), ^ (1) take toget Ti~ 
 i, avve\aj3ov, avvei- V er; (2) seize, 
 
 i, <Twe\r}<j)9'r]v ) arrest. 
 
 T\vrdco (reXeura-), r\VTtjcra) ) (1) end; 
 
 etc., reg., i (2) die. 
 
 (^Tro + a/o^-), vTrdpgco, ) begin to be, sub- 
 
 \ sist, exist. 
 
 242. Anabasis, I., 1, 3-4. 
 3. 'Evrel &e T\vrrjo-e Aapeto? KOLI Karea-rrj efc rrjv 
 
 rov 
 
 1. eireC: see 140, I., 3, note 
 on tirel. KaT<rr] ets : entered 
 on, became established in' y cf. 
 
 KaTto-Tyo-e 125, I., 6 and note, 
 also 188, II., 2 and note. 
 
 2. 8iapdX\i : how this com- 
 
 1 From KiVSuvos danger. Verbs derived from nouns or 
 adjectives, like d^pot^o>, aTtfUia), KtvSuveva), 8ovXoa>, reAevrao), 
 are called denominatives. 
 
 2 The series TTWS A0w ? OTTWS how, TTWS (enclitic) m some 
 way, cus as, OVTCDS ^ws are correlatives, like TTOTC, TTOTC, rorc, 
 
242] 
 
 ANABASIS, Jr., 1, 3-4. 
 
 241 
 
 Kvpov vrpo? roz; dSe\<f)bv o>9 7ri/3ov\evei 
 
 ireiOerai /cal a-vKKappdvet, Kvpov a>9 dTro/crevwv 77 
 
 avrov aTTOTrefiTrei, ird\iv 5 
 
 stituted without changing the 
 meaning. But hi the sentence, 
 "I, not remembering how I 
 cried out then, will cry it o'er 
 again," how is very nearly the 
 same as that. The change of 
 meaning in a; s is the same, but 
 cJs in the sense of 6n is far 
 more common than how in the 
 sense of that. 6 8^ : but he, 
 that is, the king. A frequent 
 way of beginning a sentence, 
 when there is change of sub- 
 ject, and the new subject is 
 made prominent by the con- 
 text. Cf. 208, I., 16 and note. 
 
 4. s diroKTCvwv : lit., as about 
 to kill him ; that is, apparently 
 to put him to death. The fut. 
 pple. here, as in Latin, denotes 
 purpose, and cJs marks the 
 purpose, not as one of which 
 the writer is certain, but as 
 one which people inferred 
 from Artaxerxes 1 words and 
 actions. 
 
 5. <uTTj<rajivT| : indir. mid. ; 
 the force of the voice is lost in 
 translation. 
 
 pound of $ and j3<XXo> came 
 to have this special meaning is 
 uncertain. Xenophon was a 
 warm admirer of Cyrus and 
 evidently did not believe the 
 story. Plutarch tells us hi his 
 life of Artaxerxes, that Cyrus 
 was accused of planning to kill 
 his brother at the ceremony of 
 coronation. Tissaphernes was 
 doubtless glad to get Cyrus into 
 trouble, but we cannot be cer- 
 tain whether his accusation was 
 true or not. 
 
 3. ws : the first instance of 
 cJs in the sense of tfn that. cJs 
 is, in its origin, an adv. of man- 
 ner from the rel. pron. 6s (like 
 /caXws from /caXo's, etc. ; cf. 174, 
 L, 17 and note), and therefore 
 means in what way, as, how. 
 In Shakspere's lines, " There's 
 a divinity that shapes our ends, 
 rough-hew tHem how we will ;" 
 and " How thou pleasest, God, 
 dispose the day," how is the 
 exact equivalent of '$ in the 
 first sense, and in each sen- 
 tence quoted as could be sub- 
 
 ore. Observe that the TTOJ? series, all adverbs of manner, 
 have the same ending with KoAws and other adverbs of 
 manner. 
 
242 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [242 
 
 eirl rr)V ap^rjv. 4. o S' &>? 
 /cal arlfJiacrOels, ftov\VTCU, OTTCDS /JLiJTrore CTL earai 
 7rl TO* aSeX<<:3, aXXa, eav Svvrjrat^ j3acn\vcrei, avr 
 eiceivov. Tlapvcrans /Aev Srj rj fAiJTrjp VTrrjpxe rcS 
 10 Ku/oft), <f>i\ovcra avrbv /taXXoz/ TJ TOV ftacri\evovTa 
 
 6 f. a>s dirfiX0: ws is here 
 temporal, when. As shows a 
 like change of meaning ; for 
 example, "He greeted me as 
 he entered" ; "As mine eyes 
 opened I saw their weapons 
 drawn." KivSvvevo-ds Kal drt- 
 |iacr0Ls: English does not use 
 pples. so freely as Greek ; trans- 
 late after being in danger and 
 disgrace. 
 
 7. oircos . . . <TTat : lit., how 
 he shall never again be. This 
 is really an expression of pur- 
 pose ; see H. 885; G. 1372. 
 }i^7roT: ov expresses negation 
 simply ; /x^ expresses it as 
 willed or as thought of. The 
 same distinction appears in all 
 their compounds. It is evident 
 that a purpose clause expresses 
 something willed / hence a neg- 
 ative clause of purpose always 
 has rf. H. 1018, 1021 ; G. 1610 
 (2d sentence). Instances of the 
 second use of ^ are seen in 
 /-nj with pples. ; cf. 188, II., 17 
 and note. 
 
 8. irl T<J a8c\<|>cp : twi with 
 
 the dat. often means on, upon, 
 in a figurative or derived sense ; 
 here, dependent on, in the power 
 of. On in the literal sense 
 is more usually, in prose, M 
 with the gen. &v SVVTJTCU: 
 dvvafjLai is one of three verbs 
 which, though the theme (dwa-) 
 ends in a, have recessive ac- 
 cent in the pres. subjv. The 
 conditional clause refers to fu- 
 ture time, and is viewed as not 
 improbable ; that is, it is of the 
 future, more vivid form. H. 
 898 ; G. 1403, 1404. 
 
 91 8Vj: of course. virnpx 
 T<J> Kvpw : lit., existed for Cy- 
 rus, that is, was on his side, 
 supported Cyrus. * For the ac* 
 cent of vTTTjpxe see H. 391, b ; 
 G. 133, 1. -Ktptf is a dat. of in- 
 terest. H. 767 ; G. 1165. 
 
 11. 'ApTale'pfrjv : compara- 
 tives with TJ (like comparatives 
 with quam in Latin) are fol- 
 lowed by the case of the corre- 
 sponding noun before the com- 
 parative. H. 643 and a. 
 
243] 
 
 ANABASIS, /., 7, 3-4. 
 
 243 
 
 243. Translate into Greek. 
 
 When Dareios fell sick, Cyrus chanced to be 
 in the province of which Dareios had made him 
 satrap. Accordingly he was summoned, for the 
 king desired to see both his sons before his death. 
 Let us send for Cyrus, for the king wishes to 
 see him also. Cyrus wished, before the death of 
 Dareios, to be king ; but Xenophon does not be- 
 lieve that he plotted against his brother, as Tissa- 
 phernes affirmed. We chanced to be present 
 when some one was slandering the boy. Do not 10 
 appoint the young man general, for if the enemy 
 come against him, he will not be able to conquer 
 them and so will be disgraced. Whom shall we 
 appoint as commander? If the Persians attempt 
 to enslave Athens, the Greeks will have better 15 
 generals and more effective soldiers. 
 
 See 236,5. 
 
 1. feU sick: inceptive aor. 
 dffOevfa. H. 841 ; G. 1260. 
 
 to be: supplementary pple. 
 
 2. had made : use the aor. 
 
 3. accordingly: remember 
 that otiv is postpositive. 
 
 5. Let us send for : horta- 
 tive subjv. in the aor. See 226, 
 a. H. 866, 1 ; G. 1344. 
 
 6 ff. Cyrus wished, etc. : 
 the antithesis between the state- 
 ments of the two members of 
 the sentence should be indi- 
 cated by ntv ... 5^. 
 
 JO f. Do not appoint: ^ 
 
 with the aor. subjv. 
 H. 866, 2 ; G. 1346. 
 
 11 f . if the enemy come : 
 a condition like &v SUVTJTCU, 
 242, 8. H. 898 ; G. 1403. As 
 to tense, the aor. is preferable 
 here, since the action is more 
 naturally conceived as merely 
 occurring than as continued. 
 
 13 f. "Whom shall we ap- 
 point : deliberative subjv. See 
 236, c. H. 866, 3 ; G. 1358. 
 as : omit in Greek. 
 
 16. more effective : Kpelr- 
 
244 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 THE OPTATIVE MODE. 
 
 [244 
 
 244. The optative mode has, in principal clauses, 1 
 only two uses, both of which belong in Latin to 
 the subjunctive. 
 
 a. The optative is used to express a wish that 
 something may happen; this is the use which 
 gives the name to the mode (Latin opto, wish) : 
 e\6oi may he come. Such a wish always refers to 
 future time. H. 870 and d ; G. 1507. 
 
 b. The optative is used with av as a less posi- 
 tive expression for the future (or present) indica- 
 tive, and is translated with may, might, would, etc. ; 
 this is called the potential optative: e'X0ot av he 
 would (might) come. H. 872 and b ; G. 1327 ff. 
 
 245. The tenses of the optative do not mark 
 distinctions of time, but differ as those of the sub- 
 junctive do (227). Each tense system has an 
 optative, but the future optative has but one use, 
 which will be described later. There is no opta- 
 tive imperfect or pluperfect. 
 
 4- 
 246. Optative of Xva> (Xf-, Xu-). 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE. 
 
 Pres. S. 1 
 
 \V-OL-fjLL 
 
 \v-oi-fJLrjv 
 
 
 2 
 
 Xi5-0-5 
 
 \V-OL-O 
 
 
 3 
 
 XU-CM 
 
 \V-Oi-TO 
 
 
 1 The uses of the optative in subordinate clauses will be 
 described as they occur, 
 
THE OPTATIVE MODE. 245 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE. 
 
 D.2 
 
 \V-Ol-TOV 
 
 \t-oi-aeov 
 
 
 3 
 
 \ihoi-Trjv 
 
 \v-oi-a6riv 
 
 
 P.I 
 
 \V-Ot,-fJiV 
 
 \v-ol-fjL0a 
 
 
 2 
 
 \V-OL-T 
 
 \v-oi-(T0e 
 
 
 3 
 
 \v-oie~v 
 
 \V-Ol-VTO 
 
 
 Fut. S.I 
 
 \V-(70t,-fJL(, 
 
 \v-croi-fJLrjv 
 
 \v-0rj-(TO l-fir) v 
 
 2 
 
 \v-a-oi-? 
 
 \V-(TOl-O 
 
 \V-0T)-(TOi-0 
 
 3 
 
 \v-aoi 
 
 \V-(TOl-TO 
 
 \v-6rj-aoL-TO 
 
 D.2 
 
 \V'(70l-TOV 
 
 \v-aoi,-(70ov 
 
 \v-0tf-cro i-a-0 ov 
 
 3 
 
 \v-a-oi-Trjv 
 
 \v-croi-cr 6 r)v 
 
 \v-0rj-a-oi-o- 0rj v 
 
 P.I 
 
 \lhO- 01-/JL6V 
 
 \V-(TOl-fJL0a 
 
 \v-0rj-o~o i-/JL0a 
 
 2 
 
 \V-(TO(,-T 
 
 \v-croi-cr6e 
 
 \v-0rj-a oi-dOe 
 
 3 
 
 \V-(TOl-V 
 
 \V-(TOl-VTO 
 
 \v-0rj-croi-VTO 
 
 lAor.S.l 
 
 \v-crai-/jii, 
 
 \t-a-ai-MV 
 
 \v-0elrj-v 
 
 2 
 
 \v-o-eia-s, 
 
 \v-aai-o 
 
 \v-6ei f r]-s 
 
 
 \v-a~ai-s 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 \v-<TL,\v-<rai 
 
 \v-aai-ro 
 
 \v-6ei-rj 
 
 D.2 
 
 \V-CTCU-TOV 
 
 \v-aai-cr0ov 
 
 \v-6el-rov, 
 
 
 
 
 \v-6e irj-rov 
 
 3 
 
 \v-(ral-r i rjv 
 
 \v-crai-a-0rjv 
 
 \v-0el-Trjv, 
 
 P.I 
 
 \V-(TCU-fJLV 
 
 KaW 
 
 JSSZT' 
 
 2 
 
 \V-(TCU-T 
 
 \V-(7ai-(T0 
 
 \V~(/if]~lliV 
 ~\i\J~\jlf~T^ 
 
 3 
 
 \v-aeia-v, 
 
 \v-aai~VTo 
 
 \v-6ele-V) 
 
 
 Xv-o-atc-v 
 
 
 Xv-Octrj-crav 
 
246 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 [247- 
 
 Perf. S. 1 
 
 \e-\v-Koi-jJbi, 
 
 \-\v-fjiVO<? elr)-v 
 
 2 
 
 \e-\v-KOi-s 
 
 " erw-9 
 
 3 
 
 \-\V-KOI 
 
 " irj 
 
 D.2 
 
 \e-\v-KOi-rov 
 
 \-\V-fJL6VCO el-TOZ/, elt)-TOV 
 
 3 
 
 \e-\v-fco l-rrjv 
 
 ec-TTjv, elrrrnv 
 
 P.I 
 
 \e-\v-icoirpev 
 
 \e-\v-fievoi, i-fJLV) eirj-^ev 
 
 2 
 
 \e-\v-KOi-re 
 
 " eZ-re, etrf-re 
 
 3 
 
 \6-\v-fcot,e-v 
 
 " i-v, efy-crav 
 
 247. The mode suffix of the optative has four 
 forms, --, -677-, -e-, -ia-. These are added to the 
 tense-stem, i forming a diphthong with the pre- 
 ceding vowel. Before this i the variable vowel 
 has the form o, and in the perfect active o is sub- 
 stituted for the a of the indicative tense suffix. 
 The perfect middle has only compound forms, 
 made up of the perfect middle participle and the 
 present optative of efal. H. 478, 479 ; G. 806. 
 
 a. The mode suffix is -i- always in the middle, 
 and usually in the active and passive ; but in the 
 third plural before the ending -v it is always -^e-. 
 In the singular of /u-tenses (active, and aorist 
 passive) -irj- is always used ; in the plural of these 
 tenses, -i- or -^7- may be used, but the third plural 
 forms in -lycrav are late. 
 
248] 
 
 THE OPTATIVE NODE. 
 
 247 
 
 b. In the first aorist active the common forms of 
 the second and third singular and the third plural 
 are irregular. The tense suffix here has e instead 
 of a, and the mode suffix is -la- in the second sin- 
 gular and third plural, -ie- in the third singular. 
 
 c. The optative takes the secondary endings, 
 but in the first singular active after the mode 
 suffix -L- the ending is -fja (after ~ir)-, however, the 
 ending is -v). 
 
 d. For the accent of Xkot, Xtoxu, \vcrat,, \e\v/coi, 
 see EL 102, a and b ; G. 113. The accent of \vOel- 
 TOV, \v6elfjLev, \v6elre, \v6elev is in accordance with 
 the rule that in optatives of the /it-inflection the 
 accent cannot stand back of the mode suffix -6-. 
 H. 388. 
 
 The optative forms in /u-tenses, in the second aorist, and 
 in contract presents, are shown in the following paradigms. 
 In the tenses not here given these verbs are like the corre- 
 sponding tenses of Avo>. 
 
 248. Optative of um?/u (era-, 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D.2 
 3 
 
 -(na-Tov or -crrarj-rov 
 
 -a-ra-o 
 
 l-crral-crOov 
 
248 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [249 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 P.I 
 
 l-arairrn, l-a-rai^ev 
 
 l-crral-fjieda 
 
 2 
 
 l-arai-re l-araiy-re 
 
 l-aral-crOe 
 
 3 
 
 i-GTaie-V i-o'Tairj-o'av 
 
 l-crrai-VTo 
 
 Mt-Aor. S. 1 
 
 (rralrj-v 
 
 
 2 
 
 / 
 
 a. In like 
 
 3 
 
 (IT airj 
 
 manner the 
 
 D.2 
 
 3 
 
 (rrai-Tov or o-ralrj-rov 
 o-rai-rrjv o-rairj-Trjv 
 
 /xt-aorist opta- 
 tive of /2aiVo> 
 (/3a-, )8av-) is 
 
 P.I 
 
 ~ ' 
 
 j8ay-v, /3airj-s, 
 
 2 
 
 aral-re crraLrj-re 
 
 etc. 
 
 3 
 
 (7Tai-V CTTairj-vav 
 
 
 249. Optative of jiyvmcncco (71*0-, /va)-~). 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Mt-Aor. S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D.2 
 3 
 
 P.I 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 ryvo-rov or 
 
 ryvoi-rrjv 
 
 ryvoi-/jiev 
 
 yvorj-re 
 
250] 
 
 THE OPTATIVE NODE. 
 
 249 
 
 250. Optative of o-re'XXo) (o-reX-, 0-raX-). 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 IstAor.S. 1 
 
 2 
 
 D.2 
 
 3 
 
 P.I 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 oreiX-ai 
 
 0-rctX-atc-v 
 
 erretX-at-ro 
 <TTi\-ai,-(rdov 
 
 ffTt,\-ai-fieda 
 <TTi\-ai-cr0e 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 2d Aor. S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D.2 
 3 
 
 P.I 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 or 
 
 <7TO,\-L-fjLV 
 <TTa\-L-T 
 
250 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [251 
 
 251. Optative of 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 (\ay8-, X??/?-). 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 2dAor. S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 Xay8-ot 
 \aj3-ol-T7jv 
 
 \d/3-OL-T 
 
 Xa/3-ot-ro 
 
 \df3-oi-crdov 
 
 Xa/3-o i-<T0r]v 
 
 \a/3-oi-/Ji0a 
 
 \djS-ot-o-6e 
 
 \d/3-oi-vro 
 
 2dPerf.S. 1 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P.I 
 2 
 3 
 
 252. Present Optative of vl/cdco (mica-*). 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 s.i 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 V~uc(a-Ol)<p 
 
 vl/c (a-o /) w 
 vl/c(d-oi)q)~o 
 
253] 
 
 THE OPTATIVE NODE. 251 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 vlic (a-o L)O)-TOV 
 VLK (a-o C)(p-Triv 
 
 (a-o i ) GO-O- 0rj v 
 
 253. Present Optative of <f>i\ea) 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 s. i 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 ^t\(e-oi)owy- 1 ' or 
 e-ot')oM/-? or 
 <f>i\(_e-oC).ofa) or 
 
 -0 - 
 
252 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [254 
 
 254. Present Optative of Sov\dco (SouXo-). 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 s. i 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 1 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 Soi>X(o-o/)o/?7-z> or 
 So v\ (0-01)0/77-9 or 
 SouX(o-o')o/?7 or 
 
 Sou X (o-o t ) o t-fjLrjv 
 
 SouX (o-ot) ol-vro 
 
 255. ^N"o further special vocabularies will be given; 
 henceforth the learner should look for new words at the end 
 of the book. Further, on each lesson the learner should 
 make out for himself, from the general vocabulary, a list on 
 the model of the special vocabularies hitherto given, though 
 it is not necessary to put the words in alphabetical order. 
 This list should contain all words, with their meanings, 
 which the pupil was obliged to look up, and should be thor- 
 oughly committed to memory, so that the English can be 
 given from the Greek or the Greek from the English, aloud. 
 By following this plan on every lesson, it will be found that 
 one's vocabulary is rapidly increasing, until a whole page 
 will furnish a shorter list than a single section did at first. 
 In learning such lists, one should always associate together 
 words which are related in derivation or meaning. 
 
256] 
 
 ANABASIS, I., 2, 5-7. 
 
 253 
 
 256. Anabasis, L, 1, 5-7. 
 
 5. f/ O(7T9 8' a^HKvelro r&v irapa y8a<r\e&)9 TT/OO? 
 Trdvras ovra) SiarcOel? aTreTre/XTrero 
 
 coare 
 
 avrcp fjia\\ov <f)i\ov$ eLvai 77 
 eaurft) Se /3ap/3dpcov 
 ifcavol elriaav /cal evvoiK&s 
 
 1. &O-TIS : learn H. 280 and 
 a ; G. 425-427. TWV irapd 
 pa<ri\ws : lit. of those from the 
 king ; the motion expressed in 
 d<J>lKveiTo leads the Greek to use 
 with irapd the case which will 
 continue to suggest the same 
 motion from the king ; English 
 idiom would lead us to expect 
 rCov irapa /SacriXe?, and we should 
 translate of those at court. 
 /Sao-tXetfs, when used of the king 
 of Persia, regularly omits the 
 article, being thought of almost 
 as a proper name. 
 
 2. SiariGcis : for $ia-ri-0e-j>T-s, 
 pres. act. pple. nom. sing. masc. 
 of 5ia-Tl0t)iJLL dispose (Lat. dis- 
 pono), bring into a certain dis- 
 position. dirir^irTO : indir. 
 mid., sentfaom himself, let go. 
 Note that the rel. clause pre- 
 cedes the antec. irdvras, as is 
 more often the case in both 
 Greek and Latin ; also that 5ta- 
 riOels is more prominent than 
 direTr^fjLTreTo. We should say 
 rather, brought them all into 
 such a disposition before dis- 
 missing them. It was part of 
 
 irap 
 
 ft>9 7roXe/*,ei> re 
 ejfoiev avTu>. 6. rrjv 
 
 his plan to win over to his 
 cause as many nobles and cour- 
 tiers as he could. The imperf. 
 here, as in d</>t/cvetro, denotes 
 repetition of the act. 
 
 3. avrcp : dat. with </>fXous. 
 H. 765; G. 1174. ctvai: werre 
 denoting result takes the in- 
 die, or the inf. H. 927 ; G. 1449, 
 1450. 
 
 3 f. Kal Ttav trap' CCLVTW Sc 
 
 since 5^ is the conj., 
 must here be an adv. irap* 
 lit. beside him, that is, 
 at his court, dt is farther than 
 usual from the beginning of the 
 clause. The gen. is governed 
 by <?7re/xeXerTo. H. 742 ; G. 1102. 
 
 4 f . <os . . . iT](rav, . . . k'xoicv : 
 for the opt. see H. 881 ; G. 1362, 
 1365. Xenophon is fond of als 
 to introduce purpose clauses; 
 other Attic prose writers em- 
 ploy ws very rarely in this 
 way. See vocab. under ws. 
 evvotKws \oiv: equivalent to 
 evvol'Kol et^ffav. x w with an 
 adv. frequently has the force 
 of dpi with an adj. See vocab. 
 under exw. 
 
254 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [256 
 
 eSvvaro 
 
 OTTCD? on, aTrapacTKevdrarov \d(3oi, 
 J3a<ri\ea. a>8e ovv eTTOielro rrjv <rv\\oy)jv. oTrocra? 
 eZ^e (f>v\a,Ka$ ev rat? ir6\crt, 7raptfyyei\ rot? </>pov- 
 10 pdp^ot,? e/cdo-Tois \apl3dvew avSpas 
 
 6 f . a>s . . . irncp\nrr6ji,vos : 
 
 lit. concealing himself as he 
 most could ; that is, as secretly 
 as he could. Cf. 188, I., 11. 
 From such phrases as cJs / 
 Xicrra t5vva.ro arises, by omis- 
 sion of the form of 5wa/xcu, the 
 practice of using ws and 6'n 
 with the sup. to denote the 
 highest possible degree of a 
 quality. So 8n airoipaffKCvb 
 TOV (7) as unprepared as possi- 
 ble, STL ir\t(7Tovs /cat /SeXr/trrous 
 (11) as many and brave as pos- 
 sible. 
 
 7. oircos : here used like ws, 
 as often in Xenophon, to intro- 
 duce a purpose clause. The 
 common prose word for this is 
 Iva. XdjSoi : cf. efytrav, exoiev 
 (5) and note. 
 
 8. 8: thus, referring to 
 what follows; adv. of manner 
 from 85e this, as ourws is the 
 adv. of manner from OVTOS this, 
 that. Learn H. 271, 272 and c ; 
 G. 409. ode = Lat. hie} OVTOS = 
 Lat. is, ^60/0$ = Lat. ille. &TTOI- 
 iro : indir. mid. 6ir6<rds : in- 
 def. rel. pron. corresponding to 
 trot (see 225, 8); H. 282; G. 
 
 429 ; in the table the 
 iroffbs, T0(r6<rde, TOVOVTOS, 3<ro5, 
 6ir6(ros. It is easier to remem- 
 ber these common words if one 
 groups them together, noting 
 carefully their likeness and un- 
 likeness in form and meaning. 
 In this sentence observe that 
 again the rel. clause precedes 
 the antec. Lit. how many gar- 
 risons he had in the cities, he 
 ordered the commandants each 
 to take, etc. We should re- 
 verse the order of the clauses, 
 and say, he ordered the com- 
 mandants of all the garrisons, 
 which he had, etc. 
 
 10. avSpas : from dv/ip. 
 Learn the declension of iraT-fjp, 
 
 TTTJp, 6vy&TT)p, CLV7)p. H. 188, 
 
 189 ; G. 274, 1 ; 278. At the 
 close of the Peloponnesian war, 
 404 B.C., large bodies of men, 
 especially Peloponnesians, who 
 had spent many years in a sol- 
 dier's life, were thrown out of 
 the employment to which they 
 were most accustomed. They 
 were ready, therefore, to hire 
 themselves out to any one who 
 would pay them and give them 
 
256] 
 
 ANABASIS, /., 7, 5-7. 
 
 255 
 
 OTI 7r\e/(TTOU9 fcal /8e\T/a*TOf9 9 ft>9 
 Tt,<r<7a<j>epvov<; rals 7ro\ecn. KOI jap rjcrav at 'Icovt,- 
 KCLI 7roXe9 Ticro-acfrepvovs TO ap^alov, e/c ftacriXecos 
 SeSoytteW^, TOT S' afaicrTtf/cecrav 777309 Kvpoz/ Tracrat, 
 
 those opportunities for plunder 
 which accompanied war. Thus 
 it was easy for Cyrus and his 
 lieutenants to get together large 
 mercenary forces of Greeks, 
 whom he knew to be far better 
 soldiers than the Persians, not 
 only in equipment and tactics, 
 but above all in courage, intel- 
 ligence, and fidelity. 
 
 11. irX(<TTOvs: sup. of TTO- 
 Xvs; H.254, 5; G.361,8. ws: 
 has here, with ^Trt/SouXeuo^ros, a 
 force to which there is no an- 
 alogy in English. It indicates 
 that the statement in &ri/3ou- 
 Xeuovros Tt<T(ra<t>pvovs is given, 
 not as the writer's, but as made 
 by some one else ; who that is 
 we are to infer from the con- 
 text ; in this case Cyrus. cJs 
 with the pple. very often has 
 this effect, marking the pple. 
 as hi a sort of indir. discourse. 
 Render, asserting that Tissa- 
 phernes, etc. The gen. abs. 
 here denotes cause. 
 
 12. teal -ydp : a frequent com- 
 bination, like Lat. etenim. Or- 
 iginally the expression involved 
 an ellipsis, as, and (he could 
 reasonably give this excuse) 
 for; but the omitted clause 
 
 was not usually thought of dis- 
 tinctly, and it would be clumsy 
 to supply it in Eng. It is gen- 
 erally best, therefore, to leave 
 that and the Kal to be under- 
 stood, translating only the ydp. 
 rjo-av : the effect of the posi- 
 tion may be given by translat- 
 ing : belonged in fact to Tissa- 
 phernes originally. 
 
 13. Tur<ra4>^pvovs : pred. 
 gen. denoting possession. rd 
 dpxaiov: neut. adj. used ad- 
 verbially (H. 719 and 6; G. 
 1060), about equiv. to # dpxfjs 
 (188, I., 2). IK Pcuri\&>s: lit. 
 from the king, instead of the 
 more usual vir6 /3a<rt\^w$. 
 
 14. 8e8ofj.vaL : from dtSufu. 
 Even without knowing the full 
 conjugation, the formation of 
 this word is clear when it is 
 seen that do- is the theme ; cf . 
 \e-\v-ptvai. The passage shows 
 that these Greek cities along 
 the coast were not included in 
 Cyrus's satrapy, but remained 
 subject to Tissaphernes. They 
 knew they would be better 
 treated by Cyrus, and it was 
 for his interest to have control 
 of the seacoast. Perhaps he 
 had stirred them up to revolt. 
 
256 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [256 
 
 15 7T\rjv MF\T;TOU 7. ev MZX?;rou Se Ticro'atyepvrjs irpo- 
 aiaQo^VQ^ ra avra ravra /3oiA,euo///eVou9, a r KOd f rr\vai 
 v, TO t/9 ///ez/ aTrercreive rou9 8* e%efta\ev. o Se 
 / TOU9 <f)vyovras crvX\e^d^ crrpdrev^a 
 7ro\c6p/ci M.i\r)TOv /cal /cara ryrjv Kal Kara daXarrav 
 20 Kal 7TipdTo KardjLV TOU9 eKTreTTTcoKoras. Kal avrrj 
 
 av aXX?; 
 
 rjv 
 
 rov aOpoi^ 
 
 16. TO, avrd raOra : obj. of 
 the following pple. ; pi. because 
 the Greek conceived of the re- 
 volt as made up of many sepa- 
 rate acts. We conceive of it 
 rather as a whole, and should 
 use the sing. povXcvojicvovs : 
 supplementary pple. agreeing 
 with the understood obj. of 
 Trpoaurebnevos. H. 980, 982 ; G. 
 1578, 1582. diroo-Tfjvai : in 
 apposition with rd atrd. 
 
 17. TOVS fxev, TOVS B : cf . 174, 
 I., 12, and see H. 654 ; G. 981. 
 
 18. v-iroXapcov: taking un- 
 der his protection. TOVS <j>cv- 
 yovras: in most Greek cities 
 revolutions occurred often, and 
 were generally followed by the 
 banishment of leading mem- 
 bers of the defeated party. 
 Hence exiles, endeavoring to 
 get back home by one means 
 or another, were familiar fig- 
 ures in Greek life everywhere, 
 and there were several com- 
 mon expressions to denote men 
 in that situation. The pple. 
 
 used as a noun, was 
 one such term. 
 
 20. Kard-yctv : the verb reg- 
 ularly used of one who restored 
 such exiles to their homes, as 
 /car^pxo/xat was regularly used 
 of the exiles themselves who re- 
 turned ; Kard in both verbs has 
 come to mean practically to their 
 homes. CKireirrcoKOTas : the syl- 
 lables -K6ras mark the word as a 
 perf .act. pple. in the ace. pi. mas. 
 It is from ^/cTrt7rrco,usedvirtually 
 as the pass, of e/c/3dXXw, and is 
 another common term for exiles. 
 
 21. irpo<t>ao-is : without the 
 article, therefore avrrj does not 
 agree with it directly (see H. 
 673 ; G. 974), hence irpt><t>a<ns is 
 ^predicate noun. H. 669 ; G. 956. 
 avTT] is attracted to the gender of 
 the predicate noun. H. 632, a. 
 Translate freely, in this, again, 
 he had, etc. TOV: shows that 
 the clause d6poleiv (rrpdrevfjia is 
 a noun in the gen. depending 
 on irp6(f>a(rLs ; we should say, 
 pretext for gathering an army. 
 
258] 
 
 THE 
 
 MODE. 
 
 257 
 
 THE IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 257. The imperative represents the action as 
 commanded : Xeye speak. There is an imperative 
 in every present and aorist system, and in the per- 
 fect when that denotes a continued state. The 
 perfect middle so often has this force that it regu- 
 larly makes an imperative ; the perfect active has 
 one in comparatively few verbs. 
 
 a. The distinction in meaning between the pres- 
 ent and aorist imperative is the same as in the 
 subjunctive and optative (see 227, 245). By its 
 nature, a command in any tense necessarily refers 
 to future time. 
 
 258. Imperative of \VCD (Xv-, \u-). 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE. 
 
 Pres. S. 2 
 3 
 
 \V- 
 \V-e-TG) 
 
 \v-ov 
 \v-e-a-0a) 
 
 
 D.2 
 
 3 
 
 \V--TOV 
 
 \v-e-rwv 
 
 \v-e-cr0ov 
 
 \V--(T0a)V 
 
 
 P. 2 
 
 3 
 
 \V--T 
 
 \v-6-VTC0v or 
 Av-e-Toxrai/ 
 
 \v-e-crOe 
 \v-e-cr6 (ov or 
 Xv--<r0<j)(rcLv 
 
 
 lAor.S. 2 
 3 
 
 \v-aov 
 \v-crd-TO) 
 
 \v-crai 
 \v-o-d-a0a) 
 
 \V-01J-Tl, 
 \V-0rj-TG) 
 
258 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [259 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE. 
 
 lAor.D.2 
 3 
 
 \v-aa-Tov 
 \v-<rd-TO)v 
 
 \v-cra-cr0ov 
 \v-ad-a-0a)V 
 
 \v-0rj-rov 
 
 \V-0tf-TCOV 
 
 P. 2 
 
 3 
 
 \v-ara-T 
 \v-ad-vrci) v or 
 \v-(ra-T(ticrav 
 
 \v-cr a-(70 
 \v-a- d-(T0a)V or 
 Xv-o'd-o'Owcrav 
 
 \v-0rj-re 
 \v-0e-VTC0v or 
 
 Xv-Orj-T<J)<TCLV 
 
 Perf. S. 2 
 3 
 
 
 \-\V-(70 
 \-\V-(T0CO 
 
 
 D.2 
 3 
 
 
 \4-\v-crOov 
 
 \-\V-(T0Q)V 
 
 
 P. 2 
 3 
 
 
 \-\V-<T0 
 
 \-\v-(T0a)v or 
 \e-\v-crOa)<Tav 
 
 
 259. Imperative of 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 (o-ra-, <rrr)-). 
 MIDDLE. PASSIVE. 
 
 Pres. S. 2 
 
 lorn 
 
 i-crra-ao 
 
 
 3 
 
 l-o-rd-ra) 
 
 l-(TTd-a-0a> 
 
 
 D.2 
 
 i-ara-Tov 
 
 i/~(frc(/~&t/ov 
 
 
 3 
 
 l-o-rd-TW 
 
 l~&TCL'~O?\sCt)V 
 
 
 P. 2 
 
 i-ara-Te 
 
 i'O-Ta-o-06 
 
 
 3 
 
 l-crrd-VTCov or 
 
 l-(TTd-cr0a)v or 
 
 
 
 t-crra-Tcocrav 
 
 i-a-Td-o-Oaxrav 
 
 
260] THE IMPERATIVE MODE. 259 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE. 
 
 IstAor.S. 2 
 3 
 
 a-rrj-crov 
 
 <TT7]-(rd-TG) 
 
 etc., as in AT; d>. 
 
 etc. 
 
 ard-Orj-Ti 
 
 -Olj 
 
 etc. 
 
 M*-Aor.S. 2 
 3 
 
 D.2 
 3 
 
 P. 2 
 
 3 
 
 (7T1-TOi) 
 
 (TTT^TOV 
 (TTIJ-TCQV 
 
 M*-Perf.S.2 
 3 
 
 D.2 
 3 
 
 P. 2 
 3 
 
 e-crra-ra) 
 
 e-ara-Tov 
 e-o-rd-rcov 
 
 e-o-ra-re 
 
 260. The formation of the imperative is best 
 seen in the /u-tenses. The imperative has no 
 mode suffix, but takes personal endings which 
 are in part different from those of the other 
 finite modes; these distinguish the forms clearly 
 enough. 
 
260 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [260 
 
 a. The imperative endings are : 
 
 Active. Middle. 
 
 So 2 -0i -era 
 
 3 -TO) -(700) 
 
 D. 2 -TOP -<r0ov 
 
 3 -TG)l> -(T0a)V 
 
 P. 2 -re -<70e 
 
 3 -VTCOV (-Toxrav) -(r0(DV (-crtfaxrav) 
 
 The endings -roxjai/ and -crtftocrav are not found in Attic 
 until a late period. 
 
 b. The endings are added to the tense stem as 
 it appears in the indicative (of course without 
 augment). Variable- vowel stems have -o- before 
 -VTW, elsewhere -e-. 
 
 c. After the variable vowel, -61 is dropped ; -o-o 
 loses o- between vowels, and e-o contract to -ov. 
 In /it-presents -0i is omitted and the stem vowel 
 lengthened. In the first aorist passive -0i become 
 -TL after -#?;-, to prevent two successive syllables 
 from beginning with an aspirate. 
 
 d. In //,-aorists, active voice, and in the aorist 
 passive (which has active endings), the stem vowel 
 is long before one consonant, short before two. 
 Of. 170, d. 
 
 e. The first aorist second singular active and 
 middle are irregular, and the explanation un- 
 known. 
 
 /. Instead of the first perfect of timy/u is found 
 
THE IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 261 
 
 a second perfect of the pi-form, or /u-perfect, with- 
 out tense suffix. It consists of the reduplicated 
 theme, in the short form, with the ending un- 
 changed. It means be standing, etc. 
 
 Other common forms of the imperative are shown in the 
 following paradigms. 
 
 261. Mi-Aorist Imperative of yiyvcoo-fco) (fyvo-, yvco-). 
 
 S. 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 2 
 3 
 
 ryvco-rcov 
 
 7Z/W-T6 
 
 or yvo>-Ta)<rav 
 
 262, Aorist Imperative of crreXXa) (o-reX-, <rraX-). 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. PASSIVE. 
 
 S. 2 
 3 
 
 D.2 
 
 3 
 
 P. 2 
 3 
 
 <7Tt\-a-TO) 
 
 crretX-a-Tov 
 
 crre/X-a-re 
 (TTi\-d-VTa)v or 
 OTeiA-a-rcocrav 
 
 crretX-a-cr$ft> 
 ffreC\-a-<rdov 
 
 <TTi\-a-(70 
 
 G"rL\-d-cr6wv or 
 (rretX-a-cr^cacrav 
 
 (TTa\-e-VTC0v or 
 <TTaX-i7-TO)crav 
 
262 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [263 
 
 263. Second Aorist Imperative of \anf$dvc0 (Xa/3-, 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 S. 2 
 3 
 
 Xa/3-e 
 Xa/3-e-ra) 
 
 Xa/3-oO 
 Xa/3-e-cr#a> 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 Xa/3-e-roz/ 
 Xay8-e-Tft>z/ 
 
 \d/3-e-(T0QV 
 \a/3-e-(70ct)v 
 
 P. 2 
 3 
 
 Xa/3-e-re 
 \a/3-6-vrcov or 
 Aa^-e-raxrav 
 
 Xa/3-e-a-(9 
 \ap-e-<T0a)v or 
 Xa/3--crOoio-av 
 
 a. The second aorist imperative second singular 
 accents the end of the stem (1) regularly in the 
 middle : \af3ov (for Xa/3-e-cro) ; (2) in five active 
 forms, of which e'X0-e and Xa^S-e are two. (The 
 others belong to verbs that have not yet occurred 
 in this book.) 
 
 264. Present Imperative of m/cdo) (vl/ca-). 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 S. 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 vlic (a-e) d-a~0a) 
 
 vl/c (a-e ) a-a dco v 
 
266] THE IMPERATIVE MODE. 263 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 P. 2 
 3 
 
 vlfc(a-6^)(i)-VTCov or 
 viK(a-e) a-raxrav 
 
 vlK(a-e)a-cr6<i)v or 
 
 265. Present Imperative of <f)i,\eco 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 S. 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 
 3 
 
 P. 2 
 3 
 
 ) et-raxrav 
 
 266. Present Imperative of Sov\dco (SouXo-). 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 
 S. 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 
 3 
 
 P. 2 
 3 
 
 Bov X (o-e ) ou-rct) 
 Sou X(o-e) ov-rov 
 
 o\)uX(o-o / )ov-z>T&>z> or 
 SovX ( o-e) ov-ro)crav 
 
 SouX(o-e) OV-CT0Q) 
 
 Sov\(6-e)ov-a0ov 
 
 Sov\(d-e)ov-(r06 
 ov\(o-e)ov-crO(DV or 
 8ovX(o-) 
 
264 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [267 
 
 267. Perfect Middle Imperative of Consonant 
 Themes. 
 
 <rr 
 
 , 0-raX-) . 
 
 S. 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 
 3 
 
 P. 2 
 3 
 
 e-<7raX-<7o 
 
 ~(TTa\r00V 
 
 -<TT(i\-6a)V or 
 
 Tre-Trela-ffcov or 
 
 vct) (Xa/3-, XTyyS-) . 
 
 S. 2 
 3 
 
 D. 2 
 3 
 
 P. 2 
 3 
 
 el-\r}<l)-6tt>v or 
 
 or 
 Se-Set^-^axrav 
 
 a. The euphonic changes in the imperative are the same 
 as those in the indicative; see 215, 217, 220, 196, b, (1). 
 
 268. The entire conjugation of the regular verb has now 
 been given, except the future perfect (which does not occur 
 often and is very simple), the verbals, and some less com- 
 
268] THE IMPERATIVE MODE. 265 
 
 mon forms of icrrrjfu. The learner should now accustom 
 himself to grouping the forms of each verb in complete syn- 
 opses, similar to those already given in this book, but with 
 the subjunctive, optative, and imperative added. Let Avo> 
 be taken as the first model, H. 313 ; G. 474. For the future 
 perfect middle, see H. 318 (p. 89), 466 and a; G. 474 (p. 97 
 at the bottom) and 703. For the verbals, see H. 475 ; G. 776. 
 (The future perfect and the verbals need not be insisted 
 upon until they are met in reading.) Next the synopsis of 
 cm//u should be taken in hand, omitting for the present the 
 second perfect forms, except in the imperative, H. 351; 
 G. 509. For the peculiar future perfect active in this verb, 
 see H. 467 ; G. 705. Note that the tense called in this book 
 fu-aorist is called in the Grammars second aorist of the pi-form. 
 This longer designation amounts to the same thing ; but it 
 seems unnecessary to add the word second, and the shorter 
 term, while equally descriptive and more convenient, avoids 
 confusion with the totally different second aorists like IAa- 
 /3ov. (If Goodwin's Grammar is used, it will be necessary 
 for the teacher to assist in making out the synopsis of 
 to-TT/^t.) Next may be taken SCIKVU/U, H. 352 ; present 
 system, 1. 332. (If Goodwin's Grammar is used, it will 
 again be necessary for the teacher to assist in making out 
 the synopsis.) To these may be added i/t/cao> on the model of 
 rlfjuio), H. 337 ; <tAeco and Trote'to, H. 339 ; SovA.oo> and 877X60), 
 H. 341 ; crrcAXa), H. 342 ; TretUo, H. 347. (These synopses are 
 not given in G., but can easily be made out for the class 
 by the teacher.) Next Aa//,/3avo> and other common verbs 
 should be written out in the same way; for it is of great 
 importance that each verb should be clearly understood, in its 
 formation, as a whole. It is worth while to spend enough 
 time in review at this point to accomplish that end, the 
 details of the review naturally varying according to the cir- 
 cumstances of the class, 
 
266 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 Also in reading the remaining sections of the Anabasis 
 in this book, care should be taken not to read too fast, due 
 regard being paid to the number of new words occurring 
 and the amount of grammatical work involved. For a con- 
 siderable time to come, alongside of the task of learning 
 new words, it is important that the pupil should gradually 
 be systematizing his knowledge of grammar, grouping to- 
 gether, whenever possible, what were first learned as isolated 
 facts; only thus can grammatical facts and principles be 
 held in such form as to be of practical use. Hints to this 
 end will be given in the notes ; but a large amount of read- 
 ing must be done before the end can be fully reached. Set 
 reviews of the declensions and conjugations in the Grammar 
 used by the class will of course be necessary ; but the exact 
 time and amount of this review will vary with different 
 classes, and are best left to the judgment of the teacher. 
 
 269. Translate into Greek. 
 
 Arrest the man and put him to death, for he 
 has plotted against the king. Let us go away 
 and consider how we may never again be thus dis- 
 graced. Let us give our attention to the sol- 
 diers, that they may be both capable of making 
 
 1. Arrest . * . put to death : 
 
 use the aor. impv. The rule 
 for exceptional accent of Xa/3<? 
 does not apply to compounds ; 
 the accent in both impvs. of 
 this sentence is recessive. 
 
 2. Let us go away, etc. : 
 hortative subjv. 
 
 3. never: since the nega- 
 tion is here willed, 
 
 be used instead of OUTTOTC. H. 
 1018, 1021 ; G. 1610. 
 
 4. Let us give our atten- 
 tion to : express by one word, 
 which governs the gen. 
 
 5. that they may be, etc. : 
 since this purpose clause does 
 not depend upon a past tense, 
 the mode to be used is the 
 subjv., H. 881 j G. 1365, 
 
ANABASIS, I., 1, 5-2 
 
 267 
 
 war and friendly to the city. May lie never 
 again be in danger. He would never again be in 
 danger. We had many garrisons in the cities, 
 but all revolted to the enemy. They are plan- 
 ning how they can revolt to the enemy. When 10 
 Cyrus was arrested, and was about to die, his 
 mother begged him off. Let them collect the 
 Greek force as secretly as they can, that we may 
 catch the king as unprepared as possible. 
 
 this sentence expressed by ov- 
 Trore. 
 
 8 f. We had ... but aU 
 revolted : the Greek would 
 mark the contrast by pkv . . . 
 9*. 
 
 10. how they can: use 
 
 6 f . May he ... be : a wish, 
 therefore hi the opt. H. 870 ; 
 G. 1507. A wish is always an 
 expression of will; hence the 
 neg. in a wish must be ^. H. 
 1020 ; G. 1610, end. 
 
 7. He would never, etc. : 
 
 use the potential opt., with the 
 particle &v. This word &v can- 
 not be separately translated 
 into Eng. ; it is always post- 
 positive, and is inclined to stand 
 after some rather prominent 
 word ; a favorite position is 
 after a negative. Never is in 
 
 the fut. 
 
 12. Let them collect: use 
 
 the impv., with the idiom seen 
 in 256, 6 f. ; the pple. here must 
 be plural. 
 
 13 f . that we may catch : 
 present purpose ; therefore the 
 subjv. 
 
 270. Anabasis, I., 1, 8-11. 
 
 8TT ^ 5*\/O "v ' "" f ' f* ^ 
 
 . 11/009 oe pacrtXea TrefiTrwv rj^iov 
 
 avrov SoOrjvcu ol ravras ra9 7r6\ei,$ fia\\ov rj 
 
 1. riJCov : from the meaning but these two must be carefully 
 
 deem worthy or fitting is devel- distinguished from <?/owrdw. 
 
 oped the meaning ask as proper wv : which use of the pple. ? 
 or fair, as here. In this use 2. SoOfjvcu: without knowing 
 
 differs little from a^T^w, the full inflection of dldufu one 
 
268 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [270 
 
 avTO)V) /cai i] jjujriyp crvveTrparrev 
 ravra ware ftacri\v<$ rrjv /j,ev Trpb? eavrov 
 5 7Ti/3ov\r)v OVK rjcrOdvero, ^icraafyepvei Se 
 TroKefJLOVVTa avrov a/Ji^l ra arparev/juara 
 W(JT ovSev ij^Oero avr&v 7ro\/j,ovvra)V. Kal jap 6 
 
 can easily distinguish the three 
 elements of do-Orj-vai,, and see 
 that it is an aor. pass. inf. The 
 clause dodTjvai . . . ir6\eis is the 
 obj. of ii&ov. ol : learn the de- 
 clension in H. 261, third col.; G. 
 389, third col. The forms o 5, of, 2, 
 <r<}>lcrL are enclitic, but ol is here 
 accented because emphasized 
 by the contrast with Ti<r<ra<j>{p- 
 vf\v. In Attic prose this pron. 
 is always reflexive. H. 685 ; G. 
 987. eaury might have been 
 used instead. ravrds : note 
 the position. H. 673 ; G. 974. 
 
 3. apxiv avrwv: the pres. 
 tense denotes continuance : 
 should continue to rule them. 
 The passage shows that these 
 cities were still nominally a 
 part of Tissaphernes' prov- 
 ince. We receive a vivid im- 
 pression of the looseness of the" 
 king's authority, when two 
 governors and their subjects 
 could carry on such a war with- 
 out interference from the king, 
 while each was appealing to 
 him for support. 
 
 3 f. crvWirpaTTv avr<5 ravra: 
 lit. was doing these things with 
 
 him; that is, was acting with 
 him in this. For atfry, see H. 
 775; G. 1179. 
 
 4. irpos lavrov : has the same 
 force with tirLpov^v which the 
 simple dat. has with ^Tri/SoiAetfo;. 
 
 5 f. Ticr<ra<|>pvi Tro\ep.ovv- 
 ra: phrase contrasted with T^V 
 Trpbs eavrov eTri/SouX^v, this con- 
 trast being marked by ptv and 
 <?. To give due prominence in 
 English to these phrases, we 
 should put them at the end of 
 their respective members, trans- 
 lating in the order: /3a<riXei)s 
 otf/c 'QffOdvero TTJV . . . ^TTL^OV\I^V 
 and avrbv dairavdv d/x0i rd 
 
 This natural Eng. order would 
 be bad Greek order, because it 
 would suggest a false empha- 
 sis; it is given only to make 
 clear the difference. v6|u : 
 this verb takes a dependent inf. 
 with subj. ace. The synopsis 
 of the entire verb is like that 
 of Kofdfa H. 348. 
 
 7. ov5ev: learn the declen- 
 sion of efs and ovdels and wdets, 
 H. 290 and a; G. 375, 378. 
 While eft has the circumflex, 
 
270] 
 
 ANABASIS, I., 1, 8-11. 
 
 269 
 
 Kupo? a7T7re/i7re rot>9 
 
 9. aXXo Se <TTpdrv/jLa aurcS o-ui/eXeyero ez> Xeppo- 10 
 /car' avrnrepas 'A/36Sou roVSe TOZ> rpoirov. 
 Aa/ceScu/Jidvios cfrvya? rjv TOUTO) crvyyevo- 
 
 5 and note. e?xe would here 
 express all that is intended. 
 Tvyxd with pple. is some- 
 times a mere circumlocution 
 for a form of the verb to which 
 the pple. belongs. 
 
 10. avrw : dat. of advan- 
 tage. H. 762, 766, 767 ; G. 1157, 
 1165. 
 
 11. KttT* avTiirlpds : a phrase 
 with the force of a single prep., 
 like our equivalent over against. 
 rov8 TOV Tp6irov: for posi- 
 tion of r6vde, cf. ratfras, 2 and 
 note. For syntax of rpbirov, 
 see H. 719 and a ; G. 1060. 
 
 12. <|nryds: in Anab. II., 6 
 Xenophon describes the char- 
 acter of Klearchos and tells 
 why he was exiled. In 408 B.C., 
 when commanding for the Spar- 
 tans in Byzantium (now Con- 
 stantinople), he treated the 
 people with such harshness 
 that they surrendered the town 
 to the Athenians to get rid of 
 him. After the close of the 
 Peloponnesian war the Spartan 
 authorities sent him to Thrace 
 to protect the Greek colonists 
 there from the native tribes, 
 
 oiidels and /x?7$e/s have the acute ; 
 otherwise the compounds are 
 accented like forms of els. ou5^i> 
 is in the adverbial ace. denot- 
 ing degree, with faO*- H. 719 
 and 6 ; G. 1060. avrwv iro\- 
 jiovvTuv : at their being at war / 
 gen. abs. denoting cause. H. 
 970, 971 and a ; G. 1568 ; 1563, 
 2. Kal -yap: the ellipsis here 
 might be thus supplied: and 
 (there was another reason) for, 
 etc. But the effect is best re- 
 produced in Eng. by saying, 
 besides, Cyrus kept sending, etc. 
 This leaves the causal relation 
 to be understood. 
 
 8. -yi-yvo^vovs : accruing, 
 coming due. f3a<ri\i : with 
 TT^/XTTW the person is often ex- 
 pressed by the simple indir. 
 obj., although Lat. mitto re- 
 quires the ace. with a prep. 
 
 9. v: attracted from the 
 ace., as obj. of %wj/, to the case 
 of its antec. close beside it. 
 Such attraction occurs fre- 
 quently. H. 993, 994 ; G. 1019, 
 1031. Turcra4>'pvox>s : posses- 
 sive gen. with <Sv. Tv < yx avv 
 6Xv : cf. iroipwv Myx av i 225, 
 
270 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [270 
 
 o K0p09 rj^dcrdt] re avrov KOI StfotHriV avrq) 
 fjivpiov? Sdpei/covs. 6 Se \a/3ov TO %pvalov crrpd- 
 15 rev/Act crvve\e%ev OLTTO TOVTCOV rwv xprj/jidrcov /cal 
 
 7TO\/JLi K XeppOVlJOTOV 6 p fJid) fJbV 0$ Tofc pOL^l TO9 
 
 VTrep c E\\ijcr7rovTov olfcovcri KOI a)(f>e\(, rov? f/ EXX?;- 
 
 vas &(7T /cal xptj/AaTa crvv/3d\\ovTO avrfi 6/9 rrjv 
 
 rpocfrrjv r&v <TTpaTio)Twv at 'TfiXXTja-TTOvTiatcal 7roXe^9 
 
 20 e/covcrai. rovro S' av OVTCD rpe^ofievov e\dv6avev 
 
 but recalled him before he had 
 left Greece. He refused to 
 obey, and for this disobedience 
 was banished. Yet he was an 
 able soldier, and soon became 
 the virtual leader of the Greeks 
 in the expedition with Cyrus. 
 
 13. T)-ycur0Ti: inceptive aor. 
 H. 841 ; G. 1260. 
 
 14. (xvpCovs SdpciKovs : about 
 $54000, but worth -several times 
 as much as that sum now in 
 purchasing power. Such a 
 present was not given out of 
 mere personal affection. Doubt- 
 less Cyrus came to some un- 
 derstanding with him even thus 
 early, to the effect that Klear- 
 chos was to get together an 
 army and hold it in readiness 
 for service with Cyrus later. 
 6 U : cf . 6 5<? 242, 3 and note. 
 
 15. diro . . . \pi\}ia,T<t>v : lit. 
 from this money, where our 
 idiom leads us to expect a dat. 
 of means, which also would be 
 correct here. 
 
 16. liroXIjtti : notice the 
 change of tense : was now car- 
 rying on war. 0po : dat. of 
 association. H. 772 ; G. 1175. 
 We also say fight with, as well 
 as fight against. 
 
 17. w<|>4\6i: notice the ac- 
 cent. 
 
 18. KaC : with xp^ara has 
 almost the effect of &\\a xp^~ 
 fjLara. <rvvpoX.XovTO : subjec- 
 tive mid. H. 814; G. 1244. 
 avrtp : dat. of advantage. 
 
 18 f. els TTJV Tpo^-fjv: ex- 
 presses purpose, like Lat. ad or 
 in with the ace. 
 
 20. Kov<rai: pred. adj. in 
 agreement with the subj., to be 
 rendered by an adv. H. 619 ; 
 G. 926. For position, cf. r/ua- 
 KOO-LOVS 225, 10 and note. rpc- 
 <(>6jxvov: supplementary pple. 
 agreeing with the subj. of t\dv- 
 Oave. Cf. Myx avJ/ *X (av 9 
 and note. From our point of 
 view the pple. here seems to 
 contain the main thought, and 
 
270] 
 
 ANABASIS, 
 
 , 8-11. 
 
 r (Trprev/jua. 
 
 10. 
 
 Se 
 
 VTTO 
 
 TWV OLKOi a.VTl(TTa<TitoTO)V p%TCU 7T/909 TOI> 
 
 Kal alrel avrov els ia")(iKlov<s %evov<$ /cat rpi&v 
 
 fJLTJV&V /M(T0dV) ft>9 OVTCO 7T6piyv6lJLVOS UV TWV 2$ 
 
 we should translate, was being 
 secretly supported. 
 
 21. TO <TTpdTvfia: might 
 have been omitted, since rouro 
 plainly refers back to &\\o 
 o-rpdrevfjia 10 ; inserted, in the 
 least prominent place in the 
 sentence, merely to cut off all 
 chance of misunderstanding. 
 
 23. oteoi : has the force of 
 an adj. In the same way we 
 say, his opponents at home. 
 
 24. ds : with a number 
 often means about. Yet it is 
 more likely that one would ask 
 for pay for troops than that 
 one would ask for so large a 
 body of troops themselves. It 
 is not probable that Cyrus could 
 or would lend so large a force, 
 but he could easily give a large 
 sum of money with which to 
 raise the force ; and that would 
 aid Cyrus later still more. 
 Therefore it is better to take 
 els as in els r^v Tpo^v 18. The 
 translation then is, pay for 
 2000 mercenaries and for three 
 months. glvovs : the term JJLL- 
 (rOuroL (hirelings, fr. /u<r06s) 
 was so blunt a recognition of 
 
 the tie between mercenary 
 troops and their employer that 
 it was not a pleasant word to 
 use to such soldiers ; people 
 have always recognized a dif- 
 ference between one who fights 
 from love of country and one 
 who fights for pay. Therefore 
 such troops were more often 
 euphemistically called #wi, 
 men bound by a tie of hospitality 
 to him who supported them. 
 rpiwv : declined H. 290 ; G. 375. 
 
 25. 0>S OVTCD TTpl'yv6}UVOS 
 
 av: more concise expression 
 for \tywv tin ovTkj TrepiytvoiTO 
 SLV. For the force of w's, cf. w's 
 tTTipovXetovTos 256, 11 and note. 
 Here it is Aristippos whose 
 statement is thus indirectly 
 quoted. The i of irepL does not 
 suffer elision ; hence in the 
 impf. ind., irepu-yLyvbwv. Note 
 also that irepL- here has the 
 force of beyond, as in the phrase 
 
 irepl Travrbs TTOLITO 188, I., 7. 
 &v is used with an inf. or pple. 
 when a finite verb in its place 
 would take &v. Here irepLyevb- 
 fievos &v stands for a potential 
 opt. H. 861, 872 ; G. 1308, 1327. 
 
272 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [270 
 
 6 Be KD>09 Sl&oHTiv avTto et9 rerpa- 
 teal e /Jirjvwv {JLiaOdv, teal &ircu avrov 
 fjurj Trpoa-Oev KaraKvaai 777)09 TOU? avTio-Tao-icords 
 Trplv av avrw avfjL/Sov^vcrrjTai. ovrco Se av TO 
 30 eV OerraXta e\dv6avev CLVTM rpe^ojjievov crrpdrev^a. 
 11. TIpogevov Se rbv Botwr^o^ %evov ovra e/ceXefcre 
 \af3bvTa avSpas OTL TrXe/o-rou? Trapayeveada^ 0)9 e/9 
 
 arevecrda^ a>9 TT pay par a 
 rfj eavrov 
 
 26. avTUTTCwricoTwv : H. 749 ; 
 G. 1120. 
 
 26 f. els TTpaKi<rxtMovs 
 Kal If ji-qvwv : cf . the phrase in 
 24 f., and note. 
 
 27. SCITCU : for the contrac- 
 tion of this verb, see H. 411 ; 
 G. 495. avrov : gen. of source. 
 H. 750, 743, a; G. 1130. 
 
 28. JX-/J: used instead of otf 
 because ^ KaraXuo-cu is some- 
 thing willed by Cyrus. irpd- 
 <r6ev : anticipates irplv, and need 
 not be translated separately. 
 KaraXvo-ai irpos : come to 
 terms with. See vocab. under 
 
 Ka.TO.\V(i). 
 
 29. irplv av . . . <ru|j,|3ovX.v- 
 <rivrai: H. 921, 924; G. 1465, 
 1469. Cf. the use of Lat. donee, 
 etc. 
 
 30. 4v 0TTa\Cq,: standing 
 just after the article, is an at- 
 tributive modifier of o-Tpdrev/ma. 
 Probably it is mainly for vari- 
 ety that the order of this sen- 
 
 tence is different from that in 
 20 f. 
 
 31. |K^XVO-: in the perf. 
 mid. and aor. pass, this verb, 
 with some others, adds <r to 
 the theme ; the inflection of 
 these systems is thus like the 
 same systems of 7re/0w (214, e 
 and /). H. 461, 469 ; G. 640. 
 So 'yiyvdjffKbj has cywacrfuii, 
 and dKotfw has ijKot- 
 
 32 f. <us ... pov\6(jivos : cf . 
 ws Trepiyevb/jievos 25 and note. 
 els IIicrC8ds: we cannot say 
 into the Pisidians, but must 
 say either against or into the 
 country of. The Pisidians were 
 an unsubdued tribe in the 
 mountains, 150 to 200 miles 
 southeast of Sardis, Cyrus's 
 capital. 
 
 33 f. irpd-yjiaTa Tra,pt\6v- 
 T(ov : translate the gen. abs. by 
 a clause : were making trouble. 
 7rpdyfj,a has as wide a range of 
 
272] 
 
 AXASAS1S, I., Jf, 8-2 
 
 273 
 
 verov Se TOV 
 %evov ? 6Wa? / 
 r<z9 e\6elv on 
 vei crvv T06 
 
 OVTOt)? OVTOl 
 
 meaning as Lat. res. Notice 
 the three instances of ws with 
 the pple. in this section. 
 
 KOI ^( 
 K\ev(TV 
 
 TOV 'A^cuoV, 35 
 
 7roiovv 
 
 37. o>s 
 
 them to understand that he was 
 going to make war on. 
 
 271. Complete the list of common pronouns by 
 learning : 
 
 'a. The personal pronouns 7^ and <ru, H. 261, 
 262,263; G. 389, 390,141,1. 
 
 b. The reflexive pronouns, H. 266 and a; G. 
 401. 
 
 c. The reciprocal pronoun, H. 268 ; G. 404. 
 
 d. The possessive pronouns, H. 269 and a; G. 
 406. 
 
 272. Translate into Greek. 
 
 From the means that we have we will willingly 
 contribute largely to the support of Cyrus's army, 
 for we admire him. When we chanced to be ex- 
 
 2. largely : lit. many, agree- 
 ing with xpifiwra understood. 
 
 3. When, etc. : a Greek 
 would express by yap the fact 
 that this sentence gives the rea- 
 son for the preceding statement. 
 
 1. means : 
 
 which: let the rel. here be 
 attracted to the case of the an- 
 tec. ; cf. r&v Tr6\ewv wv 270, 9. 
 willingly : make a pred. 
 adj. : cf. e/coC<rcu 270, 20. 
 
THE GREEK OF XENOP&OX. 
 
 [272- 
 
 iles he took us under his protection and restored 
 5 us to our homes. Now therefore when Tissapher- 
 nes is falsely accusing him and when his enemies 
 are making trouble for his province, we will en- 
 deavor to cooperate with Cyrus in what he wishes 
 to do. Let us therefore send him these soldiers, 
 10 and enlist as many other men of the Peloponnesus 
 as possible, and let us go ourselves to him, that 
 the king may perceive that we are friends to 
 Cyrus ; and may he conquer all his enemies. If 
 he ever wishes to make an expedition against the 
 15 king even, with the aid of the force which is being 
 secretly collected for him he would get the better 
 of his brother. But of course he will not attempt 
 to make war on the king until he has consulted 
 with you. 
 
 4. took under his protec- 
 tion : express by one word. 
 
 5 f . when . . . when : 6Ve 
 ptv . . . tire 5t. 
 
 8. cooperate with Cyrus 
 in what: lit. accomplish with 
 C. what (things). 
 
 10. as many other men 
 of the Peloponnesus : follow 
 the order of 256, 10 f. 
 
 12. that we are : use the 
 supplementary pple. 
 
 13. all his enemies: H. 
 672 ; G. 979. 
 
 13 f. If he ever wishes: 
 condition like tav dtvyrai 242, 8. 
 
 14 f. against the king 
 even: Ko.1 M j3a<n\^d. 
 
 15 f. with the aid of: 
 <rtv. is being secretly col- 
 lected : lit. escapes notice (\av- 
 Oavu} being collected. 
 
 16. would get the better 
 of: irepLyiyvo/mai in the poten- 
 tial opt. Cf. the note on ircpi- 
 yev6fji,evos &v 270, 25 f. 
 
 17. of course . . . not : ov 
 dj. 
 
 18. until he has con- 
 sulted: irplv &v with the aor. 
 subjv. Cf. the note on 270, 
 29. 
 
273] 
 
 ANABASIS, I., 2, 1-12. 
 
 275 
 
 273. Anabasis, I., 2, 1-12. 
 1. 'E-Trel S' ISdfcei, avrq) r/S?; Tropevea-Qai avo), rrjv 
 
 e/c T 
 
 67rl TOUTOU9 TO re fiapftapiicov KOI TO ' 
 evravda 7rapayye\\eL ro3 re KXeap^ft) \aj36vrt, ij/ceiv 5 
 oVoz^ ^z/ aurc5 o-rpdrev/jLa, fcal rw 'Ap^crT/TTTTft) cruz/aX- 
 \ayevri Trpo? rou9 ol'/co^ aTTOTre^^ai TTpbs eavrov o 
 
 ical &via rc3 'Ap/cdSi, 09 aura3 
 
 TOV V TCUS TToXeCTfc %ViKOV, iJKlV TTdp- 
 
 l/cavol 10 
 
 1. 86Ki: # seemed best. 
 iropij(r6ai &vu is the subj. 
 ava> : adv. with the same force 
 as ct^a- in avajSalvctj. 
 
 2. (xv : the idea contrasted 
 with rr;j> /ij> irp6<t>a<rtv is no- 
 where expressed, being easily 
 understood. liroictro : indir. 
 mid. MS Pov\6(j,vos : ^a^ Tie 
 wished, as he said. Yet the 
 word pretext for icpbfyajffiv so 
 clearly implies the idea as Tie 
 satfd, that this phrase is better 
 omitted in translation. 
 
 3. ws : we say as if. 
 
 4. pappapiKov : supply crrpd- 
 reu/xa. Xenophon usually speaks 
 of the Persians and their sub- 
 jects by the term pdppapoi in- 
 stead of Il^po-ai. 
 
 5. IvravOa: in these circum- 
 stances, thereupon. 
 
 6. bcrov TJ v avrco crrpdrV|JLa : 
 cf. 07r6<ras el^e <f>v\aKcts 256, 8 f. 
 and o el%e trr/xreu/xa just be- 
 low. In each sentence the an- 
 tec. is taken up into the rel. 
 clause, and the rel. is then 
 made to agree with the noun 
 adjectively. This is called in- 
 corporation. H. 995 ; G. 1037. 
 It is far more common in Greek 
 than in Eng., and therefore 
 must often be resolved, in 
 translating, into the fuller 
 form. 
 
 9. irpoi(TT^Ki : observe the 
 tense and its force. TOV gcvi- 
 KOV: for the case cf. dj/Tio-ra- 
 ffiwr&v 270, 26 and note. Ob- 
 serve the ending -i*6s and cf. 
 fiap(3ap-iK6s and *E\\r)v-iK6s. 
 
 10. Xapovra: agrees with 
 the understood subj. of %Kiy 
 
276 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [273 
 
 rj&av ra? afcpoiroXeis <f)V\drTiv. 2. e/cd\ecre Se /cal 
 TOV? Mt\7jrov TroXiopKovvraS) KOI rovs <j)vyd&a$ e/ce- 
 
 el tfaXw? tear aTrpa^e Lev eft a ecrrparevero^ /JLTJ Trpd- 
 15 (T0ev Travaecrdai jrplv avrovs Karaydyoi oH/caSe. ol Be 
 
 instead of being attracted to 
 the case of He^, as \afi6vTi in 
 5 is to the case of KXec^xy. 
 Xaj36j>ri stands close beside 
 KXedpxv? while \ap6vra is 
 widely separated from Eevty. 
 irXrjv oirdtroi : for irXfyv rotroi/- 
 T(*)v 6ir6<roi. 
 
 11. CKdXecrc : final e of the 
 theme is not lengthened. H. 
 504, 5 (with cross-reference) ; 
 G. 639. 
 
 13. viro<r\djivos : see UTTKT- 
 xvtoftai. Observe that the ac- 
 tion of ^7ro<rx6^ews does not 
 precede that of ^Xeu<re, but 
 coincides with it in time. The 
 promise was a part of his sum- 
 mons, an inducement to the 
 exiles to come. H. 856, b ; 
 G. 1290. 
 
 14 f . cl . . . of KaSe : indir. 
 discourse. The dir. form would 
 be : taiv Karairpafa (aor. subjv.) 
 
 (f> 0. <TTpaTVOfJLai, Ol) 7Tp6(r0J> 
 
 iravo-ofjiai irplv SLV u/xas Karaydyu 
 of/ca5e If I accomplish that for 
 which I am making the expedi- 
 tion, I will not stop till I re- 
 store you to your homes, toiv 
 fcarairpd^ is a condition like 
 
 &v dvvnrai (242, 8). H. 898; 
 G. 1403, 1404. The conclu- 
 sion is ov TraiHTOfjLai. irplv dv 
 vfjids Karaydyu is like irplv &v 
 o-v/jL^ov\va"rjTaL (270, 29 with 
 note) . In changing this to the 
 indir. form (1) the principal 
 verb iravo-o/jLCLi is changed to the 
 inf. of the same tense ; (2) other 
 forms in the 1st and 2d person 
 (AcaraTrpa^w, <rrparei;o/xat, /cara- 
 ydyw, vpas') are changed to 
 the 3d pers. ; (3) the subjvs. 
 Karairpd^cij and Karaydyw are 
 changed to the opt., and a-rpa- 
 TevofjLaL to the impf . ind. ; (4) 
 the &v of tdv is dropped (since 
 tdv goes only with the subjv.) 
 and el alone is retained with 
 the opt. ; in like manner irplv 
 &v becomes irplv alone. Read 
 carefully H. 928-936 ; G. 1475, 
 1476, 1481, 1487, 1497. The 
 neg. otf would regularly be re- 
 tained in the indir. ; but wher- 
 ever there is a suggestion of 
 wish or of will, as with verbs 
 of hoping, promising, and the 
 like, the inf. is inclined to take 
 nt even in indir. disc. H. 1024, 
 end ; G. 1496, 
 
273] 
 
 ANABASIS, I., 2, 1-12. 
 
 277 
 
 ?5Se&>9 7TidovTO 
 ra oVXa 7rapr)<rav 
 rot>9 e 
 
 yap avTto /ecu Xa/3oWe9 
 3. SeWa? //,ez> S?) 
 e/9 l^dpSeis 
 TLpo%evo$ Se Trapfjv 
 OTrXira? /^ez/ 69 TrevraKoa-Lovs KOI xl\iovs, 71^- 20 
 Se Trez/Ta/cocr/of?, So^aiWro? Se o SruyL60aXto9 
 arr)? Se 6 'A%aios 077X1- 
 TIacrlcov Se 6 Meyapev? 
 jj,ev 07rXtra9, TpiaKocrlovs Be 7reXra<7Ta9 
 Trapeyevero rjv Se fcal ouro9 /cat o ^co/cpdr'rjs 25 
 a/i</>l MfX?;To^ o-Tparevo/juevcDv. 4. ouro^ /Ltez/ 6/9 
 e9 a^Tft) a<f>t/covTO. TKT<ra<f)epvr)<} Se /caravotf- 
 raura, Aral pei^ova rjyrjad^evo^ elvai rj 009 eVt 
 r^i/ Trapaa/cevijv, Tropevercu a>9 j3acri\d f/ 
 rd^o-ra linrtas eywv a>9 TrevraKOcriovs. 30 
 
 Learn H. 247, 236 ; G. 346, 358. 
 Tj-yTjcraiAcvos : deeming, think- 
 ing. Cf . Lat. duco. r\ ws : lit. 
 greater than as, etc. ; that is, 
 too great to be, etc. 
 
 29 f . o>s : with names and 
 other words denoting persons, 
 ws is a prep, like irp6s, meaning 
 to. rf : used adverbially, prac- 
 tically = ws in its primary signif- 
 icance. 77 edvvaro r&x^ra. as 
 quickly as he could. TCLXIO-TCI : 
 sup. adv. from raxus. For the 
 comparison, see H. 253 with 
 list ; G. 357 with list. For the 
 formation of advs., see H. 257, 
 258, 259 ; G. 365, 367-369. r- 
 
 17. 2ap8is: declined like 
 the pi. of 7r6\is. H. 201 ; G. 250. 
 In the nom. pi. -ees is in Attic 
 prose contracted to -e. So in 
 stems in -eu- like /Sao-iXeus. H. 
 206; G. 263. Sardis was the 
 capital of Lydia, and the resi- 
 dence of Cyrus. 
 
 19. els : about. So in 20. 
 
 23 f. ws: about. Tpioxoo-t- 
 ovs [tAv . . . rpioiKOo-Covs 8e : cf . 
 153, 1 f. and note. In 20 f . we 
 have oTrXtras ILV . . . yv/mvyTas 
 84. 
 
 26. TWV . . . CTTpaTVOfJ.VCOV : 
 
 pred. gen. of the whole. 
 28. ncCtova : comp. 
 
278 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [273 
 
 5. KCU /3ao-i,\v<; /Jiev S??, eVel rjicovcre 
 TOV Kvpov (TToXoz>, avTiTrapecr/cevd^ero. 
 
 Se %cov ou? iprj/ca atp/JLaro aTrb 
 
 Trapa- 
 
 35 (rdyyd? eltcocri /cal Svo 7rl rbv 
 
 xvs is declined like ydvs H. 229 ; 
 like y\vKvs G. 320. raxvs and 
 words like it come under the 
 rule that adjs. of the consonant 
 and vowel declensions have 
 short a in the fern. sing, nom., 
 ace., and voc. 
 
 31 f. tjicov(r: note that 
 CLKOVW has the Attic reduplica- 
 tion (H. 368, 358, 6 ; G. 529, 
 533) in the perf. act., but the 
 ordinary reduplication in the 
 perf. mid. ; also that the theme 
 assumes a- in the perf. mid. 
 syst. and the passive syst. (Cf . 
 KeXeuw.) Tior<ra4>pvo\>s } <TTO- 
 Xov: gen. of source together 
 with the dir. obj. H. 742, c; 
 G. 1103. We must here trans- 
 late rjKovae heard of. The pri- 
 mary meaning of o-rAXw is set 
 in order, array, especially with 
 the idea of equipping, as for a 
 voyage or expedition. <rr6Xos 
 equipment retains the earlier 
 meaning, while o-r^XXw itself in 
 Attic prose came to signify 
 send, especially to send on a 
 journey. 
 
 33. i'pr|Ka: see ^wl. The 
 pres. is supplied by 
 
 or (in composition) by 
 We in like manner group to- 
 gether go, went, gone j am, was, 
 been, making up the full para- 
 digm from two or more roots, 
 each of which taken alone lacks 
 some parts. 
 
 34. c\avvi : since the word 
 originally meant drive forth, it 
 is not -often used, in the sense 
 of march, of any one that can- 
 not be regarded as driving. 
 Thus of a commander who 
 rides, and of cavalry, ^eXaiW 
 may be used ; but seldom of 
 foot-soldiers ; these iropevovrai. 
 o-TaOpovs: properly halting- 
 places, then days' 1 march; like 
 irapacrdyyas, ace. of extent. 
 H. 720, 6 ; G. 1062. rpets : for 
 the decl. see H. 290 ; G. 375. 
 
 35. TOV Maav8pov TTOTOHO'V : 
 the fixed order when a river is 
 named. This river runs for a 
 long distance through a plain, 
 winding and turning back upon 
 itself extraordinarily. Hence 
 the meaning of our word me- 
 ander, and Milton's expression 
 (Comus, 232) " By slow Maean- 
 der's margent green," 
 
273] 
 
 ANABASIS, I., 2, 1-12. 
 
 279 
 
 TOVTOV TO 
 
 6. TOVTOV Sia/3a% e%e\avvet, Sia 
 ld? orTaffjjibv eva Trapao-dyyd? 6/cTO) et? KoXocr- 
 
 0*09, 
 evTavOa 
 
 /ca 
 
 oTrXfra? 
 
 evrra KOL rj/ce Mevcov 6 40 
 teal 7T\Ta(TTas irev- 
 
 36. TOVTOV : It is a striking 
 characteristic of Greek style 
 that nearly every sentence is 
 connected with the preceding 
 one by a conj. Up to this point 
 in the Anabasis nearly two- 
 thirds of the complete sentences 
 are introduced by $<?, about one- 
 sixth by Kalj and a few by in- 
 ferential offv. Of the remainder 
 two have ^v drf inserted after 
 the first word, 5^ having a force 
 very similar to that of otv. In 
 the other four cases the sen- 
 tence either begins with a dem., 
 or is preceded by a dem. which 
 looks forward to and intro- 
 duces it. The words of this 
 class which have occurred are 
 cJ5e, r6v5e rbv Tp6wov, ^j/raC0a, 
 OVTOS. It is evident that a dem. 
 in such a position really con- 
 tains a connective idea, in that 
 it refers to something in the 
 preceding or following sen- 
 tence. We see then that nearly 
 every sentence is connected 
 with the preceding context by 
 some conj. j if, however, the 
 
 sentence is introduced by a 
 dem. pron. or adv., the conj. is 
 often omitted. Such omission 
 of the conj. was so infrequent 
 that Greek rhetoricians gave 
 it the special name asyndeton 
 (d-crw-de-roj', a priv. and <rvv- 
 5&o, bind together). cvpos: 
 declined like ytvos H. 191 ; G. 
 228. The contractions are the 
 same as in verbs in -^w. (The 
 contraction of e-e to 17 in the 
 nom. dual is late ; in inscrip- 
 tions of the classical time e-e 
 becomes et here as elsewhere.) 
 37. 4vy}iVT) : for the red., 
 see H. 365 ; G. 523. A bridge 
 joined by seven boats we should 
 call a pontoon bridge of seven 
 boats. TOVTOV: what? 
 
 39. otKovjt^vT]v : inhabited. 
 Even at this early time there 
 were in Asia, as now, many 
 cities which had been deserted, 
 the ruins still retaining the old 
 names. vSai|j,ova : for decl. 
 see H. 234, 235 ; G. 312, 313. 
 
 40. Note the asyndeton. 
 Mevwv ; sent by Aristippos, 
 
280 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [273 
 
 AoXovra? /cal Alwava? KOI 'O\vv0iov$. 
 7. evrevOev e%e\avvei a-TaOpovs rpeh Trapaadyyd? 
 et/coa-iv eh KeXatz^a?, r^9 <&pv<yi 
 
 45 /JL<yd\r)V /cal ev$al/j,ova. evravOa 
 
 /cal TrapdSeicros /L&eya? dypicov Oypicov TrX^/o?;?, a e/cel- 
 vo<$ eOrjpevev diro tTTTrou, OTrore yv/juvdcrai, ftov\0iro 
 eavrbv re /cal rou? ETTTTOI;?. Sia /juecrov Se rov Trapa- 
 Seiaov pel o MalavSpos Trora/Lto? al Se Trrjyal avrov 
 
 50 elcriv /c TWV jSacriXeicov pel Se /cal Sid Tr)$ 
 
 43. VT00v : asyndeton. The 
 ending -Oev appears in several 
 advs. denoting motion from a 
 place. 
 
 43 f. irap curacy "yds el'Kocriv : 
 the distances covered in these 
 first days, six to eight para- 
 sangs daily, were greater than 
 the later average. 
 
 45. pao-iXcia : distinguish 
 from jSao-tXetd. The neut. pi. 
 is used for palace, probably be- 
 cause of the numerous apart- 
 ments. 
 
 46. nfyas : H - 247 i G - 346 - 
 e^ptwv: H. 743, 753 and c; 
 G. 1112, 1139, 1140. irXVjp^s: 
 declined (except for the ac- 
 cent) like evyerfs H. 230 ; like 
 dXi^j G. 313. 
 
 47. diro iirirov : lit. from a 
 horse; we say on horseback. 
 The Greek is inclined to look 
 at an act as proceeding from a 
 place, when we look at it as 
 
 occurring in a place. In re- 
 gard to this phrase observe that 
 the number of horses must be 
 the same as the number of 
 riders ; hence they hunt on 
 horseback would be Orjpevovo-iv 
 curb iTrirwv. oirore povXoiro : a 
 rel. clause implying a past gen- 
 eral condition. H. 912, 913, 
 914 B, (2), 894, 2; G. 1428, 
 1429, 1431, 2, 1393, 2. 
 
 48. (Xorov : for the position, 
 see H. 671 ; G. 978. 
 
 50. K TCOV pcuriXeicov: we 
 should say in the palace; cf. 
 note on airb 'iirirov 47. A /3atrt- 
 Xeia, like a mediaeval castle, 
 was a fortress as well as royal 
 residence ; for such a collection 
 of buildings, containing quar- 
 ters for troops as well as for 
 court officials, a good supply of 
 water was essential, and an 
 abundant spring was usually 
 included within the walls. 
 
273] 
 
 ANABASIS, /., 2, 1-12. 
 
 281 
 
 8. eo"Ti Se K 
 
 eV KeXa^afc epvfjuva eVl raZ? Trrjyais rov Map&vov 
 TTorafMov VTTO rfj aicpOTroKei pel Se /cat ovro? Sea 
 Tr;9 7ro'Xefc>9 /cat fji/3dX\,i 669 TOZ> MatavBpov rov Be 
 Mapavov TO 6^/009 eanv ei/coo-i ical irevre vroSw^. 55 
 evravOa \eyrai 'ATroXXcoi/ 6/cSeipai Mapcrvdv 
 <ra9 epi^ovrd ol Trepl (TO^>/9, /cal TO Se^a 
 ev TcS dvrpq) o6ev al Trrjyai Bta Be rovro 6 
 Ka\elrai Mapavas. 9. evravOa Sepgrjs, ore e/c rrj? 
 
 OLKO- 60 
 
 51. TTI: H. 480,2; G. 144,5. 
 
 55. iroSwv : pred. gen. where 
 we should expect the nom. 
 
 56. licScipai: the inf. here 
 stands in indir. discourse for 
 the aor. indie, of the dir. form ; 
 in such cases the aor. inf. does 
 denote past time, as the indie, 
 would. H. 851, 852, 854; G. 
 1280. The dir. form would be 
 <Wa00a 'A7r6X\a>*> t&detpe. The 
 story is often alluded to, and 
 parts of it are told in several 
 works of art that have come 
 down to us. It is said that 
 Athena invented the flute (a#- 
 X6s, more like our clarinet) ; 
 but catching sight of her own 
 image in the water as she 
 played r she determined never 
 again to distend her cheeks in 
 such an ugly manner, and threw 
 the pipe away. The satyr Mar- 
 syas, who had been listening 
 
 with delight, at once caught it 
 up, and soon was so proud of 
 his own music thereon that he 
 challenged Apollo himself, the 
 god of music, to a contest, 
 Apollo to use his lyre. The 
 victor might punish the van- 
 quished as he pleased, and 
 the Muses were to be the 
 judges. Of course Apollo won, 
 and he punished the presumptu- 
 ous satyr in the way described 
 in the text. 
 
 57. ol: enclitic, therefore 
 not the art. but the pron. Cf. 
 erf 270, 2. crowds: here skill, 
 art. Translate after defeating 
 him in a contest of skill in 
 music. Scpjxa : from 5e//>w, 
 theme e/>-, with the ending 
 
 -fJLCLT-. 
 
 58. o6 v = e o v : cf . tvrev-dev. 
 
 59. Mapo-vds : pred. nom. 
 
 60. rfj jxaxu : the well- 
 
282 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [273 
 
 $o/jLrj(7ai ravrd re ra /3a<ri\ei,a KOI rrjv 
 d/cp07ro\LV. evravOa epewe Kvpo? rj/jLepd? rpiaKovra 
 KOI Tj/ce KXea/^09 o AaKeSai/jiovios <j)vya$ e^cov OTrXi- 
 r9 f XJL\lovs /cal TreXrao-ra? pa/cas o/cra/coalov^ KOI 
 65 Toora9 Kj07?ra9 Sid/cocrlovs. a/jia Se KOI Swcrt? 
 Trapfjv 6 ^vpd/c6(7i,o$ e%a>v OTfXtrd^ rpiaKocriovs, KCLI 
 
 KOI 
 
 OTrXtra? 
 
 /cal apiOfJbov rcov 'l 
 ), KOI eyevovro ol 
 KOI %i\(,oii TreXracrral Se 
 10. evrevOev e%e\avvet, araO- 
 Svo Trapao-dyyd? Se/ca et? ITeXra?, iroKiV ol/cov- 
 evravO* efjueuvev rjfJLepds rpel? ev als HeWa? 
 ra Avfcaia eOvcre /cal d<ya)va Wrjice ra &e 
 ^pvaal edeapei Se rov dycova 
 
 6 'Ap/ca? 
 evravOa Ku/oo? e 
 7rolri<TV ev TW 
 70 Trai/re? oirKlrai fjuev 
 rovs 
 
 75 a6\a rjcrav 
 
 known battle of Salamis, 480 
 B.C. Dat. of means, H. 776 ; 
 G. 1181. Xeycrai olKoSo|j,fj(rai : 
 Cf. X<fyerai ticdeipai 56 and note. 
 
 68. dpiOfxov : here the ac- 
 tion of numbering; an enu- 
 meration. 
 
 69. -yvovro : amounted to. 
 71. dfjicjH TOVS SwrxtXCovs : 
 
 H. 664, c; G. 948, (6). The 
 numbers do not agree with 
 those previously given. 
 
 74 f. TO, AvKcua: cognate ace. 
 H. 715, b ; G. 1051 : celebrated 
 the Lycaean festival with sacri- 
 fice. This festival of Zei>s Ai5- 
 KCLLOS was the common festival 
 of the Arcadians. Every such 
 
 festival had for its central point 
 a sacrifice, which was followed 
 by athletic contests, these also 
 being in honor of the god. 
 0T]K: a 1st aor. ind. act. 3d 
 sing, from ri6r}^ with -*e- for 
 the tense suffix instead of -ere-. 
 ridriiju. is the verb regularly used 
 for appointing or arranging 
 a contest. rjo-av : pi., even 
 though the subj. is in the neut. 
 H. 604 and b ; G. 899, 2. 
 
 75. <rT\Yy8s : in Greek 
 gymnasiums and wrestling- 
 schools boys and young men 
 took their exercise naked ; they 
 rubbed themselves thoroughly 
 with olive oil, to make the 
 
273] 
 
 ANABASIS, I., 2, 1-12. 
 
 283 
 
 KOLI K{)po9. evrevOev e^e\avvi crraOfJiovs Svo Trapa- 
 ds ScaSe/co, els Kepd/mcov dyopav, TTQ\LV olKOVfjue- 
 Trpbs rfj Mucrta ^wp'i. 11. evrevdev 
 crraQ /JLOVS rpecs Trapacrdyyds Tpid/covTa els 
 Kavarpov TreSiov, r jro\iv ol/cov/jLevrjv. evravO* epeivev 80 
 rjpepds 7TVT /cal TO 2<$ err pander ais ox^e/Xero fiio'Oos 
 
 7T\OV T! TplWV /JL'TJVtoVi KOI 7TO\\dfCLS l()VTS 7rl TO? 
 
 dvpds ctTryrovv. 6 Se eXvr/Sa? \<ycov Sirjye KOI Sij\os 
 rjv avltofievos ov yap rjv Trpos rov Ktpou rpOTrov 
 
 muscles supple, and the fine 
 sand with which the place was 
 strewn would naturally stick 
 to their oiled flesh, so that with 
 oil, dirt, and sweat together, a 
 youth after an hour's exercise 
 was probably as thickly coated 
 as the contestants on a muddy 
 foot-ball field nowadays. To 
 remove this coating before the 
 necessary bath, <TT\eyyl des were 
 in everyday use. Those made of 
 gold were not for use, but me- 
 morials. xP^" at : li^ 6 aTrXoOs 
 H. 223, 224; x />u(ro0s G. 310. 
 Learn at the same time vovs 
 H. 157 ; G. 201, 2. (Since the 
 dual is nowhere used in authors 
 read in school and college, it is 
 better omitted.) 
 
 78. lo-xdrqv irpo's : lit. far- 
 thest near ; that is, on the bor- 
 der towards. 
 
 82 f . irXc'ov % : H. 647, 2d 
 sentence. p/qvwv : depends on 
 and is not affected in 
 
 case by ir\tov. loVres: give 
 the meaning of each element 
 (/-6-i/r-es) . Learn the entire 
 inflection. H. 477 ; G. 808. The 
 irreg. impf. is like a plup. ; the 
 ind., impv., and inf. are tu- 
 forms, while the subjv., opt., 
 and pple. are of the w-form. In 
 the impv., however, i-6-vrav has 
 the var. vow. as tense suffix. 
 In l-tvai the ending is -evai in- 
 stead of -vai. ras 0vpds: lit. 
 the doors ; a common Oriental 
 expression for house or gen- 
 eral's quarters, especially for 
 the king's palace ; to the pres- 
 ent day our term for the court 
 of the Sultan of Turkey is The 
 Sublime Porte, lit. the high gate. 
 
 83. 4Xirt8as Xc'-ycov : lit. speak- 
 ing hopes; that is, speaking 
 hopefully. SfjXos TJV 
 vos: cf. <f>avpbs ?jv de 
 174, I., 10. 
 
 84 f . irpos TOV rpo-rrov : in 
 accordance with the character. 
 
284 
 
 THE GHEES: OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [273 
 
 85 e^ovra p/rj aTroSiSovai. 12. evravda 
 'E7ruaa 77 ^vevveaios yvvrj rov Ti\L/ca) 
 Trapa Kvpov /cal e'Xeyero Kvpa) Sovvcu 
 TroXXa. rfi &' ovv crTparta Tore aTreSco/ce Kvpos 
 jMcrOov Terrdptov /JLIJVOJV. el^e Se 97 Ki\i(rara <f)V\a- 
 
 90 /c?)z; 7re/H avrrjv K/Xt/ea? /cat 'A<77rez>8tot>9 eXeyero 
 Se /cat a-v<y<yevecr6ai Kvpov rfj 
 
 : circumstantial pple., 
 agrees with the understood 
 subj. of &iro5i86vai. Lit. wo^ ^o 
 ^2/, (when) having (money) ^ 
 was not, etc. ; more freely, it 
 was not like Cyrus not to pay, 
 when he had money. jx^j : H. 
 1018, 1023 ; G. 1611. diroSiSo- 
 vcu: &ir6 in composition, as 
 here and in airyTovv above, 
 often suggests that something 
 is due. It is now time to learn 
 the entire verb 5/Sw/xi, H. 350, 
 330, 334 ; G. 506. Note care- 
 fully the following irregulari- 
 ties. (1) In the pres. syst. 
 impf. ind. act. sing., H. 419, a ; 
 G. 630. Impv. act. 2d sing. 
 5l8ov, H. 415, b G. 755. Pple. 
 act. didovs, H. 382 and 56 ; G. 
 770 and 335. (Cf. yvovs 169, 
 170, a.) (2) In the /xi-aor. there 
 is a mid. as well as act., but 
 the sing, of the hid. act. is 
 wanting, those forms being sup- 
 plied by the peculiar 1st aor. in 
 -*a-, H. 432 ; G. 802, 2. The 
 other peculiarities of this sys- 
 
 tem are described in H. 443, 
 a-c ; G. 802, 1. Note particu- 
 larly that the theme vowel o is 
 not lengthened, and that dovvai 
 has the ending -emt, with which 
 cf . t-tvai. Outside of the pres. 
 and aor. syst. didwfu is regular. 
 86. <yvWj: H. 216, 4 ; G.291, 
 8. pao-iXe'ws : subject, how- 
 ever, to the king of Persia. 
 Syennesis and Epyaxa seem to 
 have played a double part, fa- 
 voring both sides, in order that 
 they might retain their throne, 
 whichever should win. 
 
 88. 8* ovv : at any rate, im- 
 plying that the statement as to 
 "her giving Cyrus money is mere 
 hearsay ; but however that may 
 be, his paying the army was a 
 fact. 
 
 89. TTTopo)v: H.290; G.375. 
 90 f. &ycTO Kvpov: here 
 
 the impers. construction of A<?- 
 76TO is used, although A<fyero 
 dovvoLi 87 is in the personal con- 
 struction. For tense cf. note 
 on oiKo5oiJ,7)<rai 60. 
 
274] 
 
 ANABASIS, L, 2, 13-27. 
 
 285 
 
 - 5 
 
 274. Anabasis L, 2, 13-27. 
 13. ^VTevOev ej~e\avvet, o-raOfAous Svo 
 Se/ca e^9 vfA/Spiov, TTO\LV OiKOvjj,evrjv. evravOa 
 Trapa rrjv 6Sbv /cptfvr) f) M/Soi; /caXovfievrj TOV 
 ja)v /3a0YXe&>9, e<f> rj \eyeraL Mt'Sa 
 6r)pV(rai Oiva) /cepdads avrrfv. 14. evrevOev 
 \avvei crraO/jiovs Svo Trapaa-dyyds Se/ca els Tvpid- 
 euov, ir6\tv olKov^evrjv. evravOa epewev 
 rpei$. KOI \<yTcu Serjffijvcu rj Kl\i,(rcra Ktpov 
 Sel^at, TO (TTpaTevfjia avTrj /3oiA,o'//.ez>o9 ovv eT 
 !;ai e^eTaariv TroieiTai ev rcS 7reS/6> TWV ' 
 /3ap/3dpcov. 15. tC\V<r &e row 
 avTols 669 (JLafflVi OVTCO Ta%()rjvat, /cal 
 
 i S* /cacrTOV rou9 eavTov. eTa^Orjcrav ovv 
 7rl TCTTapcov el'xe Se TO fjuev Segibv M.VQ)v /cal ol 
 avv aurcS, TO Se evcavv/jiov KXeap^O9 /cal ol /civov, 15 
 TO Be fJiicrov ol a\\oi aTpaTrjyoL 16. effecopet ovv 
 
 /ca 10 
 
 3. MCSou: pred. gen. after 
 KaXovfjitvr) : lit. the spring called 
 Midas' 1 s. We say, the so-called 
 spring of Midas. 
 
 5. ol'vu) Kcpdcrds avr-qv : lit. 
 mixing it with wine; we say 
 rather, mixing wine with it. 
 The story is that the satyr 
 drank so much of the wine 
 from the spring that he became 
 an easy prey. 
 
 12. vopos : custom, the ear- 
 lier meaning of the word ; the 
 earliest law was merely custom. 
 Supply fy. 
 
 13. IKCUTTOV: supply 
 
 14. lirl TTTapo>v : four deep, 
 to make the line long, and so 
 make the army appear large. 
 TO SeJuSv: supply ictpas wing. 
 The right was the post of dan- 
 ger (and therefore of honor), 
 because the shield was carried 
 on the left arm, so that the right 
 side was unprotected. Hence 
 an enemy always tried to attack 
 on the right, and fortifications 
 were so planned that an enter- 
 ing force must expose that side. 
 
286 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [274 
 
 6 Kvp09 irp&TOV aev rou9 /Bapftdpovs ol 
 \avvov Teray/Jievoi, Kara fXa? /cal Kara rdgeis elra 
 Be rots' f/ EXX?;i>a9, TrapeXavvcov e<' ap/jLaro? /cal rj 
 ^>' apaaad^r)?. ^X OV ^ Trdvres /cpdvrj 
 teal ^iT&vas (froivl/covs /cal KvrjfuBa^ /cal ra9 
 9 /cKfca\vfji/JLvds. 17. eTreiBrj Be Trdvra? 
 
 cmjo'ds TO apua Trpo rr)$ 
 jLyfrd^ Tllryprjra TOP eparjved Trapa 
 25 (TTpaTrjyovs T&V 'TZXXrjvatv e/ceXevae 7rpo/3a\ea0a(, 
 TCL oVXa fcal eTn^copijo-ai o\rjv T^V </>d\a<y<ya. ol Be 
 
 TavTa TrpoeiTTov rot9 crrpaTtcoTa^ Kal eTrel 
 
 7rpo/3a\6/ji,voi, TCL oVXa eTrycrav. e/c Be TOV- 
 TOV OaTTOV TrpolovTCdV <rvv tcpavyf) diro roO avTo- 
 
 17. irpwrov: H. 719, 6; G. 
 1060. Trpwros is the ordinal 
 numeral corresponding to els. 
 See list, H. 288 ; G. 372. 
 
 19. irap\avvo>v : here the 
 original meaning of tXatvw ap- 
 pears. 
 
 21. \a\Kcl, <J>OIVIKOVS : de- 
 clined like x/)i)crous ; see x/wo-cu 
 273, 75 and note. 
 
 22. KKKa\v|jL(j.vds : observe 
 the effect of the pred. position : 
 a lit. translation in the Greek 
 order gives the same force. 
 H. 670, a; G. 972. On the 
 march shields were usually 
 protected by leathern covers. 
 TrdvTds : governed by the 
 irapa- (along, or past} in 
 
 24. fJ.6CTT)S : Cf. fJL^ffOV TOV 
 
 irapadela-ov 273, 48 and note. 
 
 25. irpopaX&rOcu : indir. 
 mid. ; lit. throw their arms be- 
 fore them ; that is, put the 
 shield and spear in position for 
 attack. The subj. is the Greek 
 soldiers, or ryv <j>d\ayya. 
 
 26. oX-qv : pred. position ; 
 in a body. H. 672, c ; G. 979. 
 
 27. lo-dXiriyfc : the subj. 
 (raXTrry/cr^s or ris omitted, as 
 often with ffcCkirlfa. 
 
 28 f. lirfjo-av : i subscript 
 marks the form as from efyu, 
 not elpl. Cf. ^7rixw/>?7<rcu 26, 
 with the same meaning. K 
 TOVTOV : thereupon. irpouSv- 
 TV: gen. abs. with the subj. 
 p omitted. 
 
274] 
 
 ANABASIS, I., 2, 13-27. 
 
 287 
 
 Spo/xo? eyevero rofc crrpaTKorais 7rl ra? 30 
 . 18. rcoz> Se fiapftdpcov <o/3o9 vroXu?, /tal 
 re Kt \icro-a efywyev eirl 7-779 dpfJiafjid^rj^ /ecu ol etc 
 T}? dyopds fcara\i,7rdvTs rd &via e<f)V<yov. ol Se 
 
 TIW <ye\Q)Ti, &rrl ra9 a-/crjvas r}\6ov. f] Se . 
 ISovo-a rrjv \afjL7rp6rrjra /cal rrjv rd%iv rov 35 
 crTpaTV/jLaTO<; eOavjjiacre. KOpo? Se rjcrOrj rbv K 
 TWV r ft\\r)V(0v et9 TOU9 j3ap/3dpovs (frdftov IScov. 
 19. zvrevOev c%e\avvt crTadpovs rpeis Trapao-dyyd? 
 
 etfcocriv 
 
 evravOa e^eive rpei? fj 
 r?)9 Avfcdovtds a-ra 
 KOVTCL. ravrijv rrjv 
 
 evrevOev e%e\avvet Sid 40 
 irevre Trapacrdyyds rpiar 
 eTrerpei/re Siap7rd(rcu 
 ovcrav. 20. 
 
 29 f . airo TOV 
 
 of their own accord. Spopos 
 -yVTO TOIS o-Tpartwrais : lit. 
 running arose to the soldiers / 
 that is, the soldiers began to run. 
 
 32 f . ol K TTJS d-yopds : for 
 ol v rrj dyopq.. Cf. TtDf irapa 
 /3ao-t\^ws 256, 1 and tic r&v paffi- 
 \elwv 273, 50. 
 
 35. I8ov<ra : see opdaj. The 
 impv. i'5<? belongs with dirt, 
 i\0t, and XajS^. H. 387, 6 ; G. 
 131, 2. For the tense cf. l$6v 
 37, and UTTOO-X^WS 273, 13 and 
 note. 
 
 36 f . HO-OT] : for ^5-^ from 
 T;O/AGU. IK TWV 'EXXrjvcov its 
 TOVS Pappdpovs : the preps, 
 mark clearly the source and 
 
 goal of the feeling, while the 
 position between art. and noun 
 shows that the phrase is an 
 attributive modifier of <t>6pov, 
 we must use a rel. clause, as, 
 the fear which the Greeks in- 
 spired in the Orientals. One 
 object of the display was to 
 impress the Orientals with the 
 superiority of the Greeks ; 
 Cyrus was naturally pleased 
 at the success in that direction. 
 
 42. Siapirdo-ai : inf. denot- 
 ing purpose, as in Eng. The 
 inf. was originally the dat. of 
 a verbal noun ; the original 
 force appears in this usage. 
 H. 951 ; G. 1532. 
 
 43. ws TToXejjudv ovcrav: cf. 
 
288 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [274 
 
 45 
 
 TLi\icrcrav 69 rrjv Ki\i/cidv aTTOTreyt&Tre*- rrjv 
 6S6v KOI avveTrefji'^ev avry roi>9 arpa- 
 01)9 Me^o>z> eZ^e Kal avrov. Kyj09 Se 
 rcov ahXcov el;e\avvt, Sea Ka7T7raSo/aa9 a 
 rerrapa^ Trapacrdyyds ell/coo"^ Kal vreWe e/9 6ava, 
 7ro\iv olfcov/jievrjv, /Jijd\r]v fcal ev&al/jiova. evravOa 
 50 efjieivav rj^epd^ r/oet9 * ev cS Kvp09 aTre/creivev avSpa 
 
 /ecu 
 
 erepov nva TWV vTrap^cov 
 eTriftovXeveiv avr(S. 21. evrevdev 7 
 
 55 bpOld la")(yp&s KOI d/JL^^avo^ elcre\6elv 
 
 el T9 K(t)\vev. \e<yTO Se /cal l^vevvecns elvai eVl 
 TCOV aKpwv <f)V\drTc0v rr)V elcrf3o\r}V 810 efjueivav 
 fjjjiepdv ev rc3 TreSt'w. rfj S' varepaia fjicev ay<y\o<? 
 Xeycov OTL XeXo67Tft)9 efy ^vevvecris ra a/cpa, eirel 
 
 60 r)a6eTO QTI TO Me^o)^o9 (TTpdrevfjia 'tjSrj ev KtX^/c/a 
 
 w$ tirt(3ov\&jovTos 256, 11 and 
 note ; ws TT pay /xara 
 rwv 270, 33 f. ; cJs /3 
 273, 2. 
 
 44 f. TT|V Ta\i<rTT] 
 H. 719, a ; G. 1060. 
 
 46. avrov: supply 
 
 50. 4v w : supply 
 
 53. mpovXi>iv : depends 
 on aiTid<rdfj,vos : of plotting. 
 
 55. l<TX0tV <TTpaTV|JLaTl : 
 
 both depend on d/x^xaws. H. 
 952, 766, 767; G. 1528, 1165. 
 
 58. rfj vo-Tpcua : supply 
 
 o$. H. 782 ; G. 1192. 
 
 68ov : 
 
 59. XcXonrws ctrj : the com- 
 pound form (as often in the 
 perf. opt.) for XeXo^Troi. For 
 the mode see H. 932, 2 ; G. 
 1487. But notice the mode of 
 TJo-Oero and ^v in the two fol- 
 lowing lines, and cf. H. 935, b 
 and c ; G. 1482, 1499. 
 
 60. TJ'<r6TO on : cf . jSouXeuo- 
 fjitvovs 256, 16, which illustrates 
 the more usual construction of 
 a clause dependent on alo-0d- 
 VO/JLCLI. Xenophon might have 
 written here ycrBero rb M^VWPOS 
 
2T4] 
 
 ANABASIS, L, 2, 13-27. 
 
 289 
 
 T)V i<TO) TtoV Op ft) I/, 
 
 OTt 
 
 7J/COV6 7Tpl- 
 
 /cat avrov Ktijoou. 22. KOpo? 8' 
 67rl ra oprj ovSevbs /CCO\VOVTO$, /cal elSe 
 ra? cr/c^va? ov ol K/X^/ee? e<uA,aTToz/. evrevOev Se 65 
 Kareftaivev ek ireSlov /Aya KOI Ka\6v, eirippVTOV, 
 KOI SevSpcov TravroSaTTtov <rvp,7r\ewv KOI a/ji7re\cov 
 Be teal crrj<ra/j,ov /cal p,e\iv7)v /cal Ke 
 /cal tcplOas (frepei. 0/309 
 
 avro 
 
 61 f . KaC : must connect the 
 clauses of which ya-Bero and 
 17/coue are the verbs ; therefore 
 the next word 3rt must mean 
 because, not that. Tpirjpis : 
 for the decl. see H. 232 ; G. 234. 
 When TrepnrXeofoas is reached, 
 it is seen that r/u^peis is in the 
 ace. pi.; and it then appears 
 as if rpnypeis TrepurXeoiJo-ds were 
 obj. and supplementary pple. 
 with TJKove. But when further 
 TafjL&v and ZXOVTCL appear, it is 
 found that rptrjpets must be the 
 obj. of exoj/ra, which is itself a 
 supplementary pple. with Ta/x<2j/ 
 after TJKOVC, while Tre/UTrAeoiVas 
 is a circumstantial pple. This 
 momentary ambiguity must 
 have been felt by a Greek 
 reader as well as by us. The 
 sentence therefore cannot be 
 called well constructed gram- 
 matically ; yet as regards their 
 relative importance 
 
 7r\eoi5(7as and Ta/uwv cxoira are 
 placed naturally. For the ab- 
 sence of contraction in -irXeotf- 
 <rds see H. 411 ; G. 495, 1. 
 
 63 f. TOS AdKcScUfAOVLCOV, 
 
 etc. : added as an afterthought 
 to rpi^peis. 8* ovv : cf. 273, 88. 
 cISc : see bpaw. 
 
 65. ov: rel. adv. of place; 
 H. 283; G. 436. 4<|>vXaTTOv : 
 seems to be used here for the 
 plup., had been on guard, or 
 were before on guard; cf. fjo-av 
 . . . Tiffffa^tpvovs rb dpx&?ov 256, 
 12 f. The Greek expresses the 
 past continuance of the action, 
 leaving unexpressed the fact 
 that the action was completed 
 in the past. 
 
 67. ScvSpcov, dfi-ireXcov : cf. 
 0rjpiwv 273, 46 and note. <rvji- 
 irXcwv: declined like ?Xewj H. 
 226, 227, with 159; G. 306 
 with 196, 197. 
 
 69. avTo : that is, r6 iredlov. 
 
290 
 
 THE GKEEK OF XENOPBON. 
 
 [274- 
 
 70 o^vpov KOI vtyqXbv irdvrrj e/c 0a\drrr}^ els 0d\ar- 
 rav. 23. /carafias Se Bid TOVTOV rov TreSlov 7/Xacre 
 rerrapa^ Trapaa'dyyd^ vrevre KOI eiicoaiv 
 % KfcX/aa9 TTO\LV fJLeyd\r)v KOI evBal- 
 . evda rjv rd ^vevvecrios ftaaiKeia rov 
 75 /SacriXecos Sia ftecrov Se rfjs TroXecy? pel 
 
 KuSi/o? 6Vo/Aa, evpos Svo 7r\e0pcov. 24. Tavrrjv rrjv 
 7ro\iv ee\i7rov ol evoucovvres perd ^vevvecnos et9 
 o'xypov eTTi rd 0/377 irhrjv ol rd KcnrrjKela 
 ejjbeivav Se /cal ol Trapd rrjv 6d\arrav 
 80 oircovvres ev So\o^9 KOI ev 'Icrcrofc. 25. ' 
 
 Se ?; ^vevveaios <yvvrj TTporepd Ifcupov TreVre rjfjiep 
 669 Ta/)crou9 d^iKero e^ Se T^ vTrepftdXy rcov op&v 
 rrj els TO ire^iov Bvo \6%ot, rov Mevcovo? crrpareii- 
 /jLaro? aTrdSKovro 06 /xez^ efyacrav dpTrd^ovrds TL 
 85 KaraKOTrrjvaL VTTO TWV K^Xt/cco^, o/ Se v7ro\ei<f)0evTas 
 /cal ov BvvafjLevov? evpelv TO aXXo crrpdrevp^a ovBe 
 T09 0801)9 elra ir\ava)iJievov<$ airoKevQai rjcrav S' ouz^ 
 
 75. )i(rov T-qs iroXews : here 
 /A^O-OU is used substantively, r^s 
 7r6Xeo;s depending on it. Cf. 
 7-97$ <f>d\ayyos /xeo-^s 23 f. 
 
 76. ovojxa, evpos : H. 718 
 and 6 ; G. 1058. irXc'epwv : 
 gen. of measure with Trora- 
 jpi6t. 
 
 77 f. ls xptov, iTrl TOL opt] : 
 ace. because of the motion im- 
 plied in &\LTTOV : abandoned 
 for a secure stronghold on the 
 mountains. irXrjv : here a 
 
 conj., hence the nom. after it. 
 Cf. Eng. except, used both as 
 prep, and as conj. 
 
 81. irpoTcpol: H. 619 and a; 
 G. 926. Cf . <?/coC<rcu 270, 20 and 
 note. T]n*pais : H. 781; G. 
 1184. 
 
 84 f. ol JJK'V, olSe': H. 654; 
 G. 981. itycurav: H. 481 and 
 ; G. 812; 141, 3. 
 
 86. TO aXXo 0-Tpa.Tevfxa. : the 
 rest of the army. 
 
 87. 8* oflv : cf. 63 f. 
 
274] 
 
 ANABASIS, /., 2, 13-27. 
 
 291 
 
 e/carov oirXlrai. 26. ol S' a\\oi eTrel fj/cov, 
 re 7ro\iv rovs Tapcrovs SitfpTraaav, Sia rbv 6'Xe- 
 Opov T&V o-vcrTparicDTWv opyi^ofjLevoi, /cal ra /3a<rl- 90 
 \eia ra ev avrrj. K{)po9 Se eTrel elafaacrev els rrjv 
 
 7TO\IV, fJLT7rfJL7TTO TOV ^VVV(71V 7T/309 ZCiVTOV O S' 
 
 ovre 7rpoTpov ovSevi TTW KpeLrrovi eavrov els X ^P a ^ 
 e\6elv (f)7j OVT rare Kvpcp livai r^6e\e y jrplv r] yvvrj 
 
 eXaySe. 27. pera Se ravra 95 
 p,ev eSco/ce 
 Se 
 
 ITTTTOV 
 /cal 
 
 avTov eTretcre /ca 
 
 crvveyevovTO 
 Xpij/JMTa TroXXa 
 S&pa a vo^L^eTai irapa 
 
 KOI crrpeTTTOv xpvaovv /cal 
 
 88. ol 8* aXXot : subj. of 
 ^ACOJ/, placed before tiret for 
 greater prominence. 
 
 89. TOVS Tap<rovs: in app. 
 with T7)v ir6\iv. 
 
 91. Kvpos : cf . oi 5' &\\OL 88 
 and note. 
 
 92. irpos iavTov : to come to 
 him. 
 
 93. o*8ev: H. 767 ; G.1165. 
 We must translate as if it were 
 gen. So Kvpy 94. Observe the 
 Greek way of repeating the neg. 
 where we now use but one neg. 
 H. 1030 ; G. 1619. Yet in old 
 Eng. we find the same practice 
 as in Greek. Thus Chaucer 
 has, " And wol not suffren hem 
 by noon assent | Nother to ben 
 y-buried nor y-brent" (mod- 
 ernized, "And will not suffer 
 
 them by no assent neither to 
 be buried nor burnt") ; and 
 Shakspere, " I cannot choose 
 one nor refuse none." Among 
 the uneducated this old usage 
 is still common, and children 
 are apt to adopt it uncon- 
 sciously as the more natural 
 way of speaking. 
 
 95. eXafk: the subj. is not 
 ij yvv/i, but Zvtvveo-is. Such a 
 change of subj. is often left to 
 be understood in Greek, al- 
 though in Eng. the new subj. 
 must be expressed, nplv here 
 takes the indie, instead of the 
 subjv., because the action is 
 one which actually occurred. 
 H. 922, 924; G. 1469, 1464. 
 Cf. irplv cLv <rvfj,(3ov\ti<rr)Tai 270, 
 29, 
 
292 
 
 THE GEEEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [275 
 
 iood/clvd/cr]v ^pvcrovv KOI (rroXrjv Tlepcn/ctfv, KOI rrjv 
 
 SiapTrd&a-Oai, ' ra Se 
 fiv TTOV evrv<y%dva)cn,v, 
 
 100 ff. TTJV \copdv . . . Siap- 
 irdeo-0cu and rd Tjpircwriuva 
 . . . diroXa}Apdviv are also objs. 
 
 of 
 
 cf. 
 
 understood. diro- 
 : for the force of dir6 
 , 85 and note. 
 
 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 275. In mastering the vocabulary of a language, it is a 
 great help to observe how words are formed. New words 
 are directly formed from existing words in two ways, 
 (1) by composition, (2) by derivation. 
 
 a. Composition is putting together two existing words to 
 make a new one, as o,K/oo-7roAis from aKpos and TroAis, Trpo- 
 /3aAAo> from Trpo and /2aAA.<o. Some slight change of form 
 often occurs, especially in the first member. The simpler 
 cases of composition are easily recognized and the com- 
 pound easily remembered, if the parts were already known ; 
 the more detailed study of compounds may be postponed a 
 while longer. 
 
 b. Derivation consists in adding to the stem or root of a 
 word a suffix, which modifies the meaning of the stem or 
 root, but is not itself used as a separate word, as 
 
 The most common modes of derivation have now been 
 illustrated abundantly, and are grouped together in the 
 following sections. The most important examples that have 
 occurred are first given, then the suffix is pointed out, and a 
 reference given to the Grammar. 
 
276] FORMATION OF WORDS. 293 
 
 Primitive Nouns. 
 
 276. Words formed immediately from a root or verb 
 theme are called primitives. 
 
 a. Xo-y-o-s (Xo-y-o-) speech, word, from X^-yw (Xe-y-) speak. 
 8p6fA-o-s (8po(ji-o-) running, 8paji-iv (Spaji-) run. 
 Tpoir-o-sCTpoir-o-) turn, manner, rpe'irw (rpcir-) turn. 
 Tvir-o-s (TVTT-O-) stroke, type, TVTTTW (TV-IT-) strike. 
 orroX-o-s (o-roX-o-) equipment, \ ( o-reXXw (crrcX-) equip, 
 
 expedition, J \ send. 
 
 v6|i-o-s (vofi-o-) law, vjjLw (v|i-) distribute. 
 
 apx-o-s (dpx-o-) ruler, a-px" (a-px-) rule. 
 
 (vir-apxos subordinate ruler.) 
 
 a/ywy-6-s (d-ywy-o-) leader, a-yw (ot-y-) lead. 
 
 (stem reduplicated. ) 
 
 Suffix -o-, H. 548 ; G. 832. 
 
 b. dpx-^i (dpx-d-) beginning, rule, from apx" (apx-) begin, rule. 
 Tpod>-Ti Crpo<i>-d-) nurture, ^ 
 
 support, } ^4"" ^P'*-) WOUTOft - 
 
 garrison, 
 povX--/j (povX-d-) ^s^, p?aw, povXojtai (povX-) wish. 
 
 (<ruX-XoY-d-) gath- \ ( o-vX-Xc-yw (<rvv + Xe-y-) 
 
 ering, levy, f \ gather. 
 
 t<r-poX-^ (l<r-poX-d-) pass\ f 
 
 into, / \ 
 
 poX-^(v'irp-poX-d-)^roto- > > f vircp-pdXXa) (virep- 
 
 r beyond, passage over, f \ paX-) throw beyond. 
 
 (K- a X--) battle, licxxoK-ai (jiax-) ^^- 
 Suffix -d-, H. 548 and b ; G. 832. 
 
 c. Kpt-TTj-s (Kpt-rd-) judge, from Kptvw (Kpi-) decide. 
 
 n-oiTj-T'/j-s(iroiT]-Ta-) maker, poet, irotca) (irow-) make. 
 
 '-*\ s*a\ -\ ^i + rdOXew (d0X-) contend 
 
 aOX-n-r^-s (aOX-n-ra-) athlete, 1 s 
 
 \ for a prize. 
 
 ^k f dvT-avwv(tco (dvri + 
 
 avT-_avv l o-T<,. S (avT-a 1f v l r. I ' } 
 
 TO-) antagomst, ] \ ^.J 
 
 Suffix -ra-, H. 550 and a ; G. 833, 1. 
 
294 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [277 
 
 d. Xv-<ri-s (Xv-<ri-) loosing, from XVCD (Xv-, Xv-) loose. 
 
 -<ri-) putting, position, TCOijju (6-) put. 
 
 c.) birth, 
 
 (dva-pa-o-i-) 00- ) f dva-pcuvu> (dva + Pa-) 
 
 ing up, ] \ go up. 
 
 Trp6-<t>a-cri.-s (irpo-<|>a-cri-) pre-\ f irpo-<|>aCva> (irpo+<|>av-, 
 
 text, | \ <|>a-) show before. 
 
 4J-ra-<ri-s ({-Ta-<ri-) re- ^ J |-TO^<O (ef + 4ra8-) 
 
 view, ) (. inspect. 
 TOI-S (TOI- for Tav-crt-) ar- ") 
 
 ranyement, 
 
 irCo-Tt-s(mo-Ti-form9-Ti-)/a#&, ir9a> (iriO-) persuade. 
 
 Suffix -<ri-, -TI-, H. 551, 1 ; G. 834. 
 
 e. 5pd-|Aa (8pd-fi,aT-) deed, drama, from 8paa> (Spa-) do. 
 
 vpau,-u,a (vpau.-u.aT- for vpad)- ") 
 
 r \ir r r i .vpadxo (vpa<b-) 
 jiar-) writing, / 
 
 irpay-ixa (irpdv-uar-) thing} 
 
 done, /, 
 
 8p-u,a (Scp-jiar-) Mde, Seipca (8p-) /?/, skin. 
 
 86v-u,a (8ov-uiaT- for SOK-) , c N 
 
 r , v I , 1 ". V 8oKi (8oK-) seems 6es. 
 jiar-) resolution, J 
 
 (TTparcv-fxa (o-Tparev-jxaT-) "i f crrparcva) (orrpaTev-) 
 
 army, f \ make an expedition. 
 
 Suffix -nar-, H. 553, 1 ; G. 837. 
 
 - ") 
 
 TaTTW 
 
 /. TTcuSei'd (iraiScid-) education, from irai86va)(i 
 
 pacriXcid (pacriXeid-) kingdom, pa<riXvw(pa<riXu-)re^w. 
 
 Suffix -id-, H. 522, G. 836. 
 
 Denominative Nouns. 
 
 277. Words formed immediately from a noun (or adjec- 
 tive) stem are called denominatives. 
 
 a. lirirv-s (iinr-t>-) horseman, from i'-inro-s horse. 
 Upcv-s (lep-v-) priest, Up6-s sacred. 
 
278]' FORMATION OF WORDS. 295 
 
 s, Hermes, mes- 
 
 v-) interpreter, senger of Zeus and 
 
 (. god of trade. 
 
 Suffix -v-, H. 557, 1 ; G. 841. 
 
 b. iroXf-Ttj-s (iro\l-Ta,-) .citizen, from ir<5Xi-s city, state. 
 TO|O-TT)-S (Tofo-To,-) bowman, rojo-v bow. 
 6-irXt-TTj-s (oirXl-TcL-) hoplite, 8-irXa arms. 
 
 Suffix -TCI-, H. 557, 2 ; G. 841. 
 
 c. xpv<r-o-v (\p\5cr-io-) gold piece, from xpv<rd-s 
 0i]p-o-v (Orjp-io-) beast, Orjp beast. 
 Xwp-Co-v (xwp-to-) fortress, xP-s> 
 ircS-Co-v (ircS-io-) plain, ircSo-v ground. 
 ptpX-Co-v (Ptpx-io-) 6ooA:, ppXo-s papyrus. 
 
 Suffix -to-, H. 558, 1 ; G. 844. Many diminutives have lost the 
 diminutive meaning. 
 
 278. Denominative Adjectives. 
 
 a. dpxato-s (for dpxa-io-s) ancient, from apx^ (apxd-) beginning. 
 1 A0t]vato-s (for ' Ae^va-io-s) \ ( * A6fjvai ('Ae^vcL-) Ath- 
 
 Athenian, / \ 6ns. 
 
 pYos (d V po-) 
 (Lat. ager). 
 
 (for paa-iXcv-io-s) \ ( pacriXevs 
 
 kingly, f \ king. 
 
 MlX^jo-to-s (for MiXrjT-io-s) \ ( MfX-qros (MlX-qro-) 
 
 Milesian, f \ Miletos. 
 
 op0-io-s steep, opOos (op0o-) upright. 
 
 iroX|j,-io-s hostile, enemy, iroXcfxos (iroXcfjio-) war. 
 
 honorable, T ^H-^ (TIJIO-) honor. 
 
 Suffix -io-, H. 564 with a and b ; G. 850. 
 
 b. pappap-iK6-s barbarian, from { P a PP a P ' s (PapPapo-) 
 
 I foreigner. 
 
 6-s (for oapei-iKo-s) daric, < . 
 
 :6-s Hellenic, "TH\\r\v ('EXXr^v-) Greek. 
 
296 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [279 
 
 Ionic, "Iwv-cs (*Iwv-) lonians. 
 
 f Ilepo-n-s (Ilp<rd-)Per- 
 
 
 jv-iic6-s mercenary, ^vo-s(vo-) guest-friend. 
 
 Suffix -IKO-, H. 565 ; G. 851, 1. 
 
 ^"- -s) golden, from xpvo-6-s (xpvoro-) gold. 
 (for va\K-o-s) of} \ j / \ \-L 
 
 bronze, } X<***- (X^KO-) bronze. 
 
 4>oivlKov-s (for <|>otviK-o-s) \ / <|>oivij (<)>OIVIK-) pur- 
 
 purple-red, ] t pie-red dye. 
 
 Suffix -co-, H. 566 ; G. 852. 
 
 279. Denominative Verbs. 
 
 a. aft6-a> deem worthy, from a|io-s worthy. 
 8ovX6-w enslave, 8ov\o-s slave. 
 
 H. 570, 571, 1 ; G. 861, 3. 
 
 b. 8airava-a> expend, from Sairavr) expense. 
 TcXcvTa-a) end, die, T\vH] end, death. 
 iripd-o|xai attempt, ircipa attempt. 
 
 accuse, alrCd cause, charge, 
 
 be worsted, TJTTWV ivorse. 
 
 H. 571, 2 ; G. 861, 1. 
 
 c. olK*-a> dwell, inhabit, from ottco-s house. 
 iro\fi-o> make war, iroXcjio-s war. 
 Xcopc-o) withdraw, move, X"P-s P^acc. 
 eewp^-w view?, 0<op6-s spectator. 
 
 H. 571, 3; G. 861, 2. 
 
 d. pao-iXcv-w reign, from paonXcv-s king. 
 
 ) suspect, vir-o-rrrTj-s suspicious, 
 
 educate, irais 
 
 p^an, povX-/j 
 
 iruTTv-w rws^,' iricrrd-s faithful 
 
FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 297 
 
 Kiv8vvv- be in danger, icCv8vvo-s danger. 
 
 ev-w make proceed, iropo-s passage. 
 
 hunt, 8rjp wild beast. 
 
 H. 571, 4 ; G. 861, 4. 
 
 e. cpC (for IpiS-iu) strive, from epis (epiS-) strife. 
 
 ^o) (for <raXiriyy-u0) ) f o-dXm-yJ 
 
 trumpet, / t trumpet, 
 
 assemble, d0poo-s together. 
 
 H. 571, 5; G. 861, 6; 864. 
 
 /. yvp.vdfcw exercise, from yviivo-s naked. 
 
 d.Ti|ioLJ;<i> dishonor, arlpo-s without honor. 
 
 ^a) wonder at, 6avjxa wonder. 
 
 H. 571, 6; G. 861, 5; 864. 
 
 280. Translate into Greek. 
 
 At my summons the Greeks assembled at Sar- 
 dis ; for I intended to march with them against the 
 king, but they did not suspect it. We traveled 
 for many days through many large cities and prov- 
 inces, crossing rivers and ascending mountains, 5 
 
 1. At my summons : gen. 
 abs., I calling. 
 
 2. intended : use juAXw. 
 march : here (rrparei/o/xat ; for 
 it is not merely the act of march- 
 ing that is meant, but rather the 
 making a military expedition. 
 
 3. but they: cf. 274, 17. 
 tKeivoi. might be used, but would 
 make the new subj. unduly 
 prominent. We traveled : 
 use a connective in Greek. 
 
 4 f . for : expressed by the 
 ace. of extent. many large : 
 the Greek would always say 
 many and large. cities and 
 provinces : use re Kai. 
 
 5. crossing rivers and as- 
 cending mountains : the Greek 
 would contrast these phrases, 
 which we merely coordinate. 
 Put the nouns before the pples., 
 to give them the same relative 
 prominence as in English, and 
 
298 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [280 
 
 and the Greeks gladly obeyed their generals in 
 everything. When we were at Kaystros Plain, 
 the soldiers came again and again to my head- 
 quarters and asked for their pay. I kept telling 
 
 10 them that I could not pay them until I got the 
 
 means ; but they saw that I was distressed, for it 
 
 is not like me not to pay my debts. But after 
 
 Epyaxa came, I paid them four months' wages. 
 
 At one town I held a general review. The Greeks 
 
 15 were drawn up and took position as is their custom 
 for battle, each general arranging his own troops ; 
 and when, as their line was advancing in a body, 
 the Greek began to run, it was a fine thing to see 
 
 mark the contrast by ptv and 
 5 Since certain definite rivers 
 and mountains are had in 
 mind, use the article. We thus 
 get rods jj.tv 7TOTajuoi>s diapal- 
 vovres tiri dt ra 6pi) dvapaivovrcs. 
 6 f . generals : H. 763 ; 764, 
 2; G. 1158, 1160. in every- 
 thing: Trdvra, cognate ace. 
 at: ev. 
 
 8. again and again: TroX- 
 Xd/as. my : use the personal 
 pron. in the gen. For the 
 position see H. 673, 6 ; G. 977, 1. 
 
 9. I kept telling : the Greek 
 would indicate the contrast be- 
 tween the new subject and that 
 of the preceding sentence by 
 expressing ty& and using 5<?, 
 which will also properly con- 
 
 nect the sentence with the for- 
 mer one. For kept telling use 
 a single word in Greek. 
 
 10. could not : opt. H. 932, 
 2 ; G. 1487. Or the impf . ind. 
 may be used, H. 936; G. 1489. 
 until : cf . trplv &v (ru/A/3ouXetf- 
 (rijTcu 270, 29, and irplv /carcryd- 
 701 273, 15, with notes. 
 
 11. they saw that I -was : 
 lit. / was plain being distressed. 
 
 12. my debts : lit. the 
 things owed, pres. pass. pple. 
 used substantively. 
 
 14. At one town: /cai ev 
 nvL w6\i. general: lit. of all. 
 
 16. troops: omit. 
 
 17. as ... in a body : gen. 
 abs. 
 
 18. the Greeks began to 
 
281] 
 
 ANABASIS, /., <9, 1-12. 
 
 299 
 
 the fear of the Persians. There for the first time 
 it became clear how much better soldiers these 20 
 Greeks are than my own people ; and with them 
 as auxiliaries I think I shall be able to defeat 
 Artaxerxes. 
 
 run : cf . 274, 30. fine : fca\6s. 
 thing: omit. 
 
 19. for the first time: 
 
 20. how much : dat. sing. 
 neut. (H. 781 ; G. 1184) of the 
 indef. rel. that is correlative 
 with foos. See H. 282 ; G. 429. 
 
 21 f. my own people : the 
 
 article with the gen. of the re- 
 flexive pron. with : either crtfv 
 or exwi/ may be used. 
 
 22. as auxiliaries: put in 
 apposition with the word for 
 them. Do not use w's. I shall 
 be able : H. 940 ; G. 895, 2. 
 
 281. Anabasis, L, 3, 1-12. 
 
 1. ^vravOa epewe Kvpo? /cal 77 err par ta 
 eiKoenv - ol jap crrpanwrai ov/c ecfracrav levai rov 
 Trpocra) VTTcoTrrevov jap rfSr) CTTL ftacriKed ievat, ' 
 Se ov/c eirl TOVTCO <fra(rav. 7r/ocoTO9 Se 
 TOU? avrov o-Tpancord^ e/3meTO ievai * 5 
 
 alone, is virtually made a noun 
 by prefixing the art. ; this 
 phrase-noun is then treated as 
 an ace. of extent or adverbial 
 ace., or (as here) a gen. of 
 place. H. 760, a ; G. 1138. 
 
 4. eirl TOVTW: on this basis; for 
 this. rrpwros: H.619,5; G.926. 
 
 5. avTov : note the position. 
 So in 10. pidtTo: for deri- 
 vation cf. 279, /. For tense 
 see H. 832 ; G. 1255. 
 
 1. ^ivc : H. 607 ; G. 901. 
 
 2 f. OVK (()a<rav : refused. 
 Cf. 174, I., 19 and note. It 
 was now plain that Cyrus's 
 pretense about the Pisidians 
 was false. The march had al- 
 ready lasted three months, and 
 they had passed directly by 
 the Pisidians. TOV -rrpoo-w : 
 the adv. alone would have 
 been sufficient. But sometimes 
 an adv. , instead of being used 
 
300 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [281 
 
 ol Be avrov re e/3a\\ov KOI ra vTrotyyia ra 
 eVel ap^aivro Trpoievcu. 2. KXe'a/r^o? Se rore 
 filKpov ^(f>vy pr) KaraTreTpcodijvai) vcrrepov S' 
 Zyvco on ov Svvtfo-erai, ftiacracrQai, (rvvtfyayev 
 10 criav rcov avrov (rrpancDTWv. fcal Trpcorov pev eSa- 
 
 ve 7TO\VV ftpOVOV 60-TC09 * Ol Se 0/3CO^T9 0CLV/Jia%OV 
 
 (Tt,(i)7rQ)v elra Se eXe^e rotate. 3. v A^S/?e? 
 jJbrj OavfJid^ere on ^aXeTrw? <f>epa) rot? 
 
 6. epaXXov : supply \L6ois : 
 lit. ^reio at (repeatedly) with 
 stones. 
 
 7. apaivTo: indir. mid. H. 
 813 ; 816, 4 ; G. 1242, 2 and 3. 
 <?7re is a rel. conj., and com- 
 bined with the opt. mode of 
 tLpZcLLVTo means whenever. Thus 
 the clause implies the condi- 
 tion if ever they began. This 
 is a general condition referring 
 to past time, and takes the opt. 
 H. 890 ; 894, 2 ; 912 ; 913 ; 914, 
 B, (2); G. 1393, 2; 1428, 1; 
 1431, 2. 
 
 8. juKpdv : H. 719 and b ; G. 
 1060. Translate barely escaped. 
 (jrij : H. 1029 ; G. 1615. The 
 same idiom appears in older 
 Eng. ; as, u You may as well 
 forbid the mountain pines | To 
 wag their high tops and to make 
 no noise" (Shakspere), where 
 we find the modern and the 
 Greek idiom combined. 
 
 9. Sryvw: recognized. Svvfj- 
 <rT<u : retains the mode as well 
 
 as the tense of the dir. form. 
 What he thought was otf dwri- 
 crofjicu. 
 
 11. lo-n&s : peculiar 2d perf . 
 act. pple. of i<rr?7/u, more com- 
 mon than effTyKds. H. 336, 454, 
 244 and a ; G. 507, 508 ; 342. 
 Translate, he stood and wept. 
 Although the Greeks expressed 
 their emotion more freely than 
 we do, yet this action of the 
 veteran soldier could not but 
 excite attention and sympathy, 
 as it was intended to do. 
 
 12. "Av8ps : regularly used 
 as a general form of respectful 
 address, followed by the more 
 particular title, as TroXtrcu, Si/ca- 
 <rral ( judges) , or o-rpartwrai. 
 Translate the second title only. 
 
 13. \LV\ Oav|j,aT: the neg. 
 /^, suggesting an exercise of 
 will, shows that flav/xdfere is 
 impv. instead of indie. H. 874 
 and a ; G. 1346. xaXcirws 
 <j>p(o: am sorrowful, or de- 
 pressed. 
 
281] 
 
 ANABASIS, /., 3, 1-12. 
 
 301 
 
 Trapovo-L TTpaypacnv. e/Aol yap ez/o? KCyjo? eyevero 
 Kal fji favyovra e/c TT}? TrarpiSos rd re a\\a ert/i^o-e 15 
 Kal pipiovs &a)K SdpeiKOV? oft? eyco Aa/3&)i> ov/c e& 
 TO tSiov Kare6e^r]v efjiol ovSe KaO^VTrdOrjaa^ a\V 
 efc v/jid$ e&aTrdvtov. 4. Kal Trpwrov pev Trpbs roi>9 
 
 14. irpaYH-curi : H. 778 ; G. 
 1181. Translate the phrase, at 
 the present situation. 
 
 15. rd aXXa: cf. /xl/cp6^ 8 
 and note. 
 
 16 f. |J,Vp(oVS S(i)K 5dpL- 
 
 KOVS : the effect of the order is 
 to give considerable promi- 
 nence to fjivplovs and edw/ce. In 
 a lively or earnest style, such 
 as this speech exhibits, a favor- 
 ite way of ending a sentence 
 in which the verb is accompa- 
 nied by a dependent noun 
 with an adjective modifier, is 
 this arrangement : (1) adjective 
 modifier, (2) verb, (3) depend- 
 ent noun. OVK ls TO t8iov 
 Ko.T6l|AT]v ejjoC: did not lay up 
 (lit. deposit) for my private 
 advantage. Kar-e-d^-^v is in 
 the ju-aor. mid. ind. 1st sing. 
 
 The entire conjugation of 
 TlOtifu should be learned at this 
 point. H. 349, 329, 333; G. 
 504, 506. Note carefully the 
 following irregularities. (For 
 future convenience it is well to 
 put the references against the 
 form, in the paradigm, which 
 is explained.) (1) In the pres. 
 
 syst. rttfets, MOets, trlOei and 
 the opt. riOolwv etc., H. 419, a ; 
 G. 630. Accent of Tt0etVov, 
 Titfef/xej', Ti0e?re, TiOeTev, rtOeTro, 
 Ti0oto, H. 388 ; G. 131, 3. rl0i, 
 H. 415, & ; G. 753. TtOels (for 
 Ti-0e-ir-s), H. 382, 56 ; G. 335 ; 
 131, 5. (2) In the /u-aor. the 
 sing, of the ind. act. is wanting, 
 and is supplied by the peculiar 
 1st aor. in -*a-, H. 432 ; G. 670. 
 The other peculiarities of this 
 system are described H. 443, 
 a e\ G. 802. Note particu- 
 larly that e of the theme is not 
 lengthened, and that OeTvai (for 
 6e-vai) has the ending -emt, 
 with which compare l-tvai and 
 dovvai. (3) The perl act. rt- 
 6ei-Ka is wholly irregular for 
 T^-6-rj-Ka ; and in fact Tt-0y-Ka 
 etc. are the classical forms, 
 rtOeiKa etc. not appearing in 
 inscriptions before 100 B.C. 
 There is a close resemblance 
 in inflection between ri0rifu 
 and 55o>/xi. 
 
 18 f. ISairavwv: note the 
 change of tense. irpos TOVS 
 equiv. to rots 6/>?. 
 in behalf of. 
 
302 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [281 
 
 eTroXefjirjcra, /cal virep TT}? 'EXXaSo? 
 
 20 pOVjJbTJV peff V/JL&V, K TT)<$ X.eppOVr)(TOV CLVTOVS %- 
 
 \avvwv /3ofXo/>ceVoi;5 afyaipelaOai, rou? evoi/covvra? 
 rrjv <yfjv. eTreiSrj Se KO/oo? eKaXei, \a/3a>v 
 Vi Iva el TI Seotro axpeXoirjv avrov 
 av6* &v ev 7ra0ov VTT e/ceivov. 5. ejrel Se v/juels ov 
 25 /3ov\(T0 crvfjuTropeveaffai,, avdy/ctj 81$ JJLOL rj uyita? 
 rfj Kvpou <f)i\ia xpijaffai, rj TT/OO? eicelvov 
 ' V/JL&V elvai. el fjuev Srj Sl/caia TTOL- 
 
 20 f . IJeXavvwv : in the orig- 
 inal, not the secondary, mean- 
 ing. povXojAc'vovs : notice the 
 agreement. 
 
 22. "EXXTjvas TTJV -yfiv: H. 
 724 ; G. 1069. 
 
 23. A TI S&HTO: what he 
 thought was t&v n dfyrai (H. 
 898 ; G. 1403) ; this becomes 
 opt. in the implied indir. dis- 
 course because introduced by a 
 past tense, tiropevbwv. H. 937 ; 
 G. 1502. W^\OT]V : H. 881 
 and a ; G. 1365, 1369. 
 
 24. dv0* wv : = avr y ticelvajv & : 
 in such phrases the antec. is 
 regularly omitted when it is 
 indef. cv ciraBov : 7rd<rxw does 
 not in itself imply an unpleas- 
 ant feeling, but means merely 
 experience something ; e& makes 
 it clear that the experience was 
 a pleasant one. Taken by it- 
 self, then, the phrase e$ eiraBov 
 is equivalent to had been well 
 
 treated (for tense see H. 837), 
 and so takes the gen. of the 
 agent with U7r6, like a pass. 
 The entire clause must be trans- 
 lated freely, in return for the 
 \favors which I had received 
 from him. vjwis: emphatic, 
 and so complimentary to the 
 troops. The whole address is 
 intended to tickle their sense 
 of their own importance and 
 so win their confidence, while 
 suggesting that there are diffi- 
 culties before them if they take 
 this course, and barely hinting 
 at the claims of honor. 
 
 25. dvcfyKT] : supply fart. 
 8if : of course. 
 
 26. irpoSovra: cf. \ap6j>ra 
 273, 10. <t>iXl: H. 777; G. 
 1183. xP^" at: f r XP& eff Q ai "> 
 irreg. contraction. H. 412 ; G. 
 496. Translate enjoy. 
 
 27. el : whether, introducing 
 an indir. question. Eng. if is 
 
281] 
 
 ANABASIS, /., 3, 1-12. 
 
 303 
 
 OVK olSa, aiptfcrofjLai S' ovv vfjias /cal <rvv V/JLLV 
 o rt, av Bey TreicrofJiaL. /cal ovTrore epel ovSels ft>9 
 eyco "}\\r)vas dyaycbv els rovs /3ap/3dpov$, TrpoSou? 30 
 TOT)? f/ EXX?7i>a9 rrjv rcov /3ap/3dpcov fyiXiav ei\6fjirjv. 
 6. aXX' eirel vaeis e/Jiol OVK etfeXere TreidecrOcu, 
 crvv vfilv e^ofjLai /cal o TI av Sep Trelo-o/jiai. 
 yap v/jias efjiol elvai /cal irarplSa /cal tf>t\ov? /cal 
 o-vfi/jid^ov^ /cal <TVV vfjblv /J,ev av olfjiat, zivai rt/i^o? 35 
 OTTOV av c5, vjjicov Se 'eprj/Aos cov ov/c av iKavos olfiac 
 elvai OVT av <f>i\ov QxfreXrjcrat, ovr av e^dpbv aXe^a- 
 cr6ai. to? efjiov ovv IOVTO? OTrrj av /cal Vfjbels OVTQ> 
 
 often used in the same way. 
 Observe that indir. questions 
 do not take the subjv. in Greek. 
 
 28. otSa: learn the conju- 
 gation, H. 491 ; G. 820. alptf- 
 <ro|iai : H. 816, 1 ; G. 1246. 
 
 29. '6 TI av S^TJ : supply 
 Trdexeiv- For the mode see H. 
 912, 913, 916 (with example), 
 898 ; G. 1428, 1 and 2 ; 1434 ; 
 1403. imo-ofj.o.1 : from ird<rxu ; 
 the form from TrdBw would not 
 yield a meaning suited to the 
 context. oviroT ovSeis : H. 
 1030 ; G. 1619. Cf. 274, 93 and 
 note. 
 
 30. ls: among, into the 
 land of. 
 
 32. v>is jioC: put side by 
 side for contrast. So in 34 
 
 i 
 
 33. crvv: omitinEng. TTO- 
 u takes either the simple dat. 
 
 of association (H.772; G. 1175) 
 or the dat. with <rtv. 
 
 35. av: belongs with eli/at, 
 which is thus shown to stand 
 for a potential opt. H. 964 ; G. 
 1308. Cf. 7re/H7ei>6/>iej>os Av 270, 
 25 and note. 
 
 36 f. Sirov av w: cf. 8n &v 
 dty 29 and note. vjxwv: gen. 
 of separation. H. 753, g\ G. 
 1139, 1140, 1112. The reminder 
 that he is an exile is an appeal 
 to their sympathy. av Uavos 
 otficu ctvat : cf . civ ol/xai rf/xtos 
 35. OVT' av : this &v is merely 
 a repetition of & v in 36 ; it adds 
 nothing, except that it lends a 
 slight emphasis to the preced- 
 ing oUre. H. 864 ; G. 1312. 
 
 38. <os: belongs with the 
 pple. Ijiov IOVTOS: gen. 
 
 I where we might expect rather 
 l tin ty& elfjit. oirrj av Kal vp.is : 
 
304 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [281 
 
 rr)V yvcojjirjv e^ere. 7. ravra elirev ol Se 
 40 rat, 01 re avrov erceivov KOL ol aXXot ravra dtcovcrav- 
 T9 on ov $air) Trapa f3aa-i\ea TropeveaOai eiryveo-av 
 Trapa Se Bevlov KCU Hdalayvos 7r\elovs rf $icr')(t\ioi, 
 XaySoVre? ra oVXa KOI ra o-/cevo<f)6pa eo-TparoTreo'ev- 
 aavro Trapa K.\eap%ov. 8. Kvpo? Se TOVTOIS aTro- 
 
 45 pWV T Kal \V7TOV/JiVOS fjLT7T6/ji7rTO TOV 
 
 6 Se levai fiev ov/c f)6e\e, \d6pa Se rwv 
 TrefJLTrwv avrat a<yy\ov e\<y dappelv ct>9 
 ao/Jievcov TOVTCOV t? TO Seov. fjieTaTre/jLTrecrOai, 8' 
 /ce\vev avrdv aura? S' ov/c (f)rj levai. 9. /juera Se 
 50 ravra o~vvayaja)V rovs 6* eavrov err pan cor a$ KOI 
 
 supply fr;re, and cf . 8 TL &v 29 and 
 tiirov &v 36. Translate freely, 
 Be quite sure therefore that I 
 am going whichever way you do. 
 
 40. 01 re : for accent of the 
 art. see H. 112, c ; G. 143, 4. 
 avTov: emphasizes ejceiVov, for 
 which in Eng. use the proper 
 name. 
 
 41. on : because. ov : for 
 position cf. OVK e^ao-av 2. 
 4>atT] : what does the mode in- 
 dicate ? iropevWBeu : like ibv- 
 TOS 38 and Uvai 2, fut. in mean- 
 ing. So in Eng. am going. 
 irrfvcrav : see eiraivtu. For the 
 retention of e at the end of the 
 theme cf. AcaX^w, ^/cdXecra. 
 
 44. irapd K\4apxov : ace. be- 
 cause of the motion implied in 
 the verb. 
 
 46. TWV crrpaTuoTwv : gen. 
 of separation with \d6pg.. H. 
 756; G. 1150. 
 
 47. \-y 6appiv: told him 
 to be of good courage. Only in 
 this sense of bid does X<?7a> in 
 the act. ordinarily admit the 
 inf. in classical prose. o>s : in- 
 dicates that the following gen. 
 abs. is Klearchos's statement. 
 Translate, assuring him that 
 this matter would be settled in 
 the right way. 
 
 48. (iTairji,'rro-0ai : thetense 
 denotes repetition : keep send- 
 ing for. The object was to 
 make it appear to the soldiers 
 that Klearchos was really at 
 enmity with Cyrus. 
 
 50. 6* : for re. H. 79, 82 ; 
 G. 48, 92. 
 
281] 
 
 ANABASIS, I., 3, 1-1 
 
 305 
 
 rou9 7rpoo-\06vTa$ aurc3 /eal TWV aXXcov TOV 
 
 fjievov, eXe^e rotaSe. "Az/Spe9 crrpaTiwrai, ra /JLCV 
 
 Srj Kvpov 8rj\ov OTL 01/70)9 G^CL 7rpo9 ^7/ia9 axTTrep 
 
 TCL rjfJLerepa irpos e/ceivov ovre yap ^pel? e/cewov 
 
 TL (TTpaTLtoTaL) eirei rye ov (rvveTro^eOa avrq), ovre 55 
 
 e/ceZz/09 TL fjplv fjnaOoSorrj^. OTL ^evro 
 
 vo/jii^ei, v<f>* rjfjL(f)v olSa ' 10. &crre Kal 
 
 fjuevov avrov OVK e0e\co e\6elv 9 TO /J,ev 
 
 ala"xyv6iivo<$ OTL crvvoLSa /j,avTq> TTCLVTCL e 
 
 CLVTOV, 7TLTa Kal Se&w fjirj \a/3d)v fie BLK^JV 7TL0rj 60 
 
 51. avr^ : dat. after Trpos- m 
 
 TTpO(T\66vTaS. TOV POV\O|1VOV : 
 
 any one icho desired. 
 
 52 f . TO, Kvpov : the relation 
 of Cyrus, subj. of 6x. 8f]\ov 
 8n : virtually = an adv. 5iJXws. 
 In the original construction 5^- 
 \6v ten was the principal 
 clause, with a 8n clause as 
 its subj. Next 5ij\ov 8ri, with 
 tcrrl omitted, was used par- 
 enthetically, as here. OVTWS 
 
 Xl : Cf. VVOi'K&S XOLV 256, 5 
 
 and note. Translate, the re- 
 lation of Cyrus to us is evi- 
 dently (5iJ and S^Xov 8n to- 
 gether) the same as ours to 
 him. 
 
 55. Y : cannot here be 
 translated; at least is too clumsy. 
 In actual speech the e was elided 
 before a vowel, so that the word 
 did not even make a separate 
 syllable. 
 
 56. jtwr0o8oTtis : that their 
 pay has stopped is merely the 
 first of the disadvantages sug- 
 gested as resulting from their 
 changed relation to Cyrus. 
 d8iKio-0ai: since no subj. is 
 expressed, while one is required, 
 it must be the same as that of 
 the governing verb. H. 940 ; 
 G. 895, 2. 
 
 57 f. Kal p.rair|xirofj,vov av- 
 TOV : even though he keeps send- 
 ing for me. H. 969, e and Rem. ; 
 971, c; G. 1663, 6; 1568. TO 
 ptva-Tov: chiefly; H. 626, 6; 
 G. 915. 
 
 59. alcrxvvofj.vos : from 
 shame. H. 969, b and Eem. ; 
 G. 1563, 2. 4|iavTw : dat. after 
 <rvv- in avvotda. i\|/vo*|ivos : 
 supplementary pple. agreeing 
 with the subj. H. 982 and a ; 
 G. 1578, 1590. 
 
 60. iriTd : correl. with pAv 
 
306 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [281 
 
 vofjLi%ei VTT efjiov rjSi/cfjcrffai. 11. efjbol ovv So/eel 
 &pd elvai rjjJilv /caOevSeiv ovS* afJbe\elv rjfjiwv 
 &v, d\\a (3ov\evecr6ai o TL %prj nroielv CK TOVTCOV. 
 /col 60)5 re fjievofjiev avrov cr/ceTrTeov yuoi Sofcei 
 65 OTTO)? a(7(f)a\eo'TaTa fjuevov/Aev, el re rjSTj Bofcel 
 evai, OTTO)? acr^aXecrrara aTTifJbev, KOI 6V&>5 ra 67 
 
 avev jap TOVTCOV OVTC crTpaTrjyov cure 
 o^>e\o5 ovBev. 12. 6 8' avrjp TroXXoO 
 
 58. SeStws : cf . note on at<rxv- 
 vb/jLevos, 59. jxrf : lest, that. 
 8iKT]v : punishment. liriOfj : H. 
 887 ; G. 1378. 
 
 61. wv : for Toirrwp &j cf. 
 avd' wv 24 and note. TOVTWV 
 would depend on dlicy since 
 the antec. is omitted, the rel. 
 is made to depend on dticrjv, in- 
 stead of being left in its proper 
 construction, the cognate ace. 
 with ijdLKrj(T0ai. H. 996, a, (2) ; 
 G. 1031, 1032. Translate, pun- 
 ishment for the wrongs he 
 thinks he has received from 
 me. 8oK6i : impers., to me 
 therefore it seems to be no time. 
 
 62 f. TJJIIV: H. 767; G. 1165. 
 
 Ka0v8civ: depends on a>'/>a. 
 H. 952; G. 1521. w&v a*- 
 TWV: H. 742; G. 1102. POV- 
 Xe vcr0ai : supply doKeT wpa elvai. 
 
 '6 TI: here indir. interrog., 
 not indef. rel. as in 29 and 33. 
 We use what in both senses. 
 6 TI xpy Troie'iv is the indir. form 
 of rl xpi) TroLfTv ; which is equiv- 
 
 alent to rl Troi&pev ; with the 
 deliberative subjv. CK TOVTWV : 
 "next, expressing time (se- 
 quence) with an implied idea 
 of consequence, in considera- 
 tion o/, in consequence o/, the 
 present circumstances." 
 
 64. avTov: adv., here. Cf. 
 TTOU, TTOU, which were originally 
 genitives. O-KCTTTCOV : verbal 
 from (r/c&rTojucu. For the for- 
 mation, H. 475 ; G. 776, 1 and 
 3. For the syntax, H. 988, 990; 
 G. 1594, 1597. 
 
 65. SITUS |j.vovfxv: an ex- 
 cellent illustration of the way 
 in which purpose clauses (H. 
 880, 885 ; G. 1362, 1372) arise 
 from the indir. question and 
 indef. rel. clause. SOKI : seems 
 best; commonly called impers., 
 but really having airitvat as 
 subj. 
 
 66. airijiev : fut. in mean- 
 ing, parallel with ^evov^ev and 
 
 68. iroXXov: H. 753, /; G. 
 
ANABASIS, L, 3, 13-21. 
 
 307 
 
 KOI 
 
 v KOI 
 
 vavTiicr)V r\v Traz/re? /a)<? opw/JLev re /ca 
 KOI yap ouSe Trdppa) So/covfjuev /JLOL av- 
 rov tcadrjcrOai. &are &pd Xeyeiv o TL n 
 apicrrov elvcu. ravra eiTrtov eVaucraro. 
 
 - 70 
 
 1135. |*4v : here stands within 
 the phrase (TroXXou d^tos 0fXos) 
 which is contrasted with x a ^ e - 
 
 69. <o av (JH\OS -Q: implies 
 the condition av <f>l\os y. H. 
 765 ; 912 ; 913 ; 914 ; B. (1) ; 
 894, 1 ; G. 1174 ; 1428 ; 1431, 1 ; 
 1393, 1. So (f SLV iroMfjLios y. 
 
 72 f . ov8 : here adverbial, 
 slightly emphasizing -n-bppu. 
 SoKov|iv |ioi : we should use 
 the impers. construction. The 
 mild form of statement, as if 
 
 the fact which is obvious to all 
 were doubtful, makes all real- 
 ize more forcibly the signifi- 
 cance of the fact. avrov : gen. 
 of separation with irbppu. 
 Ka9fjo-0cu : to be encamped. 
 Learn rj^an and KdOrjfjLcu, H. 
 483, 484 and a; G. 814-816. 
 wpd : supply tarl. Xyiv : 
 cf. KaOevdetv 62. yryvwo-Kei : 
 judges, Lat. sentit. Note that 
 the ind. is here used, not the 
 subjv. Although 6 TL and rls 
 are indef . , the time is not. 
 
 282. Anabasis L, 3, 13-21. 
 
 13. 'EA; Se rovrov avitTTawro ol pev e/c TOV avro- 
 /JLCLTOV, Xe^oi/re? a eylyvcocr/cov^ ol Se /ecu VTT e/celvov 
 
 oid ellrj r) airopid avev 
 
 yvdxTKw frequently means form 
 a judgment, and hold an opin- 
 ion. 
 
 3. oi'd : the Greek is inclined 
 to speak of the quality of things, 
 as here (lit. of what sort) , where 
 we think rather of the magni- 
 
 1. IK TOVTOV: cf. e/c TOVTWV 
 281, 63. dvto-TavTo : force of 
 the tense ? 
 
 2. \'ovTs: H. 969, c; G. 
 1563, 4. ^ry vcocrKOV : really 
 thought, as opposed to those 
 who are next mentioned. 71- 
 
308 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [282 
 
 r?79 Kvpov jvca/Ar]? fcal fjueveiv /cal dirievai. 14. el? 
 5 Se Srj eZvre, TrpoaTroiov/Jievos (TTrevSeiv co? rd^iara 
 7ropVcr@at, 9 rrjv 'EXXaSa, arparrjyov^ /jiev eXe- 
 >9 ra^(7Ta, e/ yu/^ /BovXerai KXea/^09 
 
 \P>5 /C>J> / 4* /I fO>? X 
 
 ra o eTTirrjoet, a^opa^ecruai i] 6 ayopa 
 rjv ev TW /3ap/3apt,/cq) arparev/jLarL /cal ava/cevd- 
 10 ecr0ai eXOovras Se KO/ooz/ alrelv TrXom, 009 avro- 
 7r\oiV eaz/ Se yu/^ S^SoS raura, rjye/Jidva alrelv 
 TLvpov oc7T^9 S^a <f)i\tds 7-779 %<w/39 aTrd^ei. eav Se 
 
 tude (Tio^ great), or content 
 ourselves with the less definite 
 
 4. THS Ktfpov -yvcofx-qs: Cfy- 
 rws's consent. (xmiv, airUvai : 
 depend on airopla. Cf. X^yeip 
 281, 73 and note. 
 
 5. 8rj: in particular. 
 
 6 f . 4X.<r0ai : the mode shows 
 that elTre 5 was used in the sense 
 of bade, told them. Cf. e\e7e 
 0appeii> 281, 47 and note. pov- 
 XTCU : the form of the dir. dis- 
 course retained. Observe that 
 simple conditions take the in- 
 die., as in Eng. and Lat. 
 
 8 f . ij 8c d^opd . . . (TTpaTev- 
 jxan : not part of the speech, 
 but thrown in parenthetically 
 by Xenophon to show the man- 
 ifest and intentional absurdity 
 of the proposal. 
 
 10 f. diroir\&Hv: H. 881; 
 G. 1365. 
 
 11. alriv : the force of elTre 
 6 still continues. 
 
 12. SO-TIS : has for its antec. 
 not Kvpov but the more em- 
 phatic yye/jibva. (jnXids : the 
 predicate position (H. 594, 6 ; 
 670 and a ; G. 971-973) and 
 place of emphasis make the 
 meaning very different from 
 that of 5ta T?}S (fitXlds %c6/oas, 
 or 5i<i <j>i\las %cfy>as. Lit. would 
 lead them back through the 
 land friendly / that is, render 
 the land friendly through which 
 he was to lead them. This form 
 of predication is a slight exten- 
 sion of the usage seen in such 
 familiar sentences as, He wipes 
 his face dry. The fact that a 
 guide given by Cyrus was lead- 
 ing them would render the 
 population friendly, elxov ras 
 
 CL(TTr[aS ^KKKA\VfJL^VOL3 274, 
 
 20 ff., exhibits nearly the same 
 construction. dirogci : H. 911 ; 
 G. 1442. The clause is essen- 
 tially the same in character as 
 tfnrws pevovfAev 281, 65. 
 
ANABASIS, I., 3, 13-21. 
 
 309 
 
 Se 
 
 o>, crvvTaTreo-Oai, rrjv 
 
 rakri'^ro^evov^ ra dfcpa, OTTCO? 
 /-ir; <fr0dcrco(ri ^re KOpo? /i^re 06 Ki\i,K6$ tcaraXa- 15 
 
 /30Z>T9, WI/ TTOXXOV? KOi TToXXa %prjp,aTa 6%OfjiV 
 
 dvrjpTT a/core^. ofiro? /*<ez> roiavra elire fjuera Se 
 TOVTOV K\eap^o9 eZvre TOCTOVTOV. 15. '-fl? //<ez/ arpa- 
 e/^e ravrrjv rrjv crrparri^idv yu-^Sel? 
 
 13 f. n^8^: adv. Translate, 
 i/ /ie should not give them a 
 guide either, or, i/ ^e should 
 refuse to give them a guide too. 
 
 <nivTaTT6<r0at, ir'ju|s<u : the 
 force of elTre 5 still continues. 
 
 TTJV TaxCo-TTjv: H. 719, a, 3d 
 line ; G. 1060, 2d example. Cf . 
 T^\V rax^TT/j/ odbv 274, 44 f. 
 
 14. irpOKaTaX'qt|/ojJLvovs: note 
 the force of each element. We 
 need not suppose that the Greek 
 reader supplied dvdpas or any 
 such word ; the ending -ous ex- 
 presses the idea of dvSpas dis- 
 tinctly enough, just as in TTO\- 
 \ovs in the next line. For tense 
 cf. \tovTes 2 and note. There 
 is no more emphasis on &Kpa 
 than on irpo- : to seize the heights 
 in advance (first). 
 
 15 f . <|>6curaxri : pi. because 
 the subj. is at first thought of 
 as general ; it is then divided 
 up into Kupos and oi K/Xt/ces. 
 Kara\apo'vTs : supplementary 
 pple. with 00d<rw<rt agreeing 
 with the subj. H. 984 ; G. 1586. 
 
 For tense cf . I5ov<ra 274, 35. 
 v: relates to KJXi/ces, and de- 
 pends on TroXXous and x/^A*Ta. 
 \O|Xv dvt]pTraKOTS : each 
 word has its full ordinary force. 
 Translate freely, many of whom 
 we hold as prisoners along with 
 much of their property that we 
 have carried off. Observe the 
 change to the dir. discourse. 
 In the preceding indir. quota- 
 tion /SovXercu 7, 5i5<? 11 and 13, 
 d7rdei 12, and tpSfowi 15 are 
 in the same form as in the dir. 
 This gives a liveliness of tone 
 that leads up to the change in 
 
 X<>fJ<V. 
 
 18 f. TOO-OVTOV : only so 
 much. The sets of correl. 
 prons. and advs. (H. 282, 283 ; 
 G. 429, 436) should gradually 
 be thoroughly learned. s 
 <rTpaTTiyr{<rovTa (X: ace. abs., 
 a not infrequent construction 
 in Xenophon. H. 973, 974 ; G. 
 1569, 1570. The gen. abs. <Js 
 (TTpaTr)yr)<rovTOS C/JLOV would have 
 had the same meaning. Cf. ws 
 
310 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [282 
 
 20 \JT(O ' TTOXXa <ydp VOpO) &i a /JLOi TOVTO OV TTOLrj- 
 
 Teov <i)9 Se rc5 dvSpl ov av \rjcr6e TrelcrofJiai f Svva- 
 TOV ^aXiarra, r iva el&rjTe on /cal dp^eadai ^i 
 <W9 T9 fcal aXXo9 fjbd\io~ra dvOpcoTrcov. 16. 
 TOVTOV aXXo9 dvecrTrj) eiT&eiicvvs fjiev rrjv 
 25 TOV ra 7r\ola alrelv /ceXetoz^T09 9 coo-Trep 7rd\iv TOV 
 crTO\ov Kvpov TToiov/jievoV) 7riSi/cvv$ Se a>9 
 
 tfJLOV ofiv loVTOS . . . OVTbJ T7]V yvd)- 
 /J.r)V XT 281, 38 f. 0-TpaTT]- 
 
 yCdv: cognate ace. Translate, 
 Let no one of you speak in the 
 belief that I (note the emphatic 
 form <?ju<Q will be general in this 
 campaign. 
 
 20 f. H,O(: H.991; G. 1597. 
 iroiT]TOv : supply fort. o>s 
 8e': though correl. with ws ptv 
 18 in form and in thought, cos 
 does not here have the same 
 office as above, but is declara- 
 tive, equivalent to tin. The 
 clause depends upon a verb 
 like tare be assured, in the 
 mind of the speaker, the op- 
 posite of fjurjdels Xe7^rw, which 
 suggests it. imcrofjLcu : from 
 ireiOw or Trda^w ? TJ 8vvar6v 
 fjLcxXi<TTa : cf . rj tdvvaro rdx^rra 
 273, 29 f. 
 
 22. elSiJTe: do not confuse 
 the forms from o!5a (^5r/, ei'Sa), 
 eideiyv, foOi, ddtvai, e/5c6s) and 
 those from eidov (f5w, ?5o/u, tdt, 
 ideip, id 6 >). Though derived 
 from the same root, the forms 
 
 and meanings are entirely dis- 
 tinct. 
 
 23. COS TIS . . . dvOpCUTTCOV : 
 
 lit. as any one else also of men 
 most; that is, as well as any 
 one else whatever. 
 
 25 f ; TOV . . . K\VOVTOS I 
 
 translate by a rel. clause. 
 wcnrrep Kvpov iroioufuvou : gen. 
 abs., uxrirep denoting a com- 
 parison, which we must denote 
 by as if, although the Greek 
 phrase does not imply a condi- 
 tion : just as if Cyrus were 
 making his expedition back 
 again, a slightly humorous way 
 of saying giving up his pro- 
 ject and marching back, as he 
 would have to do if he assented 
 to the demand. ciriSeiicvvs Se : 
 cf. rpiaKoatovs fttv, TpiaKocrlovs 
 5t 273, 24 and note. We may 
 give the effect of ptv and 5<* 
 combined with the repetition 
 by saying, pointing out on the 
 one hand . . . and on the other 
 hand. o>s : there is nothing in 
 the context to determine which 
 
ANABASIS, L, 3, 13-21. 
 
 311 
 
 eirj rjye/jLova alrelv jrapa rovrov q> \v/jLaivdfJi0a rrjv 
 7rpa%iv. el Se /cal TO> rjye^ovi incrrev cro /JLV bv av 
 Ky>o9 So3, ri Kco\VL teal ra d/cpa rjfjblv K\euiv 
 Kvpov 7rpofcara\a/3eiv ; 17. eyco yap 6/cvolrjv fjuev 30 
 av et9 ra rr\ola epftaiveiv a rjfuv 0/77, fjirj 77/^9 rat? 
 rpiripeai /caraSvcry, (frofioi/JLrjv S' av roS rjyefjiovi, cS 
 Solrj 7Ta-0a^ firj 77^9 aydyrj oOev OVK ecrrai 
 
 shade of meaning is intended 
 here, that which we express by 
 that, or the one which we ex- 
 press by ftow. The Greek did 
 not distinguish them, but we 
 are obliged to do so. 
 
 27. irapd TOVTOV : instead 
 of the ace. of the person, which 
 was used in 10. : dat. of 
 disadvantage ; we say whose en- 
 terprise. \v(iatvo'fx0a: sudden 
 change to the dir. form, as in 16. 
 
 28. t irurTv<ro|Xv : H. 893, 
 c; G. 1391. 
 
 29. TJHIV : dat. of advantage. 
 
 30. Kvpov : obj. of 
 supply r} pas as subj. of 
 
 The sentence is ironical, the 
 thought being, If we are to 
 assume that he will be so kind 
 as to give us a guide in order 
 to make our return safe and 
 easy, we might as well trust 
 his good nature a little farther 
 and ask him to occupy the 
 heights in order to defend us 
 from the Cilicians ; of course 
 he would do neither, 4-yw 
 
 yap : introduces the reason for 
 the statement in the previous 
 section, that it was silly to talk 
 of asking such favors of the 
 man whom they were injuring. 
 In Eng. it is more idiomatic to 
 begin this sentence without for, 
 leaving the causal relation to 
 be understood. 
 
 31 f. a SoCrp implies the 
 condition el afca Sofy, H. 917, 
 900 ; G. 1436, 1408. rats Tpirf- 
 p<ri : with his war-ships, dat. of 
 means. KaraStKrn : cf . tiri0y 
 281, 60 and note. <f>of3oCjn]v 
 8* av: correl. with dKvot-rjv ^v 
 &v 30 f. The two synonyms 
 differ but little here, although 
 <f>o^oLfjLf)v is stronger, and the 
 order is similar to that in 24 
 and 26. $ : attracted (H. 994 ; 
 G. 1031) to the case of ^ye^vi, 
 for which cf. <rbi> ifuv 281, 33 
 and note, also avrf 281, 55. 
 
 33. SofTj: cf.oMl. 80v: 
 the antec. (<?/cet<re) is omitted, 
 being indef . O$K Ko-rai : it will 
 be impossible. 
 
312 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [282 
 
 Oelv ftov\ol/ji'r)v S' av CLKOVTOS cnritov Kvpov \a6elv 
 35 avrbv a7re\6(i)v o ov Svvarov ecrriv. aXX' 700 
 ravra p,ev <f*\vapia$ elvai 18. So/cei Se /JLOL 
 e\66vTd<s 777909 Kvpov, o'irives eTrtT^Setot, avv 
 epcorav eicelvov TI j3ov\rai r^pZv %pf](rOai, 
 /cat eav /Jiev r) Trpagis y TrapaTr^rjaia o'lairep KOI 
 40 irpbcrOev e^prjro rofe ^ez/ot?, eirecrOai KOI rj/uas fcal 
 /j,rj Kcuciovs elvai T&V irpoa'Oev rovra) crvvava/3dvTO)v 
 19. lav Se /Jielfav r] Trpafy^ T % TTpocrdev 
 
 34 f . aKOvros : put with Ku- 
 poi/. XaGeiv avrov : shows the 
 primary meaning of \av0dvw 
 and the common construction 
 with it. The emphasis falls 
 upon &KOVTOS and \a0etV. dircX- 
 0v: nowise different, except 
 in tense, from diritbv. With 
 \av0dvw and QOdvu the supple- 
 mentary pple. regularly has the 
 same tense as the finite verb ; 
 with TU7xd^w the pple. com- 
 monly agrees in tense, but 
 there are many exceptions. 
 Cf. <j>0d(rt*)<ri Kara\a(36vTs 15 f. ; 
 also Tpe<j>6fjLi>ov tXdvOave and 
 wv trvyxave 270, 20 f. Trans- 
 late, I should like, if I go 
 away without Cyrus's con- 
 sent, to go without his know- 
 ing it. 
 
 36. 8oKi |ioi : it seems best 
 to me, the subj. being the clause 
 beginning with dvdpas and end- 
 ing with Pov\ve<r0ai 48, in which 
 the leading infinitives are tyw- 
 
 rav, ^7T(T0aL, elvai, d%iovv, dway- 
 7e?Xcu, (3ov\ev<r0ai. 
 
 37. iriTT]8ioi : has here its 
 primary meaning, suitable ; the 
 meaning seen in &rn-^5eia 8 is 
 secondary, and is found only 
 in the neut. pi. 
 
 38. T(: cognate ace. with 
 Xpi)<r0ai, what use he wishes to 
 make of us. 
 
 39. lav if: the condition 
 refers to fut. time ; if the en- 
 terprise proves to be. ot$ircp : 
 we should expect ticdvy yvircp ; 
 instead of that the antec. is 
 omitted, though it is here defi- 
 nite, and the rel. of quality used 
 (cf. note on oi'a 3) in the case 
 of the omitted antec. ywrep or 
 o'ldvirep would have had with 
 txpfjro the same construction 
 as rl 38. 
 
 40. irpoVOev: the journey 
 mentioned in 225, 8 ff. 
 
 42. Ttis irpoV0v : supply 
 
ANABASIS, I., 3, 13-21. 
 
 313 
 
 Kal 7ri7TOVQ)Tpd KOl 7UKl,vSvVOTpd) d^LOVV Tj 
 
 cravra fjfjbds ayeiv rj TreiaOevra Trpo? <j>i\idv afylevau 
 ovro) yap KOI eTrofievoi av <f>l\ot, aura) /ecu Trpodv/jioi, 45 
 7rol/ji0a Kal cnrLovTes do"0aXw9 av aTrioi^ev o TL 
 8' av 7T/009 ravra Xey?; aTrayyeiXai, Sevpo 97/^9 S' 
 nrpos ravra j3ov\evcrdaL. 20. eSo^e 
 fcal dvSpas e\djjivot, avv KXea/o^ft) Treyu/Trof- 
 i/, ot rjpcorcov Kvpov ra Sd^avra rfj a-rparia. 6 8* 50 
 OTI a/covoi 'Aftpo/cdfjidv %0pbv avBpa eirl 
 
 43 f . ireicravTa. TTCLG 0evra : 
 agree with Kupoi> understood, 
 subj. of dyeiv and d0i^j/at. His 
 readiest means of persuading 
 the soldiers would of course be 
 an offer of higher pay ; this is 
 what is hinted at in TreLo-avra. 
 irpos <|>iXdv : in friendship. 
 We may give the general effect 
 of the parallelism of the sen- 
 tence thus: that they should 
 ask that he either win our con- 
 sent before leading us on, or let 
 us go in friendship with his 
 consent. d<jnevcu: from d<j>iri- 
 /u. The form from #7rei/u go 
 away would be air^vai. Learn 
 the conjugation of ITJIJU, H. 476 ; 
 G. 810. Note the resemblance 
 to, and the few differences from 
 TWyfju, which should be thor- 
 oughly reviewed with fy/u. The 
 long I in the pres. reduplication 
 is irregular. 
 
 45. iropivoi; translate as 
 
 if it were e tirol^a. So 
 d7ri6jTes as if it were el dirioi- 
 
 fUV. 
 
 47. Sevpo : instead of tvBdde 
 (here) because of the motion 
 implied in dirayyc'tXai. 
 
 48. irpos ravra : with refer- 
 ence to this. '8ofj TavTa : this 
 was agreed to. e5oe is regu- 
 larly used to denote the passage 
 of a resolution. For the time 
 being the Greek army has be- 
 come a mass-meeting, in which 
 proposals are made, advocated 
 by speeches, and put to vote ; 
 the question is decided by 
 majority of hands raised, and 
 the minority submit. This pro- 
 cedure was as familiar to the 
 democratic states of Greece as 
 to us ; indeed it originated 
 among them. 
 
 50. Td 86avTa: the ques- 
 tions agreed upon. -rjj <rrpa- 
 TI : indir. obj. of d6%avra. 
 
314 
 
 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. 
 
 [282 
 
 TO) EtV(f)parrj Trora/Jiq) elvai, a^re^ovra Sct)Se/ca araO- 
 7T/30? TOVTOV ovv (f>r) /3oi\<rO(u e\0elv KCLV 
 e/cei, rrjv Sl/c^v e</>?? Xpy&iv 
 55 eav Se <j>v<yrj) rjpels e/cel TT/OO? ravra 
 
 21. afcovaavres Se ravra ol alperol a7rayye\\ov(7L 
 T069 o-TparitoTais Tofc Se VTTO^id fjiV r]V fin, dyoi 
 7T/009 /3a<7tXea, oyLto)9 Se eSd/cei eireaOat,. Trpoaai- 
 TOLO-L Se fjbiaOov 6 Se Kvpos VTrior^velrai rjjjiiokiov 
 60 Trdcri Saxreiv ov Trporepov efapov, avrl Sdpei/cov rpia 
 rov /Jirjvbs rcS arpaTKOTrj on Se 7rl 
 ayoi oi>Se evrai/Oa rjKovcrev ovSels ev <ye rc3 
 
 52. etvai : CLKOVCO, like opdw, 
 at<r0dvofjiai, o?5a, takes the sup- 
 plementary pple. more often 
 than the inf. The inf. proba- 
 bly marks the statement more 
 distinctly as an indir. speech, 
 that is, as a matter of mere 
 hearsay. 
 
 53. K5,v : for /cai ^a v, by era- 
 sis, H. 76 and b ; G. 42. 
 
 54. Vf: cf. note on y 39. 
 The condition is of the same 
 sort as in <j>vyr) 55. 
 
 55. TJfwts : again the change 
 to the more lively dir. form. 
 
 57. TOIS 8 viroxl/Cd TJV : = ol 
 
 58 f. TrpocrcuTovo-i jjucrOov : 
 lit. demand pay in addition. 
 We put the idea of irpos- in 
 the form of a modifier of />u- 
 <r6bv, and say, demand higher 
 pay. 
 
 60. ov: for TOVTOV o: gen. 
 after ^/u6\ioj/, which has a com- 
 parative force, a half more. 
 <|>pov : were receiving. 
 
 61. rpCa TJfuSapciKa : we say 
 a daric and a half. 
 
 62 f . cv *y rep cj>avpw : this 
 expression makes it evident 
 that some, probably most, un- 
 derstood pretty well what the 
 real purpose of Cyrus was. 
 
285] SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 315 
 
 USES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE. 
 
 283. All the common uses of the subjunctive and opta- 
 tive have now been illustrated and should at this point be 
 thoroughly reviewed. To assist in this, summaries are here 
 given, with references to the Grammar. The pupil should 
 collect out of the text as many examples of each construc- 
 tion as possible. The uses of these modes can easily be so 
 learned at this point that they will give no serious trouble 
 hereafter. 
 
 284. The Subjunctive. 
 
 1. In Principal Clauses. 
 
 a. Hortative. H. 866, 1; G. 1344. 
 
 b. In prohibitions, in the aorist only. H. 866, 2; G. 
 1346. 
 
 c. Deliberative. H. 866, 3 ; G. 1358. 
 
 2. In Subordinate Clauses. 
 
 a. Denoting pure purpose. H. 881 ; G. 1365. 
 
 b. After expressions of fear. H. 887 ; G. 1378. 
 
 c. In conditions 
 
 (1) of the present general form. H. 894, 1 ; G. 1393, 1. 
 
 (2) of the future more vivid form. H. 898 ; G. 1403. 
 Also in relative clauses implying such conditions. H. 912, 
 
 913 ; G. 1428 ; 1431, 1 ; 1434. 
 
 d. With coos and other words signifying until, and with 
 irpw before, until, when they imply expectation. H. 921, 924 ; 
 G. 1465, 1469. 
 
 285. The Optative. 
 
 1. In Principal Clauses. 
 
 a. In wishes, referring to future time (without av). H. 
 870; G. 1507. 
 
316 THE GREEK OF XENOPHON. [W6 
 
 b. Potential (with Sv). H. 872; G. 1327. 
 
 So in conclusions of less vivid future conditions. H. 900 ; 
 G. 1408. 
 2. In Dependent Clauses. 
 
 a. Denoting pure purpose, after past tenses. H. 881; 
 G. 1365. 
 
 b. After expressions of fear, after past tenses. H. 887 ; 
 G. 1378. 
 
 c. In conditions 
 
 (1) of the past general form. H. 894, 2 ; G. 1393, 2. 
 
 (2) of the future less vivid form. H. 900 ; G. 1408. 
 Also in relative clauses implying such conditions. H. 912, 
 
 913 ; G. 1431, 2 ; 1436. 
 
 d. With cws and other words signifying until, and with 
 Trpw before, until, when they imply expectation, after past 
 tenses. H. 921, 924 ; G. 1465, 1469. 
 
 e. In indirect discourse, after past tenses. H. 932, 2 ; 937 ; 
 G. 1481, 2; 1502. 
 
 Observe that those uses of the optative which involve the 
 principles of indirect quotation (namely, a, b, d, e under 2) 
 are permissive only, not required. The forms of direct 
 speech may be retained after past tenses, and are retained in 
 nearly half the cases. To retain them gives the same effect 
 of liveliness which is produced by the historical present, or 
 by the sudden changes from indirect to direct form in prin- 
 cipal clauses. 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES, INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 
 
 286. All common forms of conditional sentences have 
 been illustrated, except those contrary to reality. With 
 some classes it may be well to postpone the connected review 
 of these sentences until later ; but in any case, as soon as 
 the forms yet lacking occur, the entire subject should be 
 
286] INDIRECT DISCOURSE. 317 
 
 reviewed as presented in H. 889-900, 912-918 ; G. 1381-1420, 
 omitting the paragraphs in the smallest type and the less 
 important paragraphs in type of the second size. 
 
 In the same way should be reviewed the subject of indi- 
 rect discourse as presented in H. 928-937, 946; G. 1475- 
 1503, 1522, 1523. 
 
NOTE. In the Greek-English vocabulary the theme of each verb is given 
 in parenthesis immediately after the first form; next follows the class to 
 which the present belongs, unless it is of the variable-vowel class. Under 
 most compound verbs the theme is given as a compound of the preposition 
 and the simple theme; for the principal parts look under the simple verb. 
 The derivation or composition, when known, is generally indicated in square 
 brackets [ ] just before the translation. This matter is so given that the 
 student can trace the successive steps in word -formation more precisely 
 than in most vocabularies or dictionaries. For example, it is indicated that 
 e7ri/3ovAevo> is a compound of CTTI and /3ovAevo>, that /SovAeuw is formed from 
 povAr?, and ]8ouA^ from 0ov'Ao/uai. Unless care is taken in clear cases to 
 impress upon students the historical order of word-formation, the whole 
 subject of etymology is likely to appear a mass of guess-work, and so be of 
 little use and some positive harm. In cases of doubt of course the matter 
 should not be pressed. Words which occur only in Part I. are treated less 
 fully than the others. The English-Greek vocabulary is complete for the 
 Exercises that precede the beginning of the Anabasis. The additional words 
 needed for the four exercises based on the early sections of the Anabasis are 
 not included, because it is better for the student to accustom himself to rely, 
 for such words, upon the Greek text. 
 
 The following abbreviations are used in the book, with some others that 
 need no explanation. 
 
 act. = active, 
 adj. = adjective, 
 adv. = adverb, 
 antec. = antecedent, 
 aor. = aorist. 
 app. = apposition, 
 art. = article, 
 cf . = confer, compare, 
 cl. = class. 
 
 comp. = comparative, 
 conj. = conjunction, 
 correl. = correlative, 
 decl. = declension, 
 dem. = demonstrative, 
 dep. = deponent, 
 dir. = direct, 
 e.g. = for example. 
 Eng. = English, 
 equiv. = equivalent, 
 f ., ff. = following, 
 fut. = future. 
 i.e. = that is. 
 impers. = impersonal, 
 impf . = imperfect, 
 impv. = imperative, 
 indef . = indefinite, 
 indie. = indicative, 
 indir. = indirect, 
 inf. = infinitive, 
 interr. = interrogative. 
 
 318 
 
 intr. = intransitive. 
 
 Lat. = Latin. 
 
 lit. =* literal, literally. 
 
 mid. = middle. 
 
 neg. = negative. 
 
 obj. = object. 
 
 opt. = optative. 
 
 p., pp. = page, pages. 
 
 pass. = passive. 
 
 pass. s. = passive suffix. 
 
 perf . = perfect. 
 
 pers. = person. 
 
 plup. = pluperfect. 
 
 pple. = participle. 
 
 pred. = predicate. 
 
 prep. = preposition. 
 
 pres. = present. 
 
 priv. = privative. 
 
 pron. = pronoun. 
 
 red. = reduplication. 
 
 rel. = relative. 
 
 subj. = subject. 
 
 subjv. = subjunctive. 
 
 subst. = substantive. 
 
 sup. = superlative. 
 
 syst. = system. 
 
 trans. = transitive. 
 
 t. s. = tense suffix. 
 
 var. vow. = variable vowel. 
 
 vocab. = vocabulary. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 A. 
 
 s, -a (H. 149; G. 
 
 188, 3, end), 6, Abroko- 
 
 mas. 
 
 "ApvSos, -ov, -f), Abydos. 
 d-yaOos, -(], -6*v, good. Comp. 
 
 d|i(va)v, pcXrtwv. KpeiTTcov, 
 
 sup. apurros, P^XTWTTOS, Kpd- 
 
 TKTTOS. 
 
 d-yajxat (d-ya-, root cl. , H. 404 ; 
 
 G. 619), Tfydo-Oiiv, admire. 
 ayy&Xca (dyy\-, i-cl., H. 399 ; 
 
 G. 593), d^\w, ti 
 
 0i]v, announce, report. 
 d-yy\os, -ov, 6, messenger. 
 d*yopa, -as, T|, [d-yeCpw assem- 
 
 ble^assembly ; market-place, 
 
 market. 
 d^opdt(dYopa8-, i-cl., H. 398 ; 
 
 G. 584, 585, 587), 
 
 buy. (Cf. our verb mar- 
 ket.) 
 
 a-ypios, -a, -ov, [<rypos field, 
 country'], wild. 
 
 aY (d-Y-), a{w, rj-ya-yov (H. 
 
 436; G. 535), fa*, TO"", 
 
 TJxBtjv, drive, lead. 
 d-ywy6s, -ov, 6, [<vy], leader, 
 
 d-ywv, d-ywvos, 6, [<rya>], con- 
 test. 
 
 d-yci)v^o|iai, [d-ywv], struggle, 
 engage in a contest. 
 
 d8\<|>6s, -ov, 6, brother. 
 
 dSiKo> (dSiK-), dSiKTjo-co, etc., 
 [dSiKos], injure, wrong. 
 
 aSiKos, -ov, [a priv., 8CKT]], un- 
 just, wrong. 
 
 drip, apos, 6, air. 
 
 *A9f]vai, -v, at, Athens. 
 
 'AO-qvatos, -a, -ov, [*A6f}vai], 
 Athenian. 
 
 d9\T]TT|s, -ov, 6, athlete. 
 
 a6\ov, -ov, TO, prize. 
 
 , -ov, 6, athletic game. 
 w (dBpotS-, i-cl., H. 396, 
 398 ; G. 579, 584, 585, 587), 
 d0pot<ra>, TjOpoura, TJGpoiKa, 
 T]0pour|Aai, T|0poCo-0i]v, [d0po- 
 os together'], assemble, mus- 
 ter, (trans.) ; dir. mid. as- 
 semble (intr.). 
 
 319 
 
320 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 Alvidves. -v, ol, Ainidnes or 
 
 Aenianians,m southwestern 
 
 Thessaly. 
 alpTos, -i\, -6v, verbal of alpe'w ; 
 
 ol alperoi, the men chosen, 
 
 the committee. 
 alpa> (alpe-, 4X-), alpt]o-a>, 
 
 lXov, (8X, etc., H. 359, a ; 
 
 G. 537 and 2), TJ'pTjica, TJ'pt]- 
 
 }iai,.T)p0'qv, seize, ta&e; in- 
 
 dir. mid., choose, elect. 
 alo-0dvojiai (ato-9-, alcrO-r]-, nas. 
 
 cl., H. 402, 6; G. 603,605), 
 
 alo-0Ticrop.au flcr06|AT)v, TJ'ar0T]- 
 
 pai, perceive. 
 alo~xvva> (alo~xw-, i-cl., H. 400 ; 
 
 G. 596), alo~xwa>, rjfo'xvva, 
 
 tjorxvv0T]v, [cf. a,icr\vvr\ 
 
 shame"], put to shame; dir. 
 
 mid., be ashamed. 
 
 (alT-), alr^cra), TJ'TT]<ra, 
 a, fJTT]|xai, TJT^)0T]v, asA: 
 
 /or, demand, entreat. 
 lTtdojiai (alria-) , airiouro- 
 
 fi,ai, etc., [alrCd cause], give 
 
 as the cause, accuse, blame. 
 KivaKT]s, -ov, 6, [Persian 
 
 word], short sword. 
 T|. -fjs, TJ, summit, prime. 
 (aKov-), dKovcrojxai, 
 
 tjKovo-a, dK^JKoa (H. 368, 44 ; 
 
 G. 529), tjicou<r|xai, ^KovcrO-qv, 
 
 hear. 
 aicpoiroXis, -a>s, T|, [aKpos, iro- 
 
 Xis], acropolis. 
 aKpos, -a, -ov, at the point or 
 
 end (H. 671 ; G. 978) ; r6 
 
 aKpov, the top or end; rd 
 
 ctKpa, ^e heights. 
 OLKCOV, (XKovo-a, aKov, [a priy., 
 
 IKCOV], unwilling. 
 aX-yos, -cos, r6, pain. 
 
 XcK-), dX'go|j,ai, 
 , toarc? o^", defend 
 
 one's self against. 
 dXXd, [dXXos], but, more 
 
 strongly adversative than Be*. 
 dXXdTTo (dXXa^-, i-cl., H. 397 ; 
 
 G. 584, 588), dXXd, tjXXaa, 
 
 or qXXdxO'nv, exchange. 
 dXXtjXw, -a, -w, only du. and 
 
 pi., oblique cases, [dXXos], 
 
 each other. 
 dXXos, -T], -o, other ; after the 
 
 art. often the remaining, the 
 
 rest of. 
 
 &(ia, adv., at the same time. 
 ajiaja, -TJS, TJ, [&jia, a-ya>], 
 
 wagon. 
 djiaJiTos, -6v, [Afiaja, cljjii], 
 
 traversed by wagons; 686s 
 
 - , wagon-road. 
 
 e'w (djJicXe-), djxeXf^o-ft), etc., 
 
 [djxeX^s], neglect, be care- 
 
 less. 
 fxcX^s, -^s, [a priv., plXci ^ is 
 
 a cre], careless, neglectful. 
 
 Xav^j], without device, im- 
 practicable. 
 dpireXos, -ov, TJ, vine, 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 321 
 
 dfx<j>, prep. w. ace., about, in 
 
 connection with. 
 d(jLc()6Tpos, -d, -ov, both. 
 av, post-pos. adv., cannot 
 
 be translated by itself. 
 
 Its uses are described 
 
 in H. 857-862; G. 1299- 
 
 1316. 
 dvapaivo) (dva+pav-, pa-), go 
 
 up, go inland. 
 
 ascent, journey inland. 
 dva-yi'yvtto-Kft) (dva+Yvo-), read. 
 dvd-yKi], -TJS, fj, necessity ; with 
 
 IcrrC expressed or under- 
 
 stood, it is necessary. 
 dva-yvovs, see dvcrja^vwo-KW. 
 dvdXvo-is- -a>s, T) [dvaXvw], 
 
 undoing, analysis. 
 dvaXvw, unloose, take apart, 
 
 analyze. 
 dvapirda> (dva+dpiraS-), snatch 
 
 up, carry off as booty. 
 dvSpdiroSov, -ov, TO. [dvr)p, 
 
 -iro8ov being perhaps a de- 
 
 rivative ending], slave. 
 avev, improper prep. w. gen., 
 
 without. 
 dvt)p, dv8p6s, 6, man as dis- 
 
 tinguished from woman, dif- 
 
 fering from dvOptouos as 
 
 Lat. vir from homo. 
 dv0os, -os, TO, flower. 
 avOpuiros, -ov, 6, man, human 
 
 being, Lat. homo. 
 dvidw (d via-) , dvtcurw. Tjvtdcra. 
 
 T|viaBt]v, [dvtd grief '] , grieve, 
 distress. 
 
 dvo-n]|jii (dva + o-ra-), raise 
 up, cause to stand up j dir. 
 mid. and jii-aor., arise. 
 
 -ov, 6, [dvri, 
 , antagonist. 
 
 dvrC, prep. w. gen., instead of; 
 in comp. the older mean- 
 ing against, in opposition, is 
 often retained. 
 
 dvTiirapcurKvda> (dvrt + irapa- 
 o-Kva8-) , prepare in turn or 
 in opposition. 
 
 avTiir^pas [dvrC, tr^pds on the 
 other side], adv. w. gen., over 
 against. 
 
 avrCo-Tao-is, -a>s, TJ, [dvrC, o-rd- 
 <r is party, from UTTTIJU], op- 
 posing party. 
 
 dvTio-TCuruoTT]s, -ov, 6, [dv- 
 rCo-Tao-is], political oppo- 
 nent, member of the oppos- 
 ing party. 
 
 avTpov, -ov, r6, cave. 
 
 av, adv. [dvd], upward, 
 above; inland. 
 
 d^ios, -d, -ov, worthy. 
 
 d|idw (agio-), djiwo-w, etc., 
 [djios], deem worthy, think 
 Jit, claim as proper, re- 
 quest. 
 
 diraY'Y^XXw (diro + d-yycX-), 
 bring back word, report. 
 
 aird-yco (diro + d-y-) , lead away 
 or back. 
 
322 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 dirairla) (diro + alre-) , ask as 
 
 due, demand. 
 dirapdo-Kvos, -ov [apriv.,irapa- 
 
 o-Kv^j], unprepared. 
 aim}!!. (diro + t-, see tju), go 
 
 away. 
 dirlpxoficu (d-rro + 4p\-, X0-, 
 
 4Xv0-), dirijXOov, 
 
 go or come away. 
 
 <TX-, o-X'n-)? hold off* oe dis- 
 
 tant. 
 
 dirf)X0ov, see dirlpxo|iai. 
 dir6, prep. w. gen., from, away 
 
 from. In comp. off, away ; 
 
 often indicates that some- 
 
 thing is due (see 
 
 diroSeticvvfu (diro + SeiK-) , ap- 
 
 point. 
 diroSSco|ii (diro + 80-), give 
 
 what is due, hence pay. 
 <vrroKptvo|Acu (diro + Kpiv-, Kpi-), 
 
 diroKpivov|xai, dTTKplvd|JH]v, 
 
 diroKCKpifjiai, reply. 
 
 CLTTOKTeiVCO (dlTO + KTV-, KTOV-), 
 
 kill, put to death, execute. 
 
 aTroXajipavw (diro + Xa^-, 
 
 XT^P-), take back, receive 
 back. 
 
 diroXXvju (diro + 6X-, oXe-, nas. 
 cl., H. 402, e; G. 608; SX- 
 Xii|u is prob. for oXvvju), 
 diroXu, onrwXecra. dira>X6fi,T]v, 
 diroXtoXcKa, onroXwXa, in the 
 act. pres., fut., 1st aor., 1st 
 
 perf., lose, destroy; in the 
 mid. pres., fut., 2d aor., 
 and in the 2d perf. act., be 
 lost or destroyed, perish. 
 
 'Airo'XXwv, -coves, 6, Apollo, 
 son of Zeus and Leto, god 
 of the sun, of health, of div- 
 ination, of music and poetry. 
 
 diroirfi,irci) (<xiro+ir|jnr-, iro|i<)>-), 
 send away, send back; in- 
 dir. mid., send from one's 
 self, dismiss, let go. 
 
 ciiroirX&o (diro + irXv-, 
 sail away. 
 
 diropeo) (diropc-), 
 
 etc. , [airopos] , be perplexed. 
 
 diropCd, -as, T|, [diropos], diffi- 
 culty, perplexity. 
 
 diropos, -ov [a priv., iro'pos], 
 without resource, hence per- 
 plexed. 
 
 diroo-T^XXw (diro + o~TX-, 
 
 o-raX-), send away. 
 
 diroVroXos, -ov, 6, [diroo-rcX- 
 Xw], envoy, ambassador. 
 
 diroxwpcw (diro + X W P ~) -> with- 
 draw, retreat. 
 
 dpi0|ila> [dpi0jxo's], count. 
 
 dpi0|j,o'$, -ov, 6, number, enum- 
 eration. 
 
 'ApCo-Tiiriros, -ov, 6, [dpiorros, 
 iiriros], Aristippos. 
 
 apio-ros, -T], -ov, sup. of d-ya- 
 0os. 
 
 'ApKas, -a8os, 6, Arcadian. 
 
 ctpjia, -aros, TO', chariot. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 323 
 
 -T]S, TJ, [apjia, 
 afj.a|a], covered carriage. 
 
 dpTrda> (dp-iraS-, i-cl., H. 398 ; 
 G. 584, 585, 586), dpird<ra>, 
 TJpiracra, TjpTraica, {Jpirao-^xai, 
 Tjp-Trdo-B^v, seize, plunder. 
 
 'ApTa|pfr]s, -ov, o, Artaxerxes. 
 
 dpxaios, -a, -ov [dpx^|], an- 
 cient; TO dpxatov, of old, 
 formerly. 
 
 <*PX^ -to *\> [&PX]> ^gin- 
 ning ; government ; province. 
 
 hence begin, and rwZe. 
 pxov, pple. of dpx as subst., 
 
 commander. 
 cr6vto (do-0V-), do-Oevrjo-o), 
 
 etc. [do-06v^s], be weak or 
 
 -& [a priv., 
 
 strength], weak. 
 'Acrid, -as, T|, Asia. 
 *Acrirv8ios, -a, -ov, ["Acrircv- 
 
 8os city in Pamphylia], As- 
 
 pendian. 
 
 do-irts, -C8os, TJ, shield. 
 do-Tpov, -ov, TO', star. 
 do-<|)a\crTaTa, sup. of a<r<|>a\(os. 
 do-c))a\T|s, -^s, [a priv., o-<t>d\\w 
 
 make fall~], safe, secure. 
 acr<|>aXws [do-<|>aX^s], safely; 
 
 comp. do-<j>a\crTpov, sup. 
 
 dcr<|>a\crTaTa. 
 dTljxdtw (dTljxaS-, i-cl., H. 
 
 398; G. 584, 585, 587), 
 
 (XTiji,dcra>, T)Tt(j.acra. T| 
 
 TjTtfJLaCT|JiaL. T|TlJJ,d 
 
 JJLOS], disgrace, dishonor. 
 
 aTijios, -ov [a priv., Tijt^j], 
 without honor, unhonored. 
 
 av, postpos. adv., again, in 
 turn. 
 
 avXo's, -ov, 6, pipe. 
 
 avTOfxaTOS- -T], -ov, [ttVTo's, root 
 (ia- will], self-acting; diro 
 (or CK) TOV avTojidTov, volun- 
 tarily, of one's own accord. 
 
 avTo's, -^, -o', self, myself, him- 
 self, etc. (l)Lat.ipse. This 
 is always the meaning of the 
 word when in the pred. posi- 
 tion with a substantive, and 
 when standing alone in the 
 nom. (2) When preceded 
 by the article, Lat. idem. 
 (3) Standing alone in any 
 case but the nom. it serves 
 as the personal pron. of the 
 3d pers., him, her, it, etc. 
 
 avTov, adv., here. 
 
 avTov, -fjs, contracted from 
 cavrov, etc. 
 
 d,4>cup'co (euro + alpc-, 4X-), take 
 away from, deprive, often in 
 indir. mid. 
 
 d<f>tT]|xi (diro + 4-), send away, 
 let go. 
 
 doJuKVO|icu (airo + iK-, nas. cl., 
 H. 402, d; G. 607), do>Co- 
 fiat. d<{)lKO}j.T|v, d<))iYH.at, ar- 
 rive, come. 
 
324 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 (diro + <rra-) , diro- 
 
 d<j>o-ri]Ka, dirco-TdOTjv, set 
 off, cause to revolt; dir. 
 mid., ju-aor., and perf. act., 
 revolt. 
 
 o's, -a, -o'v, Achaian. 
 
 (d X 0-, d X 0-), d X 0- 
 i, Tj X 0a-0T]v, [cf. TO a X - 
 0os burden], be burdened, 
 troubled. 
 
 paCva> (Pav-, Pa-, i-cl., H. 
 400; G. 594, 610), p^jo-o- 
 ficu, 'p-.]v. pep^Ka. -P^pajxai 
 in comp., -4pd0T)v in comp., 
 go. 
 
 pdXXco (paX-, pXrj-, t-cl., H. 
 399; G. 593), paXw, e'pa- 
 Xov, p^pXtjKa, p^pXT]|xai,4pXTJ- 
 0i]v, throw, throw at. 
 
 pappapiKo's. -V|, -o'v, [pdppa- 
 pos], connected with foreign- 
 ers j TO pappapiKo'v, foreign 
 or Persian force. 
 
 Pdppapos, -ov, 6, foreigner, 
 barbarian. 
 
 pdpos, -cos, TO', weight. 
 
 pcuriXetd, -ds, r\, [pao-iXevo>], 
 act of ruling, royal power, 
 kingdom, throne. 
 
 pcurCXcios, -d, -ov, [ {3curi\vs] ? 
 l) kingly ; subst. in the 
 
 neut. pi., fortified palace, 
 
 castle. 
 
 pcuriXcvs, -^ws, 6, king. 
 pacriAevw (paonXeij- ), pacru- 
 
 Xcvo'w, etc., [pao-iXevs], be 
 
 king, reign. 
 PC'XTIO-TOS, -TJ, -ov, sup. of crya- 
 
 0o's. 
 ptdtofiat (Pia8-, i-cl., H. 398 ; 
 
 G. 587), pido-oncu, 
 
 |JLT]V, ppCao-|j.ai, 
 
 [pid/orce], compel, force. 
 pipXCov, -ov, TO', book. 
 pipXioircoXTjs, -ov, 6, 
 
 ira)X(o], bookseller. 
 POS, -ov, 6, life. 
 , -as, 
 
 succor. 
 
 , etc., 
 
 [poT)0o's helper], help, suc- 
 
 cor. 
 
 BOUOTIOS, -a, -ov, Boeotian. 
 BOIWTO'S, -ov, 6, Boeotian. 
 popas, -ov, 6, north-wind. 
 poTavt], -TJS, TJ, grass, herb. 
 povXevco (povXev-), povXevo*a), 
 
 etc., [povX-tfj], plan; indir. 
 
 mid., plan for or with one's 
 
 self, deliberate, consider. 
 povX^j, -fis, T), [povXojxai], will, 
 
 wish ; commonly plan, coun- 
 
 sel; also council. 
 povXofxcu (povX-, povXt)-), POV- 
 
 X^o-O)iai, pcpovXt^fxai, epov- 
 
 , wish, desire. 
 O'S, -ov, 6, altar. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 325 
 
 r. 
 
 s, -ov, 6, marriage. 
 yap, postpos. conj., for. 
 yc, enclitic particle, emphasiz- 
 ing the preceding word by 
 restriction, at least; often 
 not to be rendered by a sep- 
 arate word. 
 
 s, -WTOS, 6, laughter. 
 d, -as, f|, [/yfyvojiat,], fam- 
 
 yV<ris, -s, T|, 
 
 birth, origin, genesis. 
 
 y*vos, -cos, TO, [-yC-yvojxai], race. 
 
 ye<j>vpa, -as, TJ, bridge. 
 
 YH> "VHS, T|, earth, land. 
 
 'ytyvoncu (?v-, <yvr|-, -yov-), 
 yvf}cro|j.ai, ryevofujv, -yfyova, 
 ye-ye'vTjuai, become, be born, 
 (of events) take place. 
 
 yi-yvwa'Ktt ("yvo-, incep. cl., H. 
 403; G. 613), <yv(&<ronai, 2^- 
 vwv, -yvcuKa. c-yvoxr^Jtai, -yv<o- 
 o-0T]v,come ^o know, perceive, 
 become aware, recognize, 
 come to hold an opinion; 
 the aor. and perf. may 
 sometimes be rendered 
 know, but the ordinary 
 words for know are ot8a and 
 
 y\v<|>a>, carve. 
 
 yXwcnra or yXw-rra, -t^s, TJ, 
 tongue, language. 
 -TJS, T|, 
 
 judgment, thought, mind, 
 consent ; also proverb. 
 pdjxpia, -aros, TO, [Ypd<|>Ci>], 
 writing, letter (of the alpha- 
 bet). 
 
 w (-yvp-vaS-, i-cl., H. 
 398; G. 584, 585, 587), 
 yv|i,vdo-cD, <yv|j,vao-a, 
 vaKa, < y < yvfi.vao-|xai, 
 o-6r|v, [-yvjivo's], exercise. 
 yvfjivdo-iov, -ov, TO', 
 gymnasium. 
 
 ^V|lVf^S, -f|TOS, 6, 
 
 light-armed soldier. 
 yvjxvo's, -f^, -o'v, naked, bare. 
 ywf}, -ywaiKo's, TJ, woman, 
 
 wife. 
 ywvCd, -as, TJ, corner, angle. 
 
 A. 
 
 SaCpcov, -ovos, 6, divinity, spirit. 
 SaKpva> (SaKpv-), SaKpvo-a>, 
 
 ISaKpvo-a, ScSaKpvKa, weep. 
 Sairavdo) (Sairava-), Sairavtfj- 
 
 o-w, etc., [8airdvT| expense], 
 
 expend. 
 SapeiKo's, -ov, 6, [Aapctos], 
 
 daric, a Persian gold coin, 
 
 worth $5.40 in our gold. 
 Aapctos, -ov, 6, Dareios or Da- 
 
 rius. 
 Sao-|xo's, -ov, 6, tribute. 
 
326 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 &, postpos. conj., indicating 
 a slight contrast with some- 
 thing preceding ; but, and, 
 often correl. with JJL^V. 
 
 ScSuos, pple. of 2d perf. S&ta 
 (H. 490, 5; G. 804 SeCSw), 
 fearing. 
 
 ScCicvv|u (8iK-, nas. cl., H. 402, 
 e; G. 608), S Ca>, 
 
 point out, show. 
 8*ica, indecl., ten. 
 ScKas, -dSos, fj, company of 
 
 ten, decad. 
 AeX4>ou -tov, ol, Delphi. 
 SlvSpov, -ov, TO, tree. 
 Scfjio's, -d, -ov, right (opp. to 
 
 left). 
 S&v, SC'OVTOS, TO', neut. pple. 
 
 of Set, fta which is need- 
 
 ful: ls TO S&v satisfac- 
 
 torily. 
 
 -TOS, TO', [84pw], 
 
 -, Sap-), 
 
 , 48dpT|v, flay. 
 S, -ov, 6, master. 
 8vpo, adv., hither. 
 8&i> (Se-, Set]-), 
 
 SeSe'TjKo,, lack, want; impers., 
 Set, 8eT)creu ISc^tre. SeSe'i^Ke. 
 i/iere ^s nee^ o/, ^ is neces- 
 sary, must, ought, Lat. 
 est ; mid., Seo fj.au 
 
 -fj, postpos. particle. Its mean- 
 ings are very elusive ; they 
 may be grouped under two 
 heads, which cannot always 
 be clearly distinguished. 
 (1) Its force falls on a sin- 
 gle word or. phrase, marking 
 the idea as being immedi- 
 ately present to the mind, 
 giving greater definiteness 
 or positiveness. The word 
 thus made prominent is the 
 one immediately preceding 
 8-fj (yet another particle, as 
 jx^v, may intervene). The 
 effect can sometimes be ren- 
 dered in English by the tone 
 of the voice only, sometimes 
 indeed, clearly, may be used. 
 TO'TC 8ij, then indeed. Some- 
 times it has an ironical force, 
 of course ! (2) It belongs to 
 the entire clause. It then 
 stands near the beginning,, 
 and often marks the state- 
 ment as obvious, or to be 
 expected under the known 
 circumstances. This effect 
 may be given by of course, 
 plainly, obviously. When 
 inferential, like ovv, it may 
 be rendered accordingly, un- 
 emphatic now or so. jiev Srj 
 is a frequent combination; 
 each particle usually has its 
 full separate force. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 327 
 
 SfjXos, -tj, -ov, plain, evident. 
 
 STjpoicpaTid, -as, TJ, [S-qptos, 
 KpaTw]. democracy. 
 
 Sfifjios, -ov, 6, people ; often the 
 democratic party as opposed 
 to the oligarchical faction. 
 
 8id, prep., (1) w. gen., through ; 
 (2) w. ace., on account of, 
 because of; Sid iroXXd for 
 many reasons. 
 
 Siapai vw (Sia + |3av-, pa-) , go 
 through, cross. 
 
 8iapdXXa> (6ia - (3aX-. pXt]-), 
 attack the character of, slan- 
 der, accuse falsely. 
 
 Sid-yco (8ia+d-y-) , lead through ; 
 pass one's time, and so con- 
 tinue. Xe-ywv 8if)-yc, contin- 
 ued to speak, kept speaking. 
 
 Siaipew, divide. 
 
 Siaira, -TJS, TJ, mode of life. 
 
 810x60-101, -ai, -a, two hundred. 
 
 SiaX^yopai, converse. 
 
 Siapirda> (8ia + dpira8-) , plun- 
 der, sack. 
 
 8iaT(0Tjju (8ia + 0-, root cl., 
 H. 404; G. 619), 8ia0rfj<r, 
 8ie'9r|Ka. 8iar46T]Ka or 8iar- 
 
 0LKa. 8iaT0lp,ai, 8lT0t]V 
 
 (for 8t00Ti v) , dispose, bring 
 into a certain disposition, 
 treat. 
 
 Si8duric<i>, teach. 
 
 88|u (80-, root cl., H. 404; 
 G. 619), ScGa-w, '8a)Ka, Se'Sw- 
 Ka, SeSojxai, 4860T)v, give. 
 
 s, -a, -ov, [8iKt]], just, 
 right. 
 
 j, -TJS, T|, decision of a judge; 
 sentence, penalty ; right, jus- 
 tice. 
 
 816 (for Sid 8), on account 
 of which, wherefore, there- 
 fore. 
 
 8Cs, twice. 
 
 SurxtXioi, -at. -a, (S($, \tXioi), 
 two thousand. 
 
 867^, -aros, r6, opinion. 
 
 8oK' w (8oK-, SOK-), 86$a>,^So$a, 
 Se'So-yjiaL, 4S6\0T]v, think, 
 seem; 3d sing, impers., 
 seems, seems best ; of a pro- 
 posal in an assembly, be 
 adopted, pass. 
 
 AoXoircs, -wv, ol, Dolopes, tribe 
 on the southwest borders of 
 Thessaly. 
 
 8oa, -TJS, T|, opinion. 
 
 SoOXos. -ov, 6, slave. 
 
 8ovX6a> (SovXo-), 8ovXw(rw,etc., 
 [8ovXos], enslave. 
 
 Spdfia. -TOS, r6, deed ; drama. 
 
 Spdco, do, accomplish. 
 
 Spo^os, -ov, 6, [Spajxciv run], 
 running, race. 
 
 Svvajxat (Svva-, root cl., H. 
 404; G. 619), 8vv^<ro|jLai, 
 SeSvvtifjiai, ISw^O-qv, can, be 
 able ; of words, signify. 
 
 Svvafus, -o>s, T|, [Svvafxai], 
 force, power; also signifi- 
 cance, meaning. 
 
328 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 Svvdo-Ttjs, -ov, 6, powerful 
 
 man, nobleman. 
 8 wards. -TJ, -6v, [Svvajxai], 
 
 able ; of things, possible. 
 8vo, SVCHV. two. 
 Siiw (8v-, 8x>-), Sticrco, 8vo~a, 
 
 cSvv, Sc'Svica. ScSvfiai, cSvO^v, 
 
 cause to sink, also enter; 
 
 dir. mid., with jii-aor. and 
 
 perf. act., sink, intrans. 
 8<68Ka, indecl., [8vo, Se'ica], 
 
 twelve. 
 Swpov, -ov, TO, [SiStoju], gift. 
 
 E. 
 
 lav, [cl, av], if, with the subjv. 
 
 Also written av and fjv. 
 cavrov, -f]s, -ov, [stem !-, av- 
 r6s], reflex, pron., one" 1 s self, 
 himself, herself, itself. Also 
 written avrov, etc. 
 s, -dSos, TJ, wee^. 
 , -ij, -ov, seventh. 
 
 S, -OV, [V, K\Va>], 
 
 bidden, incited. 
 (0, CJJLOV, or jjiov, /. 
 
 e will- 
 
 ing, in Attic prose almost 
 always implying less distinct 
 choice and desire than 0ov- 
 Xopai wish. (In poetry this 
 difference is not made. ) 
 cl, proclit. conj., if; sometimes 
 whether, 
 
 ctSlvai, l8f]T, see otSa. 
 
 t8ov. see 6pda>. 
 
 ctSos, -cos, TO', shape, figure. 
 
 \Ir](rav, see elfiC. 
 
 \IKOCTI, indecl., twenty. 
 
 lK<&v, -ovos, T|, image, statue. 
 
 elfxC (!>., root cl.,H. 404, 478; 
 
 G. 619, 806), carofiai, am, be. 
 t|ii (1-, root cl., H. 477; G. 
 
 808, 1-3), go, often future 
 
 in meaning. 
 etvai, see eljjit. 
 
 ellTOV, See <|>T]|At. 
 
 tpT]Ka, LpT]|jiai, see 4>-q(Ai. 
 els, proclitic prep. w. ace., into, 
 
 in with verbs of motion ; 
 
 for (denoting purpose) , with 
 
 reference to, bearing upon; 
 
 with numbers, about. 
 els, pta, ev, one. 
 io-pd\Xw (els+paX-, PXt)-), 
 
 ^roio m^o; 7?iaA;e entrance 
 
 into, enter. 
 tcrpoX^, -fjs, ^, [lo-pdXXa>], 
 
 pass into a region, entrance. 
 cto-eXavvo) (els + cXa-), n'^e or 
 
 march into. 
 
 (els + i*px-, IX0-, 
 
 to-C(v), (they) are; see el^C. 
 
 or o-w, adv. w. gen., 
 [els], within, inside. 
 
 adv., afterwards, then, 
 secondly. 
 CK, see 4. 
 f KacrTos, -1], -ov, 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 329 
 
 Ifcaro'v, indecl., one hundred. 
 
 icpdXXa> (cJ + paX-, pXrj-), cast 
 out, expel, banish. 
 
 K&pa> (K + 8 P -, Sap-), flay, 
 skin. 
 
 Ki, adv., yonder, there. 
 
 Kivos, -TJ, -o, dem. pron., 
 [Ki], he (the more re- 
 mote), Lat. ille. 
 
 iKKoXlw (Ifj + KaXc-, K\T]-), call 
 out. 
 
 KKaXvTTTO> (4J; + KttXvp-), UU- 
 
 cover. 
 
 KK\T]<rCd, -as, f|, [eKKtxXcw], 
 assembly. 
 
 CKXeCirco (IJ+Xiir-, XCIIT-, XOIIT-), 
 leave by going out, aban- 
 don. 
 
 CK-irtlTTtt (4 + 1TT-, irCT-, IPTO)-), 
 
 fall out, be banished, used 
 as pass, of icf3aXXa>. 
 
 "EKTO>P, -opos, 6, Hektor or 
 Hector. 
 
 4K<t>v?a> (^ + 4>v^-, <t>v Y -). es- 
 cape. 
 
 IKWV, -ovora, -6v, decl. like an 
 aor. pple., willing, volun- 
 tarily. 
 
 IXavvco (4Xa-, nas. cl. , H. 402, e ; 
 G. 603, 612), 4X, (H. 424; 
 G. 665, 1 and 2), -fjXao-a, 
 IX^Xaica, cX^Xapai, TjXa0T]v, 
 drive. (IXavvco is prob. for 
 cXa-w-w.) 
 
 IX&rOai, see alp^w. 
 
 s, -a, -ov, free. 
 
 , see epxofJtaL. 
 'EXXds, -d8os, TI, Greece, Hellas. 
 "EXXrjv, -os, 6, Greek, Hellene. 
 'EXXTjviico's, -^j, -ov, ["EXXr]v], 
 
 Grecian, Greek; TO 'EXXi]- 
 
 VIKO'V, Greek force. 
 'EXX-qo-irovTiaKo's, -i\, -o'v, ['EX- 
 
 X^O-ITOVTOS], Hellespontic, 
 
 on the Hellespont. 
 c EXX^orirovTOs, -ov, 6, ["EXXtj, 
 
 ITOVTOS sea], Hellespont, or 
 
 sea of Helle, who was said 
 
 to have been drowned there ; 
 
 now the Dardanelles. 
 iXirCs, C8os, -TJ, hope. 
 |iavTov, [4jx^, avrds], reflex. 
 
 pron., not used in nom., of 
 
 myself. 
 npava> (4v+pav-, fa-), go on 
 
 board, embark. 
 IfipdXXca (4v+paX-, pXt]-), 
 
 throw in; of rivers, empty 
 
 into. 
 
 4v, proclitic prep. w. dat. , in. 
 v6a, adv., [4v], dem., there; 
 
 rel., where. 
 voiK&> (4v + olK-), dwell in ; oi 
 
 CVOIKOVVTCS, the inhabitants. 
 Ivopdco (4v + opa-), see in some- 
 thing, see therein. 
 cvraOOa, adv., [4v], there, here; 
 
 thereupon, then. 
 VT6v9v, adv., [4v], thence. 
 Ivrvyxdvo) (4v + TV\-, TVX.T]-, 
 
 TV\-), chance upon, fall in 
 
 with, meet, 
 
330 
 
 GBEEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 4J, before consonants IK, pro- 
 clitic prep. w. gen., out of, 
 from. 
 
 !, indecl., six. 
 
 4aiT (Jj + atT-), ask from ; 
 indir. mid., beg out, ob- 
 tain the release of by en- 
 treaty. 
 
 4$\avva> (cfj + IXa-), drive out, 
 drive forth; intrans. (IV- 
 irov omitted), march forth, 
 march. 
 
 IgeXOiiv, see 
 
 come out. 
 IjjcTcuris, -s, T), [e-Ta scru- 
 
 tinize, inspect}, inspection, 
 
 review. 
 <[Ja>, outside. 
 errayy4XX.a> (liri + dyycX-) , pro- 
 
 claim; subjective mid., an- 
 
 nounce from one's self, offer, 
 
 promise. 
 
 eiraOov, see < rrdo*x<>. 
 ircuvco (lirt + alvc-), 
 
 croficu, eTrrfvco-a, 
 
 [alve'co is from at vos praise}, 
 
 praise, commend, applaud. 
 4-ireC, conj., temporal, when, 
 
 after ; causal, since. 
 TTiSTj [eireC, 8^], conj., when, 
 
 after. 
 iri|u (lirt + ccr-, see l|iC), be 
 
 upon or over. 
 Iimpi (irt + l-, see etju), ad- 
 
 vance, attach 
 
 TTira, adv., [4irC, clra], there- 
 upon, next, secondly. 
 
 4ir, prep., on, upon. (1) W. 
 gen., on, upon. (2) W. dat., 
 on, upon ; in dependence on, 
 in the power of, for. (3) W. 
 ace., to, towards, against. 
 In comj)., upon, against, in 
 addition; eirl Terrapwv, by 
 fours, four deep. 
 
 plot, or scheme against. 
 
 plot, design against one. 
 lm8e(Kvv|u (liri+.SciK-), show 
 
 to, exhibit, display; point 
 
 out. 
 4iriK(v8vvos, -ov, [eirt, KivSv- 
 
 vos] , dangerous. Comp. 4-irt- 
 
 Klv8vVOTpOS, SUp. CTTlKlvSli- 
 VOTttTOS. 
 
 4-iriKpvirTa) (iiri + Kpv<|>-) , cover 
 
 over, conceal. 
 7ri|ieX0|Jiai (eiri + jxcXe-) , lirijic- 
 
 irifX)JLXT])Xai, 1T- 
 
 , take care of, attend 
 
 to, give attention to. 
 cirCirovos, -ov, [en-C, irovos], 
 
 laborious, toilsome. Comp. 
 
 irnrovc&Tpos, sup. liriirovw- 
 
 TCITOS. 
 cirCppvros, -ov, [verbal of irip- 
 
 pw flow upon], well wat- 
 
 ered. 
 lirCo-Koiros, -ov, 6, overseer, 
 
 guardian. 
 
GREEK-EN GL1SS VOCABULARY. 
 
 331 
 
 lirCorrafxai (lirurra-), errurnr]- 
 crojxaL, TjirwrTTJOTjv, know, un- 
 derstand. 
 
 emo-ToXTJ, -f]s, TJ, letter, epistle. 
 
 ImT^jSeios, -a, -ov, suitable, fit j 
 TO, &nvrtfjScia, supplies, provi- 
 
 eiriT0T]ju (eiri + 0-), put upon ; 
 StKTjv iriTi0ii)u, inflict pun- 
 ishment on. 
 
 iriTpira> (4-iri + rpcir-, rpo<|>-, 
 Tpair-), turn over to, give 
 up to. 
 
 irtxp&> (4iri + xp-)) ad- 
 vance. 
 
 )ir-, ir-), \|/o|iai, 
 (for <r()'irojit]v, 
 rough breathing irregularly 
 taken from pres. ; synopsis, 
 orircofxai, <riroCjiT]v, o-irov, o-ir^- 
 o-0ai, criro|Xvos) , follow. 
 
 irra, indecl., seven. 
 
 'Eirvaja, -TJS, TJ, Epyaxa. 
 
 ep'yov, -ov, TO, work. 
 
 pTj[ios, -tj, -ov, lonely, solitary, 
 bereft. 
 
 IpCItt (4pt8-, i-cl., H. 398; G. 
 584, 585), tjpura, [pis, -1805, 
 strife"] i contend. 
 
 pjJLT]VVS, -^0>S, 6, ['EpH-fjS 
 
 Hermes, messenger of Zeus] , 
 
 interpreter. 
 Ipvjxvo's, -i\, -o'v, fortified, 
 
 strong. 
 <fp X on<u (4 PX -, 4X6-, 4\v6-, H. 
 
 539, 2 and a ; G. 621), ^ 
 
 4\T|Xv0a, come, go. The fut. 
 is supplied generally by 
 
 t|JLt. 
 
 pw, see 4>iuiC. 
 
 epcordw (Ipcora-, cp-), pcoTT|(ra>, 
 etc. ; also 2d aor. TJpo'iiTjv, 
 ask, inquire. 
 
 OTCU, see d\iL 
 
 O-T(V), is; see clpC. 
 
 o-xo.Tos, -i\, -ov, last, farthest, 
 extreme. 
 
 <rci>, see ci'o-co. 
 
 Tpos, -d, -ov, o^er (generally, 
 one of ^o). 
 
 CTI, adv. Of time, referring 
 to the pres. or past, still, 
 yet, longer; referring to the 
 fat., further, longer, again. 
 Of degree, yet, still. 
 
 Tvjios, -tj, -ov, true, real, 
 genuine. 
 
 cv, adv., well. 
 
 vSaC|i,o>v, -ov, [cv, 8a.ip.wv], 
 fortunate, happy, prosper- 
 ous. 
 
 v^j0ia, -as, -T|, [v^0T]s], sim- 
 plicity, folly. 
 
 ^0^5, T!0S, [, TJ00S], Of 
 
 good character; then sim- 
 ple-hearted, silly, foolish. 
 
 CVVOIKO'S, -i\, -o'v, [$, vovs 
 mind} , kindly, friendly. 
 
 vvotKs, adv., [evvoiKo's], in 
 a kindly way ; VVOIKWS 
 'x, be kindly disposed or 
 loyal. 
 
332 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 vpio-Ko) (vp-, vp-, inceptive 
 cl., H. 403; G. 613), vp*jo-, 
 
 pe'0T]v, find. (2d aor. impv. 
 
 vp*, H. 387, b ; G. 131, 2.) 
 cvpos, -ovs, TO, width. 
 Ev4>pdrr]s, -ov, 6, Euphrates. 
 evwvv^os, -ov, [v, ovvfxa], of 
 
 good name; left, used for 
 
 dpicrrepos left to avoid a 
 
 word of bad omen. 
 4x0pos, -a, -ov, [>'x0a> hate], 
 
 hateful, hostile ; subst., 
 
 enemy. 
 
 *]-, see 239), la> or 
 
 , <rxov, <rxT]Ka, o-XTl|Jiat, 
 
 e. The pres. pple. may 
 often be translated having 
 under one's command^ and 
 so with. Accompanied by 
 an adv. 'xo> often means be 
 in a certain state, which the 
 adv. denotes ; the phrase is 
 then nearly equivalent to 
 l|i( with the adj. to which 
 the adv. corresponds ; vvo'i- 
 KO>S ^x 40 ' oe we M disposed. 
 5(a>s, conj., while, until. 
 
 Z. 
 
 t v< Y'^ nas - c l- 
 H. 402, e\ G. 608), trffu, 
 ctv|a, ^vyjjLat, etv^v, join, 
 yoke. 
 
 v, -ov, r 
 
 , -ov, TO', animal. 
 
 fj, conj., or; afteracomp.,ftem. 
 tlpT], -TJS, 4|, yoM^. 
 
 TJ^HIWV, -OVOS, 6, [T|-y'0|UU], 
 
 leader, guide. 
 
 i, [a-yw], ? 
 think, believe, consider. 
 
 s, adv., [rjSvs], f/Za^??/. 
 fjST], adv., now, already. 
 t]So|iai (T|8-), 1JO-0TJV, be pleased. 
 TjSviraOeo) (Tj8vira0-) , rjSvira- 
 0^0-w, etc., [Tj8vira0^s having 
 pleasant sensations, enjoying 
 one's self, TjSvs, ira0os], live 
 
 fjSvs, -ia, -v, pleasant, deli- 
 cious, (figuratively) sweet. 
 
 TJ00S, -os, TO', character. 
 
 fj, adv., dat. sing. fern, of os, 
 in what way, as. 
 
 fJKtt (T|K-), TJ|<), come, return; 
 pres. generally perf . in mean- 
 ing, am come. 
 
 T]Xios, -ov, 6, sun. 
 -as, t|, day. 
 , -a, -ov, [T)|its], our. 
 
 T)(jtiSapiKo'v, -ov, TO', [TJJJLI- half, 
 SdpeiKo's], half-daric. 
 
 Tjjxio'Xios, -a, -ov, [TJJII- half, 
 <JXos], containing one and a 
 half, half as much more. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 333 
 
 TJV, see clfiC. 
 T)IOV. see dio'a>. 
 qo-av, see etjxC. 
 
 (r|TTa-), fj-rHjo-ouai, 
 qTTT|(iai, f|TT-i]0T]v, [ifrra de- 
 feat, TJTTWV inferior'], be de- 
 feated, used as pass, of 
 
 VIKCUO. 
 
 0. 
 
 OdXarra, -TJS, f|, sea. 
 
 Bavaros, -ov, 6, death. 
 
 Oappcw (9app-), 0apprj<rci>, etc., 
 [0dpo-os, Bdppos courage], 
 be of good courage. 
 
 0a,TTOv, adv., comp. of Ta\^o>s. 
 
 0av|idta> (0avfia8-, i-cl.,H.398 ; 
 G. 584, 585, 587), 0av|id<ra>, 
 0avfJLa<ra, TeOavpaica, rcOav- 
 p.ao-(a.at. 0av|id(r0T]v, won- 
 der, wonder at, admire. 
 
 0^d, -as, T|, sight, show. 
 
 0arpov, -ov, TO, theatre. 
 
 0o's, -ov, 6, a god, God. 
 
 0pairv<i> (0pairv-). 0pairv- 
 o-w, etc., serve, worship. 
 
 0epp.ov. -ov, TO', heat. 
 
 OcVis, -<), TJ, position, putting. 
 
 0TTaXd, -as, TJ, Thessaly. 
 
 06TTaXo's, -ov, 6, Thessalian. 
 
 0ewpta), (00>p-), 0ecopT|cra>. etc., 
 [0wpo's spectator, from 04d], 
 view, witness, review an 
 army. 
 
 0T|plJW (0qpV- 
 
 beast], hunt. 
 
 0T]p(ov, -ov, TO', [0-fjp beast], 
 beast. 
 
 0o'ava, -wv, Ta, Thoana. 
 
 0pa|, 0pdKo's, 6, Thracian. 
 
 0vfi(3piov, -ov, TO', Thymbrion. 
 
 0vpd, -as, T|, gate, door, at 
 0vpai, residence, quarters, 
 especially of the Persian 
 king. 
 
 0v (0v-, 0v-), 0vo-o), 0vo-a, 
 T0vKa, T0v(iai, 4Tv0T]v, sac- 
 rifice. 
 
 t8ios, -a,, -ov, one' sown, private. 
 
 tSi(o-rr|s, -ov, 6, [t8ios] , private 
 person, private soldier. 
 
 tSovo-a, see opduo. 
 
 Upvs, -&DS, o, priest. 
 , -a, -o'v, sacred. 
 (c-, root cl., H. 476; G. 
 810), tjcrco, T]Ka, ctKa, clfxai, 
 i0T]v, set in motion, send. 
 
 licavo's, --fj, -o'v, [root IK- seen 
 ind<|)tKv^oji,ai], capable, com- 
 petent, sufficient, enough. 
 
 "Iico'viov, -ov, TO', Ikonion or 
 Iconium. 
 
 tXt), --qs, T|, troop, squadron. 
 
 iva, conj., where; in order 
 that, that denoting purpose. 
 
 l*irirvs, -<os, 6, [i'lnros], horse- 
 man, cavalryman. 
 
 liririKo's, -"f\, -o'v, [tinros], per- 
 taining to horses; 8vva|xis 
 liririK^i, cavalry. 
 
334 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 firiros, -ov, 6, horse. 
 i'cros, -T], -ov, equal. 
 'lo-o-oC, -v, ol, or 'Lro-o's, -ov, 
 
 Issos or /ssws. 
 
 to-rrjju (o-ra-, root cl., H. 404 ; 
 G. 619), <TT^<ra>, <rn)<ra, 
 co-njv, &rTi]Ka, (-2(TTa|iai in 
 a few compounds), lo-TaOrjv, 
 se, station, cause to stand; 
 dir. mid. and ju-aor., station 
 one's self, take one's stand; 
 perf. and fut. perf. act., 
 stand. 
 
 l<rropCd, -ds, f|, history, story. 
 
 lo-xvpo's, -a, -ov, [lo-xvs 
 strength], strong. 
 
 t<rxvps, adv., [lo-xvfxS], ex- 
 tremely. 
 
 "lams, -cov, ol, lonians. 
 
 'IcovCd, -ds, T|, [Alcoves], Ionia, 
 the central part of the west- 
 ern coast-region of Asia 
 Minor. 
 
 *), -o'v,["Ia>vs],/om'c. 
 
 (icara + cvS-, -uST|-), 
 impf. 4Ka0v8ov (H. 361 ; G. 
 544), or Ka0T)vSov, 
 
 squander in luxury, revel 
 away. 
 
 Kd9T]jj,ai (Kara + TJO--, root cl., 
 H. 483, 484; G. 814, 816, 
 
 816), sit, be seated; be en- 
 camped. 
 
 Ka6t<rrT]|u (Kara + o-ra-) , Kara- 
 <rr/j<ra>, KaT&mjo-a, Kar^- 
 OTT]V, KaOcVr^Ka, Ka0<rra- 
 jjiat, KaTo-Ta0T]v, set down, 
 station, establish, appoint; 
 dir. mid., with the ju-aor. and 
 perf. act., take one's place, 
 become or be established. 
 
 KaC, (1) conj., and; icaC . . . icaf, 
 both . . . and; (2) adv., also, 
 too, even, throwing its force 
 upon the next following 
 word or phrase. 
 
 KCIKO'S, - t f\, -ov, bad, cowardly. 
 Comp. KttKiwv, sup. Kcuao-ros. 
 
 KaXlco (icaXc-, K\t]- 
 (H. 423; G. 665), 
 
 KK\T)Ka, KK\T)fiaU 
 
 call, summon. 
 
 KaXXos, -os, TO, beauty. 
 
 KaXo's, -i\, -ov, beautiful; also 
 of character, noble, honora- 
 ble. Comp. KdXXfwv, sup. 
 
 KoXXlO-TOS- 
 
 KaXvirrw (KaXvp-, r-cl., H.395; 
 G. 576), KaXv+w, ^KaXv^a, 
 KCKaXvfifxai, KaXv(f>0T]v, cover. 
 
 KaXws, adv., [KaXo's], well, suc- 
 cessfully. 
 
 Kavwv, -o'vos, 6, measuring-rod. 
 
 KairT)Xiov, -ov, TO. [ Ka-rrTjXos 
 
 retail dealer], shop for retail 
 trade, especially for provis- 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 335 
 
 KairiraSoicCd, -as, fj, Kappado- 
 kia or Cappadocia. 
 
 Kao-TwXo's, -ov, o, Kastolos or 
 Castolus. 
 
 Kara, prep., down. (1) W. 
 gen. down from, down un- 
 der, down upon ; (2) w. ace., 
 down along, according to, 
 opposite. Kara yf\v, Kara 
 edXarrav, by land, by sea. 
 Kara Xds, by troops. In 
 comp., down, home. 
 
 Karapcuvw (Kara+pav-, fa-), 
 go down, descend. 
 
 K arcry w ( Kara + d-y-) , lead down , 
 lead home, restore an exile. 
 
 KaraSvo) ((cara + Sv-), sink. 
 
 KaraKoirra) (Kara + KOir-), cut 
 down. 
 
 (Kara + Xaf-, 
 seize. 
 
 (Kara + XMT-, Xciir-, 
 Xoitr-), leave in place, leave 
 behind. 
 
 KaraXva) (Kara + Xv-, Xv-), 
 bring to an end, destroy ; in- 
 dir. mid., bring a war or 
 quarrel to an end, come to 
 terms, become reconciled. 
 
 Karavoe'w (Kara + vo-), notice, 
 observe. 
 
 KcrraTreTpcKo (Kara + ircrpo-) , 
 
 KaTaTTTpW(TC). CtC., [iTCTpOS 
 
 stone'], stone to death. 
 KarairpaTTO) (Kara + irpdy-) , 
 do thoroughly, accomplish. 
 
 Ko,TCLTi0r)fju (Kara + 0-) , de- 
 posit, lay up. 
 
 KavoTTtKos, -i\, -ov, burning. 
 
 Kavo-rpos, -ov, 6, Kaystros or 
 Cayster. 
 
 KavVrpov ireSCov, Kaystros 
 Plain. 
 
 caw, burn. 
 
 K-yxPS) - v > o? a ^i n( i of mil- 
 let. 
 
 KeXcuvcu, -wv, at, Kelainai or 
 Celaenae. 
 
 K\VW (KXV-), 
 
 Xevcra. 
 
 o-|iai, cKcXcvVO^v, bid, urge. 
 Kvo's. -1\, ov, empty. 
 Kcpajiwv d-ypopa, Keramoi- or 
 
 Cer 'ami-market. 
 Kpavvvp,i (Kpa-, Kpd-, nas. cl., 
 
 H. 402, e; G. 608), 
 
 KKpd|iai, Kpaj9r]v or 
 
 o-0T]v, mix. 
 Kcpas, K^pdros, TO', horn ; wing 
 
 of an army. 
 Kcj>aXT|. -i\s, T|, head. 
 KiXiKCd, -ds, T|, Kilikia or Cili- 
 
 cia. 
 KCXif, -IKOS, 6, Kilikian or 
 
 Cilician. 
 KiXto-ora, -t]s, T|, Kilikian or 
 
 Cilician (woman, queen). 
 
 KlvSvVVO> (Klv8i>VV-), KlvSv- 
 
 VVO*<D, etc., [KivSvvos], be in 
 or encounter danger. 
 
 KtvSvvos, -ov, 6, danger. 
 
 K\au>. break. 
 
336 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 . -ov, 6, Klearchos 
 or Clearchus. 
 
 K\i|xa|, -KOS, fj, ladder. 
 
 KVT](jtts, -1805, fj, [Kvrfjfu] leg'], 
 greave. 
 
 KOIVO'S, - > f\, -ov, common, pub- 
 lic, 
 
 KoXoo-o-aC, -v, al, Kolossai 
 or Colossae. 
 
 Ko'irrtt (KO-JT-, T-cl., H. 395 ; G. 
 
 576), KOX|/W, KO\|/a, KKOCJ>a. 
 
 KKOfip,ai. liroVijv, c?^. 
 
 Koo-fjLw, adorn. 
 
 KoVpos, -ov, 6, order; orna- 
 ment; the universe, world. 
 
 Kpavos, -ovs, TO', helmet. 
 
 Kpareco, rwZe. 
 
 KpdTTjp, -fjpos, 6, mixing-bowl. 
 
 Kparos, -cos, TO, strength. 
 
 KpavyTJ, -f]s, T|, shout. 
 
 KpiTTwv, KpeiTTOv, [root seen 
 in KpaTos] , comp. of d'yaOos, 
 better, stronger, more pow- 
 erful. 
 
 Kp|xdvvv|u (Kp|xa-, nas. cl., 
 402, e; G. 608), Kp>a<ra, 
 Kpfiacr0T]v, hang. 
 T], -T]S, T|, spring. 
 s, KPTJTO'S, o', Cretan. 
 
 Kpi0-/i, -fjs, T|, mostly in pi., 
 barley. 
 
 Kptvo) (Kpiv-, Kpi-, i-cl., H. 400 ; 
 G. 596), Kptvw, c'Kpiva, K^- 
 
 KplKa, K^KplfXai, KpL0T]V. tilS- 
 
 cern, distinguish, judge. 
 , -ov, 6, judge, umpire. 
 
 Kpvirra) (icpv<|>-, r-cl., H. 395 
 and a ; G. 576), Kpv\|/<o, Kpv- 
 
 conceal, hide. 
 Kpvo*TaX\os, -ov, 6, ice. 
 
 KTtlVW (KTV-, KTOV-, l-Cl., H. 
 
 400; G. 596),KTva>,KTiva, 
 
 -KTova, kill. 
 KvSvos, -ov, 6, Kydnos or 
 
 Cydnus. 
 
 KVK\OS, -ov, 6, circle. 
 Kvpos, -ov, 6, Cyrus. 
 KwXvco (KO)\V-, KO)Xv-),Ko)Xvo-a), 
 
 K<oXv<ra, KKcoXvKa, KK<oXv- 
 
 l&at, Ka)Xv9i]v, hinder, pre- 
 
 vent. 
 
 A. 
 
 XaOpa, adv., [XavOdvw], se- 
 
 cretly, without the knowl- 
 
 edge of. 
 AaKcSaijxovios, -a, -ov, Lace- 
 
 daemonian, Spartan. 
 
 (Xap-, X^P-, nas. cl., 
 
 H. 402, c; G. 605, 6), X^o- 
 
 jxai, 4X^4>OT)v, take, receive, 
 
 capture. 
 Xajjnrpo'TTjs, -T]TOS, T), [Xajjurpo's 
 
 splendid], splendor, bril- 
 
 liancy. 
 XavOdvo) (Xa9-, Xt]9-, nas. cl., 
 
 H. 402, c; G. 605, 6), X4)<r! 
 
 cXaOov, XtX-qOa, XeX^o-fJiai, 
 
 lie hid, escape the notice of, 
 
 be concealed. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULAEY. 337 
 
 M. 
 
 Xopvyg, -yyos, o, throat, lar- 
 ynx. 
 
 Xfyco (Xry-)> k 'i 
 Ka) , \\-y [xai, 
 say, tell. 
 
 XcCirco (Xiir-, Xeiir-, XOITT-, 
 strong-vow, cl., H. 394; G. 
 
 572), Xtya>, &11TOV, X'- 
 
 Xoiira, 
 
 XCOos, -ov, 6, stone. 
 
 Xo'-yos, -ov, 6, word, talk, ac- 
 
 count, description. 
 Xo\os, -ov, 6, company of sol- 
 
 diers. 
 
 AvSCa, -as, TJ, Lydia. 
 Avicaia, -wv, ra, ^e Lykaia or 
 
 Lycaean festival, celebrated 
 
 by Arcadians in honor of 
 
 Zevs AVKCUOS. or AvKaios. 
 AvKctovCol, -as, TI, Lykaonia or 
 
 Lycaonia. 
 XvfjLatvofAaL (Xvpav-, i-cl., H. 
 
 400; G. 594), 
 
 Xvp.av0T]v, [XvjjiT] outrage], 
 maltreat, damage. 
 
 (Xtnre-), Xvir^crw, etc., 
 ], distress, grieve. 
 
 Xv<ris, -a>s, T|, a loosing, set- 
 ting free. 
 
 Xva> (Xv-, Xv-), Xvo-co, eXvcra, 
 XcXvKa, Xc'Xvpai, 4Xv0T]v, 
 loose, set free ; indir. mid., 
 set free for one's self, get 
 release^ ransom, deliver. 
 
 |ia9r||jLa, -TOS, TO, lesson. 
 Mai'avSpos, -ov, 6, Maiandros 
 
 or Maeander. 
 
 jxaKpo's, -a, -o'v, long, large. 
 (xaXa, very, much ; comp. |wLX- 
 
 Xov, more, rather, sup. na- 
 
 Xto-ra, most. 
 |iav0ava>, learn. 
 jiavTis, -cs, 6, soothsayer, 
 
 prophet. 
 
 MapaOwv, -wvos, 6, Marathon. 
 Mapcrvas, -ov, 6, Marsyas. 
 
 , -TJS, T|, 
 tle, fight. 
 
 bat- 
 
 s, 6, 
 
 Megarian. 
 
 fxc'-ya, large, 
 
 great, big. Comp. luC^wv, 
 
 sup. ^y'-o'TOs. 
 Mc-ya<)>^pvT|s, -ov, 6, Megapher- 
 
 nes. 
 
 jU-yio-ros, -T|, -ov, see jUyas. 
 p.^wv, see fU'yas. 
 |ieXCvT|, -T|S, T|, millet, a kind of 
 
 grain. 
 jjAXco (pcXX-, ixcXX-q-), jjieX- 
 
 X.TJO-CO, |i'XXT]cra, be about to 
 
 do something, intend, be go- 
 
 ing to do ; also delay. 
 lUXos, -cos, TO', song, strain of 
 
 music. 
 |iv*, postpos. particle, indicat- 
 
 ing that something not yet 
 
 mentioned is thought of as 
 
338 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 contrasted with the word be- 
 fore ji^v, or with the phrase 
 in which ji^v stands ; usually 
 translated by the tone of 
 voice only, sometimes by on 
 the one hand, in the first 
 place, indeed. 
 jjLVToi, conj., however, yet. 
 
 fJLCVCO (|1V-, |1VT]-), |XVW, fXlva, 
 
 remain. 
 v, -os, 6, Menon. 
 
 |x<ros, -T], -ov, in the pred. posi- 
 tion, the middle part of, the 
 midst of (H. 671 ; G. 978) ; 
 TO jx&rov, the midst, centre. 
 
 JWTOL, prep., w. gen., with; w. 
 ace., after. 
 
 }j,Tair|j.ira> (fiera + ircixir-, 
 ITOJI,<|>-) , send after; indir. 
 mid., send for, summon. 
 
 fierpov, -ov, TO', measure. 
 
 jx-fj, adv., not, marking the ne- 
 gation as willed or aimed at, 
 or as merely conceived. Also 
 conj., to denote neg. pur- 
 pose, that not ; after expres- 
 sion of fear, lest, that. 
 
 |iT|Sl, conj. and adv., used for 
 ov8 in all senses, to marl the 
 negation as willed or aimed 
 at, or as merely thought of. 
 
 |iT)Scs, |iT)8|iCa, fiTjSc'v, indef. 
 pron., no one, used instead 
 of ovScCs to mark the nega- 
 tion as willed or aimed at, 
 or as merely thought of. 
 
 Mf)8os, -ov, 6, Mede. 
 
 JJIT]KTI, adv., Qjdj, Tl, K Hl- 
 
 serted from analogy with 
 OVKTI], no longer, used hi- 
 st ead of ovjceVi to mark the 
 negation as willed or aimed 
 at, or as merely thought of. 
 jx-fjv, -o's, 6, month. 
 
 , never, used instead of 
 oviroT to mark the negation 
 as willed or aimed at, or as 
 merely thought of. 
 
 C, conj., used for OVT to 
 mark the negation as willed 
 or aimed at, or as merely 
 thought of. 
 
 , -Tpo's, T), mother. 
 j, -fjs, TJ, machine. 
 MCSds, -ov, 6, Midas. 
 jxiKpo's, -d, -o'v, small, little; 
 neut. fjuKpo'v as adv., barely. 
 MlX^o-tos, -d, -ov, 
 Milesian. 
 
 , -ov, T|, Miletos. 
 i, imitate. 
 , -ov, 6, imitator. 
 
 , -OV, 6, 
 
 SoV-qs giver, fr. SCScofxi], pay- 
 master. 
 fuo-Oo's, -ov, o, pay, wages. 
 
 ( |ito-6o-) , |iur0<6cra>, etc., 
 [jiicrObs], let for hire; mid., 
 make another let to one's 
 self, hire ; pass., be hired. 
 , -cos, TO', hatred. 
 J, -TJS, TJ, memory. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 339 
 
 o'vos, -TJ, -ov, alone, only, only 
 one. 
 
 , -fis, f|, form. 
 . -TJS, f), muse. 
 |Aovo-lov, -ov, TO, house of the 
 
 muses, museum. 
 JJLOVO-IK^, -i]s, f|, music. 
 HV00S, -ov, 6, tale, legend. 
 tivpuu, -ai, -a, ten thousand. 
 Mvo-ios, -a, -ov, Mysian. 
 jivo-T^piov, -ov, r6, secret doc- 
 trine, mystery. 
 PVO-TIKOS, -f\, -ov, secret, mys- 
 tic. 
 
 N. 
 
 vavs, v<&s, f|, ship. H. 206; 
 G. 268, 269. 
 
 vavTT|s, -ov, 6, sailor. 
 
 vavriKos, -"f\, -6v, [vavs], naval. 
 
 vicp6s, -d, -6v. dead. 
 
 v|ia>, deal out, distribute. 
 
 ve'os, -d,-ov, new, young ; comp. 
 veampos. sup. vcwraros. 
 
 (viKa-), viK^cro), etc., 
 ], conquer, defeat, sur- 
 pass, be victorious. 
 
 viKt], --qs, TJ, victory. 
 
 voa> (vo-) , vo-fyrco, etc., [vdos] , 
 observe. 
 
 vo|ita> (vojiiS-, i-cl., H. 398; 
 G. 584, 585), vojuw (H. 425; 
 G. 665, 3), Iv6[iura, vcvofiiKa, 
 vvo'|j.icr[iaL. vop.icr0T]v. [vo'- 
 
 j*os], hold as custom; com- 
 
 monly consider, think, be- 
 
 lieve. 
 vojios, -ov, 6, [vejtco], custom, 
 
 laic. 
 vo'os, contracted vovs, vov, 6, 
 
 mind. 
 
 jEfcvids, -ov, 6, Xenias. 
 
 |VLKO'S, -i\, -ov, [J^vos], CCM- 
 
 nected with Jcvoi; TO gcvt- 
 KO'V, mercenary force. 
 
 {cvos, -ov, 6, foreigner; one 
 connected by a tie of hospi- 
 tality, guest-friend; merce- 
 nary soldier. 
 
 QVO<|)WV, -WVTOS, 6, Xeno- 
 phon. 
 
 , -ov, 6, JEerxes. 
 
 O. 
 
 6, TJ, TO', the. Often translated 
 his, her, its, their. Some- 
 times retains its earlier force 
 as dem. pron., he, she, it; 
 as 6 8^, but he ; TO, |i^v . . . 
 Td 8c, some things . . . other 
 things ; 6 jiev . . . 6 8e, this 
 . . . that, the one . . . the 
 other. 
 
 o8, rj8, TO'S, dem. pron., [o, 
 enclit. -Be], this (Lat. hie). 
 
 68os, -ov, TJ, road, way. 
 
 o0v, rel. adv., [os], whence. 
 
340 
 
 GEEEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 ot8a, perf. in form, pres. in 
 meaning (see H. 491; G. 
 820), cto-ofxai, know. 
 
 oticaSc, adv., [olicos], home- 
 ward, home. 
 
 olKw (OIKC-). olKTJcro), ipKTjcra, 
 
 etc., [O!KOS], inhabit; also 
 intrans., dwell, live. 
 olKoSop.co (olico8o|j.e-), olicoSo- 
 
 |J,T]0-CO. U)Ko8o'[JLT|0-a, I'll'., [ol- 
 
 KoSo'jxos house-builder; ot- 
 KOS, 8jj,a> build}, build. 
 i, adv., [olicos], at home. 
 s, -ov, 6, house, home. 
 
 otvos, -ov, 6, wine. 
 
 ofopcu or otjxai (ol-, olij-), ol-fj- 
 (rojjiai, cp^0T]v, think, sup- 
 pose, deem. 
 
 olos, -a, -ov, rel. pron. of qual- 
 ity, of what sort. 
 
 oloVircp, oia/rrep, olo'vircp, 
 strengthened form of olos. 
 
 OKVCO (OKV6-), OKVTJCTtt, 6tC., 
 
 [OKVOS hesitation], hesitate, 
 shrink from. 
 
 OKTaKo'criOL, -ai, -a, [OKTW], 
 eight hundred. 
 
 OKTW, indecl., eight. 
 
 6\0pos, -ov, 6, [o'XXvjjLi], de- 
 struction, death. 
 
 6\i-yapx(a, -as, T|, [oXC-yot, 
 apx], oligarchy. 
 
 6Xi-yot, -ai, -a, few. 
 
 8Xos, -TJ, -ov, whole. 
 
 'OXvvOios, -a, -ov, Olynthian. 
 
 ojiaXo's, -Vj, -o'v, even, level. 
 
 ofioios, -a, -ov, [cf. ajxa, ojiov], 
 like, similar. 
 
 6|io(ws, adv., [ofjiotos], in like 
 manner, alike. 
 
 OfioXo'y^CD (6fj.o\o*y-), bpoXoy-f]- 
 o-w, etc., [ojxo'-Xo-yos agree- 
 ing], agree. 
 
 6[*ov, adv., [cf. apa], together. 
 
 OJJLWS, adv., [cf. afxa], neverthe- 
 less, yet. 
 
 ovofia, -TOS, TO', name. 
 
 ovvfxa, dialectic form of 6Vo|ia. 
 
 oTqj, indef. rel. adv. and conj., 
 in what way, wherever. 
 
 oirXtnjs, -ov, 6, [oirXa], heavy- 
 armed soldier, hoplite. 
 
 frn-Xov, -ov, TO', implement; pi. 
 arms. 
 
 oirocros, -t|, -ov, indef. rel. 
 pron., how much, as much 
 as; pi. how many, as many 
 as. 
 
 OTTO'TC, indef. rel. conj., when- 
 ever. 
 
 8irov, indef. rel. adv. and conj., 
 where. 
 
 oirws, indef. rel. adv. and conj., 
 originally denoting manner, 
 in what way, how ; in order 
 that, that. 
 
 opdw (opa-, oir-, 18-), impf. 
 iwpwv (H. 359 and 6; G. 
 638), 6\|/ofjiat, elSov (synop. 
 8<o, 80411, 184, ISciv, t8(Gv), 
 
 eo'paKa or IcopciKa, cap ap.au 
 
 see. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 341 
 
 6'p-yavov, -ov, TO, instrument. 
 
 op-yCtofxai (6><yi8-, i-cl., H. 398 ; 
 G. 584, 585, 587), opYiov^at, 
 wp'yaa-fj.cu, cup^(cr0r|v. [opyfj 
 temper, anger~\, be angry. 
 
 opOios, -a, -ov, [6p0o's], steep. 
 
 opOo's, -4\, -ov, straight, up- 
 right, right. 
 
 6p|ia.a> (opjia-), 6pfiT)<rco, etc., 
 [6pp.TJ impulse~\, set in mo- 
 tion ; dir. mid., put one's self 
 in motion, set out. 
 
 opvls, -i0os, 6, t|, bird. 
 
 opos, -ovs, TO', mountain. 
 
 os, -q, o, rel. pron., who, which, 
 that, what. 
 
 ooros, -yj, -ov, rel. pron., how 
 much, as much as; pi. how 
 many, as many as; who or 
 which referring to quantity 
 or number. 
 
 OO-TIS, TJTIS, <> TI, indef. rel. 
 pron., [os, rls], whoever, 
 whatever. 
 
 OTC, rel. conj., when, while. 
 
 OTI, conj., originally the same 
 as o TI, neut. sing, of OO-TIS. 
 (1) Declarative, introducing 
 a substantive clause of which 
 the verb is in a finite mode 
 (as the article TO' introduces 
 a substantive clause of which 
 the verb is in the inf.), 
 that. (2) Causal (showing 
 the same change of mean- 
 ing as that and Lat. quod), 
 
 because. (3) Strengthening 
 a superl. (like o>s and Lat. 
 quam) as, OTI irXcurToi as 
 many as possible, quam 
 plurimi. 
 
 ov, OVK, ov\, not. 
 
 ov, rel. adv., [os], where. 
 
 ov, ol, g, reflex, pron., of him- 
 self, etc. 
 
 ov8, conj. and adv. [ov, 84]. 
 Conj., (1) but not, more 
 often (2) and not, nor, 
 continuing a preceding ov. 
 Adv., neg. of adverbial K<xC, 
 calling special attention to 
 what follows, (1) also not, 
 not . . . either ; (2) not even. 
 As transition from conj. to 
 adv. we find some cases 
 where ov84 is still a conj., 
 yet lays stress upon what 
 follows, like an adv. ; neither 
 will usually render these 
 cases. 
 
 ovSeis. ovSe^La, ov8ev, [ov8, 
 els], no one. 
 
 ovv, post-pos. conj., therefore, 
 accordingly. (Xv ovv, un- 
 emphatic now. 8* ovv, but 
 at any rate. 
 
 oviroT, adv., [ov, TTOT^], never. 
 
 OVT, conj., [ov, T], generally 
 repeated, ovVc . . . OVT, nei- 
 ther ... nor. 
 
 OVTOS, avTt], TOVTO, dem. pron., 
 this, that (Lat. is). 
 
342 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 ovTft>s,bef ore a cons. OVTO>, dem. 
 
 adv. of manner, thus, so. 
 6<f>tXo> (6<|>X-, i-cl., H. 399, a ; 
 
 G. 598; also 6<|>eiX-), o<|>i- 
 
 XTJO-CO. co4>i\T]o-a and w<j>\ov. 
 a><j>i\T)Ka, co<))i\T|9t]v, owe. 
 
 o<(>\o9. r6 (only nom. and 
 ace.), advantage, good, ben- 
 efit. 
 
 oxvpds, -a, -6v, [ix], strong, 
 secure. 
 
 ovj/ofiai, see 6pda>. 
 
 n. 
 
 wdOos, -os, r6, feeling, passion. 
 wai8a-y-y6s, -ov, 6, child-leader, 
 
 teacher, pedagogue. 
 iraiScvco (waiScv-), waiSevcra), 
 
 etc., [wais], educate. 
 irais, waiSos, 6, fj, child (son 
 
 or daughter) . 
 wdXiv, again, back. 
 wavrdwdonv, adv. , [wdvra, 
 
 wdori], altogether. 
 wavraxov, adv., [was], every- 
 where. 
 iravrrj, adv., [was], in every 
 
 way, on every side. 
 wavro8aw6s, -^, -6v, [was, -8a- 
 
 wos being an adj. ending], 
 
 of every kind. 
 wapd, prep., (1) w. gen., from 
 
 beside, from; (2) w. dat. 
 
 beside, near, with; (3) w. 
 
 ace., to the side of, to (with 
 
 a word denoting a person) , 
 alongside of, along (with the 
 name of an extended object, 
 as a river) ; wapd TOV vopov, 
 contrary to the law; wapd 
 pa<rt\cos, from the king; 
 wapd pao-iXct, beside the king, 
 at his court ; wapd pao-iXcd, 
 to the king. In comp., be- 
 side, along. 
 
 n-apapdXXw, compare. 
 
 wapapoX^, -f]s, T), comparison, 
 illustration, parable. 
 
 wapa-yyeXXco (wapa + d-y Y^X-) , 
 send word along, command, 
 give orders. 
 
 wapaYfyvoixai (wapa- + "yev-, 
 yvr]-, yov-), come to, arrive. 
 
 wapaScuros, -ov, 6, park. 
 
 wapawX^crtos, -a, -ov, [wapd, 
 wX-qo-Cos near~\, resembling, 
 similar. 
 
 wapao-o/yyTjs, -ov, 6, parasang, 
 Persian measure of distance, 
 something over three miles. 
 
 wapa<TKvdo> (wapa + o-KcvaS-, 
 i-cl., H. 398; G. 584, 585, 
 587), wapao~Kvdo-a>, wape- 
 o-KCvao-a, wapo-KvaKa, wa- 
 
 o-0-qv, [wapao-Kcv/j], prepare. 
 wapao-Kv^, -i]s, TJ, [wapd, 
 
 O-KCVOS], preparation. 
 wdpi|u (wapa + 4<r-, see clfiC) , 
 
 wap^o-o^ai, be near or pres- 
 
 ent or at hand. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 343 
 
 irapcXavvco (irapa + \a-) , drive 
 or ride past or along, march 
 
 by. 
 
 irap^xw (irapa + <TX-, \-, i\-, 
 "X~ ^X 1 !')) hold beside, of- 
 fer; irpd^ixara irap^xa), make 
 trouble. 
 
 Ilappdo-tos. -a, -ov, Parrha- 
 sian. 
 
 napvo-aris, -1805, TJ, Pary satis. 
 
 TTCIS, irdcra, irav, all, every. 
 
 IIa<rCa>v, -os, 6, Pasion. 
 
 irdxr\<D (ira0-, irv0-, irov0-, in- 
 ceptive cl., H. 403, c; G. 
 613, 617), ir<ron<u (for irv0- 
 <rop,ai) , ciraOov, ir^irovOa, ex- 
 perience, be treated; cv (Ka- 
 KS) ircurxtv serve as pas- 
 sives tO 6V (KttKWS) TTOWIV. 
 
 irar^p, irarpos, 6, father. 
 irarpCs, -C8os, TJ, [irar^p], 
 
 fatherland. 
 iravo> (irav-), irav<ra>, etc., stop 
 
 (trans.) ; dir. mid., stop (in- 
 
 trans.), cease. 
 ircSCov, -ov, TO, [ir^Sov ground] , 
 
 plain. 
 irc^s, --f\, -6v, [cf. ire'Sov and 
 
 TTOVS], on foot ; Svyajjus-ire^, 
 
 infantry. 
 irt0a> (-IT10-, strong-vow, cl., H. 
 
 394 ; G. 572), ircCo-w, irura, 
 
 ir^irciKa, ir^irio-}j.ai, cireC- 
 
 o-0T]v, persuade; dir. mid., 
 
 believe, obey. 
 irctpa, -as, TJ, attempt, trial. 
 
 impa/nrjs, -ov, 6, pirate. 
 ireipdo) (impa-) , ircipdura), etc., 
 
 more commonly pass, dep., 
 
 [iripa], attempt, try. 
 XleXoirovv^o-ios, -a, -ov, [IIcXo- 
 
 ITOVVTJO-OS], Peloponnesian. 
 IleXoirdvvqo-os, -ov, TJ, [IlXo\|/ 
 
 Pelops, vfjo-os island], Pelo- 
 
 ponnesus. 
 irt\TO,l<a, [TT^XTT)], serve as 
 
 peltast. 
 
 mXrai, -wv, at, Peltai. 
 ircXraa-Tf^s, -ov, 6, [ircXTa^a)], 
 
 peltast, targeteer, carrying 
 
 the IT&.TTI, a light, crescent- 
 
 shaped shield. 
 ir|JLira> (irejJLir-, -iro(i 
 
 circfji^a, ir^irofjL<|>a, 
 
 ir^<|>0T|v, send, conduct. 
 irevTaKoorioi, -ai, -a, Jive hun- 
 
 dred. 
 
 , indecl. , five. 
 i), digest. 
 C, prep., (1) w. gen., about, 
 
 concerning; sometimes re- 
 
 tains the meaning beyond; 
 
 (2) w. ace., around. In 
 
 comp. beyond, around. 
 cpi'yC'yvoixai (irpi+ < yv-, *YVT|-, 
 
 yov-), become superior to, 
 
 get the better of. 
 
 o^x-, <TXTJ-), surround, en- 
 close. 
 
 epiirX^a) (irpi + irXv-, 
 sail around. 
 
344 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 s, -ov, 6, Persian. 
 s. -1], -6v, 
 
 Persian. 
 
 tn\yf\, -fjs, T), spring, source. 
 nc-ypiis, -TITOS, 6, Pigres. 
 im'to) (iricS-, t-cl., H. 398; G. 
 
 584, 585), irUcro), 4irt<ra, liri- 
 
 &r6T|v, squeeze, pinch, press, 
 
 push hard. 
 irtirrw (TTCT-, TOO--, TTTW-), ir- 
 
 o-ovjjiai (H. 426 ; G. 666), ihre- 
 
 <rov, irirTa>Ka, fall, (irtirra) 
 
 is for iriir(c)ra>, with irreg. 
 
 lengthening of the redupli- 
 
 cation syllable.) 
 IlurtScu, -wv, ol, Pisidians. 
 mo~Tva> (irio~Tv-) , irKTrcvo-o), 
 
 etc., [irurrds], trust. 
 irCo-Tis, -s, TJ, [ircCOw], faith, 
 
 trust ; token of faith, pledge. 
 jrurT6s, --fj, -6v, [ireCOw], trusted, 
 
 faithful. 
 orXavouo (irXava-), irXav^jo-w, 
 
 etc., [irXdvTj wandering] , 
 
 mislead; pass., wander. 
 rrXcuro-o), /orm, mould. 
 irX0pov, -ov, r6, plethron, = 
 
 100 Greek feet, =i of a o-rd- 
 
 Siov. 
 
 irXcto-Tos, --q, -ov, see iroXvs. 
 irX^ov, see iroXvs. 
 irXcw (irXv-, irXev-, strong-vow. 
 
 cl., H.394,a; G. 574), irXetf- 
 
 (rojxai, 
 
 improp. prep. w. gen., 
 
 except; also as conj., except 
 
 that. 
 irX^jptis, -S, [irCji-TrXT^xi, fill], 
 
 full. 
 
 irXotov, -ov, r6, [irX^w], boat. 
 irvcvjia, -TOS, r6, wind, breath. 
 irvcvjicDv, -ovos, 6, lung. 
 iroi0) (iroi-), iroi^o-ca, etc., 
 
 make, do ; indir. mid., make 
 
 for one's self, consider, re- 
 
 irotTjTos, -a, -ov, verbal of 
 
 , -ov, 6, poet. 
 iroXe)Xci> (iroXcixe- 
 
 etc., [ir6X|xos], make war, 
 
 fight. 
 iroX^uos, -d, -ov, [iroXcjtos] , 
 
 hostile ; as subst., enemy. 
 7ro\|jios. -ov, 6, war. 
 iroXiopK0) (iroXiopK-) , iro- 
 
 XiopK'/jcrcD, etc., [iro'Xis, k'pKos 
 
 fence], besiege. 
 iroXis, -<os, T), city, state. 
 iroXtTT]s, -ov, 6, [iro'Xis] , citizen. 
 iroXXaKis, adv., [iroXvs], many 
 
 times, often, again and again. 
 iroXvs, iroXX^j, iroXv, much, pi. 
 
 many. Comp. irXeCuv or 
 
 irXc'wv, neut. irX^ov ; sup. 
 
 irXl0-TOS, -TJ, -OV. Ol TTOX- 
 
 XoC, the many, the mass of 
 men, most people; iroXv, of- 
 ten used as an adv. (comp. 
 irX^ov), much, very. iroXvv 
 \po'vov, a long time. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 345 
 
 iro'vos, -ov, 6, [ir^vojxai work], 
 toil, labor, work. 
 
 iropeva) (iropv-), iropvo~a>, etc., 
 [iropos], make go, convey ; 
 commonly pass, dep., pro- 
 ceed, march. 
 
 iropos, -ov, d, passage, (pore 
 is one application under this 
 head) ; means, resources (cf . 
 our ways and means) . 
 
 iro'ppco, adv., far. 
 
 iroTajjio's, -ov, 6, river. 
 
 ITO'TC, interrog. adv., when? 
 
 ITOT^, enclitic, indef. adv., at 
 some time, ever, once. 
 
 irov, adv., enclitic, somewhere, 
 anywhere. 
 
 ITOVS, IToSo's, O, fOOt. 
 
 irpd^fAa, -TOS, TO', [irpaTTa>], 
 deed, affair ; irpa-yixara irap- 
 t\a>, make trouble. 
 
 irpcU-is, -s, f|, [irpd-rra)], ac- 
 tion, enterprise. 
 
 irpcurora), earlier form of 
 irpd-TTO). 
 
 irpdrTO), earlier irpao-o-w (irpd'y-, 
 i-cl., H. 397; G. 580), irpajw, 
 irpd|a, ireirpd-ya or irirpa\a, 
 ir^irpd*yp,ai, tTrpd\Qr\v, do, ac- 
 complish. 
 
 irpo-pvTpos, -a, -ov, comp. of 
 irpo-pvs, older, elder. 
 
 npiap-os. -ov, d, Priam. 
 
 irptv, conj., before. 
 
 irpd, prep. w. gen., before. 
 
 (irpo + d-yopcv-, see 
 
 <|>T](x(), irpoepca, irpoeiirov, 
 
 pT|6T]v, speak before, proclaim 
 
 publicly. 
 TrpoaurOavopai (irpo + atorO-) , 
 
 perceive beforehand. 
 Trpo|3dXXa> (irpo + paX-, pXt]-), 
 
 throw before; indir. mid., 
 
 throw before one's self, irpo- 
 
 paXeVOat TO, oirXa, put spear 
 
 and shield in position for 
 
 attack. 
 irpoS(Sa>|Ai (irpo + 80-), betray, 
 
 give up, be false to. 
 irpo'eifu (irpo+l-, see ctju), go 
 
 forward. 
 
 irpoeiirov, see irpoa-yopevw. 
 77po'0v}JLOs. -ov, [irpo', OVJJLO'S 
 
 spirit, mind~\, eager, zealous. 
 irpourn]|u (irpo + o-ra-) , set or 
 
 station before; perf. act., 
 
 stand before, command. 
 irpoKO,TaXa|j,pdv<i> (irpo + Kara + 
 
 Xap-, X-qp-), seize 'before- 
 
 hand. 
 Hpofcvos, -ov, o e , [irpo', ^vos], 
 
 Proxenos. 
 irpo's,prep., (1) w. &cc.,towards, 
 
 to, against, in the presence 
 
 of; irpos ravra, in regard 
 
 to this, sometimes in reply ; 
 
 (2) w. gen., irpos TOV rpo'irov, 
 in accord with the character ; 
 
 (3) w. dat., near, at, in addi- 
 tion to. In comp., in addi- 
 tion, further. 
 
346 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 Trpo<raiT^oD (irpos + alr-, see 
 O.IT&O) , demand further, ask 
 in addition. 
 
 jrpoo-cpxojACU (irpos + px-, \0-, 
 4\v0-), come or go to, come 
 over to. 
 
 irpdo-Bev, adv., [irpos], before- 
 hand, before, formerly. 
 
 irpocriroiO|j,ai (irpos + -iroi-) , 
 take to one's self, claim, pre- 
 tend. 
 
 n-poVw, adv., [irpos], forward. 
 
 irpoTcpos, -d, -ov, [irpo'], ear- 
 lier / neut. irpoTpov as adv., 
 before. 
 
 7rpo'cj>acris. -CCDS, T|, [irpo<|>a(va> 
 show before'] , pretext, excuse. 
 
 irpwTOs, -TJ, -ov, [irpo], first. 
 irpwrov jiev, in the first place, 
 
 iri)p, irvpo's, TO', fire. 
 jrvpo's, -ov, d, wheat. 
 irco, adv., enclitic, hitherto, yet, 
 
 after a neg. 
 ircoXco) (irwXe-), ircoX^o-o), etc., 
 
 sell. 
 
 P. 
 
 pco> (pv-, pv-, pvt]-, strong-vow, 
 cl., H. 394, a; G. 574), fcv- 
 crojiai, ppvt]Ka, 4ppvt]V (as 
 act.), ^010. 
 
 pTJrcop, -opos, o', orator. 
 
 pts, plvo's, -f), nose. 
 
 po'Sov, -ov, TO', rose. 
 
 2. 
 
 ordXiriyg, -tvyos, TJ, trumpet. 
 
 o-aXirC^w (o-aXiri-yy-, i-cl., H. 
 398,6; G. 584, 588), o-dX- 
 irt-yla, [o-dXiri-yJ] , sound the 
 trumpet. 
 
 Sap6eis, -(ov, al, Sardeis or 
 
 o-dp^, -KO'S, TJ, flesh. 
 o-aTpdirrjs, -ov, o c , satrap, Per- 
 
 sian governor of a prov- 
 ince. 
 
 2dTvpos, -ov, o', satyr. The 
 satyrs were supposed to 
 have flat noses, pointed ears, 
 and tails of horses, and to 
 be very fond of wine. 
 
 cnf]o~a|xov, -ov, TO', sesame, a 
 kind of grain. 
 
 o-iyfj, -f]s, T), silence. 
 
 cr twTrdco (crieoTra-) , a 
 
 silence'], be silent. 
 o-KirTos, -d, -ov, verbal of 
 
 (O-KCIT-, T-C!., H. 
 395; G. 576), o-K^ofiat, 
 eo-K\|/dfXT|v, o-Kjj.fjiai, view, 
 examine, consider. In the 
 pres., Attic generally uses 
 
 (o-Kva8-, i-cl., H. 
 398; G. 584, 585, 587), 
 , earKvao-a, eo-Kcva- 
 [o-Kvos] , prepare. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 347 
 
 crKvos, -ovs, TO, utensil, espe- 
 cially in pi. military equip- 
 ments, baggage. 
 
 <TKVO(f>o'pOS, -OV, [o-KCVOS, 4>O- 
 
 pos bearing, fr. <f>pw], bag- 
 gage-carrying ; rd O-KCVO- 
 4>o'pa, baggage-train. 
 
 o-KTjv-fj, -ijs, TJ, tewZ, made of 
 hides. 
 
 o-K-nirrpov, -ov, TO', staff, scep- 
 tre. 
 
 o-Koiro's, -ov, 6, watcher, look- 
 out. 
 
 So'Xoi, -v, ol, Soli. 
 
 2o<t>aivTos,-ov, 6,Sophainetos. 
 
 o~o<|>id, -as, TJ, [o-o<|>o's] , wisdom, 
 skill (as in music). 
 
 a-o<t>$o(iai, be clever or wise. 
 
 o-o<j>o's, -^j, -o'v, wise. 
 
 o"irv8 (o-ircvS-), O"irvo-a>, 
 o-irvo-a, hasten. 
 
 0-Ttt0}JLo's, -OV, O, [i'o-T1]JJLl], StOp- 
 
 ping-place, station; day's 
 journey. 
 
 O-TC'XXO) (0"T6\-, O-TdX-, l-Cl., H. 
 
 399; G. 593), o-TcXw, o-Ti\a, 
 -O-TaXKa, ca-TaX^xai, CTTCI- 
 \t\v, send, (originally equip). 
 
 o-Tpo's, -d, -o'v, firm, solid. 
 
 OTTIXOS, -ov, o', line (as of writ- 
 ing). 
 
 o-TXyys,-C8os,TJ,/esft- scraper, 
 Lat. strigilis. 
 
 o-ToXVj, -fjs, T], [o-TXX], robe. 
 
 o-T6Xos, -ov, 6, [o-T'XX<o] , equip- 
 ment, expedition. 
 
 arpaTVfia, -aTOs, TO, [orrpa- 
 
 TVW], army. 
 o-TpaTCvw (o-TpaTv-) , o-Tpa- 
 
 Tvo-a>, o-TpaTvo-a, lorrpa- 
 o-TpaTV)jiai, [o-Tpa- 
 , take the field, serve as 
 
 a soldier, make an expedi- 
 
 tion ; often dep. 
 o-TpaTT]-y&o (o-TpaTTj-ye-) , o-Tpa- 
 
 TTI^O-W, etc., [o-TpaTT^^ds], 
 
 act as general, command. 
 o-Tparq-yid, -as, TJ, [o-TpaTT]- 
 
 yds], office or act of a gen- 
 
 eral, command. 
 crTpaTTj'yds, -ov, 6, [o-TpaT6s, 
 
 a-yw], general. 
 o-TpaTtd, -as, rj, [cf. o-TpaT6s], 
 
 army. 
 o-TpaTtwTT]s, -ov, 6, [o-TpaTid], 
 
 soldier. 
 
 etc., [o-TpaToireSov] , encamp. 
 o-TpaToircSov, -ov, TO, [o"Tpa- 
 TOS, irc'Sov ground], camp. 
 , -ov, 6, army. 
 
 , -OV, 6, [<TTpe'4>W 
 
 twist], collar of twisted or 
 linked metal. Lat. torques. 
 
 ZTU|A<J>CiLXlOS. -d, -OV, 
 
 Xos], Stymphalian. 
 o-v, o-ov, thou, you. 
 o-vyyC-yvojxat (o-vv + ^v-, 
 
 yov-) , become acquainted 
 
 with, associate with; have 
 
 intercourse with. 
 
348 
 
 QUEER-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 HWvvccns, -ios, 6, 
 
 crvXXafxpavco (<rvv + Xap-, 
 
 ), arrest. 
 y a) (<rvv + X-y-, Xox-) ? 
 
 Xo\a, 
 
 yt]v, gather, collect, levy. 
 
 s, ij, [crvXXy], 
 ?/, gathering of troops. 
 
 (crvv + paX-, pXrj-), 
 together; subjective 
 mid., contribute. 
 
 vto (<rvv + povXev-), 
 oiY/i, advise; indir. 
 mid., pZa/i toftft another for 
 one's self, ask advice, con- 
 sult with. 
 
 s, -ov, 6, [<rvv, jia\o- 
 ], ally. 
 
 s, --n-cura, -irav, [<rvv, 
 was], all together. 
 
 (<rvv + 
 ) , send with. 
 s, -cov, [<rvv, 
 full~\, quite full. 
 v)JLiroXe|JL4a> (<rvv + 
 make war with. 
 v|ATropex>o}jLcu (<rvv + 
 proceed or march with. 
 vnirpaTTO) (<rvv + irpaY-) , c?o 
 or accomplish with, aid in 
 
 o-vv, prep. w. dat., with, with 
 the help of. In comp., with. 
 
 crvvayw (<rvv + d-y-), bring to- 
 gether, convene. 
 
 orvvaXXaTTw (<rvv + dXXa-y-), 
 reconcile ; pass., become rec- 
 onciled with. 
 
 (rvvavapaCvo) (<rvv + dva + Pav-. 
 pa-), go up with. 
 
 o-vvcTTOfxai (<rvv + <r()ir-, cir-), 
 accompany, follow. 
 
 <rvvp-y6s, -ov, 6, [<rvv, cp-yov], 
 fellow-worker, helper. 
 
 <rvv0o-is, -ws, T] C , a putting to- 
 gether, composition. 
 
 <rvvoiSa, [crvv, olSa], know 
 with, be conscious of. 
 
 <rvvTa,TTCD (<rvv + ra-y-), ar- 
 range together, array, draw 
 up. . 
 
 <rvvTt0Tjiu, put together. 
 
 2vpaKoo-ios, -a, -ov, [2vpdtKOv- 
 o-at Syracuse'], Syracusan. 
 
 O*V(rKVa^<i> (o-VV + O-K6VO.8-), 
 
 put baggage together, pack 
 up. 
 
 crvo-TpaTvojxai (o-vv + o-rpa- 
 TV-), make an expedition 
 with, join an expedition. 
 <rvo-TpaTi<oTT)s, -ov, 6, [crvv, 
 o-TpaTicoTTjs], fellow-soldier. 
 o-<j>aipa, -as, rj, ball, sphere. 
 >, split. 
 
 Jw, have leisure. 
 j, -fjs, TJ, leisure, school. 
 2a>KpaTT)s, -ovs, 6, [o-ws safe, 
 Kparos], Sokrates or So- 
 crates. 
 
 a-cojia. -aros, r6, body. 
 s, -ios, 6, 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 349 
 
 T. 
 
 s, -, o, Tamos. 
 rajts, -s, ij, [T<TT], ar- 
 
 rangement, order; division, 
 
 company. 
 Tapo-oi, -a>v, ot, Tarsoi or 
 
 TCUTO-O), older form of TCITTW. 
 TCLTTW (ra-y-, i-cl., H. 398; G. 
 
 588), TOO>, Taa, TTa\a, 
 
 T^Ta-yjicu, 4T<xOt]v, arrange. 
 rctyos, -ov, 6, grave, tomb. 
 Tax&>s, adv., [TO.XVS], quickly. 
 
 Comp. 0&TTOV, sup. Tax-0"Ta. 
 
 -TJ, -ov, see TO-X^S. 
 S, raxia, raxv, swift, 
 
 quick, speedy. Comp. 6dr- 
 
 TWV, SUp. TaXKTTOS. 
 
 T, postpos. enclitic conj., and ; 
 rt . . . ri or T^ . . . KaC, both 
 . . . and. 
 
 <ra>, etc., [T\VT^], end; die. 
 TeXcvTfj, -fjs, tj, [r^Xos end~], 
 end; death. 
 
 T6JJLVO), CUt. 
 
 TTpaias, [r^TTaps],/owr times. 
 TTpaKt<rxtXioi, -at, -a, four 
 thousand. 
 
 s, r^rrapa, four. 
 I, -T]S, TJ, art, skill. 
 TT|\, at a distance, afar. 
 TCe^i (0-, root cl., H. 404; 
 G. 619), 0^<rw, ^Ka, r&i\- 
 Ka or T0iKa, rc'Ocipai, tri- 
 
 0-qv, put, place; vdjxovs rC- 
 0t]|ii, /ay ^O^TI or make laws. 
 
 (rljia-), Tijjtfjo-a), etc., 
 
 ], honor. 
 
 rtjitos, -a, -ov, [Ti|i-#i], precious, 
 honored, honorable. 
 
 etc., [rtjxwpos avenger], be 
 an avenger, avenge; mid., 
 take vengeance on, punish. 
 
 rCs, T(, interrog. pron., who f 
 what ? T is often used as 
 adv., why ? 
 
 rls, rl, indef. pron., anyone or 
 -thing, a certain one t some- 
 body or -thing. 
 
 Tio-o-a<|>pvT]s, -ovs, 6, Tissa- 
 phernes. 
 
 roioV$, roidSc, roio'v8, indef. 
 dem. pron., such, differing 
 from TOIOVTOS as o8c from 
 OVTOS ; roioiSc as follows. 
 
 TOIOVTOS, TOiaVTT], TOlOVTo(v), 
 
 indef. dem. pron., such; 
 differs from ToioVSc as OVTOS 
 from 88. 
 
 etc., [To'Xjia boldness'], dare. 
 Tofo'TT|s, -ov, 6, [TO'JOV 6010], 
 
 archer, bowman. 
 TO'TTOS, -ov, 6, place. 
 TOO-OVTOS, Tocravrq, TOO-OV- 
 
 TO(V), indef. dem. pron., so 
 
 great, so much, pi., so many. 
 
350 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 TO'TC, adv., at that time, then. 
 s, TpCa, three. 
 
 (Tp7r-, Tpo<|>-, Tpair-), 
 
 J'W. Tp\|/d, 
 
 rp<|>-, Tpa<J>-), 0pv}/co 
 (H. 74, c; G. 95 and 5), 
 0pv|/a, T0pafj.p.cu. 4rpd<|>T)v, 
 nourish, support. 
 
 TpiaKovra, indecl., thirty. 
 
 TpiaKo'crioi, -ai, -a, three hun- 
 dred. 
 
 Tpi^jprjs, -ovs, -i, -tj; du. -tj, 
 -otv ; pi. -is, -wv, -<rt, -is, 
 [rpis, root 4p- roi^], tri- 
 reme, ship of war with three 
 banks of oars. 
 
 Tpoiros, -ov, 6, [TPJTG>], turn t 
 way, manner ; character. 
 ^, -fjs, ij, 
 e, support. 
 (TVX-, 
 
 nas. cl., H. 402, c; G. 603, 
 605 and 6) , TVO(I<U, Irvxov, 
 rervx^Ka, TTvxa, happen, 
 chance. 
 
 TVTTOS, -ov, 6, type. 
 
 TvirT<i>, strike. 
 
 Tvpavvcvw (rvpavvcv-), rvpav- 
 vvcra>, etc., [rvpavvos], ac^ 
 s tyrant, tyrannize. 
 
 rvpavvos, -ov, o l , absolute 
 ruler, tyrant. 
 
 Tvpiociov, -ov, TO, Tyria- 
 eion. 
 
 Y. 
 
 -as, T|, health. 
 , vSaros, TO', water. H. 
 
 182, a ; G. 291, 34. 
 vfuts, see o*v. 
 virapxos, -ov, o, [viro, apxos 
 
 ruler, fr. apxw], lieutenant, 
 
 subordinate commander. 
 virapx (viro + dpx-), begin; 
 
 exist; virapx^v TivC, be on 
 
 one's side, favor, support. 
 vir^p, prep., (1) w. gen., over, 
 
 above, in behalf of; (2) w. 
 
 ace., beyond. 
 v-rreppaXXw, outdo, excel. 
 vircppoXV), --qs, f|, [vircppaXXw] , 
 
 excess, extravagance ; also 
 
 passage over mountains. 
 
 (viro + <T()X-, 
 . cl., H. 402, d\ 
 
 G.607,Urx-for(o-)ur(f)x-) 
 
 i, promise (hold 
 one's self under). 
 
 viro, prep., (1) w. gen., under; 
 denoting the agent with 
 pass, verbs, by ; (2) w. dat., 
 under, at the foot of. In 
 comp., under, somewhat. 
 
 viro^v-yiov, -ov, TO', [VITO, v- 
 yov], draught animal, beast 
 of burden. 
 
 viroKptvofxai, answer; play a 
 part on the stage. 
 
 , -ov, 6, actor. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 351 
 
 (viro + Xa(3-. 
 ), take under one^s pro- 
 
 tection. 
 viroXct'ira) (viro + Xtir-, Xctir-, 
 
 XOITT-), leave behind. 
 viroirrevco (viro + oinrcv-), viro-Tr- 
 
 T6v<ra>, v-irwirrevo-a, etc., 
 
 [viro'irrr]s suspicious], sus- 
 
 pect, apprehend. 
 viro\|/d, -as, T), [viro, root 6ir-], 
 
 suspicion. 
 6<rTpatos, -a, -ov, [v<TTpos], 
 
 belonging to the next day ; 
 
 TQ vo-Tpaia (fijic'pq;), on the 
 
 next day. 
 vcrrepos, -a, -ov, late / vorepov, 
 
 adv., afterwards. 
 v^/TjXos, -rfj, -ov, [cf. v\|ros 
 
 height], high, lofty. 
 
 (^a-yeiv, inf., to eat. 
 
 <(>ava> (<|)av-, i-cl., H. 400 ; G. 
 
 594), 4>ava>, <|>T|va, 
 
 (H. 55, 6; G. 78), 
 
 7r'4>aor^ai, 4<j>av0T]v or 
 
 vi]v, show, cause to appear / 
 
 dir. mid. (and pass.) with 
 
 the 2d perf., appear. 
 <|>aXa-yg, -a-y-yos, TJ, battle-line, 
 
 army in battle order, Lat. 
 
 acies. 
 <|>avpo's, -a, -o'v, [<j>avw], 
 
 plain, evident; 4v TW <j>a- 
 
 vpp, in public. 
 
 4>ap|j.aKov, -ov, TO', drug. 
 
 <(>> (<)>p-, ol-, 4vK-, 
 
 Ivc-yK-), oi'cra), T]V < yKa (H. 
 438), TJvc-yicov, cvifvoxa, 
 VT)V-y}xai, "nvexOilv, bear, 
 carry. 
 
 (J^v-yw (<|>vy-, <|>vy-, strong- 
 vow, cl., H. 394; G. 572), 
 4>v^ofiau e(|>vyov, tr<|>vya, 
 flee ; go into exile, be in ex- 
 ile. 
 
 <|>T]|iC (<|>a-, root cl., H. 404 ; G. 
 619), <j>T|crw or 6pw. c(|>T]o-a or 
 ctirov, l'pT)Ka. 6\IpT]|Aai, Ipp^j- 
 0t]v, sa?/, declare, speak. 0(1 
 <j>Tl|it, say n ti refuse, 
 deny. The root of pw was 
 originally Fp- ; tpT]Ka is for 
 FFpt]Ka (Fpil-)^ ^pr)|jiat for 
 FtFpT][j.cu. eppTjO-qv for cFpi]- 
 6t]v. The root of ctirov was 
 originally petr- ; synopsis 
 
 Lirca. IUOL}1L. llT, cllTClV, 
 
 clircov. In compounds the 
 pres. syst. is usually supplied 
 by d'yopcvo). 
 
 <(>0av<o (4>8a-, nas. cl., H 402, 
 a ; G. 603), ^Grfo-ojiai, |>8a- 
 o-a or <)>0T)v, e<)>6aKa, get the 
 start of, anticipate. 
 
 (jnXc'a) (4>iX-), 4>tXT](rw, etc., 
 [<(>Xos], love. 
 
 <|>iXd, -as, T|, [<|)CXos], friend- 
 ship. 
 
 <|>Xu>s, -a, -ov, [<J>fXos], 
 friendly. 
 
352 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 4>(Xos, -TJ, -ov, friendly, dear. 
 As subst., friend. 
 
 <jnXo'<ro<|>os, -ov, d, [<|>CXos, <ro- 
 <|>o's] , lover of wisdom, phi- 
 losopher. 
 
 4>XvdpC6L, -ds, TJ, nonsense, folly. 
 
 <f>opw (4>ope-), 4>opTJcrco, etc., 
 [<(>6pos], frighten; pass., to 
 be afraid, fear. 
 
 4>6pos, -ov, o', fear. 
 
 4>OlVLKLOrTTJS, -OV, O, [<j>OtVlKlw 
 
 fr. <j>oivi|], purple-wearer; 
 <|>. Pao-(\ios, wearer of the 
 royal purple, a nobleman 
 allowed by the king to wear 
 the royal color. 
 (JXHVIKOVS, -fj, -ovv, contracted 
 
 fr. <|>OlvtKOS, -61, -OV, [<j>OL- 
 
 vij purple-red dye~\, purple- 
 red, red. 
 
 <|>patt, make known, tell. 
 
 4>povpapxos, -ov, o, [(jjpovpd 
 garrison, apx] , comman- 
 der of a garrison, comman- 
 dant. 
 
 $pvyd, -ds, fj, Phrygia. 
 
 ^>pvf, <pvyo's, o c , Phrygian. 
 
 <j>vycxs, -oSos, o c , [4>v-Y<>], ban- 
 ished man, exile. 
 
 <|>vXaKT]', -f]s, TI, [<j>vXaTTw], the 
 act of guarding / garrison, 
 guard. 
 
 4>vXa|, -aKos, o e , guard. 
 
 <J>vXciTT<i) (<)>vXaK-, i-cl., H. 397 ; 
 G. 580), <|>vXa<o, <|>v'Xa|a, 
 
 axri v, [^v'Xag] , guard ; 
 
 dir. mid., guard one's self 
 
 against. 
 
 4>vVis, -ws, TJ, nature. 
 <|)vToV, -ov, TO', plant. 
 <|>ijci), make grow. 
 4>covT), -f|s, TJ, sound, voice. 
 <j>a>s, <|)WTO'S, TO', light. 
 
 , -TJ, -o'v, difficult, hard ; 
 
 of persons, harsh, bitter, 
 
 dangerous. 
 XaXcirws, adv., [xaXciro's] , 
 
 with difficulty, hardly ; \o,- 
 
 Xcirws <|>p w b ear hardly, be 
 
 sorrowful. 
 XaXKovs, -fj, -ovv, contracted 
 
 from XO^XKCOS, -d, -ov, [x a ^- 
 
 KO'S bronze], brazen, of 
 
 bronze. 
 
 XapaKTTjp, -fjpos, o f , mark. 
 Xapcuro-o), scratch. 
 Xip, -o's, Tj, (but Du. G. D. 
 
 Xpotv, PI. dat. xpo*C), hand. 
 
 XcppOVTJO-OS, -OV, TJ, [X^PPOS, 
 
 earlier x^po"s ^y land, vfj- 
 o-os island], peninsula, es- 
 pecially the Thracian Cher- 
 sonesos. 
 
 xtXtot, -at, -a, a thousand. 
 pa, -as, TJ, she-goat. 
 , -wvos, o, garment worn 
 next the skin, tunic. 
 
GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 353 
 
 Xpoo|A<u 
 
 v, use, enjoy (primarily 
 serve one's self, hence taking 
 the dat. of means). In the 
 pres. syst. a- contracts to tj, 
 H. 412 ; G. 496. 
 prj, impers. verb, Lat. oportet, 
 one ought, must, it is neces- 
 
 XPrit (XPflS-, i-cl., H. 398; 
 G. 584, 585), want, desire. 
 
 XP% a -TOS, T0 '> [XP^F""]* in 
 
 the pi. property, money. 
 Xpo'vos, -ov, o, time. 
 Xpvo-Cov, -ov, TO, [xpvo-os], 
 
 gold coin, money. 
 Xpvo-ovs, -fj, -ovv, contr. fr. 
 
 XpvVeos, -a, -ov, [xpva-os], 
 
 golden. 
 
 Xpvo-o's, -ov, o f , gold. 
 Xpvo-oxaXivos, -ov, [xpv<ro's, 
 
 XaXivds bridle], with gold- 
 
 mounted bridle. 
 Xpa>|ia, -TOS, TO', color. 
 Xpa, -as, T|, land. 
 
 XP 1 1' etc -> 
 place], make place, 
 withdraw, go. 
 
 Xpov -ov, T6, [xpos place], 
 place, stronghold. 
 
 t|/&iov, -ov, TO', bracelet, arm- 
 let. 
 
 \|/vSos, -os, TO', falsehood. 
 
 \|fv'Sa> (t|/6v8-), xj/evVw, \|/vo-a. 
 \|/vo-fxat, \|/vV6T]v, deceive 
 by falsehood, prove false to ; 
 often dep. 
 TJ, --qs, TJ, 
 
 n. 
 
 wSe, adv., [88c], thus, as fol- 
 lows. 
 
 <p8t|, -fjs, T|, sow^, ode. 
 wv, ovo-a, 6v, pres. pple. of 
 
 1(XC. 
 
 oivios, -a, -ov, [wvos price] , for 
 sale. Td wvia, wares, goods 
 for sale. 
 
 pd, -as, T|, season, time. 
 
 u>s, proclitic, originally a rel. 
 adv. of manner, [8s], in 
 which way, as, how; then 
 a conj. with many derived 
 meanings. (1) Comparative, 
 as, how; special uses are, 
 (a) to strengthen a super!., 
 o>s Taxio-Ta, as quickly as 
 possible ; (&) to denote that 
 a participle states the idea 
 of some one else than the 
 writer, where we use various 
 phrases, as saying that, pre- 
 tending that, supposing that, 
 as he claimed, etc. (2) Tem- 
 poral = 8T, as, when. (3) 
 Causal = cireiS-if, as, since. 
 
354 
 
 GREEK-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 (4) Declarative = 8, how, 
 that. (5) Final = i'va, in 
 order that. (6) Prep. w. ace. 
 of a word referring to a per- 
 son = irapd, to. 
 wo-irp, rel. adv. of manner, 
 
 strengthened from s, just 
 as. 
 
 WO-T, conj., [o>s, T], so as, so 
 that. 
 
 (U(f>eXeCi) (0)4>\-), 0)4>\T]0-CO. 
 
 etc., [^><|>Xos], benefit, help. 
 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 A. 
 
 Able, am 
 About, 7rf.pi w. gen. 
 Accomplish, opda>. 
 According to, Kara w. ace. 
 Account, Aoyos, -ov, 6. 
 Acropolis, aKpoVoAts, -eo>s, 17. 
 Act like a tyrant, Tvpai/vcvw. 
 
 Actor, VTTOKplTyS, -OV, 6. 
 
 Adorn, Kooy/,(o. 
 
 Advise, o-v//,/2ovAeva). 
 
 Afar, TiJAe. 
 
 Affair, 7rpay//.a, -ros, TO. 
 
 Affirm, <r7/xi. 
 
 After, prep., /xcra w. ace. ; 
 
 COnj., eVei. 
 
 Again, TroAiv. 
 
 Against, cm or Trpos w. ace. 
 
 Agree, 6//,oAoyea>. 
 
 Air, a?/p, a epos, 6. 
 
 All, ?ras, Trao'a, Trav. 
 
 Alone, /xoVos, -7y, -ov. 
 
 Already, ^8?;. 
 
 Also, /cat. 
 
 Ambassador, aTrooroAos, -ov, 
 
 6. 
 
 Analysis, dVoAvo'is, -ews, ^. 
 Analyze, 
 
 Ancient, dpx a '?) , -ov. 
 
 And, /cat. 
 
 Angle, ytovta, -as, 17. 
 
 Animal, f<oov, -ov, TO. 
 
 Announce, dyyeAAco. 
 
 Answer, aTTOKptvo/xat. 
 
 Antagonist, 
 
 < c 
 
 -ov, o. 
 
 Any one, Tts, Tt. 
 Apollo, ATroAAan/, -os, 6. 
 Appear, 
 Appoint, 
 
 Are, they - , cto-t(v). 
 Around, Trept w. ace. 
 Arrange, Touro-a). 
 Arrangement, Ta^ts, -ews, ^. 
 Art, Ttxvrj, ^ %- 
 Artaxerxes, 'ApTa^epf^s, -ov, 
 
 c 
 O. 
 
 As, ojs. 
 
 Asia, 'Aat'a, -as, 17. 
 
 Ask, atT(o, epcoTaa). 
 
 As much as we could, lit. as 
 
 we most could. 
 Assembly, dyopa, -as, 17. 
 At, cv. 
 
 At a distance, T^Ac. 
 Athenians, 'A^vaiot, -a)v, ot. 
 355 
 
356 
 
 ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 Athlete, aOXrjTys, -ov, 6. 
 Athletic game, a#Xos, -ov, 6. 
 Attempt, noun, Treipa, -as, 77 ; 
 
 verb, Tretpaofuu. 
 At the side of, Trapa w. dat. 
 Aware, become - , ytyvco- 
 
 Away from, dbrd w. gen. 
 
 B. 
 
 Back, TroXiv. 
 
 Bad, KaKos, -77, -dv. 
 
 Ball, o~<atpa, -as, 77. 
 
 Barbarian, fidpflapos, -ov, 6. 
 
 Bare, yv//,vos, -77, -ov. 
 
 Battle, /Aax77, -77$, rj- 
 
 Be about (to), /xeXXto. 
 
 Bear, <epeo. 
 
 Beautiful, KoXos, -97, -ov. 
 
 Beauty, KoXXos, -eos, TO. 
 
 Because, on; 8ta w. article 
 and inf. in the ace. 
 
 Become, yiyvofuu. 
 
 Before, irpo w. gen. 
 
 Begin, apx<*>- Often ex- 
 pressed by the inceptive 
 aor. 
 
 Beginning, apxfj, -fc, ^- 
 
 Beside, Trapa w. dat. 
 
 Best, aptoros, -77, -ov; 
 O~TOS, -77, -ov. 
 
 Better, /^eXrfwv, 
 
 Beyond, iro-cp w. ace. 
 
 Bird, opvls, -0os, 6 or 77. 
 
 Birth, yeveo-ts, -eo>s, */. 
 
 Blame, atrtao/xoi. 
 
 , -ov, 
 
 Book, yStjSXt'ov, -ov, TO. 
 Bookseller, ySt^XtoTrwX 
 
 c 
 O. 
 
 Born, be - , ycyvopxu. 
 
 Boy, Trats, TratSos, 6. 
 
 Break, KXao> ; break down, 
 
 Breath, Trvev/xa, -TOS, TO. 
 Brother, d8eA</>os, -ov, 6. 
 Burn, /caw. 
 
 Burning, Kavo-TtKOs, ->;, -o'v. 
 But, dAAa, 8e. 
 
 By, denoting agency, VTTO w. 
 gen. 
 
 C. 
 
 Can, 
 Carry, 
 Carve, 
 
 Cause to revolt, d 
 Cause to stop, Travco. 
 Caustic, Kavo~TtKos, -77, -ov. 
 Certain, a - , TIS, Tt. 
 Character, ?^0os, -eos, TO. 
 Child, Trats, TraiSos, 6 or 77. 
 Choose, mid. of atpe'co. 
 Circle, KVAcXos, -ov, 6. 
 Citadel, d/cpoVoXts, -eos, 77. 
 Citizen, 7roXtTr7S, -ov, 6. 
 City, TroXts, -ccos, 77. 
 Color, xpco/xa, -TOS, TO. 
 Common, KOIVOS, -77, -ov. 
 Compare, Trapa^oXXo). 
 Comparison, Trapa/BoXy, -775, 77. 
 Composition, o-vv0eo-is, -ccos, 
 
 ^ 
 
 Conceal, 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 357 
 
 Concerning, Trepi w. gen. 
 Conquer, viKaa>. 
 Consult, mid. of o-v//,/?ovAevo>. 
 Contest, dyoiv, dytovos, 6. 
 Converse, StoAeyo/Aat. 
 Corner, ytovtd, -as, y. 
 Counsel, take counsel with, 
 
 mid. of o-v/A/SovAevw. 
 Count, dpi0/Aeo>. 
 
 Cut, TjUVa>. 
 
 Cyrus, Kvpos, -ov, 6. 
 D. 
 
 Dare, 
 
 Dead, ve/cpds, -a, -ov. 
 Decad, Se/<as, -8os> 17. 
 Declare, <r;/u. 
 Deed, Spdfux, -ros, TO. 
 Defeat, vZ/cdo), Kparcw. 
 Deliberate, mid. of /SovAevco. 
 Delphi, AeA<ot, -tov, ot. 
 Depose, Travw r^s dpx^5. 
 Description, Xdyos, -ov, 6. 
 Destroy, KaraXvw. 
 Digest, 7T7rra). 
 Discourse, A.oyos, -ov, 6. 
 Distance, at a - , TTJ\. 
 Distribute, ve/^o). 
 Divide, 8tatpea>. 
 Divinity, Sat/xwv, -ovos, 6. 
 Do, Trotea), Spaa). 
 Do good to, cv Trotea) w. ace. 
 Drama, 8pajw,a, -ros, TO. 
 Drug, <dpjnaKov, -ov, TO. 
 Dwell in, otKeo). 
 Dynast, Svvdo-T^s, -ov, 6. 
 
 E. 
 
 Earth, y^, y^s, 17. 
 
 Eat, to - , inf., <ayetv. 
 
 Educate, TratSevto. 
 
 Elder, 7rpeo-/3vrepos, -a, -ov. 
 
 Empty, KCVOS, -rj, -ov. 
 
 Enemy, 7roXep,tos, -ov, 6. 
 
 Enough, t/cavds, -77, -ov; to 
 
 avoid ambiguity apiOpov 
 
 may be added. 
 Enslave, SovAdo). 
 Envoy, aTrocrroAos, -ov, 6. 
 Epistle, eTrto-ToATy, -T)S, ^. 
 Equal, to-os, -ry, -ov. 
 Establish, KaOca-TrjfJU.. 
 Even, adj., 6/xaAds, -17, ov; 
 
 adv., /cat. 
 
 Ever, 7TOT6 enclitic. 
 Everything = all things, 
 
 Evident, c^avepds, -a, -ov. 
 Examine, o-KeVTo/xat. 
 Excel, VTrep/3dAAo). 
 Excess, vTrepjSoAr/, -^5, 17. 
 Exercise, yv/wi<o. 
 Expedition, make an - , 
 
 orpaTevo), usually mid. 
 Extravagance, vT 
 
 F. 
 
 Faithful, TTICTTOS, -17, -ov. 
 Falsehood, i/^vSos, -eos, TO. 
 Family, yevea, -as, 17. 
 Far, T^Ae. 
 Fear, ^o/Sos, -ov, 6. 
 
358 
 
 ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 Feeling, Traces, -eos, TO. 
 Few, oXtyot, -at, -a. 
 Figure, ctSos, -eos, TO. 
 Fire, Trvp, Trvpds, TO. 
 Firm, o~Tepeds, -a, -ov. 
 First, 7rpu>Tos, -77, -ov. 
 
 Fitting, think , dfioto. 
 
 Flesh, o-dp, o-apKos, 17. 
 Flower, dv#os, -eos, TO. 
 
 Foot, 7TOVS, TToSds, 6. 
 
 For, conj., yap. 
 
 For many months, ace. of 
 
 extent. 
 
 Force, Svva^is, -ea>s, 17. 
 Form, noun, pop<j>y, -77$, 17; 
 
 verb, 7rXao"o~a). 
 Free, eXev0epos, -a, -ov. 
 Friend, <i'Xos, -ov, 6. 
 From, aTTO w. gen., or ef w. 
 
 gen. 
 
 G. 
 
 Game, a0Xos, -ov, 6. 
 Genuine, ITV/AOS, -77, -ov. 
 Get into, sometimes KaOi- 
 
 O-TrjfU 15. 
 
 Get to revolt, 
 Give, oY8a>/Ai. 
 Go, Ip^o/xat, et/xt. 
 God, 0eos, -ov, 6. 
 Gold, xp^o"05> -<> o. 
 Good, dya^o?, -^, -ov. 
 Good health, vytcta, -a?, T). 
 Government, dp^, ->7S, 17. 
 Grasp, atpcco. 
 Grass, flordvrj, -775, T). 
 Grave, Ta<^os, -ov, 6. 
 
 Greek, "EXX^v, -os, 6. 
 
 Grow, make , <vo>. 
 
 Guardian, CTmrKOTros, -ov, 6. 
 Guide, dywyos, -ov, 6. 
 Gymnasium, yv/xvdo-tov, -ov, 
 TO. 
 
 H. 
 
 Hand, x^tp, -os, >;. 
 Hatred, /x,to;os, TO. 
 
 Have, l^^j c ^/ xt/ w< ^ a ^' ^ 
 possessor. 
 
 Have leisure, o-xoXda>. 
 
 He, she, it, as subj., not ex- 
 pressed unless emphatic ; 
 when emphatic, OVTOS, Ket- 
 vos. But he, 6 8c. His, 
 her, its, their, often ex- 
 pressed by the article only, 
 sometimes by the gen. of 
 avTOs. Him, her, it, them, 
 as obj., ace. of avTos. 
 
 Head, Ke^aXry, -775, 7). 
 
 Health, vyteta, -as, 7;. 
 
 Hear, d/<ovo). 
 
 Heat, OepjjLov, -ov, TO. 
 
 Help, fioYJOeta, -as, 77. 
 
 Helper, orvvepyds, -ov, 6. 
 
 Her, poss., translated by the 
 article. 
 
 Herb, Pordvr), -779, 77. 
 
 Hide, Sep/xa, -TOS, TO. 
 
 Himself, herself, etc., avro?, 
 -77, -d; when reflexive, cav- 
 TOV, -^s, -ov. 
 
 Hippopotamus, t7T7ro7r6Va//,os, 
 -ov, 6. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 359 
 
 His, see He. 
 History, toroptd, -as, 17. 
 Honor, Tt//,aa>. 
 Honorable, /coAos, -17, -ov. 
 Horn, /cepas, /ceparo>, TO. 
 Horse, TTTTTOS, -ov, 6. 
 House, OIKOS, -ov, 6. 
 House of the muses, 
 crciov, -ov, TO. 
 
 I. 
 
 I, eyw, e//,ov or p&v. 
 
 Ice, KpvoTaAA,os, -ov, 6. 
 
 If, el, lav. 
 
 Illustration, irapa/3oXfy -^s, 17. 
 
 Image, CIKUJV, -ovos, 17. 
 
 Imitate, /xi/xo/>uu. 
 
 Imitator, JUU/AOS, -ov, 6. 
 
 In, cv w. dat. 
 
 Inhabit, ot/cew. 
 
 Inquire, cptoraw. 
 
 Inside, Icrw. 
 
 Instead of, avTt w. gen. 
 
 Instrument, opyavov, -ov, TO. 
 
 Into, cts w. ace. 
 
 Ionian s, *Io>ves, -vo>v, ot. 
 
 Is, ccm'(V). 
 
 It, see jfiTe. 
 
 Its, translated by the article. 
 
 Itself, avros, -17, -o. 
 
 J. 
 
 Judge, verb, /cpfvw; noun, 
 , -ov, 6. 
 
 K. 
 
 Kept trying, imperf . of verb 
 
 for try. 
 
 Kind, yevos, -cos, TO. 
 King, /3ao~iAevs, -e<os, 6. 
 Know, ot8a, inf. 
 
 sometimes inf. and perf. 
 
 of yiyvwo-Kco. Learn to 
 
 know, ytyv(oo"/co). 
 Known, make 
 
 L. 
 
 Ladder, KA.i)ua, -KOS, 17. 
 Land, y^, y>/s, 17- 
 Language, yAwo-o-a, -i;s, 17. 
 Large, /Aa/cpos, -a, -ov. 
 Laughter, yeA.o>s, -WTOS, 6. 
 Law, VO/AOS, -ov, 6. 
 Lead, ayw. 
 
 Leader, dywyds, -ov, 6. 
 Learn, jjuavOdvo). 
 Learn to know, ytyv<oo-/o. 
 Legend, //,v0os, -ov, 6. 
 Leisure, o*^oA?7, -^s, 17 ; have 
 
 leisure, o~xoAaa>. 
 Lesson, /xa^^/xa, -ros, TO. 
 Letter (of the alphabet), 
 
 ypa//yxa, -ros, TO. 
 Letter (epistle), 
 
 Level, 6/xaA.os, -17, -ov. 
 
 Life, yStos, -ov, 6. 
 
 Life, mode of - , oYan-a, 
 
 Light, <^>cos, 
 
 Like, o/Aotos, -a, -ov. 
 
360 
 
 ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 Line, crrt^os, -ov, 6. 
 Little, /u/cpds, -a, -ov. 
 Live, oiAcea). 
 Lonely, e/jTy/xos, -77, -ov. 
 Long, ^a/epos, -a, -ov ; a long 
 
 time, TroAvv \povov. 
 Loose, Avo>. 
 Loosing, Averts, -ecus, 77. 
 
 Lung, TTVCV/ACOV, -OV09, 6. 
 
 M. 
 
 Machine, 
 Make, 7roteo>. 
 Make grow, < 
 Make known, 
 Man, av0po)7ros, -ov, 6. 
 Many, TroAAoi, TroAAat, ?roAAa. 
 Marathon, Mapafltov, -coves, 6. 
 Mariner, vavr^s, -or, 6. 
 Mark, ^apa/crT/p, -^pos, 6. 
 Marriage, ya^os, -ov, 6. 
 Master, SecrTroV^s, -ov, 6. 
 Matter, ?rpay/xa, -ros, TO. 
 Measure, ^terpov, -ov, TO. 
 Measuring-rod, Kavwv, -dvos, 
 
 6. 
 
 Memory, fwrjprj, -779, ?;. 
 Messenger, ayyeAos, -ov, 6. 
 Mix, Kpavvv/xt. 
 Mixing-bowl, /cpaT^p, -^pos, 
 
 6. 
 
 Mode of life, oYaiTa, -175, T). 
 Month, /U.T/V, /xryvds, 6. 
 Most, adv., fjLaAi<rTa. 
 Mould, TrAao^o-o). 
 Much, iroAvs, TroAA^, TroAv. 
 
 Muse, /xovo-a, -779, ?). 
 Museum, /xovo-etov, -ov, TO. 
 Music, fjiovo-LKrjj -i}s, T). 
 
 N. 
 
 Naked, yvjiu/ds, -97, -ov. 
 Name, ovv/xa, -TOS, TO. 
 Nature, <vVis, -<os, 77. 
 Neither . . . nor, OVTC . 
 
 OVT. 
 
 Never, OVTTOTC, /AT^TTOTC. 
 New, veos, -a, -ov. 
 North-wind, /3opeds, -ov, 
 Nose, pfs, ptvds, 77. 
 Not, ov, OVK, ov^, ^77. 
 Not yet, OVTTO). 
 Now, vvv. 
 Number, ap^ftds, -ov, 6. 
 
 O. 
 
 Ode, (0877, -779, 77. 
 Often, TToAAaKts. 
 Older, Trpeo-ySvTcpos, -a, -ov. 
 Oligarchy, oAtyapxtd, -as, 77. 
 On, 7Ti w. dat. 
 Once, ?roT, enclitic. 
 One's self, lavTov, -775, -ov. 
 Only, only one, /xdvos, -77, -ov. 
 Opinion, Sofa, -775, rj ; Soyyma, 
 
 -TOS, TO. 
 
 Orator, p77Ta>p, -opos, 6. 
 Origin, yev0"ts, -ecus, 17. 
 Other, aAAos, -77, -ov ; erepos, 
 
 -a, -ov. 
 Ought, xp77, impers., w. inf. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 361 
 
 Outdo, v? 
 
 Out of, c, /c, w. gen. 
 
 Outside, cf <o. 
 
 Overseer, eTria-Korros, -ov, 6. 
 
 Own, one's own, i&os, -a, -ov. 
 
 P. 
 
 Pain, oAyos, -eos, TO. 
 Park, TrapaSeto-os, -ov, 6. 
 Passion, 7ra0os, -cos, TO. 
 Pedagogue, TraiSaytoyos, -ov, 
 
 6. 
 
 People, &7/xos, -ov, 6. 
 Perceive, aicr0avo/xai, yiyvco- 
 
 O7CO). 
 
 Persian, Ilepo-T/s, -ov, 6. 
 Philosopher, <iAoo-o</>os, -ov, 
 
 6. 
 
 Pipe, avAos, -ov, 6. 
 Pirate, TreipaTiys, -ov, 6. 
 Place, noun, TOTTOS, -ov, 6; 
 
 verb, riOrjfu. 
 
 Place, take , yiyvojLuu. 
 
 Plan, )8ovAcvo). 
 Plant, <VTOV, -ov, TO. 
 Plot against, cVi/itovAcva). 
 Poet, TTOI^T^S, -ov, 6. 
 Position, 0ns, -cws, 17. 
 Power, 8vva/us, -ca>s, ^. 
 Prevent, /ccoAvo). 
 Priest, tcpevs, -ccos, 6. 
 Prime, aK/xrJ, -i}s, ^. 
 Private, tStos, -a, -ov. 
 Prize, a^Aov, -ov, TO. 
 Procure the release of, mid. 
 
 of Avw, 
 
 Prophet, /xavTts, -ea>s, 6. 
 Put, TiOrjfU. 
 
 Put together, owrt'0i?/u. 
 Putting together, o-v 
 -(os, 17. 
 
 R. 
 
 Race, kind, yei/os, -eos, TO. 
 Race, running, Spo/ios, -ov, 6. 
 Ransom, mid. of Avo>. 
 Read, dvaytyv(oo*K(o. 
 Real, ITV/XOS, -17, -ov. 
 Recognize, ytyvwo-Kto. 
 Reign, reign over, /?ao-iAevo>. 
 Release, Avo>. 
 Reply, aTTOKptvo/xat. 
 Report, ayyeAAo). 
 Revolt, mid. (with /u-aor. and 
 
 perf. act.) of <l<icrn7/Ai. 
 Right, op#os, -ry, -ov. 
 River, TroTa/xos, -ov, 6. 
 Road, 6805, -ov, 17. 
 Rose, poSov, -ov, TO. 
 Rule, noun, /cavcov, -ovos, 6; 
 
 verb, apx>' 
 
 Ruler, Svvao-Tr/s, -ov, 6. 
 Running, 8po/xos, -ov, 6. 
 
 S. 
 
 Sacred, tepos, -a, -ov. 
 Sailor, vavT^s, -ov, 6. 
 Same, 6 avros, ^ avTiy, TO 
 
 avTo. 
 
 Satrap, o-aTpctTr^s, -ov, 6. 
 Say, <f>r]iAL, Acyco. 
 Sceptre, cnaJTrrpov, -ov ? TO. 
 
362 
 
 ENGLISH-GEEEE: VOCABULABY. 
 
 Scheme against, 7ri/:tovA.ei;'(o. 
 School, o~xoA.T7, -775, 77. 
 Scratch, xapacroxo. 
 Season, copa, -as, 77. 
 Secret, /AVOTIKOS, -77, -ov. 
 Secret doctrine, //.vor^piov, 
 
 -OV, TO. 
 
 See, 6paa> ; fut. ctyo/xai. 
 
 Seize, aipeco. 
 
 Sell, 7ra)A.O). 
 
 Send, aWAAo). 
 
 Send away, aTrooreAAci). 
 
 Set up, fcrrr//^. 
 
 Seven, CTTTOI. 
 
 Seventh, c/3So/xos, -77, -ov. 
 
 Shape, cISos, -eos, TO. 
 
 She-goat, ^t/iatpa, -as, 77. 
 
 Ship, vavs, vews, 77. 
 
 Show, noun, fled, -as, 77 ; verb, 
 
 </>atVto. 
 Side, at the side of, 7ra/oa w. 
 
 dat. 
 
 Sight, ^ea, -as, 17. 
 Skill, TexvT?, -775, ^. 
 Skin, 8ep/u.a, -ros, TO. 
 Slave, SovXos, -ov, 6. 
 Small, /xt/cpos, -d, -ov. 
 So, OVTO>(S). 
 
 Sokrates, 5a>KpaT?7S, -ovs, 6. 
 Soldier, o"TpaTta)T77S, -ov, 6. 
 Solid, orepeos, -a, -ov. 
 Solitary, p77/x,os, -17, -ov. 
 Something, TI, enclitic. 
 Sometime, -TTOTC, enclitic. 
 Son, Trats, 7rat8os, 6. 
 Song, ode, 0)877, "^? ^ 5 strain 
 
 of music, ^c'Aos, -eos, TO. 
 
 Soothsayer, /AavTts, -ca>s, 6. 
 Sort, what - of a, otos, -a, 
 -ov. 
 
 Soul, \fixn) -fa ft- 
 
 Sound, noun, ^>a)v>7, -775, 17 ; 
 
 verb, <^a)Va>. 
 Spartans, Aa/ceSat/Aovtot, -a>v, 
 
 c 
 01. 
 
 Speak, Xcyo). 
 
 Sphere, o"^)arpa, -as, 77. 
 
 Spirit, 8at/>ta)v, -ovos, 6. 
 
 Split, o-xt'a>. 
 
 Staff, cr/c^TTTpov, -ov, TO. 
 
 Stand, perf., plup., and fut. 
 
 perf. act. of io-Trjfu. 
 Star, ao-Tpov, -ov, TO. 
 Statue, ctkwv, -ovos, 77. 
 Stone, At^os, -ov, 6. 
 
 Stop, TTttVO). 
 
 Story, lo~Topt'a, -as, 77. 
 Straight, op^os, -77, -ov. 
 Street, 68os, -ov, 77. 
 Strength, /cpaTos, -eos, TO. 
 Strike, TVTTTO). 
 Struggle, dycovt^o/xat. 
 Summit, 0,^77, -775, ). 
 Sun, 77X105, -ov, 6. 
 Suppose, oto/Aat. 
 Surpass, vtKaa>. 
 
 T. 
 
 Take, . 
 
 Take apart, dvoAvo). 
 
 Take counsel with, mid. of 
 
 <TVjJi/3oV\V<l). 
 
 Take place, ytyvo/xat. 
 
ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 363 
 
 Taking apart, dvoAvo-is, -eo>s, 
 
 * 
 
 Tale, jjivOos, -ov, 6. 
 
 Talk, Aoyos, -ov, 6. 
 
 Teach, StScurjcco. 
 
 Teacher, SiSao-KoAos, -ov, 6. 
 
 Tell, <pa<o, Ae'yw. 
 
 Ten, SeKa. 
 
 Than, 77, or the gen. case. 
 
 That, conj., on; after ^TJ/U 
 and some other verbs, ex- 
 pressed by the inf. mode. 
 
 That, rel. pron., os, 77, o. 
 
 The, 6, 77, TO. 
 
 Theatre, ^earpov, -ov, TO. 
 
 Their, see JETe. 
 
 Them, see He. 
 
 Themselves, see Himself. 
 
 Then, TOTC. 
 
 There, often not translated 
 at the beginning of a sent. 
 
 They, see He. 
 
 Thing, often omitted, some- 
 times Trpayfta, -ros, TO. 
 
 Think, oto/xat. 
 
 Thirty, TptaKovra. 
 
 Three, Tpets. 
 
 Throat, Aapuy, -7705, 6. 
 
 Through, 8ta w. gen. 
 
 Throw, /?aXXa>. 
 
 Time, ^povos, -ov, 6 ; season, 
 wpd, -a?, 17. 
 
 To, with verbs of motion, 
 TU or ts w. ace. 
 
 Together, 6/xov. 
 
 Tomb, Ta^)os, -or, 6. 
 
 Tongue, yXwo-o-a, -779, ^. 
 
 Top, aKpov, -ov, TO. 
 
 Tree, SevSpov, -ov, TO. 
 
 True, 6TV/X05, -77, -ov. 
 
 Try, Tretpaojitat. 
 
 Turn, verb, TpeVw; noun, 
 
 TpO7TO9, -OV, 6. 
 
 Type, TVTTOS, -ov, 6. 
 Tyrant, Tvpawos, -ov, 6. 
 
 U. 
 
 Unable, be , ov SvVa/juit. 
 
 Under, VTTO w. dat. 
 Undo, X'jw. 
 Unloose, dvoAvo). 
 Upon, 7rt w. dat. 
 Upright, op0os, -77, -ov. 
 Used to, expressed by the 
 imperf. tense. 
 
 V. 
 
 Vanquish, vt/ccuo. 
 
 Victorious, be , vt/caw. 
 
 View, o~K7TTo/xat. 
 Voice, <^a>vi7, -779, 77. 
 
 W. 
 
 War, TroXc/Aos, -ov, 6. 
 Was, T^V. 
 
 Water, vSwp, V&ITOS, TO. 
 Way, 6809, -ov, 17. 
 Week, I^So/xcis, -01805, r). 
 Weight, /3apos, -05, TO. 
 Well, cv. 
 Were, 
 
364 
 
 ENGLISH-GREEK VOCABULARY. 
 
 What? TL. 
 
 When, ore, CTTCI, see note on 
 
 140, I., 3. 
 When ? TroVe. 
 Which, see Who. 
 While, ore. 
 Who, which, that, what, rel. 
 
 pron., os, 17, o. 
 Who? TI'S. 
 Whole, oAos, -r;, -ov. 
 Why? TI'. 
 
 Wind, Trvev/xa, -ros, TO. 
 Wisdom, oxx^ia, -as, 17. 
 Wise, oxx^os, ->/, -ov. 
 Wish, /3ov\ofjjai. 
 With, /xcra w. gen., cruv w. 
 
 dat., or sometimes the 
 
 simple dat. 
 
 Within, ccro). 
 Word, Xoyos, -ov, 6. 
 Work, pyov, -ov, TO. 
 World, Koo-ftos, -ov, 6. 
 W'orship, 0epa7rev(i>. 
 Write, ypa<#)w. 
 Writing, ypa/x^na, -TOS, TO. 
 
 X. 
 
 Xenophon, Hcvo^wv, -WVTOS, 
 
 Xerxes, 
 
 , -ov, 6. 
 
 Y. 
 
 Young, veos, -a, -ov. 
 Younger, vecoTcpos, -a, -ov. 
 Youth, 17)817, -^s, ^. 
 
INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 
 
 A-, an- (privative) 60, 3, b. 
 Acephalous 31, 5. 
 Acme 29; 31, 1. 
 Acoustic 34 ; 36, 1. 
 Acoustics 36, 1 ; 36, 6. 
 Acropolis 94. 
 Acrostic 94; 96, 1. 
 Adelphi 58 ; 59, I, 9. 
 Aerate 86, 2. 
 Aerial 86, 2. 
 Aeriform 86, 2. 
 Aerolite 86, 2. 
 Aeronaut 86, 2. 
 Aesthetic 78, 1 ; 78, 11. 
 Aesthetics 78, 1. 
 Agatha 66. 
 Agnostic 60, 3, b. 
 Agonize 84. 
 Agony 84 ; 86, 1. 
 Air 84 ; 86, 2. 
 Albuminoid 91, 5. 
 Allopathy 89 ; 91, 1. 
 Alpha and Omega 2, a. 
 Alphabet 2. 
 Amnesty 100, 9. 
 Amorphous 60, 3, b. 
 Amphibious 57, 6. 
 Amphitheatre 57, 6. 
 
 Anabaptist 51, 5, b. 
 Anachronism 51, 5, b. 
 Anaesthesia 78, 1. 
 Anaesthetic 78, 1. 
 Anagram 51, 5, b. 
 Analogon 51, 5, b. 
 Analogous 51, 5, b. 
 Analogue 51, 5, b. 
 Analogy 51, 5, b. 
 Analysis 94; 96, 7; 100, 10, a. 
 Analytic 96, 7. 
 Analyze 94. 
 Anarchy 82, 1, b. 
 Anathema 100, 10, c. 
 Anathematize 100, 10, c. 
 Anatomy 105, 10. 
 Anchor 6, a. 
 Anecdote 100, 3. 
 Angel 58. 
 
 Anhydrous 60, 3, b. 
 Annapolis 96, 11. 
 Anomalous 103 ; 105, 7. 
 Anomaly 105, 7. 
 Anonymous 91, 9. 
 Antagonist 84. 
 Antagonize 84. 
 Anthem 68, 1. 
 Anther 98. 
 
366 INDEX OF ENGLISH JDEBIVATIVES. 
 
 Anthology 100, 1. 
 Anthropoid 91, 5. 
 Anthropology 49. 
 Anthropomorphic 59, I, 12. 
 Anthropomorphism 60, 6. 
 Anthropophagi 77, 1, 2. 
 Anthropophagous 77, I, 2. 
 Anti- 68, 1. 
 Antidote 100, 3. 
 Antinomian 68, 1. 
 Antinomy 68, 1. 
 Antipathy 91, 10. 
 Antiperiodic 68, 1. 
 Antiphone 68, 1. 
 Antipode 82, 7. 
 Antipodes 80 ; 82, 7. 
 Antislavery 68, 1. 
 Antithesis 100, 10, a. 
 Antithetic 100, 10, a. 
 Apathetic 91, 10. 
 Apathy 91, 10. 
 Aphelion 56, II, 4. 
 Apocrypha 110, 7. 
 Apogee 31, 3; 57, 1. 
 Apologetic 57, 1. 
 Apologize 57, 1. 
 Apologue 57, 1. 
 Apology 54 ; 57, 1. 
 Apostasy 105, 5. 
 Apostate 105, 5. 
 Apostle 58 ; 60, 7. 
 Apostolic 60, 7. 
 Apothecary 100, 10, b. 
 Apotheosis 60, 3, c. 
 Arch- 82, 1, b. 
 Archaeology 80 ; 82, 1, a. 
 
 Archaic 82, 1, a. 
 Archaism 82, 1, a. 
 Archangel 82, 1, b. 
 Archbishop 82, 1, b ; 74, 9. 
 Archduke 82, 1, b. 
 Archetype 82, 1, a. 
 Archi- 82, 1, b. 
 Archiepiscopal 82, 1, b ; 74, 9. 
 Architect 82, 1, b. 
 Archives 82, 1, b. 
 Archthief 82, 1, b. 
 Aristocracy 90, 1, 1 ; 91, 7. 
 Aristocrat 89; 90, 1, 1; 91, 7. 
 Arithmetic 76. 
 Aster 68, 2. 
 Asterisk 68, 2. 
 Asteroid 91, 5. 
 Astral 66. 
 Astrology 68, 2. 
 Astronomy 67, II, 9 ; 68, 2. 
 Atheist 60, 3, b. 
 Athlete 84. 
 Atom 105, 10. 
 
 Autobiography 66 ; 67, 1, 2. 
 Autocrat 91, 7. 
 Autograph 67, I, 2. 
 Automatic 68, 3, a. 
 Automaton 68, 3, a. 
 Autonomous 67, 1, 3 ; 68, 3, a. 
 Autonomy 68, 3, a. 
 Autopsy 78, 5. 
 Autotype 78, 9. 
 
 Baptize 51, 5, b. 
 Baritone 110, 3. 
 Barometer 108. 
 
INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 367 
 
 Barytone 110, 3. 
 Basil 96, 2. 
 Basilica 96, 2. 
 Basilisk 96, 2. 
 Bible 66. 
 
 Bibliography 68, 4. 
 Bibliomancy 100, 7. 
 Bibliomania 68, 4. 
 Bibliophile 68, 4. 
 Bibliopole 66. 
 Bibliotheke 100, 10, b. 
 Bicycle 60, 5. 
 Bigamy 91, 2. 
 Bimetallist 68, 9. 
 Biography 49; 50,1,2; 51,1. 
 Biology 50, II, 5; 51, 1. 
 Bishop 74, 9. 
 Boreas 44. 
 Botanic 31, 2. 
 Botanist 31, 2. 
 Botany 29; 31, 2. 
 Bureaucracy 91 , 7. 
 Bureaucrat 91, 7. 
 
 Cacodoxy 68, 7. 
 Cacography 68, 7. 
 Cacophony 66 ; 68, 7. 
 Calligraphy 91, 6. 
 Callisthenics 91, 6. 
 Canon 84 ; 86, 6. 
 Canonical 86, 6. 
 Canonize 86, 6. 
 Catacomb 51, 5, c. 
 Catalogue 51, 5, c. 
 Catarrh 7. 
 Catholic 110, 10. 
 
 Caustic 108. 
 Cauterize 110, 6. 
 Cautery 110, 6. 
 Cenotaph 98 ; 99, I, 3. 
 Cephalalgia 31, 5; 110,2. 
 Cephalic 29; 31,5. 
 Cephalopod 82, 7. 
 Character 84; 86, 10. 
 Characteristic 86, 10. 
 Characterize 86, 10. 
 Chimaera, or Chimera 39 ; 41, 
 
 5. 
 
 Chimerical 41, 5. 
 Chirography 34 ; 35, 1,3. 
 Chiromancy 100, 7. 
 Chiropodist 82, 7. 
 Chord 110, 11. 
 Chromatic 91, 14. 
 Chrome 89. 
 Chromo91, 14. 
 Chromolithograph 91 , 14. 
 Chronic 51, 7. 
 Chronicle 51, 7. 
 Chronology 49 ; 50, II, 1 ; 51, 1. 
 Chronometer 56, II, 1. 
 Chrysalis 76; 78, 10. 
 Chrysanthemum 78, 10. 
 Chryselephantine 78, 10. 
 Chrysolite 78, 10. 
 Climacteric 78, 3. 
 Climax 76. 
 Comedy 31, 7. 
 Constantinople 96, 11. 
 Cosmetic 49 ; 51, 4. 
 Cosmic 51, 4. 
 Cosmical 51, 4. 
 
368 INDEX OF ENGLISH LEEIVATIVES. 
 
 Cosmogony 91, 3; 95, I, 2. 
 Cosmopolitan 51, 4. 
 Cosmopolite 50, II, 1 ; 51, 1 ; 
 
 51,4. 
 
 Cosmorama 49 ; 51, 4. 
 Cosmos 49; 51, 4. 
 -cracy 91, 7. 
 -crat 91, 7. 
 Crater 103; 105, 6. 
 Crisis 46, 1. 
 Criterion 46, 1. 
 Critic 44 ; 46, 1. 
 Critical 46, 1. 
 Criticism 46, 1. 
 Criticise 46, 1. 
 Crypt 108. 
 Crystal 58. 
 Cycle 58. 
 Cyclone 58. 
 Cyclopaedia 82, 6. 
 
 Daemon 86, 3. 
 Daemonic 86, 3. 
 Daimon 86, 3. 
 Daimonic 86, 3. 
 Decad 68, 9 ; 80. 
 Decade 80. 
 
 Decagon 80; 81, II, 1. 
 Decagram 82, 3; 91, 4. 
 Decalogue 82, 3. 
 Decameter 82, 3. 
 Decarchy 82, 1, b. 
 Delta 2, a. 
 Deltoid 91, 5. 
 Demagogue 72 ; 73, I, 1. 
 Democracy 90, 1, 2 ; 91, 7. 
 
 Democrat 91, 7. 
 Demon 84 ; 86, 3. 
 Demonic 86, 3. 
 Demonology 86, 3. 
 Demotic 74, 1. 
 Derm 98. 
 Despot 44. 
 Devil 46, 3; 60,7. 
 Di- 96, 1. 
 Dia- 78, 8. 
 
 Diabolical 46, 3 ; 60, 7. 
 Diacritical 78, 8. 
 Diaeresis 105, 1. 
 Diagnosis 78, 8. 
 Diagonal 82, 2. 
 DialectlOS; 105,2. 
 Dialectics 105, 2. 
 Dialogue 105, 2. 
 Diameter 54; 56, 1, 3. 
 Diapason 110, 11. 
 Diaphanous 72; 74, 11. 
 Diastole 78, 8. 
 Didactic 108 ; 110, 4. 
 DieresislOS; 105, 1. 
 Diet 39; 41, 3; 41,5. 
 Digraph 96, 1. 
 Dilemma 110, 8. 
 Dimorphic, -ous 96, 1. 
 Diorama 57, 2. 
 Diphthong 5; 68, 9; 96, 1. 
 Dissyllable 110, 8. 
 Distich 96, 1. 
 Dogma 108 ; 110, 5. 
 Dogmatic 110, 5. 
 Dogmatize 110, 5. 
 Dose 98 ; 100, 3, 
 
INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 369 
 
 Doxology 68, 5. 
 Drama 98. 
 Dramatic 100, 4. 
 Dramatist 100, 4. 
 Dramaturgy 100, 4. 
 Drastic 100, 4. 
 Dromedary 51, 3. 
 Dynamic 96, 5. 
 Dynamite 94. 
 Dynamo 96, 5. 
 Dynamo-electric 96, 5. 
 Dynast 94. 
 Dynasty 94. 
 Dyspepsia 103 ; 105, 8. 
 Dyspeptic 105, 8. 
 
 Eclectic 100, 1. 
 Economy 74, 6. 
 Ecstasy 105, 5. 
 Ecstatic 105, 5. 
 Electricity 96, 5. 
 Elephant 78, 10. 
 Emphasis 74, 11. 
 Emphatic 74, 11. 
 Empiric 108 ; 110, 12. 
 Empyrean 86, 8. 
 Encephalon 30, II, 5 ; 31, 5. 
 Encyclical 59, I, 5. 
 Encyclopaedia 82, 6. 
 Energy 54; 56, II, 5. 
 Entomology 105, 10. 
 Eph- 68, 6. 
 Ephemeral 68, 6. 
 Ephemeris 68, 6. 
 Epi- 68, 6. 
 Epidemic 74, 1 ; 105, 3. 
 
 Epidermis 100, 2. 
 Epiglottis 68, 6. 
 Epigram 68, 6; 91, 4. 
 Epigraphy 68, 6. 
 Epilepsy 110, 8. 
 Epilogue 68, 6. 
 Epiphany 74, 11. 
 Epiphyte 96, 14. 
 Episcopacy, 74, 9. 
 Episcopal 72 ; 74, 9. 
 Epistle 58 ; 60, 7. 
 Epistolary 60, 7. 
 Epitaph 99, 1, 2. 
 Epithet 100, 10, a. 
 Epitome 105, 10. 
 Epizootic 105, 3. 
 Epode 68, 6. 
 Eponym, 91, 9. 
 Eponymous 91, 9. 
 Eremite 84 ; 86, 5. 
 Esoteric 80; 82, 5. 
 Ethic 100, 5. 
 Ethical 100, 5. 
 Ethics 98; 100,5. 
 Etymology 72 ; 74, 2. 
 Etymon 74, 2. 
 Eugene 91, 3. 
 Eugenia 91, 3. 
 Eugenie 91, 3. 
 Eulogium 51, 5, a. 
 Eulogize 51, 5, a. 
 Eulogy 51, 5, a. 
 Eupepsia 105, 8. 
 Eupeptic 104, I, 8; 105,8. 
 Euphemism 108 ; 110, 15. 
 Euphemistic 110, 15, 
 
370 INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 
 
 Euphony 34 ; 35, I, 5 ; 36, 2 ; 
 
 68, 7. 
 
 Evangel 60, 1. 
 Evangelical 60, 1. 
 Evangelize 60, 1. 
 Exodus 57, 3. 
 Exoteric 82, 5. 
 Exotic 80 ; 82, 5. 
 
 Fancy 74, 11. 
 Fantastic 74, 11. 
 Fantasy 74, 11. 
 
 Genealogy 89. 
 
 Genesis 94 ; 96, 3. 
 
 Genetic 96, 3. 
 
 Geography 29; 30,1,8; 31,3. 
 
 Geology 31, 3; 50, 11,5. 
 
 Geometry 31, 3; 57, 4. 
 
 George 57, 4. 
 
 Gloss 41, 1. 
 
 Glossary 39 ; 41, 1. 
 
 Glottis 41, 1. 
 
 Gnome 51, 2. 
 
 Gnostic 49; 51, 2; 60, 3, b. 
 
 Goniometer 82, 2. 
 
 Grammar 91, 4. 
 
 Grammatical 91, 4. 
 
 Graphic 31, 4; 82, 10. 
 
 Graphite 31, 4. 
 
 Gymnasium 76. 
 
 Gymnast 78, 2. 
 
 Gymnastic '78, 2. 
 
 Gymnic 78, 2. 
 
 Hades 7, a. 
 
 Harmony 51, 7. 
 Hebdomadal 80 ; 82, 4. 
 Hebe 29. 
 Heliacal 57, 5. 
 Helianthus 100, 1. 
 Heliometer 57, 5. 
 Heliotrope 54 ; 56, II, 9. 
 Heliotype 78, 9. 
 Hemi- 41, 3. 
 Hemisphere 41, 3. 
 Heptarchy 80; 82, 1, b. 
 Heresy 105, 1. 
 Heretic 103; 105, 1. 
 Hermit 86, 5. 
 Heterodox 66 ; 68, 5. 
 Heterogeneous 91, 3. 
 Heterophemy 110, 15. 
 Hexagon 82, 2. 
 Hierarchy 94; 95,11, 1. 
 Hieratic 74, 1; 96, 6. 
 Hieroglyphic 94. 
 Hieroglyphics 96, 6. 
 Hieronymus 96, 6. 
 Hierophant 96, 6. 
 Hippodrome 58 ; 60, 4. 
 Hippopotamus 58 ; 59, 1, 2. 
 Historiographer 35, II, 5. 
 History 34 ; 36, 3. 
 Holocaust 108 ; 110, 10. 
 Homer 7. 
 Homoeopathy 89 ; 90, II, 10 ; 
 
 91, 1. 
 
 Homogeneous 91, 3; 91, 8. 
 Homonym 91, 8; 91, 9. 
 Homonymous 91, 8. 
 Holography 30, 1, 9 ; 31, 3. 
 
INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 371 
 
 Horologe 31, 8; 51, 5, a. 
 Horometer 31, 8; 57, 4. 
 Horoscope 31, 8 ; 74, 9. 
 Hour 29 ; 31, 8. 
 Hydra 60, 9. 
 Hydrant 60, 9. 
 Hydraulic 58; 59,1, 1. 
 Hydraulics 58; 59, I, 1. 
 Hydrography 60, 9. 
 Hydrometer 60, 9. 
 Hydropathy 91, 10. 
 Hydrophobia 58 ; 60, 9. 
 Hydrostatics 105, 5. 
 Hygeia39; 41, 4. 
 Hygiene 41, 4. 
 Hygienic 41, 4. 
 Hyper- 46, 6. 
 Hyperbole 45. 
 
 Hyperborean 45, I, 8 ; 46, 6. 
 Hypercritical 44 ; 46, 6. 
 Hypo- 100, 2. 
 Hypocrisy 76. 
 Hypocrite 76. 
 Hypodermis 100, 2. 
 Hypodermic 100, 2. 
 Hypothecate 100, 10, b. 
 Hypothesis 100, 10, a. 
 
 -ic 78, 11. 
 
 Iconoclasm 84 ; 86, 4. 
 Iconoclast 85, I, 10; 86, 4. 
 Iconography 86, 4. 
 -ide 91, 5. 
 Idiocrasy 105, 5. 
 Idiom 103 ; 105, 4. 
 Idiomatic 105, 4. 
 
 Idiopathic 104, II, 1. 
 
 Idiosyncrasy 105, 6. 
 
 Idiot 105, 4. 
 
 Indianapolis 96, 11. 
 
 Iota 2, a. 
 
 -ise 86, 11. 
 
 -ism 86, 11. 
 
 Isochronous 74, 3. 
 
 Isometric 74, 3. 
 
 Isosceles 74, 3. 
 
 Isothermal 72 ; 73, 1, 12 ; 74, 3. 
 
 -ist 78, 11; 86, 11. 
 
 -He 31, 4. f 
 
 -ize 86, 11.' 
 
 Jerome 96, 6. 
 Jot 2, a. 
 
 Kaleidoscopic 89; 90, I, 10. 
 
 Laryngoscope 77, 1, 5. 
 Larynx 76. 
 
 Lithograph 66 ; 67, 1,4. 
 Lithology 68, 8. 
 Logic 51, 5, a. 
 
 Machine 34; 36,4. 
 Macrocephalous 74, 4. 
 Macrocosm 73, 1, 5. 
 Macrometer 74, 4. 
 Macron 72 ; 74, 4. 
 Macroscopic 74, 4. 
 Mantic 100, 7. 
 Mathematics 108 ; 110, 9. 
 Mechanic 34 ; 36, 4. 
 Mechanism 36, 4, 
 
372 INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 
 
 Melodrama 100, 8. 
 Melody 98, 100, 8; 31,7. 
 Metal 68, 9. 
 Metamorphosis 60, 6. 
 Metaphor 82, 9. 
 Metaphysics 96, 13. 
 Metempsychosis 60, 6. 
 Meter 54. 
 Method 57, 3. 
 Metonymy 91, 9. 
 Metric 54. 
 
 Metronome 66; 68, 10. 
 Metropolis 96, 11.. 
 Metropolitan 96, 11. 
 Microcephalous 74, 5. 
 Microcosm 73, 1, 5 ; 95, II, 9. 
 Micrometer 74, 5. 
 Micronesia 74, 5. 
 Microscope 72; 74, 5; 74, 9. 
 Mime 76; 78, 4. 
 Mimetic 78, 4. 
 Mimic 78, 4. 
 Misanthrope 94. 
 Misanthropy 95, I, 8. 
 Misogamist 96, 10. 
 Misogynist 96, 10. 
 Mnemonic 98 ; 100, 9. 
 Mnemonics 100, 9. 
 Mobocracy 91, 7. 
 Monachism 68, 9. 
 Monad 68, 9. 
 Monarch 81, I, 9. 
 Monarchy 82, 1, b. 
 Monastery 68, 9. 
 Monastic 68, 9. 
 Monk 68, 9, 
 
 Monoceros 100, 6. 
 Monochrome 91, 14. 
 Monody 68, 9. 
 Monogamy 91, 2. 
 Monogram 66; 68, 9; 91, 4. 
 Monograph 68, 9. 
 Monolith 68, 9. 
 Monologue 68, 9. 
 Monomania 68, 9. 
 Monometallist 68, 9. 
 Monophthong 68, 9. 
 Monopoly 67, II, 1. 
 Monosyllable 68, 9. 
 Monotheism 68, 9. 
 Monotone 68, 9. 
 Morpheus 60, 6. 
 Morphine 60, 6. 
 Morphology 58. 
 Muse 39; 41,2. 
 Museum 58. 
 Music 39; 41, 2. 
 Mystery 108. 
 Mystic 108. 
 Myth 49. 
 Mythology 50, I, 3. 
 
 Naples 95, I, 5. 
 Nausea 84; 86, 7. 
 Nautical 84. 
 Nautilus 86, 7. 
 Neapolis95, I, 5; 96, 11. 
 Necrology 96, 8. 
 Necromancy 98 ; 100, 7. 
 Necromantic 100, 7. 
 Necropolis 94; 95, I, 6. 
 Nemesis 66 1 68, 10, 
 
INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 373 
 
 Neo- 96, 9. 
 Neologism 96, 9. 
 Neology 96, 9. 
 Neophyte 94 ; 96, 9. 
 Neoplatonism 96, 9. 
 Neuralgia 108 ; 110, 2. 
 Nomad 68, 10. 
 
 Ochlocracy 91, 7. 
 Ode 29. 
 Odometer 49. 
 Oeconomy 72; 74, 6. 
 Oecumenical 74, 7. 
 -oid91,5. 
 
 Oligarchy 80; 81, I, 1. 
 Ology 51, 5, a. 
 Omega 2, a. 
 Optic 78, 5; 78, 11. 
 Optics 78, 5. 
 * * Organ 54. 
 
 Ornithology 80. 
 Orthodox 66 ; 67, II, 2 ; 68, 5. 
 Orthodoxy 68, 7. 
 Orthoepy 68, 11. 
 Orthography 68, 11. 
 Orthopedy 82, 6. 
 Ovoid 91, 5. 
 
 Pachyderm 99, II, 6. 
 Pachydermatous 100, 2. 
 Paedagogue 80. 
 Palimpsest 31, 6. 
 Palindrome 31,6; 49; 51, 3. 
 Palingenesis 31, 6; 96, 3. 
 Palinode 29 ; 30, II, 4. 
 Palsy 96, 7. 
 
 Pan- 110, 11. 
 Panacea 110, 11. 
 Pandemonium 110, 11. 
 Panegyric 110, 11. 
 Panevangelical 110, 11. 
 Panoply 110, 11. 
 Panorama 57, 2 ; 108; 110,11. 
 Pan-Slavism 110, 11. 
 Pantheism 110, 11. 
 Pantheon 110, 11. 
 Pantomime 78, 4; 110, 11. 
 Pantophagous 110, 11. 
 Para- 46, 5. 
 
 Parable 44; 46, 3; 60, 7. 
 Parabolical 46, 3 ; 60, 7. 
 Paradise 58. 
 Paradox 68, 5. 
 
 Paragraph 44 ; 45, 1, 2 ; 46, 5. 
 Paralysis 96, 7. 
 Paralytic 96, 7. 
 Paraphrase 105, 11. 
 Parenthesis 100, 10, a. 
 Parenthetic 100, 10, a. 
 Parody 31, 7; 46,5. 
 Pathetic 91, 10. 
 Pathology 91, 10. 
 Pathos 89. 
 Patriarch 82, 1, b. 
 Patronymic 91, 9. 
 Pedagogue 80. 
 Pedobaptist 82, 6. 
 Perigee 56, II, 3. 
 Perihelion 56, I, 3. 
 Perimeter 54. 
 Period 56, 1, 3. 
 Periphery 82, 9, 
 
374 INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 
 
 Periphrasis 105, 11. 
 Periphrastic 105, 11. 
 Phaenomenon 74, 11. 
 Phantasm 74, 11. 
 Phantasmagoria 108; 110, 1. 
 Phantastic 74, 11. 
 Phantasy 74, 11. 
 Phantom 74, 11. 
 Pharmacist 99, I, 6. 
 Pharmacopoeia 100, 11. 
 Pharmacy 98. 
 Phase 74, 11. 
 Phenomenon 72; 74, 11. 
 Phil-, philo-, -phileSl, 6. 
 Philadelphia 59, I, 3 ; 60, 2. 
 Philanthropist 50, I, 4. 
 Philanthropy 49 ; 51,6. 
 Philharmonic 51, 6. 
 Philhellenic 51, 6. . 
 Philip 59, I, 4. 
 Philology 51, 6. 
 Philomath 108 ; 110, 9. 
 Philosopher 67, II, 4. 
 Philo-Turkish 51, 6. 
 Philter 51, 6. 
 Phonetic 36, 6. 
 Phonetics 36, 6. 
 Phonograph 34; 35, I, 2. 
 Phonography 35, II, 7. 
 Phonology 50, I, 3. 
 Phonotype 78, 9. 
 Phosphorus 82, 10. 
 Photograph 80 ; 82, 10. 
 Photolithograph 82, 10. 
 Photometer 82, 10. 
 Photosphere 82, 10. 
 
 Phrase 103; 105, 11. 
 
 Phraseology 105, 11. 
 
 Physic 96, 13. 
 
 Physical 94; 96, 13. 
 
 Physician 96, 13. 
 
 Physics 96, 13. 
 
 Physiognomy 96, 13. 
 
 Physiology 96, 13. 
 
 Piracy 110, 12. 
 
 Pirate 108 ; 110, 12. 
 
 Plaster 105, 9. 
 
 Plastic 105, 9. 
 
 Plutocracy 91 , 7. 
 
 Plutocrat 91, 7. 
 
 Pneumatic 91, 11. 
 
 Pneumonia 89. 
 
 Poem 50, II, 7. 
 
 Poesy 46, 4. 
 
 Poet 39; 44; 46, 4. 
 
 Poetry 46, 4. 
 
 Polemic-s 58. 
 
 Police 46, 2. 
 
 Policy 46, 2. 
 
 Politic 46, 2. 
 
 Political 46, 2. 
 
 Politics 44 ; 46, 2. 
 
 Polity 46, 2. 
 
 Poly- 91, 12. 
 
 Polychrome 90, I, 11 ; 91, 14. 
 
 Polygamy 89 ; 91, 2. 
 
 Polyglot 41, 1. 
 
 Polygon 82, 2. 
 
 Polyp 82, 7. 
 
 Polypus 82, 7. 
 
 Polytechnic 60, 8. 
 
 Polytheism 60, 3, c. 
 
INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 375 
 
 Practical 108; 110, 13. 
 Practice 110, 13. 
 Pragmatic 108 ; 110, 13. 
 Praxis 110, 13. 
 Presbyter 72; 74,8. 
 Prester 74, 8. 
 Priest 74, 8. 
 Prognosis 91, 13. 
 Prognostic 91, 13. 
 Prognosticate 91, 13. 
 Program 89; 91, 4. 
 Prologue 51, 5, a; 68,6. 
 Prophecy 110, 16. 
 Prophesy 110, 15. 
 Prophet 110, 15. 
 Prophetic 110, 15. 
 Prosody 31, 7. 
 Protagonist 86, 1. 
 Prototype 76; 78, 9. 
 Pseudonym 89; 91, 9. 
 Psyche 49. 
 Psychic 51, 8. 
 Psychology 50, I, 6; 51, 8; 
 
 96, 13. 
 Pyre 86, 8. 
 Pyromancy 100, 7. 
 Pyrotechnics 84; 86, 8. 
 
 Rehypothecate 100, 10, b. 
 
 Rhapsody 31, 7. 
 
 Rhetor 84. 
 
 Rhetoric 86, 9. 
 
 Rhinoceros 98 ; 99, 1, 5 ; 100, 6. 
 
 Rhododendron 54 ; 56, 1, 1. 
 
 Sarcasm 78, 6. 
 
 Sarcophagus 76; 78, 6. 
 Sceptic 74, 9. 
 Sceptre 54. 
 Schism 108; 110, 14. 
 Schismatic 110, 14. 
 Scholar 36, 5. 
 Scholastic 36, 5. 
 Scholiast 36, 5. 
 Scholium 36, 5. 
 School 34; 36, 5. 
 Scope 74, 9. 
 Skeptic 72 ; 74, 9. 
 Slavophile 51, 6. 
 Sophia 66. 
 Sophism 74, 10. 
 Sophist 72; 74, 10. 
 Sophistical 74, 10. 
 Sophisticate 74, 10. 
 Sophisticated 74, 10. 
 Sophistry 74, 10. 
 Spectroscope 74, 9. 
 Sphere 39; 41, 3. 
 Spheroid 91, 5. 
 Static 103 ; 105, 5. 
 Statics 105, 5. 
 Stereopticon 78, 7. 
 Stereoscope 78, 7. 
 Stereotype 76 ; 77, II, 6 ; 78, 7. 
 Story 34; 36, 3. 
 Syllable 108 ; 110, 8. 
 Syllabus 110, 8. 
 Syllogism 78, 8. 
 Symmetry 78, 8. 
 Sympathy 91, 10. 
 Symphony 78, 8. 
 Synagogue 78, 8. 
 
376 INDEX OF ENGLISH DERIVATIVES. 
 
 Synchronism 78, 8. 
 
 Theogony 91, 3. 
 
 Synchronous 78, 8. 
 
 Theology 58; 60, 3, a. 
 
 Synod 78, 8. 
 
 Theosoph66; 68, 12. 
 
 Synonym 89; 91, 9. 
 
 theosophist 68, 12. 
 
 Synopsis 76 ; 78, 8. 
 
 Theosophy 68, 12. 
 
 Synoptic 78, 8. 
 
 Thermal 54. 
 
 Syntactic 96, 12. 
 
 Thermometer 56, I, 4. 
 
 Syntax 94; 96, 12. 
 
 Thesis 98; 100, 10, a. 
 
 Synthesis 98 ; 100, 10, a. 
 
 Tome 103; 105, 10. 
 
 System 105, 5. 
 
 Tone 68, 9. 
 
 Systematic 105, 5. 
 
 Topography 58 ; 59, I, 4 
 
 Systematize 105, 5. 
 
 Tragedy 31, 7. 
 
 Systole 78, 8. 
 
 Tricycle 80; 82, 8. 
 
 
 Triglyph 96, 4. 
 
 Tactic 96, 12. 
 
 Trigonometry 82, 2. 
 
 Tactics 94; 96, 12. 
 
 Trilogy 82, 8. 
 
 Tautology 67, I, 10; 68, 3, b. 
 
 Tripod 82, 7. 
 
 Taxidermy 100, 2. 
 
 Trisyllable 110, 8. 
 
 Technical 60, 8. 
 
 Trope 54. 
 
 Technique 60, 8. 
 
 Trophy 57, 7. 
 
 Technology 58 ; 59, II, 6 ; 60, 8. 
 
 Tropic 57, 7. 
 
 Telegram 89. 
 
 Turcophile 51, 6. 
 
 Telegraph 35, II, 1. 
 
 Type 76; 78,9. 
 
 Telephone 34; 35,1, 1. 
 
 Typical 78, 9. 
 
 Telescope 74, 9. 
 
 Typography 77, II, 3. 
 
 Theatre 29; 54; 57,6. 
 
 
 Theism 60, 3, a. 
 
 Unsophisticated 74, 10. 
 
 Theist 60, 3, a. 
 
 
 Thematic 100, 10, c. 
 
 Zodiac 105, 3. 
 
 Theme 100, 10, c. 
 
 Zoology 103. 
 
 Theocracy 91, 7. 
 
 Zoophyte 105, 3. 
 
 Theodore 60, 3, c. 
 
 Zootomy 105, 10. 
 
GREEK AND LATIN. 
 
 THE GREEK IN ENGLISH. First Lessons in Greek, 
 with special reference to the etymology of English words of 
 Greek origin. By T. D. GOODELL, Ph.D. i6mo. 
 
 This book attempts to teach that limited portion of Greek which col- 
 lege men remember after they have forgotten vastly more. That is the 
 portion which even those who wish to banish the study of Greek from 
 our schools would admit can least easily be spared, and that portion is 
 essential to a ready command of the English tongue. 
 
 The first idea of the book arose from hearing a woman of unusual in- 
 telligence and considerable reading, talking about altruists, when she 
 meant agnostics. Similar confusions confusing, ultimately, to the 
 speaker, and constantly to the listener are of not infrequent occurrence 
 in conversation on topics interesting only to the 4 1 educated. " Moreover, 
 much as the Greek element of English appears in conversation, it ap- 
 pears much more in literature, and carries many of the key-words to the 
 thought. He to whom these key-words are not alive with meaning is at 
 great disadvantage. Many a man who thinks he has retained nothing 
 whatever from his Greek, except a lively sense of the exact meaning of 
 such words as metaphysics, agnostic, synthetic, anarchy, Russophobe, 
 nevertheless regards that sense as an intellectual acquisition worth all it 
 cost. But after all, how great the cost of this one acquisition has been ! 
 Surely this one result of the study of Greek can be reached without de- 
 voting to it years of time. And yet mere dictionaries or etymological 
 handbooks alone cannot give what is wanted. It is not enough to read 
 or be told, even repeatedly, that synthetic is derived from such and 
 such Greek words, and therefore has such and such a meaning. The 
 words in their Greek form, and with some fragment of their Greek 
 associations, must become somewhat familiar before one can be sensible 
 of that grasp of their English derivatives which will enable one to use 
 those derivatives correctly and fearlessly. 
 
 The Greek vocabulary surviving in English can be so presented in a 
 sort of Greek primer, with its relations to English so pointed out, that 
 even young pupils will find the study far from dull ; and thus, of just 
 that part of Greek which they will always use in reading current litera- 
 ture, they will be apt to remember more than the much-abused 
 " average college graduate." 
 
 This book tries to accomplish these results without waste of time and 
 brain-tissue in * * mental discipline" of doubtful value. But the writer has 
 no faith in royal roads to learning, does not profess to have compounded 
 an educational nostrum which will, in a few weeks' time, electrify a boy 
 or girl into the mastery of a difficult tongue, and does believe heartily in 
 giving an important place in our educational system, for some genera- 
 tions yet, to the patient and thorough study of the Greek language and 
 literature. This book is not intended to lessen the number of those 
 who shall enter upon such a course of study, but it is hoped that it may 
 increase that number. Yet it is not a sufficient introduction to the 
 reading of a classic author, and hence is not a rival of the various ex- 
 cellent " First Lessons " in use. In putting these ideas into practice the 
 material has been grouped about a grammatical outline, because the 
 thorough memorizing of a few inflections will save time and labor in 
 the end, by enabling the pupil from the outset to make a certain limited 
 use of the language on rational principles. In no other way can the re- 
 quisite familiarity with the Greek words be as easily gained. Besides, 
 
GREEK AND LA TIN. 
 
 while the book is intended primarily for those who without it would 
 never study Greek at all, those have also been kept in mind who will 
 afterwards continue the study. Yet with the possible exception of the 
 dual number, the memorizing of which is but a trifle, no feature what- 
 ever has been introduced which could involve labor outside of the main 
 purpose, as set forth above. 
 
 AN INTRODUCTION TO ATTIC GREEK. By JABEZ 
 BROOKS, Professor in the University of Minnesota. I2mo. 
 
 Presents essentials in such manner that the learner may enter without 
 needless detention upon an intelligent and successful reading of Attic 
 Greek. 
 
 The fundamental idea that nine years' experience in applying has 
 shown to be practicable is to begin the study of Greek with a con- 
 nected text, and to so work this text over as to derive from it all the 
 grammar involved, and then to attach to the framework thus formed 
 whatever further grammatical apparatus is necessary. In this way the 
 learner's activities are incited to discover for himself the laws of con- 
 struction, and the author studied is made to appear as their true source. 
 
 The first chapter of the Anabasis has been found to contain a stock 
 of words sufficiently varied to illustrate all the essential forms of the 
 accidence, and is accordingly taken as a basis for work. 
 
 Conversation and dictation exercises, appealing to the learner's powers 
 of imitation, form an integral part of the plan, and, it has been found, 
 give him a natural and unconscious grip of the language exceeding that 
 obtained by any other exercise. 
 
 GREEK LITERATURE. By THOMAS SARGENT PERRY. 
 8vo. 
 
 A compendious philosophical account of the growth of Greek litera- 
 ture and of its relations to the physical surroundings and political and 
 social history of the people. In this setting appear the outlines of the 
 great masterpieces, with English translations of their more interesting 
 or representative passages. The comparative method is followed, the 
 English reader's familiarity with his own literature being made to help 
 along his acquaintance with Greek authors. It is believed that the 
 college-bred man who got from his study of these classics in the origi- 
 nal but faint and distorted views of their beauties will here find assist- 
 ance in extending and organizing his knowledge ; and also that the man 
 who knows little or no Greek may by this book put himself in closer 
 contact with the spirit of Greek literature than most students of the 
 language have attained. 
 
 PREPARATORY LATIN AND GREEK TEXTS. Re- 
 
 quired for Admission to American Colleges. i6mo. pp. 767. 
 Latin and Greek parts can also be had separately. 
 
 The Latin part contains five books of Caesar, seven of Cicero's Ora- 
 tions, 177 pages of selections from Ovid's Metamorphoses, and six 
 books of the JEneid and the Bucolics. The Greek part contains three 
 books of the Anabasis and the same number of the Iliad. 
 
GREEK AND LATIN. 
 
 SCRIVENER'S (F. H. A.) GREEK TESTAMENT. 
 
 (H KAINH 4IA&HKH.) Novum Testamentum. Textfts 
 
 Stephanici A.D. 1550, cum Variis Lectionibus Editionum 
 
 Bezae, Elzeviri, Lachmanni, Tischendorfii, Tregellesii, 
 
 Westcott-Hortii, Versionis Anglicanae emendatorum, Cu- 
 
 rante, F. H. A. SCRIVENER, A.M., D.C.L., LL.D. Accedunt 
 
 Parallela S. Scripturae Loca. i6mo. 598 pp. Cloth. 
 
 The text is that of the Authorized Version (Stephens, 1550), with the 
 
 various readings approved by Westcott and Hort, and those finally 
 
 adopted by the Revisers. Dr. Scrivener has added the Eurelian Canons 
 
 and Capitula, and references specially bearing on usage of words. The 
 
 passages in which variations occur are printed in black type so that the 
 
 eye can readily distinguish them. 
 
 SUETONIUS'S LIVES OF THE C>ESARS. GAI SVE- 
 TONI TRANQVILLI DE VITA CAESARVM. LIBRI Dvo. 
 Edited, with an Introduction and Commentary, by HARRY 
 THURSTON PECK, Ph.D., Professor of the Latin Language 
 and Literature in Columbia College. I2mo, pp. xxxv, 215. 
 It is difficult to ascertain the reason why the Lives of Suetonius have 
 been suffered to remain so long unedited by English-speaking scholars. 
 No work of equal size that has come down to us from classical antiquity 
 possesses a more real interest or a more enduring value. In the his- 
 torical significance of the period that it covers, in the light it throws 
 upon so many points of Roman custom, and in the impartiality, 
 thoroughness, and conscientious accuracy of its author, it has always 
 been regarded as a most important source of information concerning 
 the men and measures of the Early Empire. It is also a rich mine of 
 personal anecdote, giving innumerable glimpses of many famous Ro- 
 mans, divested of the stage properties with which we almost always 
 find them in the pages of the professional historians. 
 
 It is, then, with the hope of gaining for the Roman Plutarch a wider 
 circle of appreciative readers that the present volume is given to the 
 public. The first two books of the Lives have been selected because they 
 have to do with that period of transition which, with its tremendous 
 moral, social, and political revolution, forms perhaps the most remark- 
 able era of Roman history ; and also because their subject is the per- 
 sonality of the two great Caesars who laid the foundation of an empire 
 whose influence is still moulding the development of modern Europe, 
 as its grandeur is still potent in the realm of imagination. 
 
 The text of the present edition is based upon the text of C. L. Roth 
 (Leipzig, 1886). Some variations from his readings have been noted 
 and defended in the Commentary. To obviate any reasonable ob- 
 jections to Suetonius's plainness of speech, a few sentences have been 
 relegated to the notes, but without any alteration in the original num- 
 bering of the sections. These textual omissions have been made with 
 a sparing hand ; for experience has only served to strengthen the con- 
 viction of the editor, that the application to a classic author of any ex- 
 tended system of expurgation is at once a moral blunder and a literary 
 crime. 
 
 HENRY HOLT & CO., PUBLISHERS, N. Y. 
 
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS 
 
 WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 
 ^ ^ THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY 
 
 WILL INCREASE TO SO CENTS ON THE FOURTH 
 
 DAY AND TO $1.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY 
 OVERDUE. 
 
 MAR 131935 
 
 
 4K. 14 fo-r 
 
 
 >- AJ/ r"r*i% i*f ^nc*c 
 
 
 p| FEB 71955 
 
 ^H \ it 
 
 
 
 t\95S^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 REC^D LD 
 
 
 AUG 1 1 wfin 
 
 
 ** W U 1 I 
 
 */l AV A ^ 9flfijl 
 
 
 KHT AI ^uu^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 *v^ 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY